Download Daikin EWAQ100DAYN Service manual

ESIE06-05
Service Manual
EWAQ080~260DAYN
EWYQ080~250DAYN
Packaged air-cooled water chillers
ESIE06-05
Table of Contents
1
1
Introduction
1.1
About This Manual ..................................................................................
i–i
Part 1
System Outline
1
3
General Outline
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
1.10
1.11
1.12
1.13
1.14
1.15
1.16
1.17
1.18
1.19
1.20
1.21
1.22
1.23
1.24
1.25
1.26
1.27
1.28
1.29
1.30
1.31
1.32
1.33
1.34
1.35
1.36
1.37
1.38
1.39
1.40
Table of Contents
What Is in This Chapter? ........................................................................
Technical Specifications: EWAQ080-260DAYN .....................................
Technical Specifications for options: EWAQ080-100DAYN....................
Technical Specifications for options: EWAQ130-150DAYN....................
Technical Specifications for options: EWAQ180-210DAYN....................
Technical Specifications for options: EWAQ240-260DAYN....................
Technical Specifications: EWYQ080-250DAYN .....................................
Technical specifications for options: EWYQ080-100DAYN ....................
Technical specifications for options: EWYQ130-150DAYN ....................
Technical specifications for options: EWYQ180-210DAYN ....................
Technical Specifications for options: EWYQ230-250DAYN....................
Electrical Specifications: EWAQ080-260DAYN ......................................
Electrical Specifications for options: EWAQ080-100DAYN ....................
Electrical Specifications for options: EWAQ130-150DAYN ....................
Electrical Specifications for options: EWAQ180-210DAYN ....................
Electrical Specifications for options: EWAQ240-260DAYN ....................
Electrical Specifications: EWYQ080-260DAYN ......................................
Electrical Specifications for options: EWYQ080-100DAYN ....................
Electrical Specifications for options: EWYQ130-150DAYN ....................
Electrical Specifications for options: EWYQ180-210DAYN ....................
Electrical Specifications for options: EWYQ230-250DAYN ....................
Correction Factors for Glycol ..................................................................
Optional equipment for EWAQ-DAYN (N-P-B) .......................................
Optional equipment for EWYQ-DAYN (N-P-B) .......................................
Outlook Drawing: EWAQ080-100DAYN(N) ............................................
Outlook Drawing: EWAQ080-100DAYN(P-B) .........................................
Outlook Drawing: EWAQ130-150DAYN(N) ............................................
Outlook Drawing: EWAQ130-150DAYN(P-B) .........................................
Outlook Drawing: EWAQ180-210DAYN(N) ............................................
Outlook Drawing: EWAQ180-210DAYN(P-B) .........................................
Outlook Drawing: EWAQ240-260DAYN(N) ............................................
Outlook Drawing: EWAQ240-260DAYN(P-B) .........................................
Outlook Drawing: EWYQ080-100DAYN(N) ............................................
Outlook Drawing: EWYQ080-100DAYN(P-B) .........................................
Outlook Drawing: EWYQ130-150DAYN(N) ............................................
Outlook Drawing: EWYQ130-150DAYN(P-B) .........................................
Outlook Drawing: EWYQ180-210DAYN(N) ............................................
Outlook Drawing: EWYQ180-210DAYN(P-B) .........................................
Outlook Drawing: EWYQ230-250DAYN(N) ............................................
Outlook Drawing: EWYQ230-250DAYN(P-B) .........................................
1–3
1–5
1–8
1–9
1–10
1–11
1–12
1–15
1–16
1–17
1–18
1–19
1–20
1–21
1–22
1–23
1–24
1–26
1–27
1–28
1–29
1–30
1–32
1–33
1–34
1–36
1–38
1–40
1–42
1–44
1–46
1–48
1–50
1–52
1–54
1–56
1–58
1–60
1–62
1–64
1
4
5
ESIE06-05
1
3
2
3
4
Piping Layout
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
2.11
What Is in This Chapter? .........................................................................
Functional Diagram Refrigeration Circuit: EWAQ080-100DAYN(N-P-B).
Functional Diagram Refrigeration Circuit: EWAQ130-210DAYN(N-P-B).
Functional Diagram Refrigeration Circuit: EWAQ240-260DAYN(N-P-B).
Components Refrigeration Side : EWAQ080-260DAYN..........................
Functional Diagram Refrigeration Circuit: EWYQ080-100DAYN(N-P-B).
Functional Diagram Refrigeration Circuit: EWYQ130-210DAYN(N-P-B).
Functional Diagram Refrigeration Circuit: EWYQ230-250DAYN(N-P-B).
Components refrigeration side: EWYQ080-250DAYN.............................
Functional Diagram Water Piping: EWAQ-EWYQ-DAYN(N-P-B)............
Components Water Side : EWAQ- EWYQ- DAYN(N-P-B) ......................
1–67
1–68
1–70
1–72
1–74
1–76
1–78
1–80
1–82
1–84
1–85
3.1
3.2
What Is in This Chapter? ......................................................................... 1–87
Wiring Layout : EWAQ080-100DAYN(N-P-B) and EWYQ080-100DAYN(N-P-B)
Standard Unit ........................................................................................... 1–88
Wiring Layout : EWAQ130-260DAYN(N-P-B) and EWYQ130-250DAYN(N-P-B)
Standard Unit ........................................................................................... 1–116
Wiring layout: EWAQ080-100DAYN(N-P-B) and EWYQ080-100DAYN(N-P-B)
with OPIF ................................................................................................. 1–149
Wiring Layout : EWAQ130-260DAYN(N-P-B) and EWYQ130-250DAYN(N-P-B)
with OPIF ................................................................................................. 1–177
Wiring Layout
3.3
3.4
3.5
5
Part 2
Functional Description
1
Operation Range
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
2
What Is in This Chapter? .........................................................................
Operational Range: EWAQ080-100-180-210-240-260DAYN(N-P-B)......
Operational Range: EWAQ130-150DAYN(N-P-B) ..................................
Operational Range: EWYQ080-100-180-210-230-250DAYN(N-P-B)......
Operational Range: EWYQ130-150DAYN(N-P-B) ..................................
2–3
2–4
2–5
2–6
2–7
Table of Contents
ESIE06-05
2
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
2.11
2.12
2.13
2.14
2.15
2.16
2.17
3
1
What Is In This Chapter? ........................................................................
2–9
The Controller ......................................................................................... 2–10
Start/Stop, Cool/Heat and Temperature settings .................................... 2–12
Menu Overview ....................................................................................... 2–13
How to Read or Adjust Parameter Settings: the Programming Procedure 2–14
Read-out Menu ....................................................................................... 2–15
Set Points Menu...................................................................................... 2–25
User Settings .......................................................................................... 2–26
Timers menu ........................................................................................... 2–43
Info menu ................................................................................................ 2–45
Input/Output Status Menu ....................................................................... 2–48
User Password Menu.............................................................................. 2–56
Network Menu ......................................................................................... 2–58
Cool / Heat Menu .................................................................................... 2–60
Service Menu .......................................................................................... 2–61
Menu overview ........................................................................................ 2–102
Service menu overview ........................................................................... 2–103
4
Functional Control for a Standalone Unit
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
3.11
3.12
3.13
3.14
3.15
3.16
3.17
3.18
3.19
3.20
3.21
3.22
3.23
3.24
3.25
Table of Contents
What Is in This Chapter? ........................................................................
Operation Flowchart................................................................................
On/Off Management ...............................................................................
Thermostat Control .................................................................................
Manual Control........................................................................................
Compressor Control ................................................................................
Fan Control .............................................................................................
Pump Control ..........................................................................................
Floating Setpoint .....................................................................................
Free Cooling ...........................................................................................
Superheat control....................................................................................
Changeable digital inputs........................................................................
Changeable digital outputs .....................................................................
Changeable analogue inputs ..................................................................
Changeable analogue outputs ................................................................
DICN Basic Setup (=master/slave system).............................................
BMS Function .........................................................................................
Freeze-up Control ...................................................................................
Discharge gas safety ..............................................................................
Password Function .................................................................................
History logging ........................................................................................
Defrost management ..............................................................................
Reversing valve ......................................................................................
Low pressure bypass ..............................................................................
Simulation ...............................................................................................
3
2–105
2–106
2–107
2–108
2–114
2–115
2–119
2–128
2–129
2–133
2–137
2–140
2–141
2–142
2–143
2–144
2–153
2–157
2–163
2–164
2–165
2–166
2–171
2–172
2–173
3
5
ESIE06-05
1
Part 3
Troubleshooting
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
3
2
4
5
Overview of Fault Indications and Safeties
Introduction ..............................................................................................
Login/Logout ............................................................................................
3–31
3–32
What is in this chapter .............................................................................
Overview hardware software/Source files................................................
Software upload procedure: PCASOflash ...............................................
Installation of PCASOflash Software .......................................................
Overview of most common problems.......................................................
3–33
3–34
3–35
3–40
3–41
Procedure for main PCB changing
5.1
5.2
5.3
4
3–27
3–28
3–29
3–30
Procedure for Software Upload
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
5
Temperature and resistance characteristics of thermistor type 1 ............
Temperature and resistance characteristics of thermistor type 2 ............
Temperature and Resistance characteristics of Thermistor Type 3 ........
Temperature and resistance characteristics of thermistor type 4. ...........
Reset procedure
3.1
3.2
4
3–3
3–4
3–5
3–6
3–11
3–19
3–21
3–23
Checking the Temperature Sensors
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
3
What Is in This Chapter? .........................................................................
What happens in the Event of an Alarm? ................................................
What to do in the Event of an Alarm? ......................................................
Overview of Unit Safeties ........................................................................
Overview of Circuit Safeties.....................................................................
Overview of Network Safeties..................................................................
Overview of Warnings..............................................................................
Overview of Start Problems .....................................................................
Changing the main PCB ..........................................................................
Configuration of Main PCB nr 1 ...............................................................
Configuration of Main PCB nr 2 ...............................................................
3–43
3–44
3–45
Table of Contents
ESIE06-05
6
Procedure for extension PCB changing
6.1
6.2
7
Changing the EEV PCB ..........................................................................
Configuration of EEV PVB ......................................................................
3–51
3–51
Introduction .............................................................................................
Use of Suction Washer ...........................................................................
3–53
3–53
Introduction .............................................................................................
Compressor connections ........................................................................
3–55
3–55
Compressor electrical connections and wiring
11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4
11.5
12
3
Procedure for Compressor Oil Fill or Oil Drain
10.1
10.2
11
3–49
3–49
3–49
4
Procedure for compressor replacement : Suction washer
9.1
9.2
10
Changing the Main Controller .................................................................
Configuration of the Main Controller .......................................................
Configuration of the Sub Controller.........................................................
Procedure for EEV PCB changing
8.1
8.2
9
1
3–47
3–47
Procedure for controller changing
7.1
7.2
7.3
8
Changing the extension PCB ..................................................................
Configuration of the extension PCB ........................................................
Electrical connections for SJ161 .............................................................
Electrical connections SJ180 ..................................................................
Electronic protection module wiring ........................................................
Electrical connections for SJ240-300......................................................
Electronic protection module wiring ........................................................
3–57
3–57
3–57
3–58
3–58
Procedure to Clear the Refrigerant Circuit in Case of Frozen
Table of Contents
5
5
ESIE06-05
Evaporators
1
Part 4
Commissioning and Test Run
1
Pre-Test Run Checks
3
4
5
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
1.10
1.11
1.12
1.13
1.14
1.15
1.16
1.17
1.18
1.19
1.20
1.21
1.22
1.23
1.24
1.25
1.26
1.27
1.28
1.29
What Is in This Chapter? .........................................................................
General Checks .......................................................................................
Water Piping Checks ...............................................................................
Water Pressure Drop through Evaporator: EWAQ080-100DAYN (N-P-B)
Water Pressure Drop through Evaporator: EWAQ130-210DAYN(N-P-B)
Water Pressure Drop through Evaporator: EWAQ240-260DAYN (N-P-B)
Water Pressure Drop through Evaporator: EWYQ080-100DAYN (N-P-B)
Water Pressure Drop through Evaporator: EWYQ130-210DAYN(N-P-B)
Water Pressure Drop through Evaporator: EWYQ230-250DAYN(N-P-B)
Unit pressure drop : EWAQ080-100DAYNN Standard Model .................
Unit pressure drop : EWAQ130-210DAYNN Standard Model .................
Unit pressure drop : EWAQ240-260DAYNN Standard Model .................
Unit pressure drop : EWYQ080-100DAYNN Standard Unit.....................
Unit pressure drop : EWYQ130-210DAYNN Standard Unit.....................
Unit pressure drop : EWYQ230-250DAYNN Standard Unit.....................
External Static Unit Pressure: EWAQ080-100 DAYN (P-B) ....................
External Static Unit Pressure: EWAQ130-210 DAYN (P-B) ....................
External Static Unit Pressure: EWAQ240-260DAYN (P-B) .....................
External Static Unit Pressure: EWYQ080-100DAYN (P-B) .....................
External Static Unit Pressure: EWYQ130-210DAYN (P-B) .....................
External Static Unit Pressure: EWYQ230-250DAYN (P-B) .....................
External Static Unit Pressure: EWAQ080-100DAYN (OPHP) .................
External Static Unit Pressure: EWAQ130-210DAYN (OPHP) .................
External Static Unit Pressure: EWAQ240-260DAYN (OPHP) .................
External Static Unit Pressure: EWYQ080-100DAYN (OPHP) .................
External Static Unit Pressure: EWYQ130-210DAYN (OPHP) .................
External Static Unit Pressure: EWYQ230-250DAYN (OPHP) .................
Electrical Checks .....................................................................................
Field wiring connection diagram : EWAQ/EWYQ 080-260 DAYN*..........
4–3
4–5
4–6
4–11
4–12
4–13
4–14
4–15
4–16
4–17
4–19
4–21
4–23
4–25
4–27
4–29
4–31
4–32
4–34
4–35
4–36
4–37
4–39
4–40
4–41
4–43
4–45
4–46
4–47
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
What Is in This Chapter ...........................................................................
Maintenance of the Main Parts ................................................................
Maintenance of the Control Devices ........................................................
Periodical Checks ....................................................................................
5–3
5–4
5–6
5–7
Part 5
Maintenance
1
6
Maintenance
Table of Contents
ESIE06-05
Part 6
Appendix
1
1
Appendix
1.1
1.2
What Is in This Chapter ..........................................................................
History of the Software............................................................................
6–3
6–4
3
4
5
Table of Contents
7
ESIE06-05
1
3
4
5
8
Table of Contents
ESIE06-05
Introduction
Part 0
1
Introduction
1.1
About This Manual
Target group
This service manual is intended for and should only be used by qualified engineers.
Purpose of this
manual
This service manual contains all the information you need to carry out the necessary repair and
maintenance tasks for the EWAQ 080~260 DAYN and EWYQ 080~250 DAYN.
EWAQ 080~ 260
DAYN
The Daikin EWAQ 080~260 DAYN packaged air-cooled water chillers:
■
Are designed for outdoor installation.
■
Are used for cooling applications.
■
Used refrigerant R410a.
■
Are available in 8 standard sizes with nominal cooling capacities ranging from 80 kW to 254 kW.
■
Have 3 types of units:
3
4
5
EWAQ 080~260 DAYNN: without hydraulic module, naked model
EWAQ 080~260 DAYNP: with hydraulic module: pump and expansion vessel
EWAQ 080~260 DAYNB: with hydraulic module: buffer tank, pump and expansion vessel
EWYQ 080~250
DAYN
The Daikin EWYQ 080~250DAYN packaged air-cooled water chillers:
■
Are designed for outdoor installation.
■
Are used for cooling and heating applications
■
Used refrigerant R410a.
■
Are available in 8 standard sizes with nominal cooling capacities ranging from 77kW to 252kW and
heating from 87,7 kW to 284kW.
■
Have 3 types of units:
EWAQ 080~250 DAYNN: without hydraulic module, naked model
EWAQ 080~250 DAYNP: with hydraulic module: pump and expansion vessel
EWAQ 080~250 DAYNB: with hydraulic module: buffer tank, pump and expansion vessel
Before starting up
the unit
Before starting up the unit for the first time, make sure it has been properly installed.
i
Introduction
1
3
4
5
ii
ESIE06-05
ESIE06-05
14
Part 1
System Outline
Introduction
This part contains an outline of all the relevant elements in the EWAQ 080~260DAYN and EWYQ
080~250 DAYN installation.
What is in this part?
This part contains the following chapters:
Chapter
See page
1–General Outline
1–3
2–Piping Layout
1–67
3–Wiring Layout
1–87
3
4
5
Part 1 – System Outline
1–1
ESIE06-05
11
3
5
1–2
Part 1 – System Outline
ESIE06-05
General Outline
Part 1
1
General Outline
1.1
What Is in This Chapter?
Introduction
This chapter contains the following information:
Q
Q
Q
Overview
Part 1 – System Outline
1
Technical specifications
Electrical specifications
Outlook drawings: Outlook, dimensions, installation and service space.
3
This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic
See page
1.2–Technical Specifications: EWAQ080-260DAYN
1–5
1.3–Technical Specifications for options: EWAQ080-100DAYN
1–8
1.4–Technical Specifications for options: EWAQ130-150DAYN
1–9
1.5–Technical Specifications for options: EWAQ180-210DAYN
1–10
1.6–Technical Specifications for options: EWAQ240-260DAYN
1–11
1.7–Technical Specifications: EWYQ080-250DAYN
1–12
1.8–Technical specifications for options: EWYQ080-100DAYN
1–15
1.9–Technical specifications for options: EWYQ130-150DAYN
1–16
1.10–Technical specifications for options: EWYQ180-210DAYN
1–17
1.11–Technical Specifications for options: EWYQ230-250DAYN
1–18
1.12–Electrical Specifications: EWAQ080-260DAYN
1–19
1.13–Electrical Specifications for options: EWAQ080-100DAYN
1–20
1.14–Electrical Specifications for options: EWAQ130-150DAYN
1–21
1.15–Electrical Specifications for options: EWAQ180-210DAYN
1–22
1.16–Electrical Specifications for options: EWAQ240-260DAYN
1–23
1.17–Electrical Specifications: EWYQ080-260DAYN
1–24
1.18–Electrical Specifications for options: EWYQ080-100DAYN
1–26
1.19–Electrical Specifications for options: EWYQ130-150DAYN
1–27
1.20–Electrical Specifications for options: EWYQ180-210DAYN
1–28
1.21–Electrical Specifications for options: EWYQ230-250DAYN
1–29
1.22–Correction Factors for Glycol
1–30
1.23–Optional equipment for EWAQ-DAYN (N-P-B)
1–32
1.24–Optional equipment for EWYQ-DAYN (N-P-B)
1–33
1.25–Outlook Drawing: EWAQ080-100DAYN(N)
1–34
1.26–Outlook Drawing: EWAQ080-100DAYN(P-B)
1–36
1.27–Outlook Drawing: EWAQ130-150DAYN(N)
1–38
1.28–Outlook Drawing: EWAQ130-150DAYN(P-B)
1–40
4
5
1–3
General Outline
11
3
ESIE06-05
Topic
See page
1.29–Outlook Drawing: EWAQ180-210DAYN(N)
1–42
1.30–Outlook Drawing: EWAQ180-210DAYN(P-B)
1–44
1.31–Outlook Drawing: EWAQ240-260DAYN(N)
1–46
1.32–Outlook Drawing: EWAQ240-260DAYN(P-B)
1–48
1.33–Outlook Drawing: EWYQ080-100DAYN(N)
1–50
1.34–Outlook Drawing: EWYQ080-100DAYN(P-B)
1–52
1.35–Outlook Drawing: EWYQ130-150DAYN(N)
1–54
1.36–Outlook Drawing: EWYQ130-150DAYN(P-B)
1–56
1.37–Outlook Drawing: EWYQ180-210DAYN(N)
1–58
1.38–Outlook Drawing: EWYQ180-210DAYN(P-B)
1–60
1.39–Outlook Drawing: EWYQ230-250DAYN(N)
1–62
1.40–Outlook Drawing: EWYQ230-250DAYN(P-B)
1–64
4
5
1–4
Part 1 – System Outline
ESIE06-05
1.2
General Outline
Technical Specifications: EWAQ080-260DAYN
Technical
specifications
1
The table below contains the technical specifications.
EWAQ080DA
YN
EWAQ100DA
YN
EWAQ130DA
YN
EWAQ150DA
YN
EWAQ180DA
YN
EWAQ210DAY
N
EWAQ240DA
YN
EWAQ260DA
YN
kW
80
105
131
152
182
209
236
254
%
0-50-100
0-50-100
0-25
50-75-100
0-25
50-75-100
21/29-43/50/
57-71/79-10
0
0-25
50-75-100
22/28-40/50/
56-72/78-10
0
0-25
50-75-100
kW
26.4
36.2
46.6
56.3
64.5
74.6
82.2
94.0
EER
3.03
2.90
2.81
2.70
2.82
2.80
2.80
2.70
ESEER
4.12
4.00
4.34
4.22
4.36
4.32
4.20
4.00
Capacity (Eurovent conditions
specified in
notes)
Cooling
Nominal
Capacity Steps
Nominal input
(Eurovent conditions specified in
notes)
Casing
Cooling
Ivory white
Colour
Material
Dimensions
Weight
Water Heat
Exchanger
Unit
4
Polyester painted galvanised steel plate/Munsell code 5Y7.5/1
Height
mm
2311
2311
2311
2311
2311
2311
2311
2311
Width
mm
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
Depth
mm
2566
2566
2631
2631
3081
3081
4850
4850
Unit
kg
1350
1400
1500
1550
1800
1850
3150
3250
Operating weight
kg
1315
1415
1517
1569
1825
1877
3189
3292
Gross weight
kg
1400
1450
1550
1600
1850
1900
3200
3300
Type
Filter
3
5
Brased plate
STRAINER GALVANIZED
Type
Diameter
perforation
s
mm
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Minimum water volume in the system
l
358
470
295
341
408
468
529
569
Water
flow
rate
Min
l/min
115
151
188
218
261
300
339
364
Max
l/min
459
602
754
871
1043
1198
1355
1456
Nominal
Water
Flow
Cooling
l/min
229
301
377
436
522
599
677
728
Nominal Water
Flow
Cooling
Total
kPa
59
58
52
49
52
53
51
47
Water Heat
Exchanger
Insulation material
Model
Part 1 – System Outline
Foamed synthetic elastomer
Quantity
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Model
PT120
PT120
DV47
DV47
DV58
DV58
DV58
DV58
1–5
General Outline
11
ESIE06-05
EWAQ080DA
YN
Air Heat
Exchanger
3
Fan
EWAQ130DA
YN
Type
EWAQ150DA
YN
3
3
3
3
3
3
Stages
56
56
48
56
56
56
48
48
Fin Pitch
mm
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8
Face Area
m2
2.46
2.46
2.11
2.46
3.02
3.02
2.11
2.11
4
4
4
4
4
4
8
8
Unit water volume
l
15
15
17
19
25
27
39
42
Nominal water
pressure drop unit
kPa
66
67
64
63
72
79
83
85
4
Direct drive
m3/min
Quantity
780
780
800
860
1290
1290
1600
1600
4
4
4
4
6
6
8
8
Speed
rpm
880
880
900
970
970
970
900
900
Motor
Output
W
500
500
600
1000
1000
1000
600
600
Discharge direction
Vertical
Type
Scroll compressor
Refrigerant oil type
Daphne FVC68D
Refrigerant oil
charge
Model
l
Quantity
Model
Speed
rpm
6.7
6.7
3.3
6.7
6.7
6.7
6.7
6.7
2
2
4
4
2
4
2
4
SJ180
SJ240
SJ161
SJ180
SJ180
SJ240
SJ240
SJ300
2900
2900
2900
2900
2900
2900
2900
2900
Quantity
Model
Speed
rpm
Cooling
dBA
Sound Level
Sound
Power
Refrigerant circuit
Refrigerant type
Refrigerant charge
86
86
88
89
2
2
SJ240
SJ300
2900
2900
90
91
91
91
29
28
39
39
39
39
2
2
2
3” OD
3”
3”
R-410A
kg
33
33
kg
No of circuits
1
1
19
25
19
25
2
2
Refrigerant control
Water heat exchanger inlet /
outlet
Water heat exchanger drain
1–6
EWAQ260DA
YN
2
Model
Piping connections
EWAQ240DA
YN
2
Nominal air flow
5
EWAQ210DAY
N
Rows
Drive
Compressor
EWAQ180DA
YN
Cross fin coil / Hi-Xss tubes and PE coated
No. of Coils
Hydraulic Components
EWAQ100DA
YN
2
Electronic expansion valve
3” OD
3” OD
3” OD
3” OD
3” OD
1/2” G
Part 1 – System Outline
ESIE06-05
General Outline
EWAQ080DA
YN
Safety Devices
EWAQ100DA
YN
EWAQ130DA
YN
EWAQ150DA
YN
High pressure switch
EWAQ180DA
YN
EWAQ210DAY
N
EWAQ240DA
YN
EWAQ260DA
YN
High pressure (pressure switch)
1
Pressure relief valve
Low pressure protection
Low pressure safety
Freeze up protection
Flowswitch
Discharge temperature control
Reverse phase protector
Electronic protection module
compressors (only for SJ180
SJ240)
Electronic protection module compressors (only for
SJ180)
Electronic protection module
compressors (only for SJ180
SJ240)
Electronic protection module
compressors
3
Overcurrent relays for compressors and fans
Notes
Nominal cooling capacity at Eurovent conditions: Evaporator 12xC/7xC; ambient 35xC
Nominal cooling capacity at Eurovent conditions: Evaporator 12xC/7xC; ambient 35xC
(= Power input compressors + fans + electrical circuit)
Minimum required watervolume for standard thermostat settings and at nominal conditions
4
5
Part 1 – System Outline
1–7
General Outline
11
1.3
ESIE06-05
Technical Specifications for options: EWAQ080-100DAYN
Technical
specifications
The table below contains the technical specifications for the options of the EWAQ080-100 DAYN.
Technical specifications options
OPSP
Units
Weight
3
Pump
kg
250
250
Additional operation weight
kg
283
283
Additional gross weight
kg
250
250
Single-stage-in-line-pumps
Single-stage-in-line-pumps
1
1
TP50-240/2
TP50-240/2
kPa
142
133
Additional unit water volume
l
33
33
Expansion vessel
l
35
Pre-charge pressure exp. vessel
bar
1,5
Safety valve
bar
3
Type
Model
Nominal Static Height Unit
Hydraulic components
EWAQ100DAYN*
Additional machine weight
Quantity
4
EWAQ080DAYN*
OPSB + OPBT
5
Units
Weight
Pump
EWAQ100DAYN*
Additional machine weight
kg
300
300
Additional operation weight
kg
523
523
Additional gross weight
kg
300
300
Single-stage-in-line-pumps
Single-stage-in-line-pumps
1
1
TP50-240/2
TP50-240/2
Type
Quantity
Model
Hydraulic components
EWAQ080DAYN*
Nominal Static Height Unit
kPa
142
133
Buffer tank
l
190
190
Additional unit water volume
l
223
223
Expansion vessel
l
35
Pre-charge pressure exp. vessel
bar
1,5
Safety valve
bar
3
OPHP
Units
Pump
Type
Quantity
Model
Nominal Static Height Unit
1–8
kPa
EWAQ080DAYN*
EWAQ100DAYN*
Single-stage-in-line-pumps
Single-stage-in-line-pumps
1
1
TP50-240/2
TP50-240/2
337
322
Part 1 – System Outline
ESIE06-05
1.4
General Outline
Technical Specifications for options: EWAQ130-150DAYN
Technical
specifications
1
The table below contains the technical specifications for the options of the EWAQ130-150DAYN.
Technical specifications options
OPSP
Units
Weight
Pump
EWAQ150DAYN*
Additional machine weight
kg
250
250
Additional operation weight
kg
286
286
Additional gross weight
kg
250
250
Single-stage-in-line-pumps
Single-stage-in-line-pumps
1
1
TP65-230/2
TP65-230/2
kPa
134
126
Additional unit water volume
l
36
36
Expansion vessel
l
35
4
Pre-charge pressure exp. vessel
bar
1,5
Safety valve
bar
3
EWAQ130DAYN*
EWAQ150DAYN*
5
Type
Quantity
Model
Nominal Static Height Unit
Hydraulic components
EWAQ130DAYN*
OPSP + OPBT
Units
Weight
Pump
Additional machine weight
kg
300
300
Additional operation weight
kg
526
526
Additional gross weight
kg
300
300
Single-stage-in-line-pumps
Single-stage-in-line-pumps
1
1
TP65-230/2
TP65-230/2
kPa
134
126
Buffer tank
l
190
190
Additional unit water volume
l
226
226
Expansion vessel
l
35
Pre-charge pressure exp. vessel
bar
1,5
Safety valve
bar
3
Type
Quantity
Model
Nominal Static Height Unit
Hydraulic components
OPHP
Units
Pump
Type
Quantity
Model
Nominal Static Height Unit
Part 1 – System Outline
kPa
EWAQ130DAYN*
EWAQ150DAYN*
Single-stage-in-line-pumps
Single-stage-in-line-pumps
1
1
TP65-340/2
TP65-340/2
253
248
1–9
3
General Outline
11
1.5
ESIE06-05
Technical Specifications for options: EWAQ180-210DAYN
Technical
specifications
The table below contains the technical specifications for the options of the EWAQ180-210DAYN.
Technical specifications options
OPSP
Units
Weight
3
Pump
kg
250
250
Additional operation weight
kg
286
286
Additional gross weight
kg
250
250
Single-stage-in-line-pumps
Single-stage-in-line-pumps
1
1
TP65-260/2
TP65-260/2
kPa
142
120
Additional unit water volume
l
36
36
Expansion vessel
l
35
Pre-charge pressure exp. vessel
bar
1,5
Safety valve
bar
3
Type
Model
5
Nominal Static Height Unit
Hydraulic components
EWAQ210DAYN*
Additional machine weight
Quantity
4
EWAQ180DAYN*
OPSP + OPBT
Units
Weight
Pump
EWAQ210DAYN*
Additional machine weight
kg
300
300
Additional operation weight
kg
526
526
Additional gross weight
kg
300
300
Single-stage-in-line-pumps
Single-stage-in-line-pumps
1
1
TP65-260/2
TP65-260/2
kPa
142
120
Buffer tank
l
190
190
Additional unit water volume
l
226
226
Expansion vessel
l
35
Pre-charge pressure exp. vessel
bar
1,5
Safety valve
bar
3
Type
Quantity
Model
Nominal Static Height Unit
Hydraulic components
EWAQ180DAYN*
OPHP
Units
Pump
Type
Quantity
Model
Nominal Static Height Unit
1–10
kPa
EWAQ180DAYN*
EWAQ210DAYN*
Single-stage-in-line-pumps
Single-stage-in-line-pumps
1
1
TP65-410/2
TP65-410/2
296
278
Part 1 – System Outline
ESIE06-05
1.6
General Outline
Technical Specifications for options: EWAQ240-260DAYN
Technical
specifications
1
The table below contains the technical specifications for the options of the EWAQ240-260DAYN.
Technical specifications options
OPSP
Units
Weight
Pump
EWAQ260DAYN*
Additional machine weight
kg
250
250
Additional operation weight
kg
271
271
Additional gross weight
kg
250
250
Single-stage-in-line-pumps
Single-stage-in-line-pumps
1
1
TP65-260/2
TP65-260/2
kPa
119
110
Additional unit water volume
l
21
21
Expansion vessel
l
50
Pre-charge pressure exp. vessel
bar
1,5
Safety valve
bar
3
Type
Quantity
Model
Nominal Static Height Unit Cooling
Hydraulic components
EWAQ240DAYN*
4
5
OPSP + OPBT
Units
Weight
Pump
EWAQ260DAYN*
Additional machine weight
kg
300
300
Additional operation weight
kg
511
511
Additional gross weight
kg
300
300
Single-stage-in-line-pumps
Single-stage-in-line-pumps
1
1
TP65-260/2
TP65-260/2
kPa
126
117
Buffer tank
l
190
190
Additional unit water volume
l
211
211
Expansion vessel
l
50
Pre-charge pressure exp. vessel
bar
1,5
Safety valve
bar
3
Type
Quantity
Model
Nominal Static Height Unit Cooling
Hydraulic components
EWAQ240DAYN*
OPHP
Units
Pump
Type
Quantity
Model
Nominal Static Height Unit Cooling
Part 1 – System Outline
kPa
3
EWAQ240DAYN*
EWAQ260DAYN*
Single-stage-in-line-pumps
Single-stage-in-line-pumps
1
1
TP65-410/2
TP65-410/2
321
276
1–11
General Outline
11
1.7
ESIE06-05
Technical Specifications: EWYQ080-250DAYN
Technical
Specifications
The table below contains the technical specifications.
2-1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Capacity (Eurovent conditions
specified in
notes)
4
EWYQ100D
AYN
EWYQ130DA
YN
EWYQ150D
AYN
EWYQ180DA
YN
EWYQ210D
AYN
EWYQ230DA
YN
EWYQ250D
AYN
Cooling
Nominal
kW
77
100
136
145
183
211
234
252
Heating
Nominal
kW
87.7
114
149
165
199
225
258
284
%
0-50-100
0-50-100
0-25
50-75-100
0-25
50-75-100
21/29-43/50
/57-71/79-1
00
0-25
50-75-100
22/28-40/50
/56-72/78-1
00
0-25
50-75-100
Cooling
kW
26.5
36.2
47.6
55.7
63.8
75.3
82.2
94.0
Heating
kW
30.0
38.1
49.6
58.8
68.0
77.0
86.9
97.9
EER
2.91
2.76
2.86
2.60
2.87
2.80
2.85
2.68
COP (Eurovent conditions specified in notes)
2.92
2.99
3.00
2.81
2.93
2.92
2.97
2.90
ESEER
4.00
4.00
4.20
4.20
4.20
4.20
4.20
4.20
Capacity Steps
3
EWYQ080
DAYN
Nominal input
(Eurovent conditions specified in
notes)
Casing
Ivory white
Colour
Material
Dimensions
5
Weight
Water Heat
Exchanger
Unit
Polyester painted galvanised steel plate
Height
mm
2311
2311
2311
2311
2311
2311
2311
2311
Width
mm
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
Depth
mm
2566
2566
2631
2631
3081
3081
4850
4850
Unit
kg
1400
1450
1550
1600
1850
1900
3200
3300
Operating weight
kg
1415
1465
1567
1619
1875
1927
3239
3342
Gross weight
kg
1450
1500
1600
1650
1900
1950
3250
3350
Type
Filter
Brased plate
STRAINER GALVANIZED
Type
Diameter perforations
mm
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Minimum water volume
in the system
l
393
511
334
370
446
504
560
616
Water
flow rate
Min
l/min
110
143
195
208
262
302
330
358
Max
l/min
503
654
854
946
1141
1290
1433
1571
Nominal
Water
Flow
Cooling
l/min
221
287
390
416
525
605
659
717
Heating
l/min
251
327
427
473
570
645
717
786
Nominal Water
Flow
Cooling
Total
kPa
36
36
43
38
41
44
38
37
Water Heat
Exchanger
Insulation material
Model
1–12
Foamed synthetic elastomer
Quan
tity
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Mode
l
PT120
PT120
DV47HP
DV47HP
DV58HP
DV58HP
DV58HP
DV58HP
Part 1 – System Outline
ESIE06-05
General Outline
2-1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Air Heat
Exchanger
Fan
EWYQ100D
AYN
EWYQ130DA
YN
Type
EWYQ150D
AYN
EWYQ230DA
YN
EWYQ250D
AYN
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
Stages
56
56
48
56
56
56
48
48
Fin Pitch
mm
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8
Face Area
m2
2.46
2.46
2.11
2.46
3.02
3.02
2.11
2.11
4
4
4
4
4
4
8
8
Unit water volume
l
15
15
17
19
25
27
39
42
Nominal water pressure
drop unit
kPa
42
43
55
51
61
70
68
74
Drive
Model
Direct drive
m3/m
in
Quantity
780
780
800
860
1290
1290
1600
1600
4
4
4
4
6
6
8
8
Speed
rpm
880
880
900
970
970
970
900
900
Motor
Output
W
500
500
600
1000
1000
1000
600
600
Discharge direction
Scroll compressor
Refrigerant oil type
Daphne FVC68D
Model
l
Quantity
Model
Speed
rpm
6.7
6.7
3.3
6.2
6.2
6.2
6.2
6.2
2
2
4
4
2
4
2
4
SJ180
SJ240
SJ161
SJ180
SJ180
SJ240
SJ240
SJ300
2900
2900
2900
2900
2900
2900
2900
2900
Quantity
Model
Speed
rpm
Cooling
dBA
Sound Level
Sound
Power
Refrigerant circuit
Refrigerant type
Refrigerant charge
86
86
88
33
37
kg
No of circuits
Water heat exchanger inlet / outlet
Part 1 – System Outline
2
SJ240
SJ300
2900
2900
89
90
91
91
93
1
1
22
22
32
32
39
39
22
22
32
32
39
39
2
2
2
2
2
2
3” OD
3”
3”
Refrigerant control
Water heat exchanger drain
2
R-410A
kg
Electronic expansion valve
3” OD
3” OD
3” OD
3” OD
1
3
4
Vertical
Type
Refrigerant oil charge
Piping connections
EWYQ210D
AYN
Rows
Nominal air flow
Compressor
EWYQ180DA
YN
Cross fin coil / Hi-Xss tubes and PE coated
No. of Coils
Hydraulic Components
EWYQ080
DAYN
3” OD
1/2” G
1–13
5
General Outline
11
2-1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
ESIE06-05
EWYQ080
DAYN
EWYQ100D
AYN
EWYQ130DA
YN
Safety Devices
EWYQ150D
AYN
EWYQ180DA
YN
EWYQ210D
AYN
EWYQ230DA
YN
EWYQ250D
AYN
Low pressure protection
Low pressure safety
Low pressure
safety
Electronic
protection
module
compressors (only
for SJ180
SJ240)
Electronic
protection
module
compressors
Electronic
protection
module
compressors
High pressure (pressure switch)
Pressure relief valve
Low
pressure
safety
Low pressure
safety
Low pressure safety
Low pressure safety
Low pressure protection
Freeze up protection
Flowswitch
Discharge temperature control
Reverse phase protector
Electronic
protection module
compressors
3
Electronic
protection
module
compressors
Electronic
protection
module
compressors (only
for SJ180
SJ240)
Electronic
protection
module
compressors (only
for SJ180
SJ240)
Electronic
protection
module
compressors (only
for SJ180
SJ240)
Overcurrent relays for compressors and fans
Notes
4
Nominal cooling capacity at Eurovent conditions: Evaporator 12xC/7xC; ambient 35xC
Nominal cooling capacity at Eurovent conditions: Evaporator 12xC/7xC; ambient 35xC
(= Power input compressors + fans + electrical circuit)
Minimum required watervolume for standard thermostat settings and at nominal conditions
Nominal heating capacity at Eurovent conditions: Evaporator 40xC/45xC, ambient: drybulb 7xC, wetbulb 6xC
Nominal heating power input at Eurovent conditions: Evaporator 40xC/45xC, ambient: drybulb 7xC, wetbulb 6xC (=Power
input compressors+fans+electrical circuit)
5
1–14
Part 1 – System Outline
ESIE06-05
1.8
General Outline
Technical specifications for options: EWYQ080-100DAYN
Technical
specifications
1
The table below contains the technical specifications for the options of the EWYQ080-100DAYN.
Technical specifications options
OPSP
Units
Weight
Pump
EWYQ100DAYN*
Additional machine weight
kg
250
250
Additional operation weight
kg
268
268
Additional gross weight
kg
250
250
Single-stage-in-line-pumps
Single-stage-in-line-pumps
1
1
TP50-240/2
TP50-240/2
kPa
173
154
Additional unit water volume
l
18
18
Expansion vessel
l
35
Pre-charge pressure exp. vessel
bar
1,5
Safety valve
bar
3
Type
Quantity
Model
Nominal Static Height Unit cooling
Hydraulic components
EWYQ080DAYN*
4
5
OPSP + OPBT
Units
Weight
Pump
EWYQ100DAYN*
Additional machine weight
kg
300
300
Additional operation weight
kg
508
508
Additional gross weight
kg
300
300
Single-stage-in-line-pumps
Single-stage-in-line-pumps
1
1
TP50-240/2
TP50-240/2
kPa
173
154
Buffer tank
l
190
190
Additional unit water volume
l
208
208
Expansion vessel
l
35
Pre-charge pressure exp. vessel
bar
1,5
Safety valve
bar
3
Type
Quantity
Model
Nominal Static Height Unit cooling
Hydraulic components
EWYQ080DAYN*
OPHP
Units
Pump
Type
Quantity
Model
Nominal Static Height Unit Cooling
Part 1 – System Outline
kPa
3
EWYQ080DAYN*
EWYQ100DAYN*
Single-stage-in-line-pumps
Single-stage-in-line-pumps
1
1
TP50-430/2
TP50-430/2
365
348
1–15
General Outline
11
1.9
ESIE06-05
Technical specifications for options: EWYQ130-150DAYN
Technical
specifications
The table below contains the technical specifications for the options of the EWYQ130-150DAYN.
Technical specifications options
OPSP
Units
Weight
3
Pump
kg
250
250
Additional operation weight
kg
286
286
Additional gross weight
kg
250
250
Single-stage-in-line-pumps
Single-stage-in-line-pumps
1
1
TP65-260/2
TP65-260/2
kPa
141
141
Additional unit water volume
l
36
36
Expansion vessel
l
35
Pre-charge pressure exp. vessel
bar
1,5
Safety valve
bar
3
Type
Model
5
Nominal Static Height Unit Cooling
Hydraulic components
EWYQ150DAYN*
Additional machine weight
Quantity
4
EWYQ130DAYN*
OPSP + OPBT
Units
Weight
Pump
EWYQ150DAYN*
Additional machine weight
kg
300
300
Additional operation weight
kg
526
526
Additional gross weight
kg
300
300
Single-stage-in-line-pumps
Single-stage-in-line-pumps
1
1
TP65-260/2
TP65-260/2
kPa
141
141
Buffer tank
l
190
190
Additional unit water volume
l
226
226
Expansion vessel
l
35
Pre-charge pressure exp. vessel
bar
1,5
Safety valve
bar
3
Type
Quantity
Model
Nominal Static Height Unit Cooling
Hydraulic components
EWYQ130DAYN*
OPHP
Units
Pump
Type
Quantity
Model
Nominal Static Height Unit
1–16
kPa
EWYQ130DAYN*
EWYQ150DAYN*
Single-stage-in-line-pumps
Single-stage-in-line-pumps
1
1
TP65-340/2
TP65-340/2
261
261
Part 1 – System Outline
ESIE06-05
1.10
General Outline
Technical specifications for options: EWYQ180-210DAYN
Technical
specifications
1
The table below contains the technical specifications for the options of the EWYQ180-210DAYN.
Technical specifications options
OPSP
Units
Weight
Pump
EWYQ210DAYN
Additional machine weight
kg
250
250
Additional operation weight
kg
286
286
Additional gross weight
kg
250
250
Single-stage-in-line-pumps
Single-stage-in-line-pumps
1
1
TP65-260/2
TP65-260/2
kPa
152
128
Additional unit water volume
l
36
36
Expansion vessel
l
35
Pre-charge pressure exp. vessel
bar
1,5
Safety valve
bar
3
Type
Quantity
Model
Nominal Static Height Unit cooling
Hydraulic components
EWYQ180DAYN
4
5
OPSP + OPBT
Units
Weight
Pump
EWYQ210DAYN
Additional machine weight
kg
300
300
Additional operation weight
kg
526
526
Additional gross weight
kg
300
300
Single-stage-in-line-pumps
Single-stage-in-line-pumps
1
1
TP65-260/2
TP65-260/2
kPa
152
128
Buffer tank
l
190
190
Additional unit water volume
l
226
226
Expansion vessel
l
35
Pre-charge pressure exp. vessel
bar
1,5
Safety valve
bar
3
Type
Quantity
Model
Nominal Static Height Unit Cooling
Hydraulic components
EWYQ180DAYN
OPHP
Units
Pump
Type
Quantity
Model
Nominal Static Height Unit
Part 1 – System Outline
kPa
3
EWYQ180DAYN*
EWYQ210DAYN*
Single-stage-in-line-pumps
Single-stage-in-line-pumps
1
1
TP65-410/2
TP65-410/2
306
286
1–17
General Outline
11
1.11
ESIE06-05
Technical Specifications for options: EWYQ230-250DAYN
Technical
specifications
The table below contains the technical specifications for the options of the EWYQ230~250DAYN.
Technical specifications options
OPSP
Units
Weight
3
Pump
kg
250
250
Additional operation weight
kg
271
271
Additional gross weight
kg
250
250
Single-stage-in-line-pumps
Single-stage-in-line-pumps
1
1
TP65-260/2
TP65-260/2
kPa
143
129
Additional unit water volume
l
21
21
Expansion vessel
l
50
Pre-charge pressure exp. vessel
bar
1,5
Safety valve
bar
3
Type
Model
5
Nominal Static Height Unit Cooling
Hydraulic components
EWYQ250DAYN*
Additional machine weight
Quantity
4
EWYQ230DAYN*
OPSP + OPBT
Units
Weight
Pump
EWYQ250DAYN*
Additional machine weight
kg
300
300
Additional operation weight
kg
511
511
Additional gross weight
kg
300
300
Single-stage-in-line-pumps
Single-stage-in-line-pumps
1
1
TP65-260/2
TP65-260/2
kPa
143
129
Buffer tank
l
190
190
Additional unit water volume
l
211
211
Expansion vessel
l
50
Pre-charge pressure exp. vessel
bar
1,5
Safety valve
bar
3
Type
Quantity
Model
Nominal Static Height Unit Cooling
Hydraulic components
EWYQ230DAYN*
OPHP
Units
Pump
Type
Quantity
Model
Nominal Static Height Unit
1–18
kPa
EWYQ230DAYN*
EWYQ250DAYN*
Single-stage-in-line-pumps
Single-stage-in-line-pumps
1
1
TP65-410/2
TP65-410/2
292
280
Part 1 – System Outline
ESIE06-05
1.12
General Outline
Electrical Specifications: EWAQ080-260DAYN
Electrical
specifications
Power supply
The table below contains the electrical specifications.
Phase
Compressor
EWAQ100D
AYN
3
3
EWAQ130D
AYN
EWAQ150D
AYN
EWAQ180D
AYN
EWAQ210D
AYN
EWAQ240DA
YN
EWAQ260D
AYN
3
3
3
3
3
3
Hz
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
Voltage
V
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
Minimum
%
-10%
Maximum
%
+10%
Starting current
A
201
(max.
240)
221 (max.
272)
161 (max.
269)
199 (max.
320
221(max.
357)
221 (max.
368)
266 (max.
426)
266 (max.
468)
Nominal Running Current
Cooling
A
60
72
88
113
131
144
162
181
Maximum Running Current
A
96
120
160
177
209
233
262
290
3x125gL
3x160gL
3x200gL
3x200gL
3x250gL
3x250gL
3x300gL
3x355gL
Recommended fuses according to
IEC standard 269-2
Fan
EWAQ080
DAYN
Frequency
Voltage
Tolerance
Unit
1
Starting method
Maximum Running Current
A
1.5
1.5
1.4
2.1
2.1
2.1
1.6
1.6
Starting current
A
195
215
158
195
195/215
215
215/260
260
Nominal Running Current
(RLA)
A
25/25
31/31
19/19
25/25
25/31
31/31
31/40
40/40
Maximum Running Current
A
39
51
35
39
39/51
51
51/65
65
Direct On-Line
Phase
Frequency
Hz
Voltage
V
Crankcase heater
(E1/2HC)
W
Notes
Part 1 – System Outline
4
Direct On-Line
Starting method
Control circuit
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
75
75
230V (supplied by factory installed transformers)
2x75
2x75
4x65
4x75
4x75
4x75
Starting current of the
unit = maximum running
current 4 fans + starting
current 1 compressor
Starting current of the unit =
maximum running current 2
fans(1 circuit) + starting current 1 compressor
Starting current of the unit
= maximum running current 3 fans(1 circuit) +
starting current 1 compressor
Initial starting current =
maximum running current 4
fans + starting current 1
compressor
Maximum starting current = maximum running
current 4 fans + maximum running current 1
compressor + starting
current 1 compressor
Maximum starting current of
the unit = maximum running
current 4 fans + maximum
running current 3 compressors + starting current 1
compressor
Maximum starting current
= maximum running current 6 fans + maximum
running current 3 compressors + starting current 1
compressor
Maximum starting current =
maximum running current 8
fans + maximum running
current 3 compressors +
starting current 1 compressor
1–19
5
General Outline
11
1.13
ESIE06-05
Electrical Specifications for options: EWAQ080-100DAYN
Electrical
specifications
The table below contains the electrical specifications for the options of the EWAQ080-100 DAYN.
Electrical specifications options
OPSP
Units
Std Pump
3
EWAQ080DAYN*
Starting method
EWAQ100DAYN*
Direct On-Line
Power
W
2,2kW
2,2kW
Maximum Running current
A
4,5
4,5
Starting current
A
42
42
EWAQ080DAYN*
EWAQ100DAYN*
OPHP
Units
4
High Esp Pump
Starting method
Direct On-Line
Power
W
5,5kW
5,5kW
Maximum Running current
A
11,2
11,2
Starting current
A
131
131
EWAQ080DAYN*
EWQ100DAYN*
OP 10
5
Units
Heater Tape
Supply Voltage
V
230+/-10%
Recommended fuses
A
2x 10 A
Power standard model
1 x 300W
1 x 300W
Power model with pump
2 x 300W
2 x 300W
2 x 300W + 1 x 150W
2 x 300W + 1 x 150W
Power model with pump and buffer
tank
1–20
Part 1 – System Outline
ESIE06-05
1.14
General Outline
Electrical Specifications for options: EWAQ130-150DAYN
Electrical
specifications
1
The table below contains the electrical specifications for the options of the EWAQ130-150DAYN.
Electrical specifications options
OPSP
Units
Std Pump
EWAQ130DAYN*
Starting method
EWAQ150DAYN*
Direct On-Line
Power
W
3 kW
3 kW
Maximum Running current
A
6,3
6,3
Starting current
A
58
58
EWAQ130DAYN*
EWAQ150DAYN*
3
OPHP
Units
High Esp Pump
Starting method
Direct On-Line
Power
W
5,5 kW
5,5 kW
Maximum Running current
A
11,2
11,2
Starting current
A
131
131
EWAQ130DAYN*
EWAQ150DAYN*
4
OP 10
Units
Heater Tape
Supply Voltage
V
230+/-10%
Recommended fuses
A
2x 10 A
Power standard model
1 x 300W
1 x 300W
Power model with pump
2 x 300W
2 x 300W
2 x 300W + 1 x 150W
2 x 300W + 1 x 150W
Power model with pump and buffer
tank
Part 1 – System Outline
5
1–21
General Outline
11
1.15
ESIE06-05
Electrical Specifications for options: EWAQ180-210DAYN
Electrical
specifications
The table below contains the electrical specifications for the options of the EWAQ180-210 DAYN.
Electrical specifications options
OPSP
Units
Std Pump
3
EWAQ180DAYN*
Starting method
EWAQ210DAYN*
Direct On-Line
Power
W
4kW
4kW
Maximum Running current
A
8
8
Starting current
A
98
98
EWAQ180DAYN*
EWAQ210DAYN*
OPHP
Units
4
High Esp Pump
Starting method
Direct On-Line
Power
W
7,5kW
7,5kW
Maximum Running current
A
15,2
15,2
Starting current
A
169
169
EWAQ180DAYN*
EWAQ210DAYN*
OP10
5
Units
Heater Tape
Supply Voltage
V
230+/-10%
Recommended fuses
A
2x 10A
Power standard model
1 x 300W
1 x 300W
Power model with pump
2 x 300W
2 x 300W
2 x 300W + 1 x 150W
2 x 300W + 1 x 150W
Power model with pump and buffer
tank
1–22
Part 1 – System Outline
ESIE06-05
1.16
General Outline
Electrical Specifications for options: EWAQ240-260DAYN
Electrical
specifications
1
The table below contains the electrical specifications for the options of the EWAQ240-260 DAYN.
Electrical specifications options
OPSP
Units
Std Pump
EWAQ240DAYN*
Starting method
Power
EWAQ260DAYN*
Direct On-Line
kW
4,0
4,0
Maximum Running current
A
8,0
8,0
Starting current
A
98
98
EWAQ240DAYN*
EWAQ260DAYN*
3
OPHP
Units
High Esp Pump
Starting method
Power
Direct On-Line
kW
7,5
7,5
Maximum Running current
A
15,2
15,2
Starting current
A
169
169
EWAQ240DAYN*
EWAQ260DAYN*
4
OP10
Units
Heater Tape
Supply Voltage
V
230+/-10%
Recommended fuses
A
2x 10 A
Power standard model
1 x 300W
1 x 300W
Power model with pump
2 x 300W
2 x 300W
2 x 300W + 1 x 150W
2 x 300W + 1 x 150W
Power model with pump and buffer
tank
Part 1 – System Outline
5
1–23
General Outline
11
1.17
Electrical Specifications: EWYQ080-260DAYN
Electrical
specifications
Power supply
ESIE06-05
The table below contains the electrical specifications.
Phase
4
5
Compressor
EWYQ150DA
YN
EWYQ180D
AYN
EWYQ210D
AYN
EWYQ230DA
YN
EWYQ250D
AYN
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
Voltage
V
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
Minimum
%
-10%
Maximum
%
+10%
Starting current
A
201
(max.
240)
221 (max.
272)
161 (max.
269)
199 (max.
320)
221(max.
357)
221 (max.
368)
266 (max.
440)
266 (max.
468)
Nominal Running Current
Cooling
A
60
72
88
113
131
144
162
181
Maximum Running Current
A
96
120
160
177
209
233
262
290
3x125gL
3x160gL
3x200gL
3x200gL
3x250gL
3x250gL
3x300gL
3x355gL
Recommended fuses according to
IEC standard 269-2
Fan
EWYQ130DA
YN
Hz
Tolerance
Unit
EWYQ100D
AYN
Frequency
Voltage
3
EWYQ080
DAYN
Starting method
Direct On-Line
Maximum Running Current
A
1.5
1.5
1.4
2.1
2.1
2.1
1.6
1.6
Starting current
A
195
215
158
195
195/215
215
215/260
260
Nominal Running Current
(RLA)
A
25/25
31/31
19/19
25/25
25/31
31/31
31/40
40/40
Maximum Running Current
A
39
51
35
39
39/51
51
51/65
65
Starting method
Control circuit
1–24
Direct On-Line
Phase
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
50
50
50
50
230V/24V
AC (supplied by factory
installed
transformers)
230V/24 V
AC (supplied by
factory
installed
transformers)
4x75
4x75
Frequency
Hz
50
50
50
50
Voltage
V
230V
(supplied
by factory
installed
transformers)
230V
(supplied
by factory
installed
transformers)
230V (supplied by factory
installed
transformers)
230V (supplied by factory installed
transformers)
Crankcase heater
(E1/2HC)
W
2x75
2x75
4x65
4x75
4x75
4x75
Part 1 – System Outline
ESIE06-05
Notes
General Outline
EWYQ080
DAYN
EWYQ100D
AYN
EWYQ130DA
YN
EWYQ150DA
YN
EWYQ180D
AYN
EWYQ210D
AYN
EWYQ230DA
YN
EWYQ250D
AYN
Initial
starting
current =
Maximum running
current 4
fans (1
circuit) +
starting
current 1
compressor
Initial
starting
current =
Maximum
running
current 4
fans (1 circuit) +
starting
current 1
compressor
Starting current of the
unit = Maximum running current
2 fans (1
circuit) +
starting current 1 compressor
Starting current of the
unit = Maximum running current
2 fans (1 circuit) + starting current 1
compressor
Initial starting current
= Maximum
running
current 3
fans (1 circuit) +
starting
current 1
compressor
Initial
starting
current =
Maximum
running
current 3
fans (1 circuit) +
starting
current 1
compressor
Initial starting current
= Maximum running current
4 fans (1
circuit) +
starting current 1 compressor
Initial
starting
current =
Maximum
running
current 4
fans (1 circuit) +
starting
current 1
compressor
Max.
starting
current of
the unit =
Maximum running
current 4
fans +
max. running current 3
compressors +
starting
current 1
compressor
Max. starting current of the
unit =
Maximum
running
current 4
fans +
max. running current 3
compressors +
starting
current 1
compressor
Max. starting current
of the unit =
Maximum
running current 4 fans
+ max. running current 3
compressors + starting current
1 compressor
Max. starting current
of the unit =
Maximum
running current 4 fans +
max. running current
3 compressors + starting current 1
compressor
Maximum
starting
current =
maximum
running
current 6
fans +
maximum
running
current 3
compressors +
starting
current 1
compressor
Maximum
starting
current =
maximum
running
current 6
fans +
maximum
running
current 3
compressors +
starting
current 1
compressor
Maximum
starting current = maximum
running current 8 fans
+ maximum running current
3 compressors + starting current
1 compressor
Maximum
starting
current =
maximum
running
current 8
fans +
maximum
running
current 3
compressors +
starting
current 1
compressor
1
3
4
5
Part 1 – System Outline
1–25
General Outline
11
1.18
ESIE06-05
Electrical Specifications for options: EWYQ080-100DAYN
Electrical
specifications
The table below contains the electrical specifications for the options of the EWYQ080-100DAYN.
Electrical specifications options
OPSP
Units
Std Pump
EWYQ080DAYN*
Starting method
Power
3
EWYQ100DAYN*
Direct On-Line
kW
2,2
2,2
Maximum Running current
A
4,45
4,45
Starting current
A
42
42
EWYQ080DAYN*
EWYQ100DAYN*
OPHP
Units
4
High Esp Pump
Starting method
Power
Direct On-Line
kW
5,5
5,5
Maximum Running current
A
11,2
11,2
Starting current
A
131
131
EWYQ080DAYN*
EWYQ100DAYN*
OP10
5
Units
Heater Tape
Supply Voltage
V
230+/-10%
Recommended fuses
A
2 x 10 A
Power standard model
1 x 300W
1 x 300W
Power model with pump
2 x 300W
2 x 300W
2 x 300W + 1 x 150W
2 x 300W + 1 x 150W
Power model with pump and OPBT
1–26
Part 1 – System Outline
ESIE06-05
1.19
General Outline
Electrical Specifications for options: EWYQ130-150DAYN
Electrical
specifications
1
The table below contains the electrical specifications for the options of the EWYQ130-150DAYN.
Electrical specifications options
OPSP
Units
Std Pump
EWYQ130DAYN*
Starting method
EWYQ150DAYN*
Direct On-Line
Power
W
3kW
3kW
Maximum Running current
A
6,3
6,3
Starting current
A
58
58
EWYQ130DAYN*
EWYQ150DAYN*
3
OPHP
Units
High Esp Pump
Starting method
Direct On-Line
Power
W
5,5kW
5,5kW
Maximum Running current
A
11,2
11,2
Starting current
A
131
131
EWYQ130DAYN*
EWYQ150DAYN*
4
OP10
Units
Heater Tape
Supply Voltage
V
230+/-10%
Recommended fuses
A
2 x 10A
Power standard model
1 x 300W
1 x 300W
Power model with pump
2 x 300W
2 x 300W
2 x 300W + 1 x 150W
2 x 300W + 1 x 150W
Power model with pump and OPBT
Part 1 – System Outline
5
1–27
General Outline
11
1.20
ESIE06-05
Electrical Specifications for options: EWYQ180-210DAYN
Electrical
specifications
The table below contains the electrical specifications for the options of the EWYQ180-210DAYN.
Electrical specifications options
OPSP
Units
Std Pump
EWYQ180DAYN*
Starting method
Power
3
EWYQ210DAYN*
Direct On-Line
kW
4kW
4kW
Maximum Running current
A
8
8
Starting current
A
98
98
EWYQ180DAYN*
EWYQ210DAYN*
OPHP
Units
4
High Esp Pump
Starting method
Power
Direct On-Line
kW
7,5kW
7,5kW
Maximum Running current
A
15,2
15,2
Starting current
A
169
169
EWYQ180DAYN*
EWYQ210DAYN*
OP10
5
Units
Heater Tape
Supply Voltage
V
230+/-10%
Recommended fuses
A
2 x 10A
Power standard model
1 x 300W
1 x 300W
Power model with pump
2 x 300W
2 x 300W
2 x 300W + 1 x 150W
2 x 300W + 1 x 150W
Power model with pump and buffer
tank
1–28
Part 1 – System Outline
ESIE06-05
1.21
General Outline
Electrical Specifications for options: EWYQ230-250DAYN
Electrical
specifications
1
The table below contains the electrical specifications for the options of the EWYQ230-250DAYN.
Electrical specifications options
OPSP
Units
Std Pump
EWYQ230DAYN*
Starting method
Power
EWYQ250DAYN*
Direct On-Line
kW
4,0
4,0
Maximum Running current
A
8,0
8,0
Starting current
A
98
98
EWYQ230DAYN*
EWYQ250DAYN*
3
OPHP
Units
High Esp Pump
Starting method
Power
Direct On-Line
kW
7,5
7,5
Maximum Running current
A
15,2
15,2
Starting current
A
169
169
EWYQ230DAYN*
EWYQ250DAYN*
4
OP 10
Units
Heater Tape
Supply Voltage
V
230+/-10%
Recommended fuses
A
2 x 10A
Power standard model
1 x 300W
1 x 300W
Power model with pump
2 x 300W
2 x 300W
2 x 300W + 1 x 150W
2 x 300W + 1 x 150W
Power model with pump and OPBT
Part 1 – System Outline
5
1–29
General Outline
11
1.22
ESIE06-05
Correction Factors for Glycol
Correction factors
The illustration below shows the correction factors for glycol.
Correction
factors
1.90
1.80
3
Kp
1.70
1.60
1.50
4
1.40
1.30
1.20
5
Kf
1.10
1.00
0.99
Ki
0.98
0.97
0.96
0.95
Kc
0.94
% glycol
0
1–30
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
Part 1 – System Outline
ESIE06-05
Legend
Glycol freezing
point
General Outline
The table below describes the patterns and symbols used for the correction factors illustrated above.
Pattern
Description
_______
Ethylene glycol
_____
Propylene glycol
Kc
Correction on cooling capacity
Ki
Correction on power input
Kf
Correction on flow rate
Kp
Correction on pressure drop
3
The table below contains glycol freezing points for different glycol concentrations.
Concentration
(wt%)
0
10
20
30
40
Ethylene
glycol
Freezing point °C
0
-4
-9
-16
-23
Minimum LWE °C
4
2
0
-5
-11
Propylene glycol
Freezing point °C
0
-3
-7
-13
-22
Minimum LWE °C
4
3
-2
-4
-10
Type
Part 1 – System Outline
1
4
5
1–31
General Outline
11
1.23
ESIE06-05
Optional equipment for EWAQ-DAYN (N-P-B)
Optional equipment for EWAQ-DAYNN
Capacity: 080-260 kW
3
4
5
Option number
EWAQ080DAYNN
EWAQ150DAYNN
EWAQ240DAYNN
EWAQ100DAYNN
EWAQ180DAYNN
EWAQ260DAYNN
EWAQ130DAYNN
EWAQ210DAYNN
Option description
Unit size
Availability
080
100
130
150
180
210
240
260
Standard unit
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
OPSC
Single pump contactor
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
fact. mount.
OPTC
Twin pump contactor
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
fact. mount.
OPSP
Single pump
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
fact. mount.
OPTP
Twin pump (1 pump house, dual motor)
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
fact. mount.
OPHP
High ESP pump (single pump only)
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
fact. mount.
OPBT
Buffer tank
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
fact. mount.
OPIF
Inverter fans (For low ambient -15°C)
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
fact. mount.
OPZL
Glycol 0°C/ -10°C
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
fact. mount.
OP03
Dual pressure relief valve
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
fact. mount.
OP10
Evaporator heater tape
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
fact. mount.
OP12
Option valves (discharge-, liquid line- and suction stop valve)
°(S)
°(S)
°(S)
°(S)
°(S)
°(S)
°(S)
°(S)
fact. mount.
OP57
A-meter / V-meter
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
fact. mount.
OPLN
Low noise = OPIF + Compressor housing
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
fact. mount.
OPCG
Condenser protection grills
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
fact. mount.
Kit
Available kits
EKLONPG
Gateway for LON
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
EKBNPG
Gateway for BACNET
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
Kit
EKACPG
Address card
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
Kit
EKRUPG
Remote user interface
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
Kit
Notes
1–32
°
Available
-
Not available
(S)
Option required for Swedish national law SNFS 1992:16
Part 1 – System Outline
ESIE06-05
1.24
General Outline
Optional equipment for EWYQ-DAYN (N-P-B)
1
Optional equipment for EWYQ-DAYNN
Capacity: 080-250 kW
Option number
EWYQ080DAYNN
EWYQ150DAYNN
EWYQ230DAYNN
EWYQ100DAYNN
EWYQ180DAYNN
EWYQ250DAYNN
EWYQ130DAYNN
EWYQ210DAYNN
Option description
Unit size
080
100
130
150
180
Availability
210
230
250
Standard unit
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
OPSC
Single pump contactor
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
OPTC
Twin pump contactor
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
fact. mount.
OPSP
Single pump
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
fact. mount.
OPTP
Twin pump (1 pump house, dual motor)
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
fact. mount.
OPHP
High ESP pump (single pump only)
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
fact. mount.
OPBT
Buffer tank
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
fact. mount.
OPIF
Inverter fans (For low ambient -15°C)
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
fact. mount.
OPZL
Glycol 0°C / -10°C
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
fact. mount.
OP03
Dual pressure relief valve
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
fact. mount.
OP10
Evaporator heater tape
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
fact. mount.
fact. mount.
OP12
Option valves (discharge-, liquid line- and suction stop valve)
°(S)
°(S)
°(S)
°(S)
°(S)
°(S)
°(S)
°(S)
fact. mount.
OP57
A-meter / V-meter
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
fact. mount.
OPLN
Low noise = OPIF + Compressor housing
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
fact. mount.
OPCG
Condenser protection grills
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
fact. mount.
EKLONPG
Gateway for LON
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
Kit
EKBNPG
Gateway for BACNET
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
Kit
EKACPG
Address card
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
Kit
EKRUPG
Remote user interface
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
Kit
Available kits
Notes
Part 1 – System Outline
°
Available
-
Not available
(S)
Option required for Swedish national law SNFS 1992:16
3
1–33
4
5
General Outline
11
1.25
ESIE06-05
Outlook Drawing: EWAQ080-100DAYN(N)
The illustration below shows the outlook, the dimensions and the installation and service space of the
unit (mm).
EWAQ080-100DAYN
(N)
1200
1000
1100
23
1200
3
1200
4
1000
2000
AIR
AIR
AIR
3000
AIR
17
18
16
11
6
19
970
5
2311
20
22
7
30
4
2 x hole for
fixation Ø20
AIR
AIR
49
15
26
120
25
3
2 x hole for
fixation Ø20
1922
AIR
AIR
14
2
13
27
673
8
29
21
28
24
1388
2566
1–34
1
217
5
12
407
9
10
1000
Required space around
the unit for service and air
intake
Center of gravity
Part 1 – System Outline
ESIE06-05
Components
General Outline
1
The table below lists the components.
No.
Component
No.
Component
1
Evaporator
16
Power supply intake
2
Condensor
17
Switchbox
3
Compressor
18
Digital display controller (Inside switchbox)
4
Expansion valve + sight glass
19
Field wiring intake
5
Discharge valve (Optional)
20
Main isolator switch
6
Suction stopvalve (Optional)
21
Transport beam
7
Liquid stopvalve (Optional)
22
Flowswitch
8
Chilled water IN (Victaulic coupling)
23
Fan
9
Chilled water OUT (Victaulic coupling)
24
Safety valve
10
Water drain evaporator
25
High pressure sensor
11
Air purge
26
Low pressure sensor
12
Leaving water temperature sensor
27
High pressure switch
13
Entering water temperature sensor
28
Oil sight glass
14
Ambient temperature sensor
29
Water filter
15
Drier + charge valve
30
Frame
3
4
5
Part 1 – System Outline
1–35
General Outline
11
1.26
ESIE06-05
Outlook Drawing: EWAQ080-100DAYN(P-B)
The illustration below shows the outlook, the dimensions and the installation and service space of the
unit (mm).
EWAQ080-100DAYN
(P-B)
23
1200
3
1090
1200
1000
1120
4
1000
2000
AIR
AIR
AIR
3000
AIR
17
18
5
16
22
2311
20
29
1
31
34
27
2 x hole for
fixation Ø20
25
4
7
15
49
26
120
6
900
19
33
3
2 x hole for
fixation Ø20
1922
ONLY FOR UNIT WITHOUT OPBT
11
33
AIR
AIR
AIR
29
14
38
31
2
ONLY FOR UNIT WITHOUT OPBT
11
5
32
32
33
8
673
35
673
383
37
36
21
28
24
1388
2566
1–36
30
36
407
38
13
217
AIR
38
9
10
12
1000
1000
Required space around
the unit for service and air
intake
Center of gravity
Part 1 – System Outline
ESIE06-05
Components
General Outline
1
The table below lists the components.
No.
Component
No.
Component
1
Evaporator
20
Main isolator switch
2
Condensor
21
Transport beam
3
Compressor
22
Flowswitch
4
Expansion valve + sight glass
23
Fan
5
Discharge stopvalve (Optional)
24
Safety valve
6
Suction stopvalve (Optional)
25
High pressure sensor
7
Liquid stopvalve (Optional)
26
Low pressure sensor
8
Chilled water IN (Victaulic coupling)
27
High pressure switch
9
Chilled water OUT (Victaulic coupling)
28
Oil sight glass
10
Water drain evaporator
29
Pump (optional)
11
Air purge
30
Buffer tank (optional)
12
Leaving water temperature sensor
31
Expansion vessel (optional)
13
Entering water temperature sensor
32
Water filter
14
Ambient temperature sensor
33
Water stopvalve (optional)
15
Drier + charge valve
34
Frame
16
Power supply intake
35
Buffer tank drain valve (optional)
17
Switchbox
36
Regulating valve (optional)
18
Digital display controller (Inside switchbox)
37
Water safety valve (optional)
19
Field wiring intake
38
Pressure gauge (optional)
Part 1 – System Outline
3
4
5
1–37
General Outline
11
1.27
ESIE06-05
Outlook Drawing: EWAQ130-150DAYN(N)
The illustration below shows the outlook, the dimensions and the installation and service space of the
unit (mm).
EWAQ130-150DAYN
(N)
1000
1200
23
1200
1000
3
2000
4
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
1200
1000
17
20
18
22
16
5
19
2311
5
3000
14
6
24
26
29
10
1
30
120
2 x hole for
fixation ÿ 20
3
15
49
AIR
925
31
2 x hole for
fixation ÿ 20
32
1922
AIR
AIR
AIR
2
11
4
13
673
8
217
12
7
28
25
27
1388
9
21
407
1000
Required space around
the unit for service and air
intake
Center of gravity
2631
1–38
Part 1 – System Outline
ESIE06-05
Components
General Outline
1
The table below lists the components.
No.
Component
No.
Component
1
Evaporator
16
Power supply intake
2
Condensor
17
Switchbox
3
Compressor
18
Digital display controller (Inside switchbox)
4
Expansion valve + sight glass
19
Field wiring intake
5
Discharge stopvalve (Optional)
20
Main isolator switch
6
Suction stopvalve (Optional)
21
Transport beam
7
Liquid stopvalve (Optional)
22
Flowswitch
8
Chilled water IN (Victaulic coupling)
23
Fan
9
Chilled water OUT (Victalic coupling)
24
Safety valve
10
Water drain evaporator
25
High pressure sensor
11
Air purge
26
Low pressure sensor
12
Leaving water temperature sensor
27
High pressure switch
13
Entering water temperature sensor
28
Oil sight glass
14
Ambient temperature sensor
29
Water filter
15
Drier + charge valve
30
Frame
3
4
5
Part 1 – System Outline
1–39
General Outline
11
1.28
ESIE06-05
Outlook Drawing: EWAQ130-150DAYN(P-B)
The illustration below shows the outlook, the dimensions and the installation and service space of the
unit (mm).
EWAQ130-150DAYN
(P-B)
1000
1200
1000
23
1200
3
1200
1000
2000
AIR
AIR
AIR
3000
4
AIR
17
20
18
14
5
19
6
2311
16
5
875
4
36
26
24
30
35
1
31
2 x hole for
fixation ÿ 20
3
15
AIR
32
33
11
2 x hole for
fixation ÿ 20
36
1922
49
AIR
ONLY FOR UNIT WITHOUT OPBT
120
33
AIR
AIR
40
35
ONLY FOR UNIT WITHOUT OPBT
2
40
29
22
25
27
1388
34
21
407
29
38
40
10
1000
673
9
412
12
39
28
217
8
37
7
673
13
11
38
1000
Required space around
the unit for service and air
intake
Center of gravity
2631
1–40
Part 1 – System Outline
ESIE06-05
Components
General Outline
1
The table below lists the components.
No.
Component
No.
Component
1
Evaporator
20
Main isolator switch
2
Condensor
21
Transport beam
3
Compressor
22
Flowswitch
4
Expansion valve + sight glass
23
Fan
5
Discharge stopvalve (Optional)
24
Safety valve
6
Suction stopvalve (Optional)
25
High pressure sensor
7
Liquid stopvalve (Optional)
26
Low pressure sensor
8
Chilled water IN (Victaulic coupling)
27
High pressure switch
9
Chilled water OUT (Victaulic coupling)
28
Oil sight glass
10
Water drain evaporator
29
Pump (optional)
11
Air purge
30
Buffer tank (optional)
12
Leaving water temperature sensor
31
Expansion vessel (optional)
13
Entering water temperature sensor
32
Water filter
14
Ambient temperature sensor
33
Water stopvalve (optional)
15
Drier + charge valve
34
Frame
16
Power supply intake
35
Buffer tank drain valve (optional)
17
Switchbox
36
Regulating valve (optional)
18
Digital display controller (Inside switchbox)
37
Water safety valve (optional)
19
Field wiring intake
38
Pressure gauge (optional)
Part 1 – System Outline
3
4
5
1–41
General Outline
11
1.29
ESIE06-05
Outlook Drawing: EWAQ180-210DAYN(N)
The illustration below shows the outlook, the dimensions and the installation and service space of the
unit (mm).
EWAQ180-210DAYN
(N)
1200
1000
1000
23
1200
3
4
2000
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
1500
AIR
20
3000
17
18
16
14
19
5
22
25
26
2311
5
930
27
29
10
120
24
30
2 x hole for
fixation Ø20
3
7
49
AIR
AIR
AIR
1000
4
15
4
2 x hole for
fixation Ø20
7
1922
AIR
AIR
2
11
13
8
6
1
217
612
12
9
1000
21
28
1838
407
Required space around
the unit for service and air
intake
Center of gravity
3081
1–42
Part 1 – System Outline
ESIE06-05
Components
General Outline
1
The table below lists the components.
No.
Component
No.
Component
1
Evaporator
16
Power supply intake
2
Condensor
17
Switchbox
3
Compressor
18
Digital display controller (Inside switchbox)
4
Expansion valve + sight glass
19
Field wiring intake
5
Discharge stopvalve (Optional)
20
Main isolator switch
6
Suction stopvalve (Optional)
21
Transport beam
7
Liquid stopvalve (Optional)
22
Flowswitch
8
Chilled water IN (Victaulic coupling)
23
Fan
9
Chilled water OUT (Victaulic coupling)
24
Safety valve
10
Water drain evaporator
25
High pressure sensor
11
Air purge
26
Low pressure sensor
12
Leaving water temperature sensor
27
High pressure switch
13
Entering water temperature sensor
28
Oil sight glass
14
Ambient temperature sensor
29
Water filter
15
Drier + charge valve
30
Frame
3
4
5
Part 1 – System Outline
1–43
General Outline
11
1.30
ESIE06-05
Outlook Drawing: EWAQ180-210DAYN(P-B)
The illustration below shows the outlook, the dimensions and the installation and service space of the
unit (mm).
EWAQ180-210DAYN
(P-B)
1000
1200
1000
1200
3
1000
1500
4
AIR
AIR
23
AIR
AIR
3000
2000
AIR
17
20
18
2311
14
5
16
6
19
27
1
ONLY FOR UNIT WITHOUT OPBT
25
29
880
5
26
33
34
31
10
28
3
120
26
2 x hole for
fixation Ø20
24
7
45
4
15
4
7
2 x hole for
fixation Ø20
29
38
1920
31
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
ONLY FOR UNIT WITHOUT OPBT
11
32
38
2
217
13
11
8
32
27
673
22
30
36
412
35
37
21
3
24
33
1838
407
1000
38
9
1000
12
673
25
36
Required space around
the unit for service and air
intake
Center of gravity
3081
1–44
Part 1 – System Outline
ESIE06-05
Components
General Outline
1
The table below lists the components.
No.
Component
No.
Component
1
Evaporator
20
Main isolator switch
2
Condensor
21
Transport beam
3
Compressor
22
Flowswitch
4
Expansion valve + sight glass
23
Fan
5
Discharge stopvalve (Optional)
24
Safety valve
6
Suction stopvalve (Optional)
25
High pressure sensor
7
Liquid stopvalve (Optional)
26
Low pressure sensor
8
Chilled water IN (Victaulic coupling)
27
High pressure switch
9
Chilled water OUT (Victaulic coupling)
28
Oil sight glass
10
Water drain evaporator
29
Pump (optional)
11
Air purge
30
Buffer tank (optional)
12
Leaving water temperature sensor
31
Expansion vessel (optional)
13
Entering water temperature sensor
32
Water filter
14
Ambient temperature sensor
33
Water stopvalve (optional)
15
Drier + charge valve
34
Frame
16
Power supply intake
35
Buffer tank drain valve (optional)
17
Switchbox
36
Regulating valve (optional)
18
Digital display controller (Inside switchbox)
37
Water safety valve (optional)
19
Field wiring intake
38
Pressure gauge (optional)
Part 1 – System Outline
3
4
5
1–45
General Outline
11
1.31
ESIE06-05
Outlook Drawing: EWAQ240-260DAYN(N)
The illustration below shows the outlook, the dimensions and the installation and service space of the
unit (mm).
EWAQ240-260DAYN
(N)
1000
1200
1000
1200
3
2500
1000
23
950
3000
4
5
2000
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
17
18
14
16
6
2311
20
25
19
29
2 x hole for
fixation ÿ 20
30
1
4
5
3
24
49
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
15
2 x hole for
fixation ÿ 20
120
26
12
1922
AI R
AIR
2
27
22
13
11
21
28
1388
814
4852
1–46
1388
406
7
10
9
583
212
8
1000
Required space around the
unit for service and air intake
Center of gravity
Part 1 – System Outline
ESIE06-05
Components
General Outline
1
The table below lists the components.
No.
Component
No.
Component
1
Evaporator
16
Power supply intake
2
Condensor
17
Switchbox
3
Compressor
18
Digital display controller (Inside switchbox)
4
Expansion valve + sight glass
19
Field wiring intake
5
Discharge stopvalve (Optional)
20
Main isolator switch
6
Suction stopvalve (Optional)
21
Transport beam
7
Liquid stopvalve (Optional)
22
Flowswitch
8
Chilled water IN (Victaulic coupling)
23
Fan
9
Chilled water OUT (Victaulic coupling)
24
Safety valve
10
Water drain evaporator
25
High pressure sensor
11
Air purge
26
Low pressure sensor
12
Leaving water temperature sensor
27
High pressure switch
13
Entering water temperature sensor
28
Oil sight glass
14
Ambient sensor
29
Water filter
15
Drier + charge valve
30
Frame
3
4
5
Part 1 – System Outline
1–47
General Outline
11
1.32
ESIE06-05
Outlook Drawing: EWAQ240-260DAYN(P-B)
The illustration below shows the outlook, the dimensions and the installation and service space of the
unit (mm).
EWAQ240-260DAYN
(P-B)
1000
1200
1000
ONLY FOR UNIT WITHOUT OPBT
22
3
33
1200
34
36
23
38
2500
1000
ONLY FOR UNIT WITHOUT OPBT
11
29
38
212
670
3000
4
1000
5
900
36
2000
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
17
18
14
16
25
34
19
5
6
26
33
1
4
7
3
24
15
49
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
120
2 x hole for
fixation Ø20
30
2311
20
27
2 x hole for
fixation Ø20
1922
AIR
AIR
2
11
8
37
38
433
35
32
21
28
1388
814
4852
1–48
1388
406
29
36
12
9
10
1000
670
13
22
Required space around the unit for
service and air intake
Center of gravity
Part 1 – System Outline
ESIE06-05
Components
General Outline
1
The table below lists the components.
No.
Component
No.
Component
1
Evaporator
20
Main isolator switch
2
Condensor
21
Transport beam
3
Compressor
22
Flowswitch
4
Expansion valve + sight glass
23
Fan
5
Discharge stopvalve (Optional)
24
Safety valve
6
Suction stopvalve (Optional)
25
High pressure sensor
7
Liquid stopvalve (Optional)
26
Low pressure sensor
8
Chilled water IN (Victaulic coupling)
27
High pressure switch
9
Chilled water OUT (Victaulic coupling)
28
Oil sight glass
10
Water drain evaporator
29
Water filter
11
Air purge
30
Frame
12
Leaving water temperature sensor
31
Pump (optional)
13
Entering water temperature sensor
32
Buffer tank (optional)
14
Ambient sensor
33
Expansion vessel (optional)
15
Drier + charge valve
34
Water stopvalve (optional)
16
Power supply intake
35
Buffertank drain valve (optional)
17
Switchbox
36
Regulating valve (optional)
18
Digital display controller (Inside switchbox)
37
Water safety valve (optional)
19
Field wiring intake
38
Pressure gauge (optional)
Part 1 – System Outline
3
4
5
1–49
General Outline
11
1.33
ESIE06-05
Outlook Drawing: EWYQ080-100DAYN(N)
The illustration below shows the outlook, the dimensions and the installation and service space of the
unit (mm).
EWYQ080-100DAYN
(N)
1100
1200
1000
23
1200
3
1200
1000
4
2000
AIR
AIR
AIR
3000
AIR
5
17
18
5
16
11
970
22
2311
20
30
1
6
26
2 x hole for
fixation ÿ 20
7
4
15
AIR
31
1922
49
AIR
32
AIR
3
120
19
29
2 x hole for
fixation ÿ 20
AIR
14
2
13
217
673
8
21
28
24
27
1388
2566
1–50
25
12
407
9
10
1000
Required space around the
unit for service and air
intake
Center of gravity
Part 1 – System Outline
ESIE06-05
Components
General Outline
1
The table below lists the components.
No.
Component
No.
Component
1
Evaporator
17
Switchbox
2
Condensor
18
Digital display controller (Inside switchbox)
3
Compressor
19
Field wiring intake
4
Expansion valve + sight glass
20
Main isolator switch
5
Discharge stopvalve (Optional)
21
Transport beam
6
Suction stopvalve (Optional)
22
Flowswitch
7
Liquid stopvalve (Optional)
23
Fan
8
Chilled water IN (Victaulic coupling)
24
Safety valve
9
Chilled water OUT (Victaulic coupling)
25
High pressure sensor
10
Water drain evaporator
26
Low pressure sensor
11
Air purge
27
High pressure switch
12
Leaving water temperature sensor
28
Oil sight glass
13
Entering water temperature sensor
29
Water filter
14
Ambient temperature sensor
30
Frame
15
Drier + charge valve
31
4-way valve
16
Power supply intake
32
Liquid receiver
3
4
5
Part 1 – System Outline
1–51
General Outline
11
1.34
ESIE06-05
Outlook Drawing: EWYQ080-100DAYN(P-B)
The illustration below shows the outlook, the dimensions and the installation and service space of the
unit (mm).
EWYQ080-100DAYN
(P-B)
1090
1200
1000
1200
3
23
1120
1000
2000
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
3000
4
17
18
5
20
16
11
19
900
22
2311
5
36
30
35
1
6
26
2 x hole for
fixation ÿ 20
7
4
15
49
AIR
32
31
120
33
3
1922
AIR
AIR
ONLY FOR UNIT WITHOUT OPBT
36
2 x hole for
fixation ÿ 20
11
AIR
14
40
2
ONLY FOR UNIT WITHOUT OPBT
11
12
38
8
13
33
35
8
217
39
673
13
383
37
673
29
36
21
28
24
27
1388
2566
1–52
25
34
407
38
40
9
10
12
1000
9
29
40
1000
Required space around
the unit for service and air
intake
Center of gravity
Part 1 – System Outline
ESIE06-05
Components
General Outline
1
The table below lists the components.
No.
Component
No.
Component
1
Evaporator
21
Transport beam
2
Condensor
22
Flowswitch
3
Compressor
23
Fan
4
Expansion valve + sight glass
24
Safety valve
5
Discharge stopvalve (Optional)
25
High pressure sensor
6
Suction stopvalve (Optional)
26
Low pressure sensor
7
Liquid stopvalve (Optional)
27
High pressure switch
8
Chilled water IN (Victaulic coupling)
28
Oil sight glass
9
Chilled water OUT (Victaulic coupling)
29
Water filter
10
Water drain evaporator
30
Frame
11
Air purge
31
4-way frame
12
Leaving water temperature sensor
32
Liquid receiver
13
Entering water temperature sensor
33
Pump (Optional)
14
Ambient temperature sensor
34
Buffer tank (Optional)
15
Drier + charge valve
35
Expansion vessel (Optional)
16
Power supply intake
36
Water stopvalve (Optional)
17
Switchbox
37
Buffer tank drain valve (Optional)
18
Digital display controller (Inside switchbox)
38
Regulating valve (Optional)
19
Field wiring intake
39
Water safety valve (Optional)
20
Main isolator switch
40
Pressure gauge (Optional)
Part 1 – System Outline
3
4
5
1–53
General Outline
11
1.35
ESIE06-05
Outlook Drawing: EWYQ130-150DAYN(N)
The illustration below shows the outlook, the dimensions and the installation and service space of the
unit (mm).
EWYQ130-150DAYN
(N)
1000
1200
23
1200
1000
3
2000
4
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
1200
1000
17
20
18
22
16
5
19
2311
5
3000
14
6
24
26
29
10
1
30
120
2 x hole for
fixation ÿ 20
3
15
49
AIR
925
31
2 x hole for
fixation ÿ 20
32
1922
AIR
AIR
AIR
2
11
4
13
673
8
217
12
7
28
25
27
1388
9
21
407
1000
Required space around
the unit for service and air
intake
Center of gravity
2631
1–54
Part 1 – System Outline
ESIE06-05
Components
General Outline
1
The table below lists the components.
No.
Component
No.
Component
1
Evaporator
17
Switchbox
2
Condensor
18
Digital display controller (Inside switchbox)
3
Compressor
19
Field wiring intake
4
Expansion valve + sight glass
20
Main isolator switch
5
Discharge stopvalve (Optional)
21
Transport beam
6
Suction stopvalve (Optional)
22
Flowswitch
7
Liquid stopvalve (Optional)
23
Fan
8
Chilled water IN (Victaulic coupling)
24
Safety valve
9
Chilled water OUT (Victaulic coupling)
25
High pressure sensor
10
Water drain evaporator
26
Low pressure sensor
11
Air purge
27
High pressure switch
12
Leaving water temperature sensor
28
Oil sight glass
13
Entering water temperature sensor
29
Water filter
14
Ambient temperature sensor
30
Frame
15
Drier + charge valve
31
4-way valve
16
Power supply intake
32
Liquid receiver
3
4
5
Part 1 – System Outline
1–55
General Outline
11
1.36
ESIE06-05
Outlook Drawing: EWYQ130-150DAYN(P-B)
The illustration below shows the outlook, the dimensions and the installation and service space of the
unit (mm).
EWYQ130-150DAYN
(P-B)
1000
1200
1000
23
1200
3
1200
1000
2000
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
3000
4
17
20
18
14
5
19
6
2311
16
5
875
4
36
26
24
30
35
1
31
2 x hole for
fixation ÿ 20
3
15
AIR
32
33
11
2 x hole for
fixation ÿ 20
36
1922
49
AIR
ONLY FOR UNIT WITHOUT OPBT
120
33
AIR
AIR
40
35
ONLY FOR UNIT WITHOUT OPBT
2
40
29
22
25
27
1388
34
21
407
29
38
40
10
1000
673
9
412
12
39
28
217
8
37
7
673
13
11
38
1000
Required space around
the unit for service and air
intake
Center of gravity
2631
1–56
Part 1 – System Outline
ESIE06-05
Components
General Outline
1
The table below lists the components.
No.
Component
No.
Component
1
Evaporator
21
Transport beam
2
Condensor
22
Flowswitch
3
Compressor
23
Fan
4
Expansion valve + sight glass
24
Safety valve
5
Discharge stopvalve (Optional)
25
High pressure sensor
6
Suction stopvalve (Optional)
26
Low pressure sensor
7
Liquid stopvalve (Optional)
27
High pressure switch
8
Chilled water IN (Victaulic coupling)
28
Oil sight glass
9
Chilled water OUT (Victaulic coupling)
29
Water filter
10
Water drain evaporator
30
Frame
11
Air purge
31
4-way frame
12
Leaving water temperature sensor
32
Liquid receiver
13
Entering water temperature sensor
33
Pump (Optional)
14
Ambient temperature sensor
34
Buffer tank (Optional)
15
Drier + charge valve
35
Expansion vessel (Optional)
16
Power supply intake
36
Water stopvalve (Optional)
17
Switchbox
37
Buffer tank drain valve (Optional)
18
Digital display controller (Inside switchbox)
38
Regulating valve (Optional)
19
Field wiring intake
39
Water safety valve (Optional)
20
Main isolator switch
40
Pressure gauge (Optional)
Part 1 – System Outline
3
4
5
1–57
General Outline
11
1.37
ESIE06-05
Outlook Drawing: EWYQ180-210DAYN(N)
The illustration below shows the outlook, the dimensions and the installation and service space of the
unit (mm).
EWYQ180-210DAYN
(N)
1000
1200
1000
23
1200
3
1500
1000
4
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
3000
2000
AIR
17
5
18
20
16
5
19
930
22
2311
14
6
26
24
10
1
30
120
31
2 x hole for
fixation Ø20
3
15
49
AIR
AIR
AIR
32
2 x hole for
fixation Ø20
1922
AIR
AIR
2
11
4
8
7
28
25
27
1838
21
217
12
9
407
612
13
29
1000
Required space around
the unit for service and air
intake
Center of gravity
3081
1–58
Part 1 – System Outline
ESIE06-05
Components
General Outline
1
The table below lists the components.
No.
Component
No.
Component
1
Evaporator
17
Switchbox
2
Condensor
18
Digital display controller (Inside switchbox)
3
Compressor
19
Field wiring intake
4
Expansion valve + sight glass
20
Main isolator switch
5
Discharge stopvalve (Optional)
21
Transport beam
6
Suction stopvalve (Optional)
22
Flowswitch
7
Liquid stopvalve (Optional)
23
Fan
8
Chilled water IN (Victaulic coupling)
24
Safety valve
9
Chilled water OUT (Victaulic coupling)
25
High pressure sensor
10
Water drain evaporator
26
Low pressure sensor
11
Air purge
27
High pressure switch
12
Leaving water temperature sensor
28
Oil sight glass
13
Entering water temperature sensor
29
Water filter
14
Ambient temperature sensor
30
Frame
15
Drier + charge valve
31
4-way valve
16
Power supply intake
32
Liquid receiver
3
4
5
Part 1 – System Outline
1–59
General Outline
11
1.38
ESIE06-05
Outlook Drawing: EWYQ180-210DAYN(P-B)
The illustration below shows the outlook, the dimensions and the installation and service space of the
unit (mm).
EWYQ180-210DAYN
(P-B)
1200
1000
1000
23
1200
3
4
2000
AIR
AIR
AIR
1500
AIR
1000
AIR
18
20
14
16
22
19
5
4
6
36
26
24
31
30
35
1
120
2 x hole for
fixation ÿ 20
880
33
2311
5
3000
17
49
2 x hole for
fixation ÿ 20
32
15
3
1922
ONLY FOR UNIT WITHOUT OPBT
11
AI R
AI R
AI R
673
AI R
40
217
AI R
29
38
2
1000
ONLY FOR UNIT WITHOUT OPBT
13
36
8
11
33
9
39
7
28
25
27
1838
3081
1–60
34
40
29
21
407
673
37
412
12
38
40
10
1000
35
Required space around
the unit for service and air
intake
Center of gravity
Part 1 – System Outline
ESIE06-05
Components
General Outline
1
The table below lists the components.
No.
Component
No.
Component
1
Evaporator
21
Transport beam
2
Condensor
22
Flowswitch
3
Compressor
23
Fan
4
Expansion valve + sight glass
24
Safety valve
5
Discharge stopvalve (Optional)
25
High pressure sensor
6
Suction stopvalve (Optional)
26
Low pressure sensor
7
Liquid stopvalve (Optional)
27
High pressure switch
8
Chilled water IN (Victaulic coupling)
28
Oil sight glass
9
Chilled water OUT (Victaulic coupling)
29
Water filter
10
Water drain evaporator
30
Frame
11
Air purge
31
4-way frame
12
Leaving water temperature sensor
32
Liquid receiver
13
Entering water temperature sensor
33
Pump (Optional)
14
Ambient temperature sensor
34
Buffer tank (Optional)
15
Drier + charge valve
35
Expansion vessel (Optional)
16
Power supply intake
36
Water stopvalve (Optional)
17
Switchbox
37
Buffer tank drain valve (Optional)
18
Digital display controller (Inside switchbox)
38
Regulating valve (Optional)
19
Field wiring intake
39
Water safety valve (Optional)
20
Main isolator switch
40
Pressure gauge (Optional)
Part 1 – System Outline
3
4
5
1–61
General Outline
11
1.39
ESIE06-05
Outlook Drawing: EWYQ230-250DAYN(N)
The illustration below shows the outlook, the dimensions and the installation and service space of the
unit (mm).
EWYQ230-250DAYN
(N)
1000
1200
1000
1200
3
23
2500
3000
4
1000
5
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
950
2000
AIR
18
17
20
16
5
24
30
29
1
4
AIR
7
6
AIR
28
AIR
21
49
AIR
26
120
19
2311
14
31
1922
AIR
AIR
2
22
13
11
8
32
15
212
583
12
3
27
1388
25
814
1388
406
10
9
1000
4852
1–62
Required space around the
unit for service and air intake
Center of gravity
Part 1 – System Outline
ESIE06-05
Components
General Outline
1
The table below lists the components.
No.
Component
No.
Component
1
Evaporator
17
Switchbox
2
Condensor
18
Digital display controller (Inside switchbox)
3
Compressor
19
Field wiring intake
4
Expansion valve + sight glass
20
Main isolator switch
5
Discharge stopvalve (Optional)
21
Transport beam
6
Suction stopvalve (Optional)
22
Flowswitch
7
Liquid stopvalve (Optional)
23
Fan
8
Chilled water IN (Victaulic coupling)
24
Safety valve
9
Chilled water OUT (Victaulic coupling)
25
High pressure sensor
10
Water drain evaporator
26
Low pressure sensor
11
Air purge
27
High pressure switch
12
Leaving water temperature sensor
28
Oil sight glass
13
Entering water temperature sensor
29
Water filter
14
Ambient sensor
30
Frame
15
Drier + charge valve
31
4-way valve
16
Power supply intake
32
Liquid receiver
3
4
5
Part 1 – System Outline
1–63
General Outline
11
1.40
ESIE06-05
Outlook Drawing: EWYQ230-250DAYN(P-B)
The illustration below shows the outlook, the dimensions and the installation and service space of the
unit (mm).
EWYQ230-250DAYN
(P-B)
1000
ONLY FOR UNIT WITHOUT OPBT
29
1200
40
212
670
1000
35
36
1000
38
1200
3
23
ONLY FOR UNIT WITHOUT OPBT
33
2500
1000
35
22
4
3000
38
40
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
17
18
14
20
5
16
19
2311
5
900
2000
33
35
1
32
15
7
6
28
24
21
26
49
AIR
AIR
AIR
AIR
120
2 x hole for
fixation Ø20
30
31
2 x hole for
fixation Ø20
1922
AIR
AIR
2
22
13
11
8
29
36
37
3
27
25
1388
814
4
39
1388
406
38
9
10
12
40
4852
1000
1–64
670
433
34
Required space around the
unit for service and air
intake
Center of gravity
Part 1 – System Outline
ESIE06-05
Components
General Outline
1
The table below lists the components.
No.
Component
No.
Component
1
Evaporator
21
Transport beam
2
Condensor
22
Flowswitch
3
Compressor
23
Fan
4
Expansion valve + sight glass
24
Safety valve
5
Discharge stopvalve (Optional)
25
High pressure sensor
6
Suction stopvalve (Optional)
26
Low pressure sensor
7
Liquid stopvalve (Optional)
27
High pressure switch
8
Chilled water IN (Victaulic coupling)
28
Oil sight glass
9
Chilled water OUT (Victaulic coupling)
29
Water filter
10
Water drain evaporator
30
Frame
11
Air purge
31
4-way valve
12
Leaving water temperature sensor
32
Liquid receiver
13
Entering water temperature sensor
33
Pump (Optional)
14
Ambient temperature sensor
34
Buffer tank (Optional)
15
Drier + charge valve
35
Expansion vessel (Optional)
16
Power supply intake
36
Water stopvalve (Optional)
17
Switchbox
37
Buffer tank drain valve (Optional)
18
Digital display controller (Inside switchbox)
38
Regulating valve (Optional)
19
Field wiring intake
39
Water safety valve (Optional)
20
Main isolator switch
40
Pressure gauge (Optional)
Part 1 – System Outline
3
4
5
1–65
General Outline
ESIE06-05
11
3
4
5
1–66
Part 1 – System Outline
ESIE06-05
Piping Layout
Part 1
2
Piping Layout
2.1
What Is in This Chapter?
Introduction
Overview
Part 1 – System Outline
This chapter describes the internal refrigeration circuit and the water piping, depending on the unit
model (N-P-B).
1
3
This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic
See page
2.2–Functional Diagram Refrigeration Circuit: EWAQ080-100DAYN(N-P-B)
1–68
2.3–Functional Diagram Refrigeration Circuit: EWAQ130-210DAYN(N-P-B)
1–70
2.4–Functional Diagram Refrigeration Circuit: EWAQ240-260DAYN(N-P-B)
1–72
2.5–Components Refrigeration Side : EWAQ080-260DAYN
1–74
2.6–Functional Diagram Refrigeration Circuit: EWYQ080-100DAYN(N-P-B)
1–76
2.7–Functional Diagram Refrigeration Circuit: EWYQ130-210DAYN(N-P-B)
1–78
2.8–Functional Diagram Refrigeration Circuit: EWYQ230-250DAYN(N-P-B)
1–80
2.9–Components refrigeration side: EWYQ080-250DAYN
1–82
2.10–Functional Diagram Water Piping: EWAQ-EWYQ-DAYN(N-P-B)
1–84
2.11–Components Water Side : EWAQ- EWYQ- DAYN(N-P-B)
1–85
4
5
1–67
Piping Layout
11
2.2
ESIE06-05
Functional Diagram Refrigeration Circuit: EWAQ080-100DAYN(N-P-B)
Functional diagram
The illustration below shows the functional diagram of the refrigeration circuit of
EWAQ080-100DAYN(N-P-B). It is also applicable for glycol applications.
13
13
AIR HEAT
EXCHANGER
15
AIR HEAT
EXCHANGER
14
M13F
DISTRIBUTOR
3
M15F
R1T
t>
SUBCOOL
PASS
SUBCOOL
PASS
AIR HEAT
EXCHANGER
AIR HEAT
EXCHANGER
M14F
M16F
12
DISTRIBUTOR
B1PH
16
DISTRIBUTOR
6
OP12
4
15
DISTRIBUTOR
SUBCOOL
PASS
p>
p>
SUBCOOL
PASS
S1PH 18
12
1 OR 2
R15T
M11C
5
OP12
4
4
NON
RETURN
R25T
M12C
9
12
NON
RETURN
FILTER
VALVE
8
OIL EQ.
10
10
R14T
12
12
17
B1PL
p<
11
Y11E
5
OP12
12
12
R17T
PHE
R2T
t>
3
WATER IN
2
1
R3T
t>
WATER OUT
1. STD
SAFETY VALVE
7
2. DUAL PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE (OP03)
SAFETY VALVES
7
1–68
Part 1 – System Outline
ESIE06-05
Piping Layout
1
.
M11-12C
Compressor motors
B1PH
High pressure sensor
M13-16F
Fan motors
B1PL
Low pressure sensor
R14T
Suction temperature sensor
Y11E
Electronic expansion valve cooling
R17T
Refrigerant piping temperature sensor
R1T
Ambient temperature sensor
S1PH
High pressure switch
R2T
Evaporator inlet water temperature sensor
Discharge temperature switch
R3T
Evaporator outlet water temperature sensor
R15T, R25T
: Check valve
: Flange connection
: Flare connection
: Pinched pipe
: Screw connection
: Spinned pipe
3
4
5
Part 1 – System Outline
1–69
Piping Layout
11
2.3
ESIE06-05
Functional Diagram Refrigeration Circuit: EWAQ130-210DAYN(N-P-B)
Functional diagram
The illustration below shows the functional diagram of the refrigeration circuit of
EWAQ130-210DAYN(N-P-B). It is also applicable for glycol applications.
.
14
13
AIR HEAT
EXCHANGER
15
13
R1T
t>
AIR HEAT
EXCHANGER
M15F
ONLY 70/80HP
3
M13F
15
M25F
DISTRIBUTOR
DISTRIBUTOR
9
SUBCOOL
PASS
12
12
OP12
ONLY 70/80HP
9
SUBCOOL
PASS
OP12
8
AIR HEAT
EXCHANGER
FILTER
FILTER
M23F
AIR HEAT
EXCHANGER
8
M24F
M14F
Y21E 11
11 Y11E
SUBCOOL
PASS
12
4
DISTRIBUTOR
DISTRIBUTOR
12
12
6
OP12
6
16
B1PH
5
OP12
p>
5
OP12
p>
18
p>
S1PH
12
12
p>
12
S2PH 18
1 OR 2
12
4
12
B1PL
B2PH 16
R34T
1 OR 2
17
OP12
12
R14T
5
12
SUBCOOL
PASS
R15T M12C
M11C
p<
NON
RETURN
12
PHE
4
R25T
NON
RETURN
OIL EQ.
10
R37T
2
R17T
4
10
R35T
R3T
t>
1
WATER OUT
3
R2T
t>
WATER IN
M22C
4
R45T
12
M21C
p<
NON
RETURN
NON
RETURN
10
10
B2PL 17
OIL EQ.
1. STD
SAFETY VALVE
2. DUAL PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE (OP03)
SAFETY VALVES
1–70
Part 1 – System Outline
ESIE06-05
Piping Layout
1
M11-12C
Compressor motors circuit 1
R34T
Suction temperature sensor circuit 2
M13-15F
Fan motors circuit 1
R37T
Refrigerant piping temperature sensor circuit 2
R14T
Suction temperature sensor circuit 1
S2PH
High pressure switch circuit 2
R17T
Refrigerant piping temperature sensor circuit 1
R35T
Discharge temperature sensor circuit 2
S1PH
High pressure switch circuit 1
B2PH
High pressure sensor circuit 2
Discharge temperature sensor circuit 1
B2PL
Low pressure sensor circuit 2
B1PH
High pressure sensor circuit 1
Y21E
Electronic expansion valve cooling circuit 2
B1PL
Low pressure sensor circuit 1
R1T
Ambient temperature sensor
Y11E
Electronic expansion valve cooling circuit 1
R2T
Evaporator inlet water temperature sensor
M21-22C
Compressor motors circuit 2
R3T
Evaporator outlet water temperature sensor
M23-25F
Fan motors circuit 2
R15T, R25T
: Check valve
: Flange connection
: Flare connection
: Pinched pipe
: Screw connection
: Spinned pipe
3
4
5
Part 1 – System Outline
1–71
Piping Layout
11
2.4
ESIE06-05
Functional Diagram Refrigeration Circuit: EWAQ240-260DAYN(N-P-B)
Functional diagram
The illustration below shows the functional diagram of the refrigeration circuit of
EWAQ240-260DAYN(N-P-B). It is also applicable for glycol applications.
14
R1T
13
15
13
t>
AIR HEAT
EXCHANGER
AIR HEAT
EXCHANGER
M15F
3
SUBCOOL
PASS
12
SUBCOOL
PASS
12
AIR HEAT
EXCHANGER
AIR HEAT
EXCHANGER
M16F
M26F
DISTRIBUTOR
4
AIR HEAT
EXCHANGER
DISTRIBUTOR
SUBCOOL
PASS
SUBCOOL
PASS
9
12
12
AIR HEAT
EXCHANGER
9
OP12
OP12
M14F
M24F
DISTRIBUTOR
DISTRIBUTOR
8
FILTER
FILTER
8
SUBCOOL
PASS
SUBCOOL
PASS
12
5
AIR HEAT
EXCHANGER
11 Y11E
M23F
DISTRIBUTOR
DISTRIBUTOR
SUBCOOL
PASS
SUBCOOL
PASS
6
OP12
6 OP12
5
B1PH
16
p>
OP12
OP12
5
18
p>
S1PH
12
12
12
p>
B2PH 16
p>
S2PH 18
12
R14T
1 OR 2
R17T
4
R15T
NON
RETURN
12
4
R25T
M12C
NON
RETURN
OIL EQ.
10
R37T
2
PHE
4
M11C
p<
10
R34T
1 OR 2
12
B1PL
12
AIR HEAT
EXCHANGER
Y21E 11
M13F
17
15
M25F
DISTRIBUTOR
DISTRIBUTOR
R35T
R3T
t>
1
WATER OUT
3
R2T
t>
WATER IN
4
R45T
M21C
NON
RETURN
M22C
p<
B2PL 17
NON
RETURN
OIL EQ.
10
10
1. STD
SAFETY VALVE
2. DUAL PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE (OP03)
SAFETY VALVES
1–72
Part 1 – System Outline
ESIE06-05
Symbols
Piping Layout
1
The table below describes the symbols.
.
M11-12C
Compressor motors circuit 1
R34T
Suction temperature sensor circuit 2
M13-16F
Fan motors circuit 1
R37T
Refrigerant piping temperature sensor circuit 2
R14T
Suction temperature sensor circuit 1
S2PH
High pressure switch circuit 2
R17T
Refrigerant piping temperature sensor circuit 1
R35T
Discharge temperature sensor circuit 2
S1PH
High pressure switch circuit 1
B2PH
High pressure sensor circuit 2
Discharge temperature sensor circuit 1
B2PL
Low pressure sensor circuit 2
B1PH
High pressure sensor circuit 1
Y21E
Electronic expansion valve cooling circuit 2
B1PL
Low pressure sensor circuit 1
R1T
Ambient temperature sensor
Y11E
Electronic expansion valve cooling circuit 1
R2T
Evaporator inlet water temperature sensor
M21-22C
Compressor motors circuit 2
R3T
Evaporator outlet water temperature sensor
M23-26F
Fan motors circuit 2
R15T, R25T
3
4
: Check valve
: Flange connection
: Flare connection
: Pinched pipe
: Screw connection
: Spinned pipe
Part 1 – System Outline
5
1–73
Piping Layout
11
2.5
Components Refrigeration Side : EWAQ080-260DAYN
Components
refrigeration side
EWAQ080-260
DAYN
3
4
5
1–74
ESIE06-05
The table below describes the main components of the refrigeration circuit.
1
Water outlet
The water outlet piping connection is delivered with a victaulic
joint but without a counter pipe.
2
Evaporator
The water-heat exchanger is of the brazed plate-heat
exchanger type.
3
Water inlet
The water inlet piping connection is delivered with a victaulic
joint but without a counter pipe.
4
Compressor
A hermetically sealed scroll compressor
5
Suction stop valve
(optional)
This suction stop valve can be used in combination with the
discharge stop valve to separate the compressors from the
system.
6
Discharge stop valve
(optional)
This discharge stop valve is used during pump down and
service work in combination with the liquid stop valve or suction
stop valve if present (optional).
7
Refrigerant circuit
safety valve
The safety valve prevents a too high pressure. Activation above
45 bar.
8
Drier/ charge valve
The replaceable filter drier will keep the refrigerant system dry. It
is installed behind the condenser and removes small particles
from the refrigerant to prevent damage to the compressor and
the expansion valve. It is equipped with a 3/8” charge valve.
9
Liquid stop valve
(optional)
The liquid stop valve is used as a shut-off valve in case of a
pump down.
10
Oil sight glass
An oil sight glass is placed in the compressor to check the oil
level of the compressor during operation.
11
Electronic expansion
valve + sight glass with
moisture indication
The electronic expansion valve is set up to control the
superheat between minimum and maximum setpoint. A sight
glass with moisture indication is integrated in the expansion
valve body and is used to check the refrigerant shortage and/or
moisture level in the system.
12
Check valve
Service port.
13
Condenser
The air-heat exchanger is of the cross fin coil type. Hi-X-tubes
and PE coated waffle louvre fins are used. The air is discharged
upwards.
14
Ambient temperature
sensor
The ambient temperature senor is used to measure the
temperature in order to perform some controls.
15
Fan
Direct driven single speed fan or inverter driver fan (only OPIF)
16
High pressure sensor
The high pressure transmitter is used to gain information in
order to perform some controls and also to act as safety.
17
Low pressure sensor
The low pressure transmitter is used to gain information in order
to perform some controls and also to act as safety.
Part 1 – System Outline
ESIE06-05
Piping Layout
18
High pressure switch
This switch acts as a circuit safety.
■
Activation at 40,5 bar
■
Automatic reset at 30,2 bar
1
3
4
5
Part 1 – System Outline
1–75
Piping Layout
11
2.6
ESIE06-05
Functional Diagram Refrigeration Circuit: EWYQ080-100DAYN(N-P-B)
Functional diagram
The illustration below shows the functional diagram of the refrigeration circuit of
EWYQ080-100DAYN(N-P-B). It is also applicable for glycol applications.
.
16
16
AIR HEAT
EXCHANGER
18
AIR HEAT
EXCHANGER
DISTRIBUTOR
M13F
M15F
14
14
17
18
DISTRIBUTOR
R1T
Y12E
R18T
SUBCOOL
PASS
3
Y22E
t>
R28T
7
AIR HEAT
EXCHANGER
SUBCOOL
PASS
7
t > R16T
R26T
t>
AIR HEAT
EXCHANGER
M14F
M16F
DISTRIBUTOR
4
DISTRIBUTOR
SUBCOOL
PASS
SUBCOOL
PASS
15
9
12 OP12
15
OP12
5
7
7
15
Liq
Receiver
5
6
19
B1PH
VALVE
11 FILTER
Y1R
p>
15
OP12 8
7
S1PH 21
Y11E
p>
15
15
R14T
14
1 OR 2
4
15
20
B1PL
M11C
p<
R17T
4
R15T M12C
NON
RETURN
2
R25T
NON
RETURN
PHE
R2T
t>
3
1
R3T
t>
OIL EQ.
13
13
WATER IN
WATER OUT
COOLING
HEATING
1. STD
SAFETY VALVE
10
2. DUAL PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE (OP03)
SAFETY VALVES
10
1–76
Part 1 – System Outline
ESIE06-05
Piping Layout
1
.
M11-12C
Compressor motors
B1PH
High pressure sensor
M13-16F
Fan motors
B1PL
Low pressure sensor
R14T
Suction temperature sensor
Y11E
Electronic expansion valve cooling
R17T
Refrigerant piping temperature sensor
Y12S
Liquid injection valve
R18T,
R28T
Heating suction piping temperature sensor
Y12E,
Y22E
Electronic expansion valve heating coil 1
R16T,
R26T
Coil temperature sensor
R1T
Ambient temperature sensor
S1PH
High pressure switch
R2T
Evaporator inlet water temperature sensor
Reverse valve
R3T
Evaporator outlet water temperature sensor
Y1R
R15T,
R25T
3
Discharge temperature sensor
: Check valve
: Flange connection
: Flare connection
: Pinched pipe
: Screw connection
: Spinned pipe
4
5
Part 1 – System Outline
1–77
Piping Layout
11
2.7
ESIE06-05
Functional Diagram Refrigeration Circuit: EWYQ130-210DAYN(N-P-B)
Functional diagram
The illustration below shows the functional diagram of the refrigeration circuit of
EWYQ130-210DAYN(N-P-B). It is also applicable for glycol applications.
16
18
16
17
R1T
t>
AIR HEAT
EXCHANGER
AIR HEAT
EXCHANGER
M15F
M25F
14
DISTRIBUTOR
14
R38T
R18T
Y12E
ONLY
EWYQ170-190DAYN*
SUBCOOL
PASS
M13F
3
15
Y22E
15
12
t > R16T
7
7
OP12
7
5
DISTRIBUTOR
14
FILTER
FILTER
6
15
9 OP12
Y1R
8
p>
15
OP12
8
15
5
20
B1PL
p<
R37T
4
R15T M12C
NON
RETURN
R3T
t>
1
WATER OUT
OIL EQ.
13
R35T
R25T
NON
RETURN
13
S2PH 21
R34T
4
M11C
B2PH 19
p>
1 OR 2
FILTER
PHE
p>
15
15
R17T
9
Y2R
OP12
2
4
OP12
6
1 OR 2
15
15
SUBCOOL
PASS
S1PH
R14T
M24F
11
15
21
p>
DISTRIBUTOR
Y21E
Y11E
B1PH
AIR HEAT
EXCHANGER
5
14
SUBCOOL
PASS
19
R36T t >
OP12
15
11
4
ONLY
EWYQ170-190DAYN*
M23F
12
7
Liq
Receiver
Liq
Receiver
15
M14F
SUBCOOL
PASS
7
7
AIR HEAT
EXCHANGER
15
18
DISTRIBUTOR
3
R2T
t>
WATER IN
4
M22C R45T
NON
RETURN
15
M21C
p<
B2PL 20
NON
RETURN
OIL EQ.
13
13
COOLING
HEATING
1. STD
SAFETY VALVE
10
2. DUAL PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE (OP03)
SAFETY VALVES
10
1–78
Part 1 – System Outline
ESIE06-05
Piping Layout
M11-12C
Compressor motors circuit 1
R34T
Suction temperature sensor circuit 2
M13-15F
Fan motors circuit 1
R36T
Coil temperature sensor circuit 2
R14T
Suction temperature sensor circuit 1
R37T
Refrigerant piping temperature sensor circuit
2
R16T
Coil temperature sensor circuit 1
R38T
Heating suction temp sensor circuit 2
R17T
Refrigerant piping temperature sensor circuit 1
S2PH
High pressure switch circuit 2
R18T
Heating suction temp sensor circuit 1
S1PH
High pressure switch circuit 1
R35T,
R45T
Discharge temperature sensor circuit 2
Y1R
Y2R
Reverse valve circuit 2
Reverse valve circuit 1
B2PH
High pressure sensor circuit 2
R15T,
R25T
Discharge temperature sensor circuit 1
B2PL
Low pressure sensor circuit 2
B1PH
High pressure sensor circuit 1
Y21E
Electronic expansion valve cooling circuit 2
B1PL
Low pressure sensor circuit 1
Y22S
Liquid injection valve circuit 2
Y11E
Electronic expansion valve cooling circuit 1
Y22E
Electronic expansion valve heating circuit 2
Y12S
Liquid injection valve circuit 1
R1T
Ambient temperature sensor
Y12E
Electronic expansion valve heating circuit 1
R2T
Evaporator inlet water temperature sensor
M21-22C
Compressor motors circuit 2
R3T
Evaporator outlet water temperature sensor
M23-25F
Fan motors circuit 2
: Check valve
: Flange connection
: Flare connection
: Pinched pipe
: Screw connection
: Spinned pipe
Part 1 – System Outline
1
3
4
5
1–79
Piping Layout
11
2.8
ESIE06-05
Functional Diagram Refrigeration Circuit: EWYQ230-250DAYN(N-P-B)
Functional diagram
The illustration below shows the functional diagram of the refrigeration circuit of
EWYQ230-250DAYN(N-P-B). It is also applicable for glycol applications.
17
16
AIR HEAT
EXCHANGER
18
AIR HEAT
EXCHANGER
M16F
14
DISTRIBUTOR
DISTRIBUTOR
15
AIR HEAT
EXCHANGER
Y23E
R48T
7
SUBCOOL
PASS
7
SUBCOOL
PASS
t > R26T
15
AIR HEAT
EXCHANGER
R46T t >
M15F
M25F
DISTRIBUTOR
DISTRIBUTOR
4
AIR HEAT
EXCHANGER
SUBCOOL
PASS
SUBCOOL
PASS
AIR HEAT
EXCHANGER
M14F
14
DISTRIBUTOR
SUBCOOL
PASS
AIR HEAT
EXCHANGER
5
M24F
14
DISTRIBUTOR
Y12E
R18T
15
12
Y22E
15
7
15
R38T
7
OP12
7
t > R16T
SUBCOOL
PASS
12
OP12
7
7
Liq
Receiver
15
7
Liq
Receiver
15
AIR HEAT
EXCHANGER
R36T t >
15
M13F
5
DISTRIBUTOR
SUBCOOL
PASS
14
DISTRIBUTOR
14
Y11E
7
11
Y21E
15
9
M23F
5
11
OP12
SUBCOOL
PASS
7
OP12
15
Y1R
OP12
p>
OP12
8
Y2R
8
S1PH 21
15
15
1 OR 2
4
15
B2PH 19
S2PH 21
R15T
NON
RETURN
NON
RETURN
R35T
R3T
t>
1
WATER OUT
OIL EQ.
13
R37T
2
PHE
R25T
M12C
13
R34T
15
1 OR 2
R17T
4
M11C
p<
p>
p>
15
R14T
B1PL
9
6
6
19 B1PH p >
20
18
M26F
14
Y13E
R28T
3
16
R1T
t>
3
R2T
t>
WATER IN
M21C
R45T
NON
RETURN
15
M22C
p<
B2PL 20
NON
RETURN
OIL EQ.
13
13
COOLING
HEATING
1. STD
SAFETY VALVE
10
2. DUAL PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE (OP03)
SAFETY VALVES
10
1–80
Part 1 – System Outline
ESIE06-05
Piping Layout
1
.
M11-12C
Compressor motors circuit 1
M13-16F
Fan motors circuit 1
R14T
R16T, R26T
R36T, R46T
Suction temperature sensor circuit 2
Coil temperature sensor circuit 2
Suction temperature sensor circuit 1
R37T
Refrigerant piping temperature sensor circuit 2
Coil temperature sensor circuit 1
S2PH
High pressure switch circuit 2
R17T
Refrigerant piping temperature sensor circuit 1
S1PH
High pressure switch circuit 1
Y1R
R34T
Y2R
R35T, R45T
Reverse valve circuit 2
Discharge temperature sensor circuit 2
Reverse valve circuit 1
B2PH
High pressure sensor circuit 2
Discharge temperature sensor circuit 1
B2PL
Low pressure sensor circuit 2
B1PH
High pressure sensor circuit 1
Y21E
Electronic expansion valve cooling circuit 2
B1PL
Low pressure sensor circuit 1
R38T, R48T
Heating suction temperature sensor circuit 2
Y11E
Electronic expansion valve cooling circuit 1
Y22E, Y23E
Electronic expansion valve heating circuit 2
R18T, R28T
Heating suction temperature sensor circuit
1
R1T
Ambient temperature sensor
Y12E, Y13E
Electronic expansion valve heating circuit 1
R2T
Evaporator inlet water temperature sensor
M21-22C
Compressor motors circuit 2
R3T
Evaporator outlet water temperature sensor
M23-26F
Fan motors circuit 2
R15T, R25T
3
4
5
: Check valve
: Flange connection
: Flare connection
: Pinched pipe
: Screw connection
: Spinned pipe
Part 1 – System Outline
1–81
Piping Layout
11
2.9
Components refrigeration side: EWYQ080-250DAYN
Components
refrigeration side
EWYQ080-250DAY
N
3
4
5
1–82
ESIE06-05
The table below describes the main components of the refrigeration circuit.
1
Water outlet
The water outlet piping connection is delivered with a victaulic
joint but without a counter pipe.
2
Evaporator
The water-heat exchanger is of the brazed plate-heat
exchanger type.
3
Water inlet
The water inlet piping connection is delivered with a victaulic
joint but without a counter pipe.
4
Compressor
A hermetically sealed scroll compressor
5
Liquid receiver
The liquid receiver is installed to accumulate the refrigerant.
6
4-way valve
The 4-way valve is used to select cooling or heating.
7
Non-return valve
The non return valve is used to block the refrigerant in one
direction.
8
Suction stop valve
(optional)
This suction stop valve can be used in combination with the
discharge stop valve to separate the compressors from the
system.
9
Discharge stop valve
(optional)
This stop valve is used during pump down and service work in
combination with the liquid stop valve or suction stop valve if
present (optional).
10
Refrigerant circuit
safety valve
The safety valve prevents a too high pressure. Activation above
45 bar.
11
Drier/ charge valve
The replaceable filter drier will keep the refrigerant system dry. It
is installed behind the condenser and removes small particles
from the refrigerant to prevent damage to the compressor and
the expansion valve. It is equipped with a 3/8” charge valve.
12
Liquid stop valve
(optional)
The liquid stop valve is used as a shut-off valve in case of a
pump down.
13
Oil sight glass
An oil sight glass is placed in the compressor to check the oil
level of the compressor during operation.
14
Electronic expansion
valve + sight glass with
moisture indication
The electronic expansion valve is set up to control the
superheat between minimum and maximum setpoint. A sight
glass with moisture indication is integrated in the expansion
valve body and is used to check the refrigerant shortage and/or
moisture level in the system.
15
Check valve
Service port
16
Condenser
The air-heat exchanger is of the cross fin coil type. Hi-X-tubes
and PE coated waffle louvre fins are used. The air is discharged
upwards.
17
Ambient temperature
sensor
The ambient temperature senor is used to measure the
temperature in order to perform some controls.
18
Fan
Direct driven single speed fan or inverter driver fan (only OPIF)
Part 1 – System Outline
ESIE06-05
Piping Layout
19
High pressure sensor
The high pressure transmitter is used to gain information in
order to perform some controls and also to act as safety.
20
Low pressure sensor
The low pressure transmitter is used to gain information in order
to perform some controls and also to act as safety.
21
High pressure switch
This switch acts as a circuit safety.
■
Activation at 40,5 bar
■
Automatic reset at 30,2 bar
1
3
4
5
Part 1 – System Outline
1–83
Piping Layout
11
2.10
ESIE06-05
Functional Diagram Water Piping: EWAQ-EWYQ-DAYN(N-P-B)
Water piping
diagram
The illustration below shows the functional diagram of the water piping of the
EWAQ080~260DAYN(N-P-B) and EWYQ080~250DAYN(N-P-B).
OPTIONAL
SERVICE
PORT
AIR PURGE
PRESSURE
GAUGE
OPTIONAL
SHUT OFF
VALVE
EXPANSION
VESSEL
SERVICE
PORT
FILL
PORT
R2T
t>
AIR PURGE
FILTER
3
SAFETY
VALVE
FLOW SWITCH
PUMP
EVAPORATOR
BUFFER
TANK
WATER IN
DRAIN
VALVE
DRAIN
PORT
SERVICE
PORT
R3T
REGULATING
OPTIONAL VALVE
4
WATER OUT
5
t>
DRAIN
VALVE
: Check valve
: Screw connection
: Flange connection
1–84
Part 1 – System Outline
ESIE06-05
2.11
Piping Layout
Components Water Side : EWAQ- EWYQ- DAYN(N-P-B)
Components water
piping side
Part 1 – System Outline
1
The table below describes the main components of the water piping.
1
Flow switch
The mechanical flow switch is used to check if there is flow or
enough water flow.
2
Service port
The service port can be used to connect a pressure gauge.
3
Drain valve
The drain valve can be used to drain water from the water
circuit.
4
Regulating valve
The pressure regulating valve is used to regulate the water flow
on the water side (option).
5
Pump
The single or double pump circulates the water (depending on
the option).
6
Fill port on the pump
The fill port can be used to fill the water circuit.
7
Drain port on the pump
The drain port can be used to drain water from the water circuit.
8
Expansion vessel
The expansion vessel deals with water expansion, which occurs
when the temperature of the water varies.
9
Pressure gauge
Pressure gauge to check the water pressure
10
Air purge
To purge the water circuit, to prevent air in the water circuit.
11
Buffer tank
This buffer tank is used to store water in order to prevent the
compressor from switching ON/OFF continuously depending on
the load.
12
Filter
This strainer prevents dirt particles from entering the evaporator.
A filter with 1mm mesh is used.
13
Shut off valve
Makes it possible to shut-off a part of the water piping for
maintenance (e.g. to change a filter).
14
Water circuit safety
valve
The safety valve prevents a too high pressure. Activation above
3 bar.
15
Inlet water sensor R2T
The water temperature sensor is used to control the thermostat
function at the heat exchanger inlet.
16
Outlet water sensor
R3T
This protection device shuts down the circuit when the
temperature of the chilled water becomes too low in order to
prevent the water from freezing during operation and is also
used to control the thermostat function at the heat exchanger
outlet.
3
4
5
1–85
Piping Layout
ESIE06-05
11
3
4
5
1–86
Part 1 – System Outline
ESIE06-05
Wiring Layout
Part 1
3
Wiring Layout
3.1
What Is in This Chapter?
Introduction
This part gives a general overview of the wiring layout.
Overview
This chapter contains the following topics:
Part 1 – System Outline
1
3
Topic
See page
3.2–Wiring Layout : EWAQ080-100DAYN(N-P-B) and EWYQ080-100DAYN(N-P-B)
Standard Unit
1–88
3.3–Wiring Layout : EWAQ130-260DAYN(N-P-B) and EWYQ130-250DAYN(N-P-B)
Standard Unit
1–116
3.4–Wiring layout: EWAQ080-100DAYN(N-P-B) and EWYQ080-100DAYN(N-P-B)
with OPIF
1–149
3.5–Wiring Layout : EWAQ130-260DAYN(N-P-B) and EWYQ130-250DAYN(N-P-B)
with OPIF
1–177
4
5
1–87
Wiring Layout
11
3.2
ESIE06-05
Wiring Layout : EWAQ080-100DAYN(N-P-B) and EWYQ080-100DAYN(N-P-B)
Standard Unit
Introduction
This chapter gives a general overview of the PCB interconnection, I/O overview, switchbox outlook
and wiring of the EWAQ080-100DAYN(N-P-B) and EWYQ080-100DAYN(N-P-B) standard units.
Overview
This chapter contains the following topics:
3
4
5
1–88
Page description
Page
3.2.1 Notes
1–89
3.2.2 Legend
1–91
3.2.3 PCB interconnection diagram
1–96
3.2.4 PCB I/O overview & fuses
1–97
3.2.5 PCB changeable I/O overview
1–101
3.2.6 Unit outlook
1–102
3.2.7 Switchbox outlook (typical)
1–103
3.2.8 Main power supply
1–104
3.2.9 Trafo & PCB power supply
1–105
3.2.10 Compressor & fan
1–106
3.2.11 Circuit 1: control compressors
1–107
3.2.12 Circuit 1: control fans
1–108
3.2.13 Control circuit (DI 230V)
1–109
3.2.14 Control circuit and EEV
1–110
3.2.15 Circuit 1: sensors
1–111
3.2.16 Field wiring DI, changeable DI
1–112
3.2.17 Field wiring changeable AI/AO
1–113
3.2.18 Field wiring DO, changeable DO
1–114
Part 1 – System Outline
ESIE06-05
3.2.1
Wiring Layout
Notes
1
L1, L2, L3
: Main terminals
1-99
: Field wiring terminals
100-199
: Factory upwiring terminals
200-
: Internal wiring terminals
U-Z
: Main terminals in compressor switchbox
: Earth wiring
3
: Wire number 15
: Terminal number 15
4
: Field supply
: Option
5
: Not mounted in switchbox
: Wiring depending on model
: PCB
: Connection ** continues on page 12 column 2
!
: Pin against miswiring
: Several wiring possibilities
N-model
: unit with no options included
Y1R, Y2R reversing valves are activated in cooling mode.
Part 1 – System Outline
1–89
Wiring Layout
11
ESIE06-05
Factory installed:
❏
OP10
= Heater tape
❏
OP57
= A-meter, V-meter
❏
OPLN
= Low noise
(OPIF+ Compressor housing)
3
User installed:
4
❏
OPTP
= Twinpump
❏
OPSC
= Single pump contactor
❏
OPTC
= Twin pump contactor
❏
OPIF
= Inverter fans for low ambient (-15°C)
❏
OPHP
= Hi ESP pump
❏
OPSP
= Single pump
❏
OPBT
= Buffer tank
❏
EKACPG
= Address card including:
-RS485 (Integrated modbus)
-F1, F2 (DICN + DBACS Connection)
❏
EKRUPG
DI:
Digital input
DO:
Digital output
AI:
Analog input
AO:
Analog output
Ch:
Changeable (function can be selected by the customer)
Remote used interface
Definitions:
5
1–90
Part 1 – System Outline
ESIE06-05
3.2.2
Wiring Layout
Legend
1
Not included with standard unit
Not possible as option
Possible as option
Obligatory
#
##
Not obligatory
*
**
Part number
Description
A01P
PCB Extension
A02P
**
A4P
A5P
**
PCB wired remote controller (EKRUPG)
**
frequency inverter circuit 1, circuit 2 (OPIF)
PCB EEV driver
A72P
PCB EEV driver (only for EWYQ)
A73P
PCB EEV driver (only for EWYQ230-250)
B1PH, B2PH
high pressure sensor circuit 1, circuit 2
B1PL, B2PL
low pressure sensor circuit 1, circuit 2
DS1 (A*P)
PCB dipswitch
E1HS
**
switchbox heater with fan (OPIF) (only for EWAQ130-260 /
EWYQ130-250)
E3H
**
heatertape (OP10)
E4H
**
heatertape (OP10) (only for OPSP/OPHP/OPTP)
E5H
*
field heater
E6H
**
buffer tank heater (OP10) (only for OPBT)
E7H
**
switchbox heater (OPIF) (only for EWA/YQ80-100)
E11HC, E12HC
crankcase heater compressor circuit 1
E21HC, E22HC
crankcase heater compressor circuit 2
#
F1U (A*P)
F4, F5
F9B
5
main fuses
fuse PCB
#
F6B
F8B
4
PCB main controller circuit 1, circuit 2
A71P
F1-F3
Part 1 – System Outline
PCB Communication (EKACPG)
PCB wired remote controller
A11P, A21P
A13P, A23P
3
fuses for heaters
autofuse for primary of TR1
**
autofuse for switchbox heater (OPIF)
autofuse for secondary of TR2
1–91
Wiring Layout
11
ESIE06-05
Part number
Description
F11B, F12B
autofuse for compressors (M11C, M12C,) (Not for EWA/YQ80-100)
F14B, F24B
autofuse for fan motors circuit 1, circuit 2
F15B, F25B
**
autofuse for fan motors circuit 1, circuit 2 (OPIF)
F16B
**
autofuse for pump (K1P) (Only for OPSP/ OPHP/ OPSC/ OPTP/OPTC)
F17B
**
autofuse for pump (K2P) (only for OPTP/OPTC)
F21B, F22B
3
4
autofuse for compressors (M21C, M22C)
H1-6P
*
indication lamp for changeable digital outputs
H11P, H12P
*
indication lamp for operation compressor circuit 1 (M11C, M12C)
H21p, H22P
*
indication lamp for operation compressor circuit 2 (M21C, M22C)
HAP-HEP (A*P)
light emitting diode PCB
K1A, K2A
auxiliary relay for compressor safety circuit 1, circuit 2
K1P
##
pump contactor (only for OPSP/ OPHP/OPSC/OPTP/OPTC)
K1S
*
overcurrent relay pump
K1R-K22R (A*P)
K2P
5
PCB relay
**
pump contactor (only for OPTP/ OPTC)
K3A
auxiliary relay for heater tape
K11M, K12M
compressor contactor for circuit 1
K13F, K14F
fan contactor for circuit 1
K13S, K14S
fan overcurrent relay for circuit 1
K15F
fan contactor for circuit 1
(Only for EWAQ80-100/180-210/240-260)
(Only for EWYQ80-100/180-210/230-250)
K15S
fan overcurrent relay for circuit 1
(Only for EWAQ80-100/180-210/240-260)
(Only for EWYQ80-100/180-210/230-250)
K16F
fan contactor for circuit 1
(Only for EWAQ80-100/240-260)
(Only for EWYQ80-100/230-250)
K16S
fan overcurrent relay for circuit 1
(Only for EWAQ80-100/240-260)
(Only for EWYQ80-100/230-250)
K21M, K22M
compressor contactor for circuit 2
K23F, K24F
fan contactor for circuit 2
K23S, K24S
fan overcurrent relay for circuit 2
K25F
fan contactor for circuit 2
(Only for EWAQ180-210/240-260)
(Only for EWYQ180-210/230-250)
1–92
Part 1 – System Outline
ESIE06-05
Wiring Layout
Part number
Description
K25S
fan overcurrent relay for circuit 2
1
(Only for EWAQ180-210/240-260)
(Only for EWYQ180-210/230-250)
K26F
fan contactor for circuit 2
(Only for EWAQ/240-260)
(Only for EWYQ230-250)
K26S
fan overcurrent relay for circuit 2
(Only for EWAQ/240-260)
(Only for EWYQ230-250)
M1P
**
pump motor 1 (only for OPSP/ OPHP/OPSC/OPTC)
M2P
**
pump motor 2 (only for OPTP/OPTC)
M11C, M12C
compressor motors circuit 1
M13F, M14F
fan motors circuit 1
M15F
fan motors circuit 1
3
4
(Only for EWAQ80-100/180-210/240-260)
(Only for EWYQ80-100/180-210/230-250)
M16F
fan motors circuit 1
5
(Only for EWAQ80-100/240-260)
(Only for EWYQ80-100/230-250)
M21C, M22C
compressor motors circuit 2
M23F, M24F
fan motors circuit 2
M25F
fan motors circuit 2
(Only for EWAQ180-210/240-260)
(Only for EWYQ180-210/230-250)
M26F
fan motors circuit 2
(Only for EWAQ240-260)
(Only for EWYQ230-250)
M1F
Q1T
Q11C, Q12C
switchbox fanmotor
**
thermostat (OP10)
For EWAQ130/EWYQ130:
thermal protector compressor circuit 1
For EWAQ80-100/150/180-210/240-260:
For EWYQ80-100/150/180-210/230-250:
electronic protection module compressor circuit 1
Q21C, Q22C
For EWAQ130/EWYQ130:
thermal protector compressor circuit 2
For EWAQ150/180-210/240-260:
For EWYQ150/180-210/230-250:
electronic protection module compressor circuit 2
Part 1 – System Outline
1–93
Wiring Layout
11
ESIE06-05
Part number
Description
R1T
ambient temperature sensor
R2T
inlet water temperature sensor
R3T
outlet water temperature sensor
R8T
3
4
5
*
temperature sensor for changeable analog input
R14T
suction temperature sensor circuit 1
R15T, R25T
discharge temperature sensor circuit 1
R16T
coil temperature sensor circuit 1 (only for EWYQ)
R17T
refrigerant piping temperature sensor circuit 1
R18T, R38T
heating suction temperature sensor circuit 1, circuit 2 (only EWYQ)
R28T, R48T
heating suction temperature sensor circuit 1, circuit 2 (only
EWYQ80-100/230-250)
R26T
coil temperature sensor circuit 1(only for EQWYQ80-100/230-250)
R34T
suction temperature sensor circuit 2
R35T, R45T
discharge temperature sensor circuit 2
R36T
coil temperature sensor circuit 2 (only for EWYQ)
R37T
refrigerant piping temperature sensor circuit 2
R46T
coil temperature sensor circuit 2 (only for EWYQ230-250)
S1A-S3A (A*P)
PCB dipswitch
S1L
flowswitch
S1M
main isolator switch
S1PH, S2PH
high pressure switch circuit 1, circuit 2
S1S-S5S
*
switch for changeable digital input (remote on/off, C/H, ...)
S1T
**
thermal contact (OPIF)
S2M
#
heater tape isolator switch
T1A
**
current transducer (OP57)
T1V
**
voltage transducer (OP57)
TR1
TR1A
transfo control circuit (400V/230V)
**
V1C
V1F, V2F
current measurement transfo (OP57)
Ferrite core
**
noise filter circuit 1, circuit 2 (OPIF)
(Only for EWAQ130-150/180-210)
(Only for EWYQ130-150/180-210)
V2C
1–94
**
Ferrite core (EKACPG)
X*A (A*P)
PCB terminal
X*Y
connector
X1M (A*P)
PCB terminal strip
Part 1 – System Outline
ESIE06-05
Wiring Layout
Part number
Description
Y1R, Y2R
reverse valve circuit 1, circuit 2 (only EWYQ)
Y11E
electronic expansion valve cooling circuit 1
Y12E
electronic expansion valve heating circuit 1 (only EWYQ)
Y13E
electronic expansion valve heating circuit 1 (only EWYQ80-100/
230-250)
Y21E
electronic expansion valve cooling circuit 2
Y22E
electronic expansion valve heating circuit 2 (only EWYQ)
Y23E
electronic expansion valve heating circuit 2 (only EWYQ230-250)
1
3
4
5
Part 1 – System Outline
1–95
1–96
2
V2C
MODBUS
DICN
EKACPG
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
HDP ON
For S3A setting
see installation manual
S1A
ADDRESS=1
H1P
H2P
HAP
HBP
A4P
A02P
X52A
TERM
S3A
X1M
F1
HCP
F2
+
RS485
-
OFF
OFF
X1M
HEP
TERM
S2A
ADDRESS=MAIN
TERM=ON
ON
HBP
TERM
S2A
S1A
MAIN
SUB
HAP
A01P
HAP
X51A
ACS
3
V1C
A11P
1
A72P
X88A
ACS
A71P
X88A
ACS
DS1
OFF
X1M
*
DS1
X89A
HAP
A4P
only
for EWYQ
080-100
shortcut on last
EEV PCB (319)
*
= DIPSWITCH
*=
X89A
OFF ADDRESS=2
ON
HAP
OFF ADDRESS=1
ON
ADDRESS=MAIN
TERM=OFF
ON
HBP
HAP
TERM
S2A
S1A
MAIN
SUB
5
1
EKRUPG
4
+
RS485
DC 24V
GND
ADDRESS=SUB
TERM=ON
ON
OFF
HBP
HAP
TERM
S2A
S1A
MAIN
SUB
3
+
RS485
DC 24V
GND
X1M
A5P
3.2.3
+
RS485
DC 24V
GND
11
Std
Wiring Layout
ESIE06-05
PCB interconnection diagram
Part 1 – System Outline
ESIE06-05
3.2.4
Wiring Layout
PCB I/O overview & fuses
1
Main PCB (A11P)
Part 1 – System Outline
X12A (1-3-5)
DI: Reverse phase detection (L1-L2-L3) c1
X4A
DI: High pressure switch c1
X5A
DI: Compressor interclock 1 c1
X6A
DI: Compressor interlock 2 c2
X7A
DI: Fan overcurrent relay Fanstep 1 c1
X8A
DI: Fan overcurrent relay Fanstep 2 c1
X9A
DI: Fan overcurrent relay Fanstep 3 c1
X27A
not used
X29A (3-4)
not used
X30A
DI: Flow switch
X31A
DI: Pump interlock
X32A (3-4)
Ch DI 1: function not pre-defined
X32A (1-2)
Ch DI 2: function not pre-defined
X13A
DO: Compressor contactor 1 c1
X14A
DO:Compressor contactor 2 c1
X15A
DO: Heatertape
X16A
DO: Pump contactor
X17A
DO: Reverse valve c1 (Only for EWYQ)
X19A (1-3)
DO: Fanstep 1 c1
X19A (5-7)
DO: Fanstep 2 c1
X20A
DO: Fanstep 3 c1
X22A
Ch DO1: “SAFETY + W. (NO)” (def)
X24A
Ch DO2: “GEN. OPERATION” (def)
X25A
Ch DO3: function not pre-defined
X33A
AI: Ambient sensor
X34A
AI: Inlet water sensor
X35A
AI: Outlet water sensor
X36A
AI: Suction temperature sensor c1
X37A
AI: Refrigerant piping temperature sensor c1
X38A
AI: Coil temperature sensor 1 c1 (only for EWYQ)
X39A
AI: Coil temperature sensor 2 c1 (only for EWYQ)
X40A
AI: Discharge temperature sensor 1 c1
X41A
AI: Discharge temperature sensor 2 c1
3
4
5
1–97
Wiring Layout
11
ESIE06-05
X42A
AI: High pressure sensor c1
X43A
AI: Low pressure sensor c1
X44A
AI: Current measurement (OP57)
X45A
AI: Voltage measurement (OP57)
HAP, HBP
LED (Service monitor green)
H1P, H2P
LED (Service monitor red)
S1A
dipswitch (address)
S2A
dipswitch (terminal resistor)
3
Extension PCB (A01P)
4
X63A
Ch DO6: Function not pre-defined
X64A (1-3)
Ch DO4: Function not pre-defined
X64A (5-7)
Ch DO5: Function not pre-defined
X65A (1-2)
Ch DI3: Function not pre-defined
X65A (3-4)
Ch DI4: Function not pre-defined
X66A
AI: Heating suction temperature sensor 1 c1
(Only for EWYQ)
5
X67A
AI: Heating suction temperature sensor 2 c1
(Only for EWYQ)
X68A
Ch AI2: Function not pre-defined
X69A
Ch AI1: Function not pre-defined
X70A
Ch AI4: Function not pre-defined
X71A
Ch AI3: Function not pre-defined
X72A (3-4)
not used
X73A
Ch AO1: Function not pre-defined
X74A (4-5)
not used
HAP, HBP
LED (service monitor green)
Wired remote controller PCB (A4P, A5P)
1–98
HAP, HBP
LED (service monitor green)
S1A
dipswitch (address)
S2A
dipswitch (terminal resistor)
Part 1 – System Outline
ESIE06-05
Wiring Layout
1
Communication PCB (A02P)
HCP, HDP, HEP
LED (service monitor green)
S3A
dipswitch (terminal resistor)
EEV PCB (A71P)
X86A
Y11E Electronic expansion valve
X87A
not used
HAP
LED (service monitor green)
DS1
dipswitch (address)
3
EEV PCB (A72P) (Only EWYQ)
X86A
Y12E Electronic expansion valve (only EWYQ)
X87A
Y13E Electronic expansion valve (only EWYQ)
HAP
LED (service monitor green)
DS1
dipswitch (address)
4
5
:
EWAQ80
EWAQ100
EWYQ80
EWYQ100
125gL/gG
160gL/gG
500V
500V
F1U
T 5A/250V
T 5A/250V
F4, F5
10gL/250V
10gL/250V
-
-
C 2A/250V
C 2A/250V
F6B
1,55A
1,55A
F11B
-
-
F12B
-
-
F16B
4,8A
4,8A
12,0A
12,0A
FUSES
F1-F3
Circuit breakers
F8B (OPIF)
F9B
Circuit breaker and motor protector settings
(OPSP/OPSC/OPTP/OPTC)
F16B (OPHP)
Part 1 – System Outline
1–99
Wiring Layout
ESIE06-05
F17B
11
4,8A
4,8A
F14B
6,6A
6,6A
F15B (OPIF)
7,7A
7,7A
K13S-K16S
1,5A
1,5A
(OPTP/OPTC)
3
4
5
1–100
Part 1 – System Outline
ESIE06-05
3.2.5
Wiring Layout
PCB changeable I/O overview
1
Refer to the installation manual for instructions how to configure changeable I/O.
Changeable digital input (4 available)
Changeable analog output (1 available)
-None
-None
-Status
- Unit capacity (mA, V)
-Dual setpoint
-Details of types:
Remote on-off
Type mA: 0 .. 20mA / 4..20 mA
-Capacity limitation 25%, 50%, 75%, or setting
Type V: 0-1V / 0-5V / o-10V
3
-Low noise (only for OPIF)
-Free cooling signal
-Fan forced on
Changeable digital output (6 or 5 available
depending on unit)
4
Changeable analog input (4 available)
- None (open)
-None
- Closed
-Status (mA, V, NTC*, DI)
- 2nd pump
-Floating setpoint (mA, V, NTC*)
-100% capacity
-Water temperature measurement (NTC**)
- Full capacity
-Changeable DI, refer to Ch DI for possibilities (DI)
- Free cooling
- Details of types:
- General operation
Type mA: 0..20mA / 4..20mA
- Safety + warning NO
(internal 5V or external power supply)
Safety + warning NC (only for ch DO1)
Type V: 0-1V / 0-5V/ 0-10V
-Safety NO (excluding warning)
Type DI: DI (5V detection)
5
-Safety NC (excluding warning) (only for ch
DO1)
-C1, C2 Safety NO
-Warning NO
- C1, C2 operation
- Cooling (only EWYQ)
- Heating (only EWYQ)
- Defrost (only EWYQ)
Part 1 – System Outline
*: for allowed NTC types and how to configure the software please contact your local
dealer.
1–101
Wiring Layout
11
3.2.6
ESIE06-05
Unit outlook
TOP VIEW OF UNIT (FANS)
M13F
M14F
M15F
M16F
3
4
5
SWITCHBOX
TOP VIEW OF UNIT (COMP+ SB)
M11C
M12C
EWAQ 80-100
EWYQ 80-100
1–102
Part 1 – System Outline
ESIE06-05
3.2.7
Wiring Layout
Switchbox outlook (typical)
1
3
4
5
Part 1 – System Outline
1–103
1–104
S1M
3
4
L2
L3
5
6
Power supply
3ò50Hz 400V
L1
F1 F2 F3
1
2
502
32.4
PE
12 /
T1A
32.4
300A/5A
11 /
T1A
F16B
1
2
3
I
M1P
X17Y
3ò
M
12
14
11
PE
W
6
PE
W
V
6
5
6
U
I
5
7
4
3
4
3
V
4
6
3ò
I
U
2
F17B
M2P
X17Y
K2P
I
M2P
43.3
3ò
M
M
X17Y
9
PE
W
V
6
5
6
U
I
10
4
3
4
5
PE
W
3
3ò
I
3
V
4
2
1
2
1
U
6
5
4
3
2
1
K2P
5
3
I
1
I
5
6
I
3
4
M
F17B
1
2
14
11
6
I
5
4
I
3
2
1
1
2
1
2
1
M1P
22.7
K1P
X26Y
X26Y
X26Y
I
K1P
OPSP/OPHP
OPTP
1
2
3
5
F16B
X26Y
X26Y
X26Y
OPSC
OPTC
9
14
11
14
11
2
2
S2M
1
1
2
1
R2
R1
max.
1kW
E5H
F5
3
4
2
X10Y
2
0
X10Y
Power supply
1ò50Hz 230V
F4
21.9
K3A
0
3
TR1A
501
OP57
16.0
16.0
4
L2C1./
L3C1./
12
OPSP/OPTP
/OPHP
E4H
Q1T
OPBT
E6H
OPSP/OPTP/OPHP
12
MODELS WITHOUT OPSP/OPTP/OPHP
E3H
PE
24
23
OP10
3.2.8
2
11
L1C1/ 20.0
L2C1/ 20.0
L3C1/ 20.0
Wiring Layout
ESIE06-05
Main power supply
Part 1 – System Outline
ESIE06-05
3.2.9
Wiring Layout
Trafo & PCB power supply
1
15.2 / L2C1.
15.2 / L3C1.
1
3
5
F6B
I
I
I
2
4
OP57
6
62
60
61
12
/
T1V
400 VAC
1
32.6
11
/
T1V
32.6
5
3
TR1
31
32 33
34
63
230 VAC
X11Y
3
X11Y
3
64
X11Y
1
X11Y
1
65
X11Y
2
X11Y
2
F9B
I
A11P
1
X1A:3
5
F1U
5A
30.0
30.0
2
E1
E1
A72P
SL
A11P
X2A
21.0
21.0
203
102
101
A71P
SN
A11P
X2A
1
1
X77A:3
X18Y
1
X2A:1
SN
/
A11P
SL
A11P /
F1U
X77A:3
X3A
SL
A11P
only for EWYQ
080-100
21.0
230 VAC
Part 1 – System Outline
4
1–105
1–106
Q11C
M11C
PE
W
V
U
M
3~
6
5
4
3
Q12C
M12C
K12M
PE
W
V
U
M
3~
6
5
4
3
2
1
R1P
X12A X12A X12A
:5
:3
:1
L3
L2
L1
A11P
M13F
X14Y
K13S
K13F
X14Y
3ò
M
U2
22.1
4
PE
V2
W1
W2
V1
6
5
6
6
U1
I
36
4
3
4
4
2
I
1
2
1
2
2
96
95
M15F
X14Y
K15S
K15F
X14Y
3ò
M
16
PE
M14F
X14Y
3ò
M
10
PE
X14Y
3ò
22.3
22
PE
V2
M
U2
M16F
W1
V1
U2
W2
6
U1
4
5
6
V2
2
3
4
W1
V1
U2
W2
W2
V1
U1
X14Y
K16S
1
2
21
96
95
K16F
20
U1
15
22.3
19
6
5
6
V2
2
4
3
4
W1
X14Y
K14S
1
2
9
96
95
K14F
8
22.2
7
6
5
6
14
4
3
4
13
2
1
2
4
2
1
I
5
3
K11M
F14B
3
5
1
96
95
11
15.2 / L1C1
15.2 / L2C1
15.2 / L3C1
Wiring Layout
ESIE06-05
3.2.10 Compressor & fan
Part 1 – System Outline
16.1 /
SN
A11P
X2A
1
3
5
13
21
K11M
K1R
A11P
30.4
K1A
211
SL
A11P
2
4
6
14
22
A2
A1
20.0
20.1
20.1
42.1
.5
X13A:3
X13A:1
14
11
K2R
101
1
3
5
13
21
K12M
204
203
212
16.2 /
2
4
6
14
22
A2
A1
20.2
20.2
20.2
42.2
.6
X14A:1
X14A:2
102
102
Y1R
X10Y
X10Y
Only
for EWYQ
101
K5R
105
102
4
3
X17A:1
X17A:2
101
K11M
X10Y
E11HC
X10Y
106
SL
A11P
X2A
8
6
22
21
K12M
7
22
21
X10Y
E12HC
X10Y
107
Part 1 – System Outline
16.1 /
9
X12Y
Q11C
X12Y
2
N
L1
6
X13Y
Q12C
X13Y
6
N
L1
1
101
R1
K3A
K3R
A11P
203
102
SN
A11P
X2A
R2 15.7
A2
A1
X15A:4
X15A:7
SL
/
A11P
SL
A11P
X2A
/
/
22.0
22.0
22.0
ESIE06-05
Wiring Layout
3.2.11 Circuit 1: control compressors
1
3
4
5
1–107
213
SN
A11P
X2A
A11P
K7R
101
2
4
6
K13F
20.5
K13S
1 20.5
3 20.5
5 20.5
A2
A1
X19A:3
X19A:1
111
96
95
110
K1*S
/
A11P
2
4
6
K15F
K8R
30.3
20.6
K15S
203
203
1 20.6
3 20.6
5 20.6
A2
A1
X19A:7
X19A:5
96
116
95
115
K2*S
/
A11P
2
4
6
K14F
K9R
30.3
20.9
K16S
20.8
K14S
1 20.7
3 20.7
5 20.8
A2
A1
X20A:1
X20A:2
96
121
95
96
95
120
K3*S
/
A11P
2
4
6
K16F
30.3
1 20.8
3 20.8
5 20.9
A2
A1
OPSP/OPTP/OPSC/
OPTC/OPHP
4
21.9 /
SL
A11P
21.9 /
102
122
121
SL
A11P
X2A
111
220
116
221
K4R
A11P
X27Y
F16B
X27Y
12
1–108
222
1
3
5
13
X27Y
K1P
X27Y
2
4
6
14
101
1
A2
A1
3
13
15.3
15.3
15.4
40.1
X16A:1
X16A:3
12
4
14
11
2
203
3
13
222
101
203
102
SN
A11P
X2A
/
SL
/
A11P
/
43.3
43.2
11
21.9 /
Wiring Layout
ESIE06-05
3.2.12 Circuit 1: control fans
5
Part 1 – System Outline
ESIE06-05
Wiring Layout
3.2.13 Control circuit (DI 230V)
1
A11P
16.1 /
SL
A11P
F1U
230
X4A:1
X10Y
10
S1PH P>
239
DI
X10Y
11
X12Y
3
14/M2
X4A:3
231
3
X5A:2
Q11C
11/M1
4
X12Y
4
232
DI
X5A:1
233
X6A:3
X13Y
3
14/M2
Q12C
11/M1
4
X13Y
5
234
DI
X6A:1
235
X7A:1
DI
111
K1*SA11P/ 22.1
116
K2*SA11P/ 22.2
121
K3*SA11P/ 22.4
X7A:2
X8A:1
DI
X8A:3
X9A:1
DI
X9A:3
X10A:3
A1
K1A
DI
X10A:1
A2
X11:1
16.1 /
Part 1 – System Outline
SN
A11P
236
X11A:2
11
14 21.1
1–109
X86A:1 2
X88A:1
A71P
X15Y
3
V1C
4
Y11E
M
3
2
4
X88A:2
3
5
X89A:1
3
*
X89A:2
248
X18Y
X29A:3
DI
249
X29A:4
315
316
X86A:1 2
X88A:1
A72P
X15Y
3
4
M
only for EWYQ 080-100
Y12E
7
6
5
8
X88A:2
5
S1L
5
X87A:1 2
X89A:1
X16Y
X15Y
3
4
Y13E
*=
M
12
BLU
X1B:1 X1B:2 X1B:3 X1B:4 X1B:5
A01P
shortcut on last
EEV PCB (319)
11
10
9
5
X89A:2
6
X1B:1 X1B:2 X1B:3 X1B:4 X1B:5
WHT
X30A:2
*
319
DI
BLU
X30A:1
BLU
X51A:2
36
471
BLU
X51A:1
313
470
RED
472
WHT
481
314
473
BLK
GRN
480
RED
482
WHT
483
BLK
GRN
244
485
RED
486
WHT
487
245
488
BLK
GRN
X2B:3
WHT
X2B:1
X2B:3
BLK
X2B:1
X1M:+
A4P
X19Y
1
X52A:1
301
301
X1M:-
2
RS485
X1M:24V
3
X52A:3
RS485
X52A:2
302
302
1–110
303
5
303
4
X1M:GND
4
X52A:4
304
3
304
11
A11P
Wiring Layout
ESIE06-05
3.2.14 Control circuit and EEV
Part 1 – System Outline
B1PH
X15Y
13
X42A:1
-t∞
A11P
R2T
-t∞
2
14
X42A:3
AI
X42A:2
1
X34A:2
AI
X34A:1
402
R1T
8
400
7
401
X16Y
X33A:3
15
B1PL
16
17
18
X43A:4
15.1 /
11
T1A
32
12
/
T1A
15.1
T1A
0-5A/0-20mA
31
12
11
OP57
X44A:3
AI
-t∞
R26T
AI
X44A:4
27
X38A:2
411
26
X39A:1
412
X44A:2
AI
Only for
EWYQ
25
X44A:1
-t∞
X15Y
R16T
30
X38A:1
-t∞
29
X37A:2
AI
X37A:1
R17T
20
X43A:3
407
X36A:2
AI
AI
X43A:2
19
X15Y
X43A:1
-t∞
X42A:4
R14T
X15Y
-t∞
4
R3T
3
X36A:1
X35A:2
AI
X35A:1
404
452
AI
450
WHT
405
RED
403
451
BLK
406
453
WHT
408
455
X33A:1
501
454
BLK
409
RED
410
503
502
16.3 /
28
11
T1V
32
X45A:4
12
/
T1V
16.3
T1V
0-500V/0-20mA
31
12
X45A:3
-t∞
R25T
23
24
415
22
X41A:2
X40A:2
AI
X41A:1
416
AI
AI
X45A:2
21
11
X45A:1
-t∞
R15T
X15Y
X40A:1
X39A:2
413
60
504
414
513
61
417
514
-t∞
Only for
EWYQ
R28T
32
-t∞
31
R18T
X15Y
33
34
X67A:2
AI
X67A:1
X66A:2
X66A:1
418
AI
419
A01P
420
Part 1 – System Outline
421
A11P
ESIE06-05
Wiring Layout
3.2.15 Circuit 1: sensors
1
3
4
5
1–111
7
44
14
13
44
X27Y
8
45
X27Y
14
13
7
44
OPSC/OPTC/OPSP/OPTP/OPHP
22.7
K1P
OPSP/OPSC/OPHP
OPTP/OPTC
X27Y
8
43.3
K2P
45
MODELS WITHOUT OPSC/OPTC/OPSP/OPTP/OPHP
OBLIGATORY
22.7
K1P
X27Y
14
13
7
7
S1S
46
47
X32A:3
Example: remote
start/stop
14
13
46
X32A:4
47
X31A:3
45
Changeable
DI1
S2S
49
X32A:1
Example: remote
cool/heat
14
13
48
X32A:2
Changeable
DI2
48
X31A:1
DI
49
1–112
S3S
A01P
14
13
50
X65A:1
51
X65A:2
Changeable
DI3
50
5
51
4
S4S
14
13
52
X65A:3
53
X65A:4
Changeable
DI4
52
3
53
11
A11P
Wiring Layout
ESIE06-05
3.2.16 Field wiring DI, changeable DI
Part 1 – System Outline
8
8
74
75
-t∞
R8T
Ch. AI1
example:
temp. sensor
Example
mA measurement
(External power supply)
-
-
Example
mA measurement
(5V power supply by PCB)
+
0
to
20mA
+
0
to
20mA
+
Ch. AI3
example:
V measurement
-
0
to
10VDC
77
78
70
76
IN
X69A:2
71
5V
X69A:1
73
GND
X69A:3
72
75
5V
X68A:1
73
74
IN
X68A:2
74
73
GND
X68A:3
75
72
5V
X71A:1
76
71
IN
X71A:2
77
70
GND
X71A:3
78
S5S
14
13
79
Ch. AI4
example:
Switch
80
IN
X70A:2
5V
X70A:1
Changeable
AI4
79
Changeable
AI3
80
Changeable
AI2
81
+
91
-
0
to
20mA or 10V
Example
mA output
V output
90
X73A:2
X73A:1
GND
X70A:3
Changeable
AO1
81
Changeable
AI1
90
Part 1 – System Outline
91
A01P
ESIE06-05
Wiring Layout
3.2.17 Field wiring changeable AI/AO
1
3
4
5
1–113
3
H11P
14
13
4
External
Power
supply
(ex 24VAC
or 230VAC)
3
K11M
4
Operation
M11C
K12M
H12P
6
External
Power
supply
(ex 24VAC
or 230VAC)
5
14
13
Operation
M12C
5
7
7
H1P
External
Power
supply
(ex 24VAC
or 230VAC)
8
X22A:1
Safety active = contact closed
No power = contact open
No safety = contact open
9
Alarm NO
Default
X22A:5
X22A:3
K12R
A11P
Changeable DO1
(Default: Alarm,
NO contact 8-9)
9
H1P
External
Power
supply
(ex 24VAC
or 230VAC)
7
Safety active = contact closed
No power = contact closed
No safety = contact open
9
Alarm NC
Software selection necessary
8
9
Changeable DO: Maximum load: 2A-230VAC, Minimum load: 10mA-5VDC
9
1–114
6
5
8
4
K14R
A11P
H2P
11
External
Power
supply
(ex 24VAC
or 230VAC)
10
X24A:1
X24A:2
Changeable DO2
(Default:
Gen. operation)
10
3
11
11
AC15: max.3A-230V
Wiring Layout
ESIE06-05
3.2.18 Field wiring DO, changeable DO
Part 1 – System Outline
4
3
K1P
X27Y
External
Power supply
(ex 24VAC
or 230VAC)
12
X16A:3
13
13
NOT FOR MODELS WITH
OPSC/OPTC/OPSP/OPTP/OPHP
K1S
X27Y
K4R
12
2
14
11
6
22.9
SL
A11P
X27Y
F17B
X27Y
14
1
5
15
22.9
1
3
5
13
2
4
6
14
SN
A11P
X2A
X27Y
K2P
X27Y
X25A:3
X25A:1
Changeable DO3
(Default: 2nd pump)
MODELS WITH OPTC/OPTP
10
K15R
A11P
14
X16A:1
15.5
15.5
15.5
40.2
15
X27Y
6
5
H3P
X27Y
External
Power
supply
(ex 24VAC
or 230VAC)
14
Changeable DO3
(no predefined function)
MODELS WITHOUT OPTC/OPTP
10
15
K21R
A01P
16
A11P
Changeable
DO3
H4P
17
External
Power
supply
(ex 24VAC
or 230VAC)
16
X64A:3
X64:1
Changeable
DO4
17
K22R
A01P
18
DO
pump
21
External
Power
supply
(ex 24VAC
or 230VAC)
20
X63A:3
X63A:1
External
Power
supply
(ex 24VAC
or 230VAC)
19
K20R
A01P
Changeable
DO6
H6P
19
H5P
18
X64A:7
X64A:5
Changeable
DO5
20
Part 1 – System Outline
21
Ch. DO: Maximum load: 2A-230VAC, Minimum load: 10mA-5VDC
ESIE06-05
Wiring Layout
1
3
4
5
1–115
Wiring Layout
11
3.3
ESIE06-05
Wiring Layout : EWAQ130-260DAYN(N-P-B) and EWYQ130-250DAYN(N-P-B)
Standard Unit
Introduction
This chapter gives a general overview of the PCB interconnection, I/O overview, switchbox outlook
and wiring of the EWAQ130-260DAYN(N-P-B) and EWYQ130-250DAYN(N-P-B) standard units.
Overview
This chapter contains the following topics:
3
4
5
1–116
Page description
Page
3.3.1 Notes
1–117
3.3.2 Legend
1–119
3.3.3 PCB interconnection diagram
1–124
3.3.4 PCB I/O overview & fuses
1–125
3.3.5 PCB changeable I/O overview
1–130
3.3.6 Unit outlook
1–131
3.3.7 Switchbox outlook (typical)
1–132
3.3.8 Main power supply
1–133
3.3.9 Trafo & PCB power supply
1–134
3.3.10 Circuit 1: compressor & fan
1–135
3.3.11 Circuit 1: control compressors
1–136
3.3.12 Circuit 1: control fans
1–137
3.3.13 Circuit 2: compressor & fan
1–138
3.3.14 Circuit 2: control compressors
1–139
3.3.15 Circuit 2: control fans
1–140
3.3.16 Control circuit (DI 230V)
1–141
3.3.17 Control circuit and EEV
1–142
3.3.18 Circuit 1: sensors
1–143
3.3.19 Circuit 2: sensors
1–144
3.3.20 Fieldwiring DI, changeable DI
1–145
3.3.21 Fieldwiring changeable AI/AO
1–146
3.3.22 Fieldwiring DO, changeable DO
1–147
Part 1 – System Outline
ESIE06-05
3.3.1
Wiring Layout
Notes
1
L1, L2, L3
: Main terminals
1-99
: Field wiring terminals
100-199
: Factory upwiring terminals
200-
: Internal wiring terminals
U-Z
: Main terminals in compressor switchbox
: Earth wiring
3
: Wire number 15
: Terminals number 15
4
: Field supply
: Option
5
: Not mounted in switchbox
: Wiring depending on model
: PCB
: Connection ** continues on page 12 column 2
!
: Pin against miswiring
: Several wiring possibilities
N-model
: unit with no options included
Y1R, Y2R reversing valves are activated in cooling mode.
Part 1 – System Outline
1–117
Wiring Layout
11
ESIE06-05
Factory installed:
❏
OP10
= Heater tape
❏
OP57
= A-meter, V-meter
❏
OPLN
= Low noise
(OPIF+ Compressorhousing)
3
User installed:
4
❏
OPTP
= Twinpump
❏
OPSC
= Single pump contactor
❏
OPTC
= Twin pump contactor
❏
OPIF
= Inverter fans for low ambient (-15°C)
❏
OPHP
= Hi ESP pump
❏
OPSP
= Single pump
❏
OPBT
= Buffer tank
❏
EKACPG
= Address card including:
-RS485 (Integrated modbus)
-F1, F2 (DICN + DBACS Connection)
❏
EKRUPG
DI:
Digital input
DO:
Digital output
AI:
Analog input
AO:
Analog output
Ch:
Changeable (function can be selected by the customer)
Remote used interface
Definitions:
5
1–118
Part 1 – System Outline
ESIE06-05
3.3.2
Wiring Layout
Legend
1
Not included with standard unit
Not possible as option
Possible as option
Obligatory
#
##
Not obligatory
*
**
Part number
Description
A01P
PCB Extension
A02P
**
A4P
A5P
PCB Communication (EKACPG)
PCB wired remote controller
**
A11P, A21P
A13P, A23P
PCB main controller circuit 1, circuit 2
**
frequency inverter circuit 1, circuit 2 (OPIF)
PCB EEV driver
A72P
PCB EEV driver (only for EWYQ)
A73P
PCB EEV driver (only for EWYQ230-250)
B1PH, B2PH
high pressure sensor circuit 1, circuit 2
B1PL, B2PL
low pressure sensor circuit 1, circuit 2
DS1 (A*P)
PCB dipswitch
E1HS
**
switchbox heater with fan (OPIF) (only for EWAQ130-260 / EWYQ130-250)
E3H
**
heatertape (OP10)
E4H
**
heatertape (OP10) (only for OPSP/OPHP/OPTP)
E5H
*
fieldheater
E6H
**
buffer tank heater (OP10) (only for OPBT)
E7H
**
switchbox heater (OPIF) (only for EWA/YQ80-100)
E11HC, E12HC
crankcase heater compressor circuit 1
E21HC, E22HC
crankcase heater compressor circuit 2
#
F1U (A*P)
F4, F5
main fuses
#
fuses for heaters
autofuse for primary of TR1
**
autofuse for switchbox heater
F9B
autofuse for secondary of TR2
F11B, F12B
autofuse for compressors (M11C, M12C,) (Not for EWA/YQ80-100)
Part 1 – System Outline
5
fuse PCB
F6B
F8B
4
PCB wired remote controller (EKRUPG)
A71P
F1-F3
3
1–119
Wiring Layout
11
ESIE06-05
Part number
Description
F14B, F24B
autofuse for fan motors circuit 1, circuit 2
F15B, F25B
**
autofuse for fan motors circuit 1, circuit 2 (OPIF)
F16B
**
autofuse for pump (K1P) (Only for OPSP/ OPHP/ OPSC/ OPTP/OPTC)
F17B
**
autofuse for pump (K2P) (only for OPTP/OPTC)
F21B, F22B
3
4
autofuse for compressors (M21C, M22C)
H1-6P
*
indication lamp for changeable digital outputs
H11P, H12P
*
indication lamp for operation compressor circuit 1 (M11C, M12C)
H21P, H22P
*
indication lamp for operation compressor circuit 1 (M21C, M22C)
HAP-HEP (A*P)
light emitting diode PCB
K1A, K2A
auxiliary relay for compressor safety circuit 1, circuit 2
K1P
##
pump contactor (only for OPSP/ OPHP/OPSC/OPTC)
K1S
*
overcurrent relay pump
K1R-K22R (A*P)
K2P
5
PCB relay
**
pump contactor (only for OPTP/ OPTC)
K3A
auxiliary relay for heater tape
K11M, K12M
compressor contactor for circuit 1
K13F, K14F
fan contactor for circuit 1
K13S, K14S
fan overcurrent relay for circuit 1
K15F
fan contactor for circuit 1
(Only for EWAQ80-100/180-210/240-260)
(Only for EWYQ80-100/180-210/230-250)
K15S
fan overcurrent relay for circuit 1
(Only for EWAQ80-100/180-210/240-260)
(Only for EWYQ80-100/180-210/230-250)
K16F
fan contactor for circuit 1
(Only for EWAQ80-100/240-260)
(Only for EWYQ80-100/230-250)
K16S
fan overcurrent relay for circuit 1
(Only for EWAQ80-100/240-260)
(Only for EWYQ80-100/230-250)
K21M, K22M
compressor contactor for circuit 2
K23F, K24F
fan contactor for circuit 2
K23S, K24S
fan overcurrent relay for circuit 2
K25F
fan contactor for circuit 2
(Only for EWAQ180-210/240-260)
(Only for EWYQ180-210/230-250)
1–120
Part 1 – System Outline
ESIE06-05
Wiring Layout
Part number
Description
K25S
fan overcurrent relay for circuit 2
1
(Only for EWAQ180-210/240-260)
(Only for EWYQ180-210/230-250)
K26F
fan contactor for circuit 2
(Only for EWAQ/240-260)
(Only for EWYQ230-250)
K26S
fan overcurrent relay for circuit 2
(Only for EWAQ/240-260)
(Only for EWYQ230-250)
M1P
**
pump motor 1 (only for OPSP/ OPHP/OPSC/OPTP/OPTC)
M2P
**
pump motor 2 (only for /OPTC)
M11C, M12C
compressor motors circuit 1
M13F, M14F
fan motors circuit 1
M15F
fan motors circuit 1
3
4
(Only for EWAQ80-100/180-210/240-260)
(Only for EWYQ80-100/180-210/230-250)
M16F
fan motors circuit 1
5
(Only for EWAQ80-100/240-260)
(Only for EWYQ80-100/230-250)
M21C, M22C
compressor motors circuit 2
M23F, M24F
fan motors circuit 2
M25F
fan motors circuit 2
(Only for EWAQ180-100/240-260)
(Only for EWYQ180-100/230-250)
M26F
fan motors circuit 2
(Only for EWAQ240-260)
(Only for EWYQ230-250)
M1F
Q1T
Q11C, Q12C
switchbox fanmotor
**
thermostat (OP10)
For EWAQ130/EWYQ130:
thermal protector compressor circuit 1
For EWAQ80-100/150/180-210/240-260:
For EWYQ80-100/150/180-210/230-250:
electronic protection module compressor circuit 1
Q21C, Q22C
For EWAQ130/EWYQ130:
thermal protector compressor circuit 2
For EWAQ150/ 180-210/240-260:
For EWYQ150/180-210/230-250:
electronic protection module compressor circuit 2
Part 1 – System Outline
1–121
Wiring Layout
11
Part number
Description
R1T
ambient temperature sensor
R2T
inlet water temperature sensor
R3T
outlet water temperature sensor
R8T
3
4
5
ESIE06-05
*
temperature sensor for changeable analog input
R14T
suction temperature sensor circuit 1
R15T, R25T
discharge temperature sensor circuit 1
R16T
coil temperature sensor circuit 1 (only for EWYQ)
R17T
refrigerant piping temperature sensor circuit 1
R18T, R38T
heating suction temperature sensor circuit 1, circuit 2 (only EWYQ)
R28T, R48T
heating suction temperature sensor circuit 1, circuit 2 (only EWYQ80-100/230-250)
R26T
coil temperature sensor circuit 1(only for EQWYQ80-100/230-250)
R34T
suction temperature sensor circuit 2
R35T, R45T
discharge temperature sensor circuit 2
R36T
coil temperature sensor circuit 2 (only for EWYQ)
R37T
refrigerant piping temperature sensor circuit 2
R46T
coil temperature sensor circuit 2 (only for EWYQ)
S1A-S3A (A*P)
PCB dipswitch
S1L
flowswitch
S1M
main isolator switch
S1PH, S2PH
high pressure switch circuit 1, circuit 2
S1S-S5S
*
switch for changeable digital input (remote on/off, C/H, ...)
S1T
**
thermal contact (OPIF)
S2M
#
heatertape isolator switch
T1A
**
current transducer (OP57)
T1V
**
voltage transducer (OP57)
TR1
TR1A
transfo control circuit (400V/230V)
**
V1C
V1F, V2F
current measurement transfo (OP57)
Ferrite core
**
noise filter circuit 1, circuit 2 (OPIF)
(Only for EWAQ130-150/180-210)
(Only for EWYQ130-150/180-210)
V2C
1–122
**
Ferrite core (EKACPG)
X*A (A*P)
PCB terminal
X*Y
connector
X1M (A*P)
PCB terminal strip
Part 1 – System Outline
ESIE06-05
Wiring Layout
Part number
Description
Y1R, Y2R
reverse valve circuit 1, circuit 2 (only EWYQ)
Y11E
electronic expansion valve cooling circuit 1
Y12E
electronic expansion valve heating circuit 1 (only EWYQ)
Y13E
electronic expansion valve heating circuit 1 (only EWYQ80-100/230-250)
Y21E
electronic expansion valve cooling circuit 2
Y22E
electronic expansion valve heating circuit 2 (only EWYQ)
Y23E
electronic expansion valve heating circuit 2 (only EWYQ 230-250)
1
3
4
5
Part 1 – System Outline
1–123
1–124
2
V2C
MODBUS
DICN
EKACPG
ON
OFF
A4P
TERM
S3A
A02P
X52A
OFF
HDP ON
For S3A setting
see installation manual EKACPG
S1A
ADDRESS=1
H1P
H2P
HAP
HBP
ON
X53A
X1M
F1
HCP
F2
+
RS485
-
OFF
OFF
X1M
HEP
TERM
S2A
ADDRESS=MAIN
TERM=ON
ON
HBP
HAP
TERM
S2A
S1A
MAIN
SUB
A01P
HAP
X51A
ACS
3
V1C
A11P
1
A73P
X88A
ACS
A72P
X88A
ACS
A71P
X88A
ACS
DS1
OFF
X1M
*
DS1
X89A
X89A
*
HAP
*=
X89A
A4P
only
for EWYQ
230-250
only
for EWYQ
shortcut on last
EEV PCB (319)
*
OFF ADDRESS=3
ON
HAP
OFF ADDRESS=2
ON
HAP
OFF ADDRESS=1
ON
ADDRESS=MAIN
TERM=OFF
ON
HBP
HAP
TERM
S2A
S1A
MAIN
SUB
5
1
EKRUPG
ON
4
+
RS485
DC 24V
GND
OFF
OFF
ON
X53A
S1A
ADDRESS=2
H1P
H2P
HAP
HBP
TERM
S2A
X52A
ADDRESS=SUB
TERM=ON
ON
OFF
HBP
HAP
TERM
S2A
S1A
MAIN
SUB
3
+
RS485
DC 24V
GND
X1M
A5P
= DIPSWITCH
A21P
3.3.3
+
RS485
DC 24V
GND
11
Std
Wiring Layout
ESIE06-05
PCB interconnection diagram
Part 1 – System Outline
ESIE06-05
3.3.4
Wiring Layout
PCB I/O overview & fuses
1
Main PCB (A11P)
Part 1 – System Outline
X12A (1-3-5)
DI: Reverse phase detection (L1-L2-L3) c1
X4A
DI: High pressure switch c1
X5A
DI: Compressor interclock 1 c1
X6A
DI: Compressor interlock 2 c2
X7A
DI: Fan overcurrent relay Fanstep 1 c1
X8A
DI: Fan overcurrent relay Fanstep 2 c1
X9A
DI: Fan overcurrent relay Fanstep 3 c1
X27A
not used
X29A (3-4)
not used
X30A
DI: Flow switch
X31A
DI: Pump interlock
X32A (3-4)
Ch DI 1: function not pre-defined
X32A (1-2)
Ch DI 2: function not pre-defined
X13A
DO: Compressor contactor 1 c1
X14A
DO: Compressor contactor 2 c1
X15A
DO: Heatertape
X16A
DO: Pump contactor
X17A
DO: Reverse valve c1 (Only for EWYQ)
X19A (1-3)
DO: Fanstep 1 c1
X19A (5-7)
DO: Fanstep 2 c1
X20A
DO: Fanstep 3 c1
X22A
Ch DO1: “SAFETY + W. (NO)” (def)
X24A
Ch DO2: “GEN. OPERATION” (def)
X25A
Ch DO3: function not pre-defined
X33A
AI: Ambient sensor
X34A
AI: Inlet water sensor
X35A
AI: Outlet water sensor
X36A
AI: Suction temperature sensor c1
X37A
AI: Refrigerant piping temperature sensor c1
X38A
AI: Coil temperature sensor 1 c1 (only for EWYQ)
X39A
AI: Coil temperature sensor 2 c1 (only for EWYQ)
X40A
AI: Discharge temperature sensor 1 c1
3
4
5
1–125
Wiring Layout
11
3
ESIE06-05
X41A
AI: Discharge temperature sensor 2 c1
X42A
AI: High pressure sensor c1
X43A
AI: Low pressure sensor c1
X44A
AI: Current measurement (OP57)
X45A
AI: Voltage measurement (OP57)
HAP, HBP
LED (service monitor green)
H1P, H2P
LED (service monitor red)
S1A
dipswitch (address)
S2A
dipswitch (terminal resistor)
Extension PCB (A01P)
4
5
X63A
Ch DO6: Function not pre-defined
X64A (1-3)
Ch DO4: Function not pre-defined
X64A (5-7)
Ch DO5: Function not pre-defined
X65A (1-2)
Ch DI3: Function not pre-defined
X65A (3-4)
Ch DI4: Function not pre-defined
X66A
AI: Heating suction temperature sensor 1 c1
(Only for EWYQ)
X67A
AI: Heating suction temperature sensor 2 c1
(Only for EWYQ)
X68A
Ch AI2: Function not pre-defined
X69A
Ch AI1: Function not pre-defined
X70A
Ch AI4: Function not pre-defined
X71A
Ch AI3: Function not pre-defined
X72A (3-4)
not used
X73A
Ch AO1: Function not pre-defined
X74A (4-5)
not used
HAP, HBP
LED (service monitor green)
Wired remote controller PCB (A4P, A5P)
1–126
HAP, HBP
LED (service monitor green)
S1A
dipswitch (address)
S2A
dipswitch (terminal resistor)
Part 1 – System Outline
ESIE06-05
Wiring Layout
1
Communication PCB (A02P)
HCP, HDP, HEP
LED (service monitor green)
S3A
dipswitch (terminal resistor)
EEV PCB (A71P)
X86A
Y11E Electronic expansion valve
X87A
Y21E Electronic expansion valve
HAP
LED (service monitor green)
DS1
dipswitch (address)
3
EEV PCB (A72P) (Only EWYQ)
X86A
Y12E Electronic expansion valve (only EWYQ)
X87A
Y22E Electronic expansion valve (only EWYQ)
HAP
LED (service monitor green)
DS1
dipswitch (address)
4
5
Main PCB (A21P)
Part 1 – System Outline
X12A (1-3-5)
DI: Reverse phase detection (L1-L2-L3) c2
X4A
DI: High pressure switch c2
X5A
DI: Compressor interclock 1 c2
X6A
DI: Compressor interlock 2 c2
X7A
DI: Fan overcurrent relay Fanstep 1 c2
X8A
DI: Fan overcurrent relay Fanstep 2 c2
X9A
DI: Fan overcurrent relay Fanstep 3 c2
X27A
not used
X13A
DO: Compressor contactor 1 c2
X14A
DO:Compressor contactor 2 c2
X17A
DO: Reverse valve c2 (Only for EWYQ)
X19A (1-3)
DO: Fanstep 1 c2
X19A (5-7)
DO: Fanstep 2 c2
X20A
DO: Fanstep 3 c2
X34A
AI: Heating suction temperature sensor 1 c2 (Only for EWYQ)
X35A
AI: Heating suction temperature sensor 2 c2 (Only for EWYQ)
1–127
Wiring Layout
11
3
ESIE06-05
X36A
AI: Suction temperature sensor c2
X37A
AI: Refrigerant piping temperature sensor c2
X38A
AI: Coil temperature sensor 1 c2 (only for EWYQ)
X39A
AI: Coil temperature sensor 2 c2 (only for EWYQ)
X40A
AI: Discharge temperature sensor 1 c2
X41A
AI: Discharge temperature sensor 2 c2
X42A
AI: High pressure sensor c2
X43A
AI: Low pressure sensor c2
HAP, HBP
LED (service monitor green)
H1P, H2P
LED (service monitor red)
S1A
dipswitch (address)
S2A
dipswitch (terminal resistor)
4
EEV PCB (A73P) (Only EWYQ230-250)
5
X86A
Y13E Electronic expansion valve (only EWYQ230-250)
X87A
Y23E Electronic expansion valve (only EWYQ230-250)
HAP
LED (service monitor green)
DS1
dipswitch (address)
EWAQ130
EWAQ150
EWAQ180
EWAQ210
EWAQ240
EWAQ260
EWYQ130
EWYQ150
EWYQ180
EWYQ210
EWYQ230
EWYQ250
200gL/gG
200gL/ gG
250gL/gG
250gL/gG
300gL/gG
355gL/gG
500V
500V
500V
500V
500V
500V
F1U
T 5A/250V
T 5A/250V
T 5A/250V
T 5A/250V
T 5A/250V
T 5A/250V
F4, F5
10gL/250
V
10gL/250
V
10gL/250
V
10gL/250
V
10gL/250
V
10gL/250
V
-
-
-
-
-
-
C 4A/250V
C 4A/250V
C 4A/250V
C 4A/250V
C 4A/250V
C 4A/250V
FUSES
F1-F3
Circuit breakers
F8B (OPIF)
F9B
Circuit breaker and motor protector settings
F6B
1–128
2,30A
2,30A
2,30A
2,30A
2,30A
2,30A
F11B, F22B
36A
40A
52A
52A
66A
66A
F12B, F21B
36A
40A
52A
52A
66A
66A
Part 1 – System Outline
ESIE06-05
Wiring Layout
F16B
6,8A
6,8A
8,6A
8,6A
8,6A
8,6A
(OPSP/
OPSC/
OPTP/OPTC)
12A
12A
16,3A
16,3A
16,3A
16,3A
6,8A
6,8A
8,6A
8,6A
8,6A
8,6A
F14B, F24B
3,5A
5,1A
7,6A
7,6A
7,0A
6,4A
F15B, F25B
(OPIF)
5,6A
7,9A
7,9A
7,9A
9,5A
9,5A
K13S-K16S
1,6A
2,3A
2,3A
2,3A
1,6A
1,6A
1
F16B (OPHP)
F17B
(OPTP/
OPTC)
K23S-K26S
3
4
5
Part 1 – System Outline
1–129
Wiring Layout
11
3.3.5
ESIE06-05
PCB changeable I/O overview
Refer to the installation manual for instructions how to configure changeable I/O.
Changeable digital input (4 available)
3
Changeable analog output (1 available)
-None
-None
-Status
-Unit capacity (mA,V)
-Dual setpoint
-Details of types:
-Remote on-off
Type mA: 0..20mA / 4..20mA
-Capacity limitation 25%, 50%, 75%, or setting
Type V: 0-1V / 0-5V / o-10V
-Low noise (only for OPIF)
-Free cooling signal
-Fan forced on
4
Changeable digital output (6 or 5 available
depending on unit)
5
Changeable analog input (4 available)
-None (open)
-None
-Closed
-Status (mA, V, NTC*, DI)
-2nd pump
-Floating setpoint (mA, V, NTC*)
-100% capacity
-Water temperature measurement (NTC*)
-Full capacity
-Changeable DI, refer to Ch DI for possibilities (DI)
-Free cooling
- Details of types:
-General operation
Type mA: 0..20mA / 4..20mA
-Safety + warning NO
(internal 5V or external power supply)
-Safety + warning NC (only for ch DO1)
Type V: 0-1V / 0-5V / 0-10V
-Safety NO (excluding warning)
Type DI: DI (5V detection)
-Safety NC (excluding warning) (only for ch
DO1)
-C1, C2 Safety NO
-Warning NO
- C1, C2 operation
- Cooling (only EWYQ)
- Heating (only EWYQ)
- Defrost (only EWYQ)
1–130
*: for allowed NTC types and how to configure the software please contact your local
dealer.
Part 1 – System Outline
Part 1 – System Outline
M23F
M24F
M25F
M15F
M24F
M23F
EWYQ 180-210
M22C
M12C
EWYQ 130-150
M21C
M11C
M12C
M22C
M11C
M21C
M16F
M26F
M15F
M25F
EWYQ 230-250
EWAQ 240-260
M14F
M13F
TOP VIEW OF UNIT (COMP+ SB)
M13F
M14F
EWAQ 180-210
M22C
SWITCHBOX
EWAQ 130-150
M21C
M12C
M24F
M23F
M11C
M14F
SWITCHBOX
3.3.6
M13F
TOP VIEW OF UNIT (FANS)
ESIE06-05
Wiring Layout
Unit outlook
1
1–131
3
4
5
SWITCHBOX
Wiring Layout
11
3.3.7
ESIE06-05
Switchbox outlook (typical)
3
4
5
1–132
Part 1 – System Outline
Part 1 – System Outline
S1M
3
4
L2
L3
5
6
Power supply
3ò50Hz 400V
L1
F1 F2 F3
1
2
502
32.4
PE
12
/
T1A
32.4
300A/5A
11
/
T1A
OP57
TR1A
501
16.0
16.0
L1C2./ 23.0
L2C2./ 23.0
L3C2./ 23.0
L2C1./
L3C1./
F16B
1
2
3
I
I
M1P
X17Y
M
V
U
3ò
6
1
4
3
2
1
3
I
3ò
4
I
U
M
3
V
4
1
2
4
I
3
2
1
2
1
M1P
22.7
K1P
K1P
X26Y
X26Y
X26Y
OPSP/OPHP
OPTP
1
2
3
F16B
X26Y
X26Y
X26Y
OPSC
OPTC
PE
W
7
6
5
6
5
I
12
14
11
PE
W
6
5
6
5
11
14
F17B
F17B
M2P
X17Y
K2P
I
M2P
43.3
K2P
I
M
3ò
I
3ò
M
I
X17Y
U
4
2
1
2
1
U
2
1
2
1
9
V
3
4
3
4
3
V
4
3
4
3
I
I
PE
W
10
6
5
6
5
PE
W
6
5
6
5
11
9
14
11
14
2
2
S2M
max.
1kW
E5H
4
3
2
1
2
F5
12
OPSP/OPTP
/OPHP
E4H
Q1T
OPBT
E6H
OPSP/OPTP/OPHP
12
MODELS WITHOUT OPSP/OPTP/OPHP
E3H
PE
24
X10Y
2
0
23
OP10
X10Y
1
R2
R1
0
Power supply
1ò50Hz 230V
F4
21.9
K3A
1
3.3.8
2
L1C1/ 20.0
L2C1/ 20.0
L3C1/ 20.0
ESIE06-05
Wiring Layout
Main power supply
1
1–133
3
4
5
I
32 33
230 VAC
21.0
230 VAC
21.0
X2A:2
65
64
60
61
21.0
SL
A11P
1
SN
/
A11P
SL
A11P /
F1U
X18Y
F9B
62
X1A:1
SL
A11P
X2A
I
34
5
6
SN
A11P
X2A
X2A:1
5A
F1U
X1A:3
31
4
400 VAC
I
5
101
X3A
A11P
TR1
1
2
3
102
I
1
63
F6B
30.0
30.0
E1
OP57
12
/
T1V
X77A:3
1–134
3
1
2
X11Y
X11Y
32.6
151
X2A:1
X2A:2
X1A:1
24.0
SL
A21P
X2A
230 VAC
24.0
5A
F1U
X1A:3
SN
A21P
X2A
X3A
A21P
11
/
T1V
X11Y
32.6
A71P
X77A:1
5
152
24.0
SL
A21P
2
SN
/
A21P
SL
A21P /
F1U
X18Y
4
203
30.5
30.5
E1
X77A:3
only for EWYQ
3
253
3
1
2
X11Y
X11Y
X11Y
A72P
X77A:3
X77A:1
A73P
only for EWYQ
230-250
E1
3.3.9
X77A:1
11
15.2 / L2C1.
15.2 / L3C1.
Wiring Layout
ESIE06-05
Trafo & PCB power supply
Part 1 – System Outline
Part 1 – System Outline
F11B
I
Q11C
M11C
K11M
15.2 / L1C1
15.2 / L2C1
15.2 / L3C1
U
M
3~
V
PE
W
6
5
4
3
1
2
6
I
5
4
I
3
2
1
14
11
F12B
Q12C
M12C
K12M
I
U
I
4
3
4
3
V
M
3~
2
1
2
1
I
PE
W
6
5
6
5
14
11
R1P
X12A X12A X12A
:1
:3
:5
L1
L2
L3
A11P
I
K13F
M13F
X14Y
K13S
F14B
M
X14Y
3ò
I
U2
V1
W2
U1
4
3
4
4
2
I
3
1
2
1
2
2
1
4
PE
X14Y
M
3ò
U2
V1
14
4
3
4
EWYQ 180-210/230-250
Only for
EWAQ 180-210/240-260
M15F
13
2
W2
X14Y
K15S
1
2
U1
96
95
K15F
V2
22.1
W1
36
6
5
6
6
5
16
PE
M14F
7
2
5
6
9
W1
V2
3
4
8
V1
U2
22.3
10
PE
6
4
X14Y
M
3ò
W2
X14Y
K14S
1
2
U1
96
95
K14F
V2
22.2
W1
15
6
5
6
96
95
EWYQ 230-250
U2
V1
20
4
3
4
X14Y
M
3ò
W2
U1
19
2
1
2
Only for
EWAQ 240-260
M16F
X14Y
K16S
K16F
22.3
22
PE
V2
W1
21
6
5
6
96
95
ESIE06-05
Wiring Layout
3.3.10 Circuit 1: compressor & fan
1
3
1–135
4
5
30.3
30.3
16.1 /
K1R
A11P
30.4
K1A
SN
A11P
X2A
1
3
5
13
21
2
4
6
14
22
A2
A1
20.0
20.1
20.1
42.0
.5
X13A:3
X13A:1
14
11
K2R
101
1
3
5
13
21
K12M
204
203
102
2
4
6
14
22
A2
A1
20.2
20.2
20.2
42.1
.6
X14A:1
X14A:2
102
102
101
Only
for EWYQ
K5R
X10Y
Y1R
X10Y
4
3
X17A:1
X17A:2
101
K11M
X10Y
E11HC
X10Y
8
6
PE
22
21
K12M
7
PE
X10Y
E12HC
X10Y
22
21
9
2
N
L1
6
X13Y
X13Y
Q12C
Only for
EWAQ 150/180-210/240-260
EWYQ 150/180-210/230-250
X12Y
Q11C
X12Y
3
K11M
SL
A11P
16.2 /
211
SL
A11P
X2A
212
1–136
105
5
106
4
107
6
N
L1
1
101
R1
K3A
K3R
A11P
203
102
X15A:4
SN
A11P
X2A
R2 15.7
A2
A1
/
22.0
22.0
SL
/
A11P
X15A:7
/ 22.0
SL
A11P
X2A
11
16.1 /
Wiring Layout
ESIE06-05
3.3.11 Circuit 1: control compressors
Part 1 – System Outline
213
SL
A11P
SN
A11P
X2A
21.9 /
21.9 /
K7R
101
2
4
6
K13F
20.5
K13S
111
220
1 20.5
3 20.5
5 20.5
A2
A1
X19A:3
X19A:1
111
96
95
110
K15F
K8R
30.3
2
4
6
EWYQ 180-210/230-250
Only for
EWAQ 180-210/240-260
K1*S
/
A11P
EWYQ 180-210/230-250
Only for
EWAQ 180-210/240-260
20.6
K15S
203
203
102
116
221
A11P
SL
A11P
X2A
1 20.6
3 20.6
5 20.6
A2
A1
X19A:7
X19A:5
96
116
95
115
K2*S
/
A11P
2
4
6
K14F
K9R
30.3
20.9
K16S
20.8
K14S
1 20.7
3 20.7
5 20.8
A2
A1
X20A:1
X20A:2
96
121
95
96
95
120
Only for
EWAQ 240-260
K16F
30.3
2
4
6
EWYQ 230-250
Only for
EWAQ 240-260
K3*S
/
A11P
EWYQ 130-150/180-210
EWYQ 230-250
Shortcut for
EWAQ 130-150/180-210
222
122
121
222
1 20.8
3 20.8
5 20.9
A2
A1
OPSP/OPTP/OPSC/
OPTC/OPHP
K4R
A11P
X27Y
F16B
X27Y
12
1
3
5
13
X27Y
K1P
X27Y
13
Part 1 – System Outline
21.9 /
2
4
6
14
101
1
A2
A1
3
13
15.3
15.3
15.4
40.1
X16A:1
X16A:3
12
4
14
11
2
203
101
203
102
SN
A11P
X2A
/
SL
/
A11P
/
43.3
43.2
ESIE06-05
Wiring Layout
3.3.12 Circuit 1: control fans
1
3
4
5
1–137
1–138
Q21C
M21C
U
M
3~
V
4
3
1
I
PE
W
6
5
6
14
11
F22B
Q22C
M22C
K22M
I
U
I
4
3
4
3
V
M
3~
2
1
2
1
I
PE
W
6
5
6
5
14
11
R2P
X12A X12A X12A
:1
:3
:5
L1
L2
L3
A21P
I
K23F
M23F
X24Y
K23S
F24B
X24Y
3ò
M
I
U2
V1
W2
U1
4
3
4
4
2
I
3
1
2
1
2
2
1
25.1
36
PE
V2
W1
3
6
5
6
6
5
96
95
U2
V1
14
4
3
4
M24F
X24Y
K24S
U2
V1
8
4
3
4
X24Y
3ò
M
W2
U1
7
2
1
2
10
PE
V2
W1
9
6
5
6
96
95
M26F
X24Y
K26S
K26F
U2
V1
20
4
3
4
X24Y
3ò
M
W2
U1
19
2
1
2
EWYQ 230-250
96
95
K24F
Only for
EWAQ 240-260
16
PE
V2
W1
15
6
5
6
25.2
EWYQ 180-210/230-250
X24Y
3ò
M
W2
U1
13
2
1
2
25.3
Only for
EWAQ 180-210/240-260
M25F
X24Y
K25S
K25F
4
2
4
I
2
5
3
K21M
I
3
5
F21B
1
30.8
30.8
25.3
22
PE
V2
W1
21
6
5
6
96
95
11
15.2 / L1C2.
15.2 / L2C2.
15.2 / L3C2.
Wiring Layout
ESIE06-05
3.3.13 Circuit 2: compressor & fan
Part 1 – System Outline
16.4 /
SN
A21P
X2A
1
3
5
13
21
K21M
K1R
A21P
30.8
K2A
261
SL
A21P
2
4
6
14
22
A2
A1
23.0
23.1
23.1
42.2
.5
X13A:3
X13A:1
14
11
K2R
151
1
3
5
13
21
K22M
254
253
262
16.5 /
2
4
6
14
22
A2
A1
23.2
23.2
23.2
42.3
.6
X14A:1
X14A:2
152
152
K5R
151
X10Y
Only for EWYQ
Y2R
X10Y
155
152
16
15
X17A:1
X17A:2
151
K21M
X10Y
E21HC
X10Y
156
SL
A21P
X2A
19
PE
17
22
21
K22M
PE
18
22
21
X10Y
E22HC
X10Y
157
Part 1 – System Outline
16.4 /
20
2
N
L1
1
X23Y
X23Y
Q22C
Only for
EWAQ 150/180-210/240-260
EWYQ 150/180-210/230-250
X22Y
Q21C
X22Y
2
N
L1
1
151
253
152
/
25.0
25.0
SL
/
A21P
SN
A21P
X2A
/ 25.0
SL
A21P
X2A
ESIE06-05
Wiring Layout
3.3.14 Circuit 2: control compressors
1
3
4
5
1–139
24.9 /
151
2
4
6
K7R
K23F
23.5
K23S
A21P
SN
A21P
X2A
SL
A21P
24.9 /
1 23.5
3 23.5
5 23.5
A2
A1
X19A:3
X19A:1
161
96
95
160
K8R
K25F
30.8
2
4
6
EWYQ 180-210/230-250
Only for
EWAQ 180-210/240-260
K1*S
/
A21P
EWYQ 180-210/230-250
Only for
EWAQ 180-210/240-260
23.6
K25S
253
253
152
166
SL
A21P
X2A
161
270
1 23.6
3 23.6
5 23.6
A2
A1
X19A:7
X19A:5
96
166
95
165
K2*S
/
A21P
2
4
6
K9R
K24F
30.8
23.9
K26S
23.8
K24S
172
171
1–140
271
1 23.7
3 23.7
5 23.8
A2
A1
X20A:1
X20A:2
96
171
95
96
95
170
K26F
30.8
2
4
6
EWYQ 230-250
Only for
EWAQ 240-260
K3*S
/
A21P
EWYQ 130-150/180-210
EWYQ 230-250
Shortcut for
EWAQ 130-150/180-210
Only for
EWAQ 240-260
1 23.8
3 23.8
5 23.9
A2
A1
5
272
151
253
152
3
272
/
/
/
11
24.9 /
Wiring Layout
ESIE06-05
3.3.15 Circuit 2: control fans
4
Part 1 – System Outline
SL
A11P
F1U
SN
A11P
16.1 /
16.1 /
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
CIRCUIT 1
X11A:2
X11:1
X10A:1
X10A:3
X9A:3
X9A:1
X8A:3
X8A:1
X7A:2
X7A:1
X6A:1
X6A:3
X5A:1
X5A:2
X4A:3
X4A:1
236
121
116
111
235
234
233
232
231
239
230
X12Y
4
X13Y
K3*S
/
A11P
K2*S
/
A11P
11
K1A
22.4
22.2
22.1
3
X13Y
20.2
F12B
4
5
14 21.1
A2
A1
5'
14 For EWAQ 130
EWYQ 130
11
3
11
14
11
10
X12Y
K1*S
/
A11P
5'
5
20.1
F11B
X10Y
S1PH P>
X10Y
11/M1
4
3
14/M2
X13Y
Q12C
X13Y
11/M1
4
3
14/M2
For EWAQ 150/
180-210/240-260
EWYQ 150/
180-210/230-250
X12Y
Q11C
X12Y
237
238
Part 1 – System Outline
16.5 /
16.5 /
A21P
SN
A21P
SL
A21P
F1U
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
CIRCUIT 2
X11A:2
X11:1
X10A:1
X10A:3
X9A:3
X9A:1
X8A:3
X8A:1
X7A:2
X7A:1
X6A:1
X6A:3
X5A:1
X5A:2
X4A:3
X4A:1
286
171
166
161
285
284
283
282
281
289
280
6'
6
X22Y
25.2
25.4
K2*S
/
A21P
K3*S
/
A21P
11
K2A
25.1
6
X23Y
K1*S
/
A21P
3
X23Y
23.2
F22B
4
6
X22Y
Q21C
X22Y
11/M1
4
6
14/M2
X23Y
X23Y
Q22C
14 24.1
A2
A1
6'
11/M1
6
3
14/M2
For EWAQ 150/
180-210/240-260
14 For EWAQ 130 EWYQ 150/
EWYQ 130 180-210/230-250
11
6
11
14
22
21
X22Y
23.1
F21B
X10Y
S2PH P>
X10Y
287
288
A11P
ESIE06-05
Wiring Layout
3.3.16 Control circuit (DI 230V)
1
3
4
5
1–141
X86A:1 2
X88A:1
A71P
X15Y
3
V1C
4
Y11E
M
3
2
36
4
X88A:2
3
5
3
X87A:1 2
X89A:1
X18Y
X25Y
3
*
DI
4
Y21E
M
3
36
1
4
5
X89A:2
315
316
S1L
X86A:1 2
X88A:1
A72P
X16Y
5
X30A:1
X15Y
3
DI
4
only for EWYQ
Y12E
M
7
6
5
8
X88A:2
6
X30A:2
5
X1B:1 X1B:2 X1B:3 X1B:4 X1B:5
X87A:1 2
X89A:1
X25Y
3
*
4
Y22E
M
7
6
5
8
5
X89A:2
317
318
X1B:1 X1B:2 X1B:3 X1B:4 X1B:5
A01P
BLU
X29A:3
BLU
X29A:4
BLU
X51A:2
X86A:1 2
X15Y
3
only for EWYQ 230-250
M
11
10
12
5
X2B:3
4
9
Y13E
X2B:3
X88A:2
X2B:1
X88A:1
A73P
X2B:1
BLK
X51A:1
313
470
RED
471
WHT
472
248
476
314
473
BLK
GRN
475
RED
477
WHT
481
249
478
BLK
GRN
485
244
480
RED
486
245
WHT
482
WHT
RED
483
BLK
GRN
BLU
WHT
487
GRN
488
BLK
490
RED
491
WHT
492
GRN
WHT
493
BLK
X87A:1 2
X89A:1
X25Y
3
*
319
X1M:+
A4P
1
X52A:1
X19Y
495
4
*=
M
12
3
RS485
X1M:24V
shortcut on last
EEV PCB (319)
11
10
5
X89A:2
X1M:-
2
X52A:3
RS485
X52A:2
9
Y23E
RED
496
302
302
301
301
497
GRN
WHT
498
BLK
303
303
1–142
X1M:GND
4
X52A:4
304
5
304
4
X53A:2
RS485
X53A:1
A21P
X53A:2
RS485
X53A:1
311
3
312
11
A11P
Wiring Layout
ESIE06-05
3.3.17 Control circuit and EEV
Part 1 – System Outline
B1PH
X15Y
13
X42A:1
-t∞
A11P
R2T
-t∞
2
14
X42A:3
AI
X42A:2
1
X34A:2
AI
X34A:1
402
R1T
8
400
7
401
X16Y
X33A:3
AI
15
B1PL
16
17
X43A:3
18
X43A:4
15.1 /
X44A:1
11
T1A
32
12
/
T1A
15.1
27
AI
X44A:4
16.3 /
28
11
T1V
32
X45A:4
12
/
T1V
16.3
T1V
0-500V/0-20mA
31
12
X45A:3
-t∞
R25T
23
24
415
22
X41A:2
X40A:2
AI
X41A:1
416
AI
AI
X45A:2
21
11
X45A:1
-t∞
R15T
X15Y
X40A:1
X39A:2
Only for
EWYQ 230-250
-t∞
R26T
X44A:3
AI
26
X39A:1
X38A:2
411
X44A:2
AI
412
T1A
0-5A/0-20mA
31
12
11
OP57
25
Only for
EWYQ
-t∞
X15Y
R16T
30
X38A:1
-t∞
29
X37A:2
AI
X37A:1
R17T
20
X36A:2
AI
AI
X43A:2
19
X15Y
X43A:1
-t∞
X42A:4
R14T
X15Y
-t∞
4
R3T
3
X36A:1
X35A:2
AI
X35A:1
404
452
X33A:1
450
WHT
405
RED
403
451
BLK
406
453
WHT
408
455
407
454
BLK
409
RED
410
501
504
413
60
503
502
414
513
61
417
514
33
Only for
EWYQ 230-250
-t∞
Only for
EWYQ
R28T
32
-t∞
31
R18T
X15Y
34
X67A:2
AI
X67A:1
X66A:2
X66A:1
418
AI
419
A01P
420
Part 1 – System Outline
421
A11P
ESIE06-05
Wiring Layout
3.3.18 Circuit 1: sensors
1
3
4
5
1–143
13
X42A:1
X25Y
B2PH
A21P
Only for
EWYQ
-t∞
R38T
31
424
X25Y
14
X42A:3
15
X42A:4
Only for
EWYQ 230-250
-t∞
33
AI
B2PL
AI
16
17
18
X43A:4
20
X36A:2
X43A:3
AI
19
X43A:2
X25Y
X43A:1
-t∞
R34T
X25Y
425
34
X36A:1
X35A:2
427
X35A:1
R48T
AI
X42A:2
32
422
X25Y
X34A:2
AI
423
X34A:1
457
BLK
456
WHT
458
RED
426
459
WHT
460
BLK
-t∞
-t∞
Only for
EWYQ
R36T
R37T
25
26
27
only for
EWYQ 230-250
-t∞
R46T
X25Y
28
-t∞
R35T
X25Y
21
22
-t∞
R45T
X25Y
23
24
428
X25Y
429
30
430
29
431
X25Y
X41A:2
AI
X41A:1
X40A:2
X38A:2
AI
X40A:1
X39A:2
X39A:1
432
X38A:1
AI
433
X37A:2
AI
434
X37A:1
AI
435
1–144
436
5
461
4
RED
3
437
11
A21P
Wiring Layout
ESIE06-05
3.3.19 Circuit 2: sensors
Part 1 – System Outline
7
X27Y
14
8
45
X27Y
14
13
7
44
OPSC/OPTC/OPSP/OPTP/OPHP
22.7
K1P
OPSP/OPSC/OPHP
OPTP/OPTC
X27Y
8
43.3
K2P
45
MODELS WITHOUT OPSC/OPTC/OPSP/OPTP/OPHP
OBLIGATORY
22.7
13
44
13
7
S1S
14
7
44
K1P
X27Y
X31A:3
45
Example: remote
start/stop
14
13
47
X32A:4
46
46
X32A:3
47
X31A:1
S2S
Example: remote
cool/heat
14
13
49
X32A:2
48
48
X32A:1
49
Changeable
DI2
S3S
14
13
50
X65A:1
51
S4S
14
13
52
53
X65A:4
X65A:3
Changeable
DI4
X65A:2
Changeable
DI3
50
Changeable
DI1
51
DI
A01P
52
Part 1 – System Outline
53
A11P
ESIE06-05
Wiring Layout
3.3.20 Fieldwiring DI, changeable DI
1
3
4
5
1–145
8
-t∞
R8T
Ch. AI1
example:
temp. sensor
8
73
74
75
0
to
20mA
-
0
to
20mA
-
Example
mA measurement
(External power supply)
+
75
+
74
Example
mA measurement
(5V power supply by PCB)
73
+
Ch. AI3
example:
V measurement
-
0
to
10VDC
78
S5S
14
13
79
Ch. AI4
example:
Switch
80
81
+
91
-
0
to
20mA or 10V
Example
mA output
V output
90
5V
X69A:1
70
77
IN
X69A:2
71
76
GND
X69A:3
72
72
5V
X68A:1
73
71
IN
X68A:2
74
70
X73A:2
X73A:1
GND
X70A:3
IN
X70A:2
5V
X70A:1
GND
X71A:3
IN
X71A:2
5V
X71A:1
GND
X68A:3
75
Changeable
AO1
76
Changeable
AI4
77
Changeable
AI3
78
Changeable
AI2
79
1–146
80
5
81
4
90
Changeable
AI1
3
91
11
A01P
Wiring Layout
ESIE06-05
3.3.21 Fieldwiring changeable AI/AO
Part 1 – System Outline
5
6
External
Power
supply
(ex 24VAC
or 230VAC)
4
14
13
External
Power
supply
(ex 24VAC
or 230VAC)
4
H12P
3
K12M
6
H11P
3
14
5
13
K21M
H21P
22
14
13
K22M
23
External
Power
supply
(ex 24VAC
or 230VAC)
22
K11M
23
25
External
Power
supply
(ex 24VAC
or 230VAC)
H22P
24
14
13
Operation
M22C
24
Operation
M21C
25
Operation
M12C
7
7
H1P
External
Power
supply
(ex 24VAC
or 230VAC)
8
X22A:1
Safety active = contact closed
No power = contact open
No safety = contact open
9
Alarm NO
Default
X22A:5
X22A:3
K12R
A11P
Changeable DO1
(Default: Alarm,
NO contact 8-9)
8
Operation
M11C
9
9
H1P
External
Power
supply
(ex 24VAC
or 230VAC)
7
8
Safety active = contact closed
No power = contact closed
No safety = contact open
9
Alarm NC
Software selection necessary
9
Changeable DO: Maximum load: 2A-230VAC, Minimum load: 10mA-5VDC
K14R
A11P
H2P
11
External
Power
supply
(ex 24VAC
or 230VAC)
10
X24A:1
X24A:2
Changeable DO2
(Default:
Gen. operation)
10
Part 1 – System Outline
11
AC15: max.3A-230V
ESIE06-05
Wiring Layout
3.3.22 Fieldwiring DO, changeable DO
1
3
4
5
1–147
4
3
K1P
X27Y
External
Power supply
(ex 24VAC
or 230VAC)
12
X16A:3
13
13
NOT FOR MODELS WITH
OPSC/OPTC/OPSP/OPTP/OPHP
K1S
X27Y
K4R
12
X16A:1
2
14
11
6
22.9
SL
A11P
X27Y
F17B
X27Y
14
1
5
15
22.9
1
3
5
13
2
4
6
14
SN
A11P
X2A
X27Y
K2P
X27Y
X25A:3
X25A:1
Changeable DO3
(Default: 2nd pump)
MODELS WITH OPTC/OPTP
10
K15R
A11P
14
A11P
15.5
15.5
15.5
40.2
15
X27Y
6
5
H3P
X27Y
External
Power
supply
(ex 24VAC
or 230VAC)
14
Changeable DO3
(no predefined function)
MODELS WITHOUT OPTC/OPTP
10
Changeable
DO3
15
K21R
A01P
16
DO
pump
H4P
External
Power
supply
(ex 24VAC
or 230VAC)
16
X64A:3
X64:1
Changeable
DO4
17
1–148
17
K22R
A01P
18
5
H5P
19
External
Power
supply
(ex 24VAC
or 230VAC)
18
X64A:7
X64A:5
Changeable
DO5
19
3
K20R
A01P
20
H6P
21
External
Power
supply
(ex 24VAC
or 230VAC)
20
X63A:3
X63A:1
Changeable
DO6
11
21
4
Ch. DO: Maximum load: 2A-230VAC, Minimum load: 10mA-5VDC
Wiring Layout
ESIE06-05
Part 1 – System Outline
ESIE06-05
3.4
Wiring Layout
Wiring layout: EWAQ080-100DAYN(N-P-B) and EWYQ080-100DAYN(N-P-B) with
OPIF
Introduction
This chapter gives a general overview of the PCB intercommunication, I/O overview, switchbox layout
and wiring of the EWAQ080-100DAYN(N-P-B) and EWYQ080-100DAYN(N-P-B) with option inverter
fans (OPIF).
Overview
This chapter contains the following topics:
Part 1 – System Outline
Page description
Page
3.4.1 Notes
1–150
3.4.2 Legend
1–152
3.4.3 PCB interconnection diagram
1–157
3.4.4 PCB I/O overview & fuses
1–158
3.4.5 PCB changeable I/O overview
1–162
3.4.6 Unit outlook
1–163
3.4.7 Switchbox outlook (typical)
1–164
3.4.8 Main power supply
1–165
3.4.9 Trafo & PCB power supply
1–166
3.4.10 Compressor & fan
1–167
3.4.11 Circuit 1: control compressors
1–168
3.4.12 Circuit 1: control fans
1–169
3.4.13 Control circuit (DI 230V)
1–170
3.4.14 Control circuit and EEV
1–171
3.4.15 Circuit 1: sensors
1–172
3.4.16 Fieldwiring DI, changeable DI
1–173
3.4.17 Fieldwiring changeable AI/AO
1–174
3.4.18 Fieldwiring DO, changeable DO
1–175
1
3
4
5
1–149
Wiring Layout
11
3.4.1
ESIE06-05
Notes
L1, L2, L3
: Main terminals
1-99
: Fieldwiring terminals
100-199
: Factory upwiring terminals
200-
: Internal wiring terminals
U-Z
: Main terminals in compressor switchbox
: Earth wiring
3
: Wire number 15
: Terminals number 15
4
: Field supply
: Option
5
: Not mounted in switchbox
: Wiring depending on model
: PCB
: Connection ** continues on page 12 column 2
!
: Pin against miswiring
: Several wiring possibilities
N-model
: unit with no options included
Y1R, Y2R reversing valves are activated in cooling mode.
1–150
Part 1 – System Outline
ESIE06-05
Wiring Layout
Factory installed:
❏
OP10
= Heater tape
❏
OP57
= A-meter, V-meter
❏
OPLN
= Low noise
1
(OPIF+ Compressorhousing)
User installed:
❏
OPTP
= Twinpump
❏
OPSC
= Single pump contactor
❏
OPTC
= Twin pump contactor
❏
OPIF
= Inverter fans for low ambient (-15°C)
❏
OPHP
= Hi ESP pump
❏
OPSP
= Single pump
❏
OPBT
= Buffertank
❏
EKACPG
= Address card including:
3
4
-RS485 (Integrated modbus)
-F1, F2 (DICN + DBACS Connection)
❏
EKRUPG
DI:
Digital input
DO:
Digital output
AI:
Analog input
AO:
Analog output
Ch:
Changeable (function can be selected by the customer)
Remote used interface
Definitions:
Part 1 – System Outline
5
1–151
Wiring Layout
11
3.4.2
ESIE06-05
Legend
Not included with standard unit
3
Not possible as option
Possible as option
Obligatory
#
##
Not obligatory
*
**
Part number
Description
A01P
PCB Extension
A02P
**
A4P
4
A5P
5
PCB wired remote controller
**
A11P, A21P
A13P, A23P
PCB Communication (EKACPG)
PCB wired remote controller (EKRUPG)
PCB main controller circuit 1, circuit 2
**
frequency inverter circuit 1, circuit 2 (OPIF)
A71P
PCB EEV driver
A72P
PCB EEV driver (only for EWYQ)
A73P
PCB EEV driver (only for EWYQ230-250)
B1PH, B2PH
high pressure sensor circuit 1, circuit 2
B1PL, B2PL
low pressure sensor circuit 1, circuit 2
DS1 (A*P)
PCB dipswitch
E1HS
**
switchbox heater with fan (OPIF) (only for EWAQ130-260 / EWYQ130-250)
E3H
**
heatertape (OP10)
E4H
**
heatertape (OP10) (only for OPSP/OPHP/OPTP)
E5H
*
fieldheater
E6H
**
buffertank heater (OP10) (only for OPBT)
E7H
**
switchbox heater (OPIF) (only for EWA/YQ80-100)
E11HC, E12HC
crankcase heater compressor circuit 1
E21HC, E22HC
crankcase heater compressor circuit 2
F1-F3
#
F1U (A*P)
F4, F5
fuse PCB
#
F6B
F8B
main fuses
fuses for heaters
autofuse for primary of TR1
**
autofuse for switchbox heater (OPIF)
F9B
autofuse for secondary of TR1
F11B, F12B
autofuse for compressors (M11C, M12C) (Not for EWA/YQ80-100)
1–152
Part 1 – System Outline
ESIE06-05
Wiring Layout
Part number
Description
F14B, F24B
autofuse for fan motors circuit 1, circuit 2
F15B, F25B
**
autofuse for fan motors circuit 1, circuit 2 (OPIF)
F16B
**
autofuse for pump (K1P) (only for OPSP/OPHP/OPSC/OPTP/OPTC)
F17B
**
autofuse for pump (K2P) (only for OPTP/OPTC)
F21B, F22B
autofuse for compressors (M21C, M22C)
H1-6P
*
indication lamp for changeable digital outputs
H11P, H12P
*
indication lamp for operation compressor circuit 1 (M11C, M12C)
H21P, H22P
*
indication lamp for operation compressor circuit 1 (M21C, M22C)
HAP-HEP (A*P)
light emitting diode PCB
K1A, K2A
auxiliary relay for compressor safety circuit 1, circuit 2
K1P
##
pump contactor (only for OPSP/OPHP/OPSC/OPTP/OPTC)
K1S
*
overcurrent relay pump
K1R-K22R (A*P)
K2P
1
3
4
PCB relay
**
pump contactor (only for OPTP/ OPTC)
K3A
auxiliary relay for heater tape
K11M, K12M
compressor contactor for circuit 1
K13F, K14F
fancontactor for circuit 1
K13S, K14S
fan overcurrent relay for circuit 1
K15F
fancontactor for circuit 1
5
(Only for EWAQ80-100/180-210/240-260)
(Only for EWYQ80-100/180-210/230-250)
K15S
fan overcurrent relay for circuit 1
(Only for EWAQ80-100/180-210/240-260)
(Only for EWYQ80-100/180-210/230-250)
K16F
fancontactor for circuit 1
(Only for EWAQ80-100/240-260)
(Only for EWYQ80-100/230-250)
K16S
fan overcurrent relay for circuit 1
(Only for EWAQ80-100/240-260)
(Only for EWYQ80-100/230-250)
K21M, K22M
compressor contactor for circuit 2
K23F, K24F
fancontactor for circuit 2
K23S, K24S
fan overcurrent relay for circuit 2
K25F
fancontactor for circuit 2
(Only for EWAQ180-210/240-260)
(Only for EWYQ180-210/230-250)
Part 1 – System Outline
1–153
Wiring Layout
11
ESIE06-05
Part number
Description
K25S
fan overcurrent relay for circuit 2
(Only for EWAQ180-210/240-260)
(Only for EWYQ180-210/230-250)
K26F
fancontactor for circuit 2
(Only for EWAQ240-260)
(Only for EWYQ230-250)
K26S
fan overcurrent relay for circuit 2
(Only for EWAQ240-260)
3
4
(Only for EWYQ230-250)
M1P
**
pump motor 1 (only for OPSP/OPHP/OPSC/OPTP/OPTC)
M2P
**
pump motor 2 (only for OPTP/OPTC)
M11C, M12C
compressor motors circuit 1
M13F, M14F
fan motors circuit 1
M15F
fan motors circuit 1
(Only for EWAQ80-100/180-210/240-260)
(Only for EWYQ80-100/180-210/230-250)
M16F
fan motors circuit 1
5
(Only for EWAQ80-100/240-260)
(Only for EWYQ80-100/230-250)
M21C, M22C
compressor motors circuit 2
M23F, M24F
fan motors circuit 2
M25F
fan motors circuit 2
(Only for EWAQ180-100/240-260)
(Only for EWYQ180-100/230-250)
M26F
fan motors circuit 2
(Only for EWAQ240-260)
(Only for EWYQ230-250)
M1F
Q1T
Q11C, Q12C
switchbox fanmotor
**
thermostat (OP10)
For EWAQ130/EWYQ130:
thermal protector compressor circuit 1
For EWAQ80-100/150/180-210/240-260:
For EWYQ80-100/150/180-210/230-250:
electronic protection module compressor circuit 1
Q21C, Q22C
For EWAQ130/EWYQ130:
thermal protector compressor circuit 2
For EWAQ150/180-210/240-260:
For EWYQ150/180-210/230-250:
electronic protection module compressor circuit 2
1–154
Part 1 – System Outline
ESIE06-05
Wiring Layout
Part number
Description
R1T
ambient temperature sensor
R2T
inlet water temperature sensor
R3T
outlet water temperature sensor
R8T
*
temperature sensor for changeable analog input
R14T
suction temperature sensor circuit 1
R15T, R25T
discharge temperature sensor circuit 1
R16T
coil temperature sensor circuit 1 (only for EWYQ)
R17T
refrigerant piping temperature sensor circuit 1
R18T, R38T
heating suction temperature sensor circuit 1, circuit 2 (only EWYQ)
R28T, R48T
heating suction temperature sensor circuit 1, circuit 2
R26T
coil temperature sensor circuit 1 (only for EQWYQ80-100/230-250)
R34T
suction temperature sensor circuit 2
R35T, R45T
discharge temperature sensor circuit 2
R36T
coil temperature sensor circuit 2 (only for EWYQ)
R37T
refrigerant piping temperature sensor circuit 2
R46T
coil temperature sensor circuit 2 (only for EWYQ230-250)
S1A-S3A (A*P)
PCB dipswitch
S1L
flowswitch
S1M
main isolator switch
S1PH, S2PH
high pressure switch circuit 1, circuit 2
S1S-S5S
*
switch for changeable digital input (remote on/off, C/H, ...)
S1T
**
thermal contact (OPIF)
S2M
#
heatertape isolator switch
T1A
**
current transducer (OP57)
T1V
**
voltage transducer (OP57)
TR1
TR1A
3
4
5
transfo control circuit (400V/230V)
**
V1C
V1F, V2F
1
current measurement transfo (OP57)
Ferrite core
**
noise filter circuit 1, circuit 2 (OPIF)
(Only for EWAQ130-150/180-210)
(Only for EWYQ130-150/180-210)
V2C
**
Ferrite core (EKACPG)
X*A (A*P)
PCB terminal
X*Y
connector
X1M (A*P)
PCB terminal strip
Part 1 – System Outline
1–155
Wiring Layout
11
ESIE06-05
Part number
Description
Y1R, Y2R
reverse valve circuit 1, circuit 2 (only EWYQ)
Y11E
electronic expansion valve cooling circuit 1
Y12E
electronic expansion valve heating circuit 1 (only EWYQ)
Y13E
electronic expansion valve heating circuit 1 (only EWYQ80-100/230-250)
Y21E
electronic expansion valve cooling circuit 2
Y22E
electronic expansion valve heating circuit 2 (only EWYQ)
Y23E
electronic expansion valve heating circuit 2 (only EWYQ 230-250)
3
4
5
1–156
Part 1 – System Outline
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
HDP ON
For S3A setting
see installation manual
S1A
ADDRESS=1
H1P
H2P
HAP
HBP
A4P
A02P
X52A
TERM
S3A
X1M
F1
HCP
F2
+
RS485
-
OFF
X1M
HEP
TERM
S2A
OFF
HBP
TERM
S2A
S1A
MAIN
SUB
HAP
ADDRESS=MAIN
TERM=ON
2
V2C
MODBUS
DICN
EKACPG
1
+
RS485
DC 24V
GND
Part 1 – System Outline
A01P
HAP
X51A
ACS
3
V1C
A11P
1
A72P
X88A
ACS
ON
DS1
*
DS1
X89A
HAP
*=
X89A
X1M
A4P
only
for EWYQ
080-100
shortcut on last
EEV PCB (319)
*
OFF ADDRESS=2
ON
HAP
OFF ADDRESS=1
ON
OFF
HBP
HAP
TERM
S2A
S1A
MAIN
SUB
ADDRESS=MAIN
TERM=OFF
A71P
X88A
ACS
EKRUPG
+
RS485
DC 24V
GND
ADDRESS=SUB
TERM=ON
ON
OFF
HBP
HAP
TERM
S2A
S1A
MAIN
SUB
= DIPSWITCH
X1M
A5P
3.4.3
+
RS485
DC 24V
GND
Std
ESIE06-05
Wiring Layout
PCB interconnection diagram
1
3
4
5
1–157
Wiring Layout
11
3.4.4
ESIE06-05
PCB I/O overview & fuses
Main PCB (A11P)
3
4
5
1–158
X12A (1-3-5)
DI: Reverse phase detection (L1-L2-L3) c1
X4A
DI: High pressure switch c1
X5A
DI: Compressor interclock 1 c1
X6A
DI: Compressor interlock 2 c1
X7A
DI: Fan overcurrent relay Fanstep 1 c1
X8A
DI: Fan overcurrent relay Fanstep 2 c1
X9A
DI: Fan overcurrent relay Fanstep 3 c1
X27A
DI: Fan inv safety c1 (only for OPIF)
X29A (3-4)
not used
X30A
DI: Flow switch
X31A
DI: Pump interlock
X32A (3-4)
Ch DI 1: function not pre-defined
X32A (1-2)
Ch DI 2: function not pre-defined
X13A
DO: Compressor contactor 1 c1
X14A
DO:Compressor contactor 2 c1
X15A
DO: Heatertape
X16A
DO: Pump contactor
X17A
DO: Reverse valve c1 (Only for EWYQ)
X19A (1-3)
DO: Fanstep 1 c1
X19A (5-7)
DO: Fanstep 2 c1
X20A
DO: Fanstep 3 c1
X22A
Ch DO1: “SAFETY + W. (NO)” (def)
X24A
Ch DO2: “GEN. OPERATION” (def)
X25A
Ch DO3: function not pre-defined
X33A
AI: Ambient sensor
X34A
AI: Inlet water sensor
X35A
AI: Outlet water sensor
X36A
AI: Suction temperature sensor c1
X37A
AI: Refrigerant piping temperature sensor c1
X38A
AI: Coil temperature sensor 1 c1 (only for EWYQ)
X39A
AI: Coil temperature sensor 2 c1 (only for EWYQ)
X40A
AI: Discharge temperature sensor 1 c1
Part 1 – System Outline
ESIE06-05
Wiring Layout
X41A
AI: Discharge temperature sensor 2 c1
X42A
AI: High pressure sensor c1
X43A
AI: Low pressure sensor c1
X44A
AI: Current measurement (OP57)
X45A
AI: Voltage measurement (OP57)
HAP, HBP
LED (service monitor green)
H1P, H2P
LED (service monitor red)
S1A
dipswitch (address)
S2A
dipswitch (terminal resistor)
1
3
Extension PCB (A01P)
X63A
Ch DO6: Function not pre-defined
X64A (1-3)
Ch DO4: Function not pre-defined
X64A (5-7)
Ch DO5: Function not pre-defined
X65A (1-2)
Ch DI3: Function not pre-defined
X65A (3-4)
Ch DI4: Function not pre-defined
X66A
AI: Heating suction temperature sensor 1 c1
4
5
(Only for EWYQ)
X67A
AI: Heating suction temperature sensor 2 c1
(Only for EWYQ)
X68A
Ch AI2: Function not pre-defined
X69A
Ch AI1: Function not pre-defined
X70A
Ch AI 4: Function not pre-defined
X71A
Ch AI3: Function not pre-defined
X72A (3-4)
AO: Fanspeed signal c1 (only for OPIF)
X73A
Ch AO1: Function not pre-defined
X74A (4-5)
not used
HAP, HBP
LED (service monitor green)
Wired remote controller PCB (A4P, A5P)
Part 1 – System Outline
HAP, HBP
LED (service monitor green)
S1A
dipswitch (address)
S2A
dipswitch (terminal resistor)
1–159
Wiring Layout
ESIE06-05
11
Communication PCB (A02P)
HCP, HDP, HEP
LED (service monitor green)
S3A
dipswitch (terminal resistor)
EEV PCB (A71P)
3
X86A
Y11E Electronic expansion valve
X87A
not used
HAP
LED (service monitor green)
DS1
dipswitch (address)
EEV PCB (A72P) (Only EWYQ)
4
X86A
Y12E Electronic expansion valve (only EWYQ)
X87A
Y13E Electronic expansion valve (only EWYQ)
HAP
LED (service monitor green)
DS1
dipswitch (address)
5
EWAQ80
EWAQ100
EWYQ80
EWYQ100
125gL/gG
160gL/ gG
500V
500V
F1U
T 5A/250V
T 5A/250V
F4, F5
10gL/250V
10gL/250V
F8B (OPIF)
C 2A/250V
C 2A/250V
F9B
C 4A/250V
C 4A/250V
F6B
2,3A
2,3A
F11B
-
-
F12B
-
-
F16B
4,8A
4,8A
12,0A
12,0A
FUSES
F1-F3
Circuit breakers
Circuit breaker and motor protector settings
(OPSP/OPSC/OPTP/OPTC)
F16B (OPHP)
1–160
Part 1 – System Outline
ESIE06-05
Wiring Layout
F17B
4,8A
4,8A
F14B
3,3A
3,3A
F15B (OPIF)
7,7A
7,7A
K13S-K16S
1,5A
1,5A
1
(OPTP/OPTC)
3
4
5
Part 1 – System Outline
1–161
Wiring Layout
11
3.4.5
ESIE06-05
PCB changeable I/O overview
Refer to the installation manual for instructions how to configure changeable I/O.
Changeable digital input (4 available)
3
Changeable analog output (1 available)
-None
-None
-Status
-Unit capacity (mA, V)
-Dual setpoint
-Details of types:
-Remote on-off
Type mA: 0..20mA / 4..20mA
-Capacity limitation 25%, 50%, 75%, or setting
Type V: 0-1V / 0-5V / 0-10V
-Low noise (only for OPIF)
-Free cooling signal
-Fan forced on
4
5
Changeable digital output (6 or 5 available depending on
unit)
Changeable analog input (4 available)
-None (open)
-None
-Closed
-Status (mA, V, NTC*, DI)
-2nd pump
-Floating setpoint (mA, V, NTC*)
-100% capacity
-Water temperature measurement (NTC*)
-Full capacity
-Changeable DI, refer to Ch DI for possibilities (DI)
-Free cooling
-Details of types:
-General operation
Type mA: 0..20mA / 4..20mA
-Safety + warning NO
(internal 5V or external power supply)
-Safety + warning NC (only for ch DO1)
Type V: 0-1V / 0-5V / 0-10V
-Safety NO (excluding warning)
Type DI: DI (5V detection)
-Safety NC (excluding warning) (only for ch DO1)
-C1, C2 Safety NO
-Warning NO
-C1, C2 operation
-Cooling (only EWYQ)
-Heating (only EWYQ)
-Defrost (only EWYQ)
1–162
*: for allowed NTC types and how to configure the software please contact your local dealer.
Part 1 – System Outline
ESIE06-05
3.4.6
Wiring Layout
Unit outlook
1
TOP VIEW OF UNIT (FANS)
M13F
M14F
3
M15F
M16F
MxxF
: Inverter controlled fan
TOP VIEW OF UNIT (COMP+ SB)
5
SWITCHBOX
M11C
M12C
EWAQ 80-100
EWYQ 80-100
Part 1 – System Outline
4
1–163
Wiring Layout
11
3.4.7
ESIE06-05
Switchbox outlook (typical)
3
4
5
1–164
Part 1 – System Outline
Part 1 – System Outline
S1M
L2
F2
3
4
3ò50Hz 400V
5
6
502
L3
F3
Power supply
L1
F1
1
2
T1A
11
T1A
12
TR1A
501
OP57
PE
/ 32.4
300A/5A
/ 32.4
L2C1. / 16.0
L3C1. / 16.0
1
2
3
F16B
X26Y
X26Y
X26Y
1
2
3
M1P
X17Y
I
M1P
W
V
U
PE
6
7
5
6
5
4
I
V
6
3
4
3
M
3ò
4
2
M
3ò
I
U
2
12
14
11
PE
W
6
I
M2P
X17Y
K2P
M2P
X17Y
I
I
9
V
U
4
3
4
3
V
3
M
3ò
I
M
3ò
4
2
1
2
1
U
4
3
2
1
K2P
43.3
5
3
I
1
I
3
4
F17B
F17B
1
2
14
11
6
I
5
4
I
3
2
1
1
1
2
1
I
K1P
22.7
K1P
OPSP/OPHP
F16B
X26Y
X26Y
X26Y
OPSC
OPTP
OPTC
PE
W
10
6
5
6
5
PE
W
6
5
6
5
9
14
11
14
11
2
2
S2M
1
1ò50Hz 230V
3
4
1
2
12
OPSP/OPTP
/OPHP
E4H
Q1T
OPBT
E6H
OPSP/OPTP/OPHP
12
MODELS WITHOUT OPSP/OPTP/OPHP E3H
PE
24
X10Y
2
2
F5
max.
1kW
E5H
0
23
X10Y
1
R2
R1
Power supply
F4
K3A
21.9
0
OP10
3.4.8
2
L1C1 / 20.0
L2C1 / 20.0
L3C1 / 20.0
ESIE06-05
Wiring Layout
Main power supply
1
3
4
5
1–165
I
32 33
230 VAC
230 VAC
21.0
X2A:2
21.0
SL
A11P
1
A71P
2
30.0
1
3
32.6
E1
X77A:3
only for EWYQ
080-100
11
/
T1V
X11Y
X11Y
32.6
X11Y
E1
12
/
T1V
65
30.0
OP57
64
60
61
SN
/
A11P
SL
A11P /
F1U
X18Y
F9B
62
X1A:1
21.0
I
34
5
6
SL
A11P
X2A
X2A:1
5A
F1U
X1A:3
31
4
400 VAC
I
5
SN
A11P
X2A
X3A
A11P
TR1
1
2
3
101
5
102
I
1
63
F6B
X77A:3
1–166
X77A:1
4
203
X11Y
X11Y
X11Y
A72P
2
1
3
3
X77A:1
S1T
F8B
E7H
t∞
I
2
1
3
1
2
X11Y
X11Y
X11Y
3.4.9
66
11
15.2 / L2C1.
15.2 / L3C1.
Wiring Layout
ESIE06-05
Trafo & PCB power supply
Part 1 – System Outline
F11B
Q11C
M11C
K11M
I
U
M
3~
V
4
3
1
2
4
I
3
2
1
I
PE
W
6
5
6
5
14
11
F12B
Q12C
M12C
K12M
I
U
I
4
3
4
3
V
M
3~
2
1
2
1
I
PE
W
6
5
6
5
14
11
R1P
X12A X12A X12A
:1
:3
:5
L1
L2
L3
A11P
I
K14F
M14F
X14Y
K14S
F14B
3
X14Y
3ò
U2
M
V1
W2
I
U1
4
3
4
4
8
I
3
7
2
1
2
2
1
10
PE
EWYQ 180-210
Only for
EWAQ 180-210
M15F
13
2
U2
V1
14
4
3
4
X14Y
3ò
M
W2
X14Y
K15S
1
2
U1
96
95
K15F
V2
23.3
W1
9
6
5
6
6
5
16
PE
V2
W1
15
6
5
6
96
95
X14Y
4
K13F
EWAQ 130-150/180-210
EWYQ 130-150/180-210
23.2
Part 1 – System Outline
14
13
328
I
K13F
8
5
V1F
M13F
K13S
A13P
325
F15B
3ò
U2
M
V1
W2
I
U1
3
4
V
L2
4
L2
4
I
3
2
1
2
U
L1
2
L1
1
PE
V2
W1
6
5
6
W
L3
6
L3
5
23.1
15.2 / L1C1
15.2 / L2C1
15.2 / L3C1
96
95
11
10
ESIE06-05
Wiring Layout
3.4.10 Compressor & fan
1
3
4
5
1–167
31.2
30.3
30.3
16.1 /
K1R
A11P
30.4
K1A
SN
A11P
X2A
1
3
5
13
21
2
4
6
14
22
A2
A1
20.0
20.1
20.1
42.1
.5
X13A:3
X13A:1
14
11
K2R
101
1
3
5
13
21
K12M
204
203
102
2
4
6
14
22
A2
A1
20.2
20.2
20.2
42.2
.6
X14A:1
X14A:2
102
102
Y1R
X10Y
X10Y
Only
for EWYQ
101
K5R
4
3
X17A:1
X17A:2
101
K11M
X10Y
E11HC
X10Y
8
6
22
21
K12M
7
X10Y
E12HC
X10Y
22
21
9
X12Y
Q11C
X12Y
2
N
L1
6
X13Y
Q12C
X13Y
3
K11M
SL
A11P
16.2 /
211
SL
A11P
X2A
212
1–168
105
5
106
4
107
6
N
L1
1
101
R1
K3A
K3R
A11P
203
102
SN
A11P
X2A
R2 15.7
A2
A1
X15A:4
X15A:7
SL
/
A11P
SL
A11P
X2A
/
/
22.0
22.0
22.0
11
16.1 /
Wiring Layout
ESIE06-05
3.4.11 Circuit 1: control compressors
Part 1 – System Outline
213
21.9 /
SN
A11P
X2A
K7R
101
2
4
6
13
K13F
20.8
K15S
20.7
K13S
A11P
SL
A11P
21.9 /
1
3
5
14
A2
A1
K1*S
/
A11P
20.7
20.7
20.7
20.6
X19A:3
X19A:1
96
111
95
96
95
110
2
4
6
13
K15F
K8R
203
30.3
203
1
3
5
14
A2
A1
K9R
2
4
6
K14F
30.3
20.5
K16S
20.4
K14S
K2*S
/
A11P
20.8
20.8
20.9
20.6
X19A:7
X19A:5
116
115
1 20.4
3 20.4
5 20.4
A2
A1
X20A:1
X20A:2
96
121
95
96
95
120
K3*S
/
A11P
2
4
6
K16F
30.3
A1
1 20.5
3 20.5
5 20.5
A2
A13P
A01P
(0V) 2
X72A:4
A0
X72A:3
(AIN+) 3 (AIN-) 4
323
102
324
SL
A11P
X2A
112
111
220
116
220
122
121
222
OPSP/OPTP/OPSC/
OPTC/OPHP
K4R
A11P
X27Y
F16B
X27Y
12
1
3
5
13
X27Y
K1P
X27Y
13
Part 1 – System Outline
21.9 /
2
4
6
14
101
1
A2
A1
3
13
15.3
15.3
15.4
40.1
X16A:1
X16A:3
12
4
14
11
2
203
101
203
102
SN
A11P
X2A
/
SL
/
A11P
/
43.3
43.2
ESIE06-05
Wiring Layout
3.4.12 Circuit 1: control fans
1
3
4
5
1–169
222
Wiring Layout
11
ESIE06-05
3.4.13 Control circuit (DI 230V)
A11P
16.1 /
SL
A11P
F1U
230
X4A:1
X10Y
10
S1PH P>
239
DI
3
X10Y
11
X12Y
3
14/M2
X4A:3
231
X5A:2
Q11C
X12Y
4
11/M1
4
232
DI
X5A:1
233
X6A:3
X13Y
Q12C
X13Y
5
3
14/M2
11/M1
4
234
DI
X6A:1
235
X7A:1
111
DI
X7A:2
K1*S
/
A11P
22.1
K2*S
/
A11P
22.2
K3*S
/
A11P
22.3
X8A:1
116
DI
X8A:3
X9A:1
121
DI
X9A:3
X10A:3
A1
K1A
DI
X10A:1
A2
X11:1
16.1 /
1–170
SN
A11P
236
X11A:2
11
14 21.1
Part 1 – System Outline
X86A:1 2
X88A:1
A71P
X15Y
3
V1C
4
Y11E
M
3
2
36
4
X88A:2
3
5
248
3
X89A:1
X18Y
*
DI
249
X89A:2
315
316
20.7
A13P
A13P
OPIF
X86A:1 2
X88A:1
A72P
ALARM
11
10
X27A:2
DI
X27A:1
X15Y
3
4
M
only for EWYQ 080-100
Y12E
7
6
5
8
X88A:2
5
S1L
5
X87A:1 2
X89A:1
X16Y
X15Y
3
4
Y13E
*=
M
11
10
9
X1B:1 X1B:2 X1B:3 X1B:4 X1B:5
X1B:1 X1B:2 X1B:3 X1B:4 X1B:5
A01P
shortcut on last
EEV PCB (319)
12
5
X89A:2
6
X30A:2
*
319
DI
BLU
X30A:1
WHT
X29A:3
BLU
X29A:4
BLU
X51A:2
BLU
X51A:1
313
470
RED
471
WHT
472
314
473
BLK
GRN
246
481
X2B:3
WHT
X2B:1
X2B:3
BLK
X2B:1
X1M:+
A4P
X19Y
1
X52A:1
X1M:-
2
RS485
X1M:24V
3
X52A:3
RS485
X52A:2
302
302
301
301
247
480
RED
482
WHT
483
BLK
GRN
303
303
244
485
RED
486
WHT
487
245
488
BLK
GRN
X1M:GND
4
X52A:4
304
Part 1 – System Outline
304
A11P
ESIE06-05
Wiring Layout
3.4.14 Control circuit and EEV
1
3
4
5
1–171
B1PH
X15Y
13
X42A:1
-t∞
A11P
R2T
-t∞
8
2
14
X42A:3
AI
X42A:2
1
X34A:2
AI
X34A:1
402
R1T
7
400
X16Y
X33A:3
AI
401
X33A:1
450
WHT
15
B1PL
16
17
X43A:3
18
X43A:4
15.1 /
11
OP57
11
T1A
32
12
/
T1A
15.1
T1A
0-5A/0-20mA
31
12
X44A:4
16.3 /
11
X45A:1
-t∞
X44A:3
AI
R15T
X15Y
-t∞
28
R26T
27
11
T1V
32
X45A:4
12
/
T1V
16.3
T1V
0-500V/0-20mA
31
12
X45A:3
Only for
EWYQ
-t∞
X15Y
R18T
24
-t∞
23
R25T
22
31
32
-t∞
R28T
33
34
X67A:2
AI
X67A:1
X66A:2
AI
X66A:1
X41A:2
AI
X41A:1
X40A:2
A01P
415
AI
AI
X45A:2
21
411
26
X40A:1
X39A:2
X39A:1
412
X38A:2
AI
413
X44A:2
AI
Only for
EWYQ
25
X44A:1
-t∞
X15Y
R16T
30
-t∞
29
X38A:1
X37A:2
AI
X37A:1
R17T
20
X36A:2
AI
AI
X43A:2
19
X15Y
X43A:1
-t∞
X42A:4
R14T
X15Y
-t∞
4
R3T
3
X36A:1
X35A:2
AI
X35A:1
404
452
403
451
BLK
405
RED
408
455
406
453
WHT
409
RED
407
454
BLK
410
501
503
502
504
416
514
414
60
513
61
417
1–172
418
5
419
4
420
3
421
11
A11P
Wiring Layout
ESIE06-05
3.4.15 Circuit 1: sensors
Part 1 – System Outline
7
44
14
13
44
X27Y
8
45
X27Y
7
14
13
44
OPSC/OPTC/OPSP/OPTP/OPHP
22.7
K1P
OPSP/OPSC/OPHP
OPTP/OPTC
X27Y
8
43.3
K2P
45
MODELS WITHOUT OPSC/OPTC/OPSP/OPTP/OPHP
OBLIGATORY
22.7
K1P
X27Y
45
X31A:3
14
13
7
7
S1S
Example: remote
start/stop
14
13
47
46
46
X32A:3
47
X32A:4
S2S
Example: remote
cool/heat
14
13
49
X32A:2
48
48
X32A:1
49
Changeable
DI2
S3S
14
13
50
X65A:1
51
S4S
14
13
52
53
X65A:4
X65A:3
Changeable
DI4
X65A:2
Changeable
DI3
51
Changeable
DI1
50
X31A:1
DI
A01P
52
Part 1 – System Outline
53
A11P
ESIE06-05
Wiring Layout
3.4.16 Fieldwiring DI, changeable DI
1
3
4
5
1–173
8
8
73
74
-t∞
R8T
Ch. AI1
example:
temp. sensor
75
-
-
Example
mA measurement
(External power supply)
0
to
20mA
0
to
20mA
Example
mA measurement
(5V power supply by PCB)
+
+
75
+
-
0
to
10VDC
77
Ch. AI3
example:
V measurement
76
78
S5S
14
13
79
Ch. AI4
example:
Switch
80
81
+
91
-
0
to
20mA or 10V
Example
mA output
V output
90
5V
X69A:1
70
74
IN
X69A:2
71
73
GND
X69A:3
72
72
5V
X68A:1
73
71
IN
X68A:2
74
70
X73A:2
X73A:1
GND
X70A:3
IN
X70A:2
5V
X70A:1
GND
X71A:3
IN
X71A:2
5V
X71A:1
GND
X68A:3
75
Changeable
AO1
76
Changeable
AI4
77
Changeable
AI3
78
Changeable
AI2
79
1–174
80
5
81
4
90
Changeable
AI1
3
91
11
A01P
Wiring Layout
ESIE06-05
3.4.17 Fieldwiring changeable AI/AO
Part 1 – System Outline
6
External
Power
supply
(ex 24VAC
or 230VAC)
5
14
13
External
Power
supply
(ex 24VAC
or 230VAC)
4
K12M
H12P
3
14
4
H11P
3
13
5
K11M
6
Operation
M12C
7
7
H1P
External
Power
supply
(ex 24VAC
or 230VAC)
8
X22A:1
Safety active = contact closed
No power = contact open
No safety = contact open
9
Alarm NO
Default
X22A:5
X22A:3
K12R
A11P
Changeable DO1
(Default: Alarm,
NO contact 8-9)
8
Operation
M11C
9
9
H1P
External
Power
supply
(ex 24VAC
or 230VAC)
7
Safety active = contact closed
No power = contact closed
No safety = contact open
9
Alarm NC
Software selection necessary
8
9
Changeable DO: Maximum load: 2A-230VAC, Minimum load: 10mA-5VDC
K14R
A11P
H2P
11
External
Power
supply
(ex 24VAC
or 230VAC)
10
X24A:1
X24A:2
Changeable DO2
(Default:
Gen. operation)
10
Part 1 – System Outline
11
AC15: max.3A-230V
ESIE06-05
Wiring Layout
3.4.18 Fieldwiring DO, changeable DO
1
3
1–175
4
5
4
3
K1P
X27Y
External
Power supply
(ex 24VAC
or 230VAC)
12
X16A:3
13
13
NOT FOR MODELS WITH
OPSC/OPTC/OPSP/OPTP/OPHP
K1S
X27Y
K4R
12
X16A:1
2
14
11
6
22.9
SL
A11P
X27Y
F17B
X27Y
14
1
5
15
22.9
1
3
5
13
2
4
6
14
SN
A11P
X2A
X27Y
K2P
X27Y
X25A:3
X25A:1
Changeable DO3
(Default: 2nd pump)
MODELS WITH OPTC/OPTP
10
K15R
A11P
14
A11P
15.5
15.5
15.5
40.2
15
X27Y
6
5
H3P
X27Y
External
Power
supply
(ex 24VAC
or 230VAC)
14
Changeable DO3
(no predefined function)
MODELS WITHOUT OPTC/OPTP
10
Changeable
DO3
15
K21R
A01P
16
DO
pump
H4P
External
Power
supply
(ex 24VAC
or 230VAC)
16
X64A:3
X64:1
Changeable
DO4
17
1–176
17
K22R
A01P
18
5
H5P
19
External
Power
supply
(ex 24VAC
or 230VAC)
18
X64A:7
X64A:5
Changeable
DO5
19
3
K20R
A01P
20
H6P
21
External
Power
supply
(ex 24VAC
or 230VAC)
20
X63A:3
X63A:1
Changeable
DO6
11
21
4
Ch. DO: Maximum load: 2A-230VAC, Minimum load: 10mA-5VDC
Wiring Layout
ESIE06-05
Part 1 – System Outline
ESIE06-05
3.5
Wiring Layout
Wiring Layout : EWAQ130-260DAYN(N-P-B) and EWYQ130-250DAYN(N-P-B) with
OPIF
Introduction
This chapter gives a general overview of the PCB intercommunication, I/O overview, switchbox layout
and wiring of the EWAQ130-250DAYN(N-P-B) and EWYQ130-260DAYN(N-P-B) with option inverter
fans (OPIF).
Overview
This chapter contains the following topics:
Part 1 – System Outline
Page description
Page
3.5.1 Notes
1–178
3.5.2 Legend
1–180
3.5.3 PCB interconnection diagram
1–185
3.5.4 PCB I/O overview & fuses
1–186
3.5.5 PCB changeable I/O overview
1–191
3.5.6 Unit outlook
1–192
3.5.7 Switchbox outlook
1–193
3.5.8 Main power supply
1–194
3.5.9 Trafo & PCB power supply
1–195
3.5.10 Circuit 1: compressor & fan
1–196
3.5.11 Circuit 1: control compressors
1–198
3.5.12 Circuit 1: control fans
1–199
3.5.13 Circuit 2: compressor & fan
1–201
3.5.14 Circuit 2: control compressors
1–203
3.5.15 Circuit 2: control fans
1–204
3.5.16 Control circuit (DI 230V)
1–206
3.5.17 Control circuit and EEV
1–207
3.5.18 Circuit 1: sensors
1–208
3.5.19 Circuit 2: sensors
1–209
3.5.20 Fieldwiring DI, changeable DI
1–210
3.5.21 Fieldwiring changeable AI/AO
1–211
3.5.22 Fieldwiring DO, changeable DO
1–212
1
3
4
5
1–177
Wiring Layout
11
3.5.1
ESIE06-05
Notes
L1, L2, L3
: Main terminals
1-99
: Fieldwiring terminals
100-199
: Factory upwiring terminals
200-
: Internal wiring terminals
U-Z
: Main terminals in compressor switchbox
: Earth wiring
3
: Wire number 15
: Terminals number 15
4
: Field supply
: Option
5
: Not mounted in switchbox
: Wiring depending on model
: PCB
: Connection ** continues on page 12 column 2
!
: Pin against miswiring
: Several wiring possibilities
N-model
: unit with no options included
Y1R, Y2R reversing valves are activated in cooling mode.
1–178
Part 1 – System Outline
ESIE06-05
Wiring Layout
Factory installed:
❏
OP10
= Heater tape
❏
OP57
= A-meter, V-meter
❏
OPLN
= Low noise
1
(OPIF+ Compressorhousing)
User installed:
❏
OPTP
= Twinpump
❏
OPSC
= Single pump contactor
❏
OPTC
= Twin pump contactor
❏
OPIF
= Inverter fans for low ambient (-15°C)
❏
OPHP
= Hi ESP pump
❏
OPSP
= Single pump
❏
OPBT
= Buffertank
❏
EKACPG
= Address card including:
3
4
-RS485 (Integrated modbus)
-F1, F2 (DICN + DBACS Connection)
❏
EKRUPG
DI:
Digital input
DO:
Digital output
AI:
Analog input
AO:
Analog output
Ch:
Changeable (function can be selected by the customer)
Remote used interface
Definitions:
Part 1 – System Outline
5
1–179
Wiring Layout
11
3.5.2
ESIE06-05
Legend
Not included with standard unit
3
Not possible as option
Possible as option
Obligatory
#
##
Not obligatory
*
**
Part number
Description
A01P
PCB Extension
A02P
**
A4P
4
A5P
5
PCB wired remote controller
**
A11P, A21P
A13P, A23P
PCB Communication (EKACPG)
PCB wired remote controller (EKRUPG)
PCB main controller circuit 1, circuit 2
**
frequency inverter circuit 1, circuit 2 (OPIF)
A71P
PCB EEV driver
A72P
PCB EEV driver (only for EWYQ)
A73P
PCB EEV driver (only for EWYQ230-250)
B1PH, B2PH
high pressure sensor circuit 1, circuit 2
B1PL, B2PL
low pressure sensor circuit 1, circuit 2
DS1 (A*P)
PCB dipswitch
E1HS
**
switchbox heater with fan (OPIF) (only for EWAQ130-260 / EWYQ130-250)
E3H
**
heatertape (OP10)
E4H
**
heatertape (OP10) (only for OPSP/OPHP/OPTP)
E5H
*
fieldheater
E6H
**
buffertank heater (OP10) (only for OPBT)
E7H
**
switchbox heater (OPIF) (only for EWA/YQ80-100)
E11HC, E12HC
crankcase heater compressor circuit 1
E21HC, E22HC
crankcase heater compressor circuit 2
F1-F3
#
F1U (A*P)
F4, F5
fuse PCB
#
F6B
F8B
main fuses
fuses for heaters
autofuse for primary of TR1
**
autofuse for switchbox heater (OPIF)
F9B
autofuse for secondary of TR1
F11B, F12B
autofuse for compressors (M11C, M12C,) (Not for EWA/YQ80-100)
1–180
Part 1 – System Outline
ESIE06-05
Wiring Layout
Part number
Description
F14B, F24B
autofuse for fan motors circuit 1, circuit 2
F15B, F25B
**
autofuse for fan motors circuit 1, circuit 2 (OPIF)
F16B
**
autofuse for pump (K1P) (only for OPSP/OPHP/OPSC/OPTP/OPTC)
F17B
**
autofuse for pump (K2P) (only for OPTP/OPTC)
F21B, F22B
autofuse for compressors (M21C, M22C)
H1-6P
*
indication lamp for changeable digital outputs
H11P, H12P
*
indication lamp for operation compressor circuit 1 (M11C, M12C)
H21P, H22P
*
indication lamp for operation compressor circuit 2 (M21C, M22C)
HAP-HEP (A*P)
light emitting diode PCB
K1A, K2A
auxiliary relay for compressor safety circuit 1, circuit 2
K1P
##
pump contactor (only for OPSP/ OPHP/OPSC/OPTC)
K1S
*
overcurrent relay pump
K1R-K22R (A*P)
K2P
1
3
4
PCB relay
**
pump contactor (only for OPTP/ OPTC)
K3A
auxiliary relay for heater tape
K11M, K12M
compressor contactor for circuit 1
K13F, K14F
fancontactor for circuit 1
K13S, K14S
fan overcurrent relay for circuit 1
K15F
fancontactor for circuit 1
5
(Only for EWAQ80-100/180-210/240-260)
(Only for EWYQ80-100/180-210/230-250)
K15S
fan overcurrent relay for circuit 1
(Only for EWAQ80-100/180-210/240-260)
(Only for EWYQ80-100/180-210/230-250)
K16F
fancontactor for circuit 1
(Only for EWAQ80-100/240-260)
(Only for EWYQ80-100/230-250)
K16S
fan overcurrent relay for circuit 1
(Only for EWAQ80-100/240-260)
(Only for EWYQ80-100/230-250)
K21M, K22M
compressor contactor for circuit 2
K23F, K24F
fancontactor for circuit 2
K23S, K24S
fan overcurrent relay for circuit 2
K25F
fancontactor for circuit 2
(Only for EWAQ180-210/240-260)
(Only for EWYQ180-210/230-250)
Part 1 – System Outline
1–181
Wiring Layout
11
ESIE06-05
Part number
Description
K25S
fan overcurrent relay for circuit 2
(Only for EWAQ180-210/240-260)
(Only for EWYQ180-210/230-250)
K26F
fancontactor for circuit 2
(Only for EWAQ240-260)
(Only for EWYQ230-250)
K26S
fan overcurrent relay for circuit 2
(Only for EWAQ240-260)
3
4
(Only for EWYQ230-250)
M1P
**
pump motor 1 (only for OPSP/OPHP/OPSC/OPTP/OPTC)
M2P
**
pump motor 2 (only for OPTP/OPTC)
M11C, M12C
compressor motors circuit 1
M13F, M14F
fan motors circuit 1
M15F
fan motors circuit 1
(Only for EWAQ80-100/180-210/240-260)
(Only for EWYQ80-100/180-210/230-250)
M16F
fan motors circuit 1
5
(Only for EWAQ80-100/240-260)
(Only for EWYQ80-100/230-250)
M21C, M22C
compressor motors circuit 2
M23F, M24F
fan motors circuit 2
M25F
fan motors circuit 2
(Only for EWAQ180-210/240-260)
(Only for EWYQ180-210/230-250)
M26F
fan motors circuit 2
(Only for EWAQ240-260)
(Only for EWYQ230-250)
M1F
Q1T
Q11C, Q12C
switchbox fanmotor
**
thermostat (OP10)
For EWAQ130/EWYQ130:
thermal protector compressor circuit 1
For EWAQ80-100/150/180-210/240-260:
For EWYQ80-100/150/180-210/230-250:
electronic protection module compressor circuit 1
Q21C, Q22C
For EWAQ130/EWYQ130:
thermal protector compressor circuit 2
For EWAQ150/180-210/240-260:
For EWYQ150/180-210/230-250:
electronic protection module compressor circuit 2
1–182
Part 1 – System Outline
ESIE06-05
Wiring Layout
Part number
Description
R1T
ambient temperature sensor
R2T
inlet water temperature sensor
R3T
outlet water temperature sensor
R8T
*
1
temperature sensor for changeable analog input
R14T
suction temperature sensor circuit 1
R15T, R25T
discharge temperature sensor circuit 1
R16T
coil temperature sensor circuit 1 (only for EWYQ)
R17T
refrigerant piping temperature sensor circuit 1
R18T, R38T
heating suction temperature sensor circuit 1, circuit 2 (only EWYQ)
R28T, R48T
heating suction temperature sensor circuit 1, circuit 2 (only EWYQ80-100/230-250)
R26T
coil temperature sensor circuit 1(only for EQWYQ80-100/230-250)
R34T
suction temperature sensor circuit 2
R35T, R45T
discharge temperature sensor circuit 2
R36T
coil temperature sensor circuit 2 (only for EWYQ)
R37T
refrigerant piping temperature sensor circuit 2
R46T
coil temperature sensor circuit 2 (only for EWYQ230-250)
S1A-S3A (A*P)
PCB dipswitch
S1L
flowswitch
S1M
main isolator switch
S1PH, S2PH
high pressure switch circuit 1, circuit 2
S1S-S5S
*
switch for changeable digital input (remote on/off, C/H, ...)
S1T
**
thermal contact (OPIF)
S2M
#
heatertape isolator switch
T1A
**
current transducer (OP57)
T1V
**
voltage transducer (OP57)
TR1
TR1A
4
5
transfo control circuit (400V/230V)
**
V1C
V1F, V2F
3
current measurement transfo (OP57)
Ferrite core
**
noise filter circuit 1, circuit 2 (OPIF)
(Only for EWAQ130-150/180-210)
(Only for EWYQ130-150/180-210)
V2C
**
Ferrite core (EKACPG)
X*A (A*P)
PCB terminal
X*Y
connector
X1M (A*P)
PCB terminal strip
Part 1 – System Outline
1–183
Wiring Layout
11
ESIE06-05
Part number
Description
Y1R, Y2R
reverse valve circuit 1, circuit 2 (only EWYQ)
Y11E
electronic expansion valve cooling circuit 1
Y12E
electronic expansion valve heating circuit 1 (only EWYQ)
Y13E
electronic expansion valve heating circuit 1 (only EWYQ80-100/230-250)
Y21E
electronic expansion valve cooling circuit 2
Y22E
electronic expansion valve heating circuit 2 (only EWYQ)
Y23E
electronic expansion valve heating circuit 2 (only EWYQ 230-250)
3
4
5
1–184
Part 1 – System Outline
ON
ON
OFF
A4P
A02P
X52A
TERM
S3A
OFF
HDP ON
For S3A setting
see installation manual EKACPG
S1A
ADDRESS=1
H1P
H2P
HAP
HBP
ON
X53A
X1M
F1
HCP
F2
+
RS485
-
OFF
X1M
HEP
TERM
S2A
OFF
HBP
HAP
TERM
S2A
S1A
MAIN
SUB
ADDRESS=MAIN
TERM=ON
2
V2C
MODBUS
DICN
EKACPG
1
+
RS485
DC 24V
GND
Part 1 – System Outline
A01P
HAP
X51A
ACS
3
V1C
A11P
1
A73P
X88A
ACS
A72P
X88A
ACS
ON
DS1
*
DS1
X89A
X89A
*
HAP
*=
X89A
X1M
A4P
only
for EWYQ
230-250
only
for EWYQ
shortcut on last
EEV PCB (319)
*
OFF ADDRESS=3
ON
HAP
OFF ADDRESS=2
ON
HAP
OFF ADDRESS=1
ON
OFF
HBP
HAP
TERM
S2A
S1A
MAIN
SUB
ADDRESS=MAIN
TERM=OFF
A71P
X88A
ACS
EKRUPG
+
RS485
DC 24V
GND
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
X53A
S1A
ADDRESS=2
H1P
H2P
HAP
HBP
TERM
S2A
X52A
ADDRESS=SUB
TERM=ON
ON
OFF
HBP
HAP
TERM
S2A
S1A
MAIN
SUB
X1M
A5P
= DIPSWITCH
A21P
3.5.3
+
RS485
DC 24V
GND
Std
ESIE06-05
Wiring Layout
PCB interconnection diagram
1
3
4
5
1–185
Wiring Layout
11
3.5.4
ESIE06-05
PCB I/O overview & fuses
Main PCB (A11P)
3
4
5
1–186
X12A (1-3-5)
DI: Reverse phase detection (L1-L2-L3) c1
X4A
DI: High pressure switch c1
X5A
DI: Compressor interclock 1 c1
X6A
DI: Compressor interlock 2 c1
X7A
DI: Fan overcurrent relay Fanstep 1 c1
X8A
DI: Fan overcurrent relay Fanstep 2 c1
X9A
DI: Fan overcurrent relay Fanstep 3 c1
X27A
DI: Fan inv safety c1 (only for OPIF)
X29A (3-4)
not used
X30A
DI: Flow switch
X31A
DI: Pump interlock
X32A (3-4)
Ch DI 1: function not pre-defined
X32A (1-2)
Ch DI 2: function not pre-defined
X13A
DO: Compressor contactor 1 c1
X14A
DO: Compressor contactor 2 c1
X15A
DO: Heatertape
X16A
DO: Pump contactor
X17A
DO: Reverse valve c1 (only for EWYQ)
X19A (1-3)
DO: Fanstep 1 c1
X19A (5-7)
DO: Fanstep 2 c1
X20A
DO: Fanstep 3 c1
X22A
Ch DO1: “SAFETY + W. (NO)” (def)
X24A
Ch DO2: “GEN. OPERATION” (def)
X25A
Ch DO3: function not pre-defined
X33A
AI: Ambient sensor
X34A
AI: Inlet water sensor
X35A
AI: Outlet water sensor
X36A
AI: Suction temperature sensor c1
X37A
AI: Refrigerant piping temperature sensor c1
X38A
AI: Coil temperature sensor 1 c1 (only for EWYQ)
X39A
AI: Coil temperature sensor 2 c1 (only for EWYQ)
X40A
AI: Discharge temperature sensor 1 c1
Part 1 – System Outline
ESIE06-05
Wiring Layout
X41A
AI: Discharge temperature sensor 2 c1
X42A
AI: High pressure sensor c1
X43A
AI: Low pressure sensor c1
X44A
AI: Current measurement (OP57)
X45A
AI: Voltage measurement (OP57)
HAP, HBP
LED (service monitor green)
H1P, H2P
LED (service monitor red)
S1A
dipswitch (address)
S2A
dipswitch (terminal resistor)
1
3
Extension PCB (A01P)
X63A
Ch DO6: Function not pre-defined
X64A (1-3)
Ch DO4: Function not pre-defined
X64A (5-7)
Ch DO5: Function not pre-defined
X65A (1-2)
Ch DI3: Function not pre-defined
X65A (3-4)
Ch DI4: Function not pre-defined
X66A
AI: Heating suction temperature sensor 1 c1
4
5
(Only for EWYQ)
X67A
AI: Heating suction temperature sensor 2 c1
(Only for EWYQ)
X68A
Ch AI2: Function not pre-defined
X69A
Ch AI1: Function not pre-defined
X70A
Ch AI 4: Function not pre-defined
X71A
ChAI3: Function not pre-defined
X72A (3-4)
AO: Fanspeed signal c1 (Only for OPIF)
X73A
ChAO1: Function not pre-defined
X74A (4-5)
AO: Fanspeed signal c2 (Only for OPIF)
HAP, HBP
LED (service monitor green)
Wired remote controller PCB (A4P, A5P)
Part 1 – System Outline
HAP, HBP
LED (service monitor green)
S1A
dipswitch (address)
S2A
dipswitch (terminal resistor)
1–187
Wiring Layout
ESIE06-05
11
Communication PCB (A02P)
HCP, HDP, HEP
LED (service monitor green)
S3A
dipswitch (terminal resistor)
EEV PCB (A71P)
3
X86A
Y11E Electronic expansion valve
X87A
Y21E Electronic expansion valve
HAP
LED (service monitor green)
DS1
dipswitch (address)
EEV PCB (A72P) (Only EWYQ)
4
5
X86A
Y12E Electronic expansion valve (only EWYQ)
X87A
Y22E Electronic expansion valve (only EWYQ)
HAP
LED (service monitor green)
DS1
dipswitch (address)
Main PCB (A21P)
1–188
X12A (1-3-5)
DI: Reverse phase detection (L1-L2-L3) c2
X4A
DI: High pressure switch c2
X5A
DI: Compressor interclock 1 c2
X6A
DI: Compressor interlock 2 c2
X7A
DI: Fan overcurrent relay Fanstep 1 c2
X8A
DI: Fan overcurrent relay Fanstep 2 c2
X9A
DI: Fan overcurrent relay Fanstep 3 c2
X27A
DI: Fan inv safety c2 (Only for OPIF)
X13A
DO: Compressor contactor 1 c2
X14A
DO: Compressor contactor 2 c2
X17A
DO: Reverse valve c2 (Only for EWYQ)
X19A (1-3)
DO: Fanstep 1 c2
X19A (5-7)
DO: Fanstep 2 c2
X20A
DO: Fanstep 3 c2
X34A
AI: Heating suction temperature sensor 1 c2 (Only for EWYQ)
X35A
AI: Heating suction temperature sensor 2 c2 (Only for EWYQ)
Part 1 – System Outline
ESIE06-05
Wiring Layout
X36A
AI: Suction temperature sensor c2
X37A
AI: Refrigerant piping temperature sensor c2
X38A
AI: Coil temperature sensor 1 c2 (only for EWYQ)
X39A
AI: Coil temperature sensor 2 c2 (only for EWYQ)
X40A
AI: Discharge temperature sensor 1 c2
X41A
AI: Discharge temperature sensor 2 c2
X42A
AI: High pressure sensor c2
X43A
AI: Low pressure sensor c2
HAP, HBP
LED (service monitor green)
H1P, H2P
LED (service monitor red)
S1A
dipswitch (address)
S2A
dipswitch (terminal resistor)
1
3
4
EEV PCB (A73P) (Only EWYQ230-250)
X86A
Y13E Electronic expansion valve (only EWYQ230-250)
X87A
Y23E Electronic expansion valve (only EWYQ230-250)
HAP
LED (service monitor green)
DS1
dipswitch (address)
5
EWAQ130
EWAQ150
EWAQ180
EWAQ210
EWAQ240
EWAQ260
EWYQ130
EWYQ150
EWYQ180
EWYQ210
EWYQ230
EWYQ250
200gL/gG
200gL/ gG
250gL/gG
250gL/gG
300gL/gG
355gL/gG
500V
500V
500V
500V
500V
500V
F1U
T 5A/250V
T 5A/250V
T5A/250V
T5A/250V
T5A/250V
T5A/250V
F4, F5
10gL/250
V
10gL/250
V
10gL/250
V
10gL/250
V
10gL/250
V
10gL/250
V
F8B (OPIF)
C 2A/250V
C 2A/250V
C 2A/250V
C 2A/250V
C 2A/250V
C 2A/250V
F9B
C 4A/250V
C 4A/250V
C 4A/250V
C 4A/250V
C 4A/250V
C 4A/250V
FUSES
F1-F3
Circuit breakers
Circuit breaker and motor protector settings
Part 1 – System Outline
F6B
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
3A
F11B, F22B
36A
40A
52A
52A
66A
66A
F12B, F21B
36A
40A
52A
52A
66A
66A
1–189
Wiring Layout
ESIE06-05
F16B
11
6,8A
6,8A
8,6A
8,6A
8,6A
8,6A
12 A
12 A
16,3A
16,3A
16,3A
16,3A
6,8A
6,8A
8,6A
8,6A
8,6A
8,6A
F14B, F24B
1,8A
2,5A
5,1A
5,1A
3,5 A
3,5 A
F15B, F25B
(OPIF)
5,6A
7,9A
7,9A
7,9A
9,5A
9,5A
K13S-K16S
1,6A
2,3A
2,3A
2,3A
1,6A
1,6A
(OPSP/
OPSC/
OPTP/OPTC)
F16B (OPHP)
F17B
(OPTP/
OPTC)
3
K23S-K26S
4
5
1–190
Part 1 – System Outline
ESIE06-05
3.5.5
Wiring Layout
PCB changeable I/O overview
1
Refer to the installation manual for instructions how to configure changeable I/O.
Changeable digital input (4 available)
Changeable analog output (1 available)
-None
-None
-Status
-Unit capacity (mA, V)
-Dual setpoint
-Details of types:
-Remote on-off
Type mA: 0..20mA / 4..20 mA
-Capacity limitation 25%, 50%, 75%, or setting
Type V: 0-1V / 0-5V / 0-10V
3
-Low noise (only for OPIF)
-Free cooling signal
-Fan forced on
Changeable digital output (6 or 5 available depending on
unit)
4
Changeable analog input (4 available)
-None (open)
-None
-Closed
-Status (mA, V, NTC*, DI)
-2nd pump
-Floating setpoint (mA, V, NTC*)
-100% capacity
-Water temperature measurement (NTC*)
-Full capacity
-Changeable DI, refer to Ch DI for possibilities (DI)
-Free cooling
- Details of types:
-General operation
Type mA: 0..20mA / 4..20mA
-Safety + warning NO
(internal 5V or external power supply)
-Safety + warning NC (only for Ch DO1)
Type V: 0-1V / 0-5V / 0-10V
-Safety NO (excluding warning)
Type DI: DI (5V detection)
5
-Safety NC (excluding warning) (only for Ch DO1)
-C1, C2 Safety NO
-Warning NO
-C1, C2 operation
-Cooling (only EWYQ)
-Heating (only EWYQ)
-Defrost (only EWYQ)
Part 1 – System Outline
*: for allowed NTC types and how to configure the software please contact your local dealer.
1–191
1–192
EWYQ 180-210
M22C
M12C
EWYQ 130-150
M21C
M11C
M23F
M24F
M25F
M15F
M24F
M23F
M21C
M11C
M22C
M12C
MxxF
M26F
M16F
: Inverter controlled fan
M25F
M15F
EWYQ 230-250
EWAQ 240-260
M14F
M13F
TOP VIEW OF UNIT (COMP+ SB)
M13F
M14F
EWAQ 180-210
M22C
M12C
SWITCHBOX
EWAQ 130-150
M21C
M11C
M24F
5
M23F
4
M14F
3
M13F
3.5.6
SWITCHBOX
SWITCHBOX
11
TOP VIEW OF UNIT (FANS)
Wiring Layout
ESIE06-05
Unit outlook
Part 1 – System Outline
ESIE06-05
3.5.7
Wiring Layout
Switchbox outlook
1
3
4
5
Part 1 – System Outline
1–193
1–194
S1M
3
4
L2
L3
5
6
Power supply
3ò50Hz 400V
L1
F1 F2 F3
1
2
502
32.4
PE
12
/
T1A
32.4
300A/5A
11
/
T1A
OP57
TR1A
501
F16B
1
2
3
I
I
M1P
X17Y
M
3ò
V
U
4
6
1
2
3
1
3
I
3ò
M
4
I
U
V
4
3
1
2
4
I
3
2
1
2
1
M1P
23.8
K1P
K1P
X26Y
X26Y
X26Y
OPSP/OPHP
OPTP
1
2
3
F16B
X26Y
X26Y
X26Y
OPSC
OPTC
W
6
5
6
12
14
11
PE
PE
W
7
6
5
6
5
I
5
14
11
F17B
F17B
M2P
X17Y
K2P
I
M2P
43.3
K2P
I
M
3ò
I
3ò
M
I
X17Y
U
4
2
1
2
1
U
2
1
2
1
5
L1C2./ 25.0
L2C2./ 25.0
L3C2./ 25.0
16.0
16.0
9
V
3
4
3
4
3
V
4
3
4
3
I
I
PE
W
10
6
5
6
5
PE
W
6
5
6
5
9
14
11
14
11
2
2
4
L2C1./
L3C1./
S2M
1
2
1
R2
R1
max.
1kW
E5H
F5
3
4
2
X10Y
2
0
X10Y
Power supply
1ò50Hz 230V
F4
22.9
K3A
0
3
1
12
OPSP/OPTP
/OPHP
E4H
Q1T
OPBT
E6H
OPSP/OPTP/OPHP
12
MODELS WITHOUT OPSP/OPTP/OPHP
E3H
PE
24
23
OP10
3.5.8
2
11
L1C1/ 20.0
L2C1/ 20.0
L3C1/ 20.0
Wiring Layout
ESIE06-05
Main power supply
Part 1 – System Outline
I
230 VAC
32 33
230 VAC
22.0
X2A:2
65
64
60
61
22.0
SL
A11P
1
SN
/
A11P
SL
A11P /
F1U
X18Y
F9B
62
X1A:1
22.0
I
34
5
6
SL
A11P
X2A
X2A:1
5A
F1U
X1A:3
31
4
400 VAC
I
SN
A11P
X2A
X3A
A11P
TR1
1
2
101
I
30.0
30.0
E1
OP57
12
/
T1V
X77A:3
F6B
63
102
3
1
2
X11Y
X11Y
32.6
151
X2A:1
X2A:2
X1A:1
27.0
SL
A21P
X2A
230 VAC
27.0
5A
F1U
X1A:3
SN
A21P
X2A
X3A
A21P
11
/
T1V
X11Y
32.6
A71P
X77A:1
5
152
3
X18Y
27.0
SL
A21P
2
SN
/
A21P
SL
A21P /
F1U
253
1
203
30.5
30.5
X77A:3
only for EWYQ
E1
3
1
2
X11Y
X11Y
X11Y
A72P
X77A:1
Part 1 – System Outline
E1HS
S1T
F8B
66
t∞
M
I
2
1
M1F
2
X11Y
1ò
1
X11Y
M
3
X11Y
only for EWYQ
230-250
E1
A73P
3.5.9
X77A:1
15.2 / L2C1.
15.2 / L3C1.
ESIE06-05
Wiring Layout
Trafo & PCB power supply
1
3
4
5
1–195
X77A:3
Q11C
M11C
K11M
I
U
M
3~
V
4
3
1
2
4
I
2
3
I
PE
W
6
5
6
5
14
11
F12B
Q12C
M12C
K12M
I
U
I
4
3
4
3
V
M
3~
2
1
2
1
I
PE
W
6
5
6
5
14
11
R1P
X12A X12A X12A
:1
:3
:5
L1
L2
L3
A11P
M14F
X14Y
K14S
K14F
X14Y
3ò
U2
M
V1
W2
I
U1
4
3
4
4
8
I
7
2
1
2
2
3
23.3
10
PE
V2
W1
9
6
5
6
6
5
96
95
EWYQ 180-210
U2
V1
14
4
3
4
X14Y
3ò
M
W2
U1
13
2
1
2
Only for
EWAQ 180-210
M15F
X14Y
K15S
K15F
16
PE
V2
W1
15
6
5
6
23.2
1–196
F11B
1
I
1
5
F14B
3
4
96
95
X14Y
4
K13F
EWAQ 130-150/180-210
EWYQ 130-150/180-210
14
13
328
I
K13F
8
5
V1F
M13F
K13S
A13P
325
F15B
3
I
3ò
M
W2
U1
2
1
2
U
L1
2
L1
1
I
U2
V1
4
3
4
V
L2
4
L2
3
PE
V2
W1
6
5
6
W
L3
6
L3
5
23.1
30.3
30.3
96
95
11
10
11
15.2 / L1C1
15.2 / L2C1
15.2 / L3C1
Wiring Layout
ESIE06-05
3.5.10 Circuit 1: compressor & fan
Part 1 – System Outline
31.2
F14B
3
M14F
X14Y
K14S
K14F
I
V1
U2
U1
W2
X14Y
3ò
M
8
4
I
7
2
3
4
2
1
4
I
3
2
1
24.3
10
PE
V2
W1
9
6
5
6
6
5
96
95
M16F
X14Y
K16S
K16F
U2
V1
20
4
3
4
X14Y
M
3ò
W2
U1
19
2
1
2
24.3
22
PE
V2
W1
21
6
5
6
K13F
X14Y
96
95
K15F
326
Part 1 – System Outline
4
14
13
14
13
328
M13F
U2
W2
M
V1
U1
3ò
4
I
2
3
4
1
2
K13F
V
L2
4
U
I
8
2
L1
I
3
5
K13S
A13P
325
F15B
1
PE
V2
W1
6
5
6
W
L3
6
5
24.1
EWAQ 240-260
EWYQ 230-250
96
95
11
10
M15F
K15S
K15F
U2
W2
M
V1
U1
3ò
4
3
4
2
1
2
24.1
PE
V2
W1
6
5
6
96
95
ESIE06-05
Wiring Layout
1
31.2
3
4
5
1–197
16.1 /
K1R
A11P
30.4
K1A
SN
A11P
X2A
1
3
5
13
21
2
4
6
14
22
A2
A1
20.0
20.1
20.1
42.0
.5
X13A:3
X13A:1
14
11
K2R
101
1
3
5
13
21
K12M
204
203
102
2
4
6
14
22
A2
A1
20.2
20.2
20.2
42.1
.6
X14A:1
X14A:2
102
102
K5R
101
X10Y
Only
for EWYQ
Y1R
X10Y
4
3
X17A:1
X17A:2
101
K11M
X10Y
E11HC
X10Y
8
6
PE
22
21
K12M
7
PE
X10Y
E12HC
X10Y
22
21
9
2
N
L1
6
X13Y
X13Y
Q12C
Only for
EWAQ 150/180-210/240-260
EWYQ 150/180-210/230-250
X12Y
Q11C
X12Y
3
K11M
SL
A11P
16.2 /
211
SL
A11P
X2A
212
1–198
105
5
106
4
107
6
N
L1
1
101
R1
K3A
K3R
A11P
203
102
SN
A11P
X2A
R2 15.7
A2
A1
X15A:4
X15A:7
SL
/
A11P
SL
A11P
X2A
/
/
23.0
23.0
23.0
11
16.1 /
Wiring Layout
ESIE06-05
3.5.11 Circuit 1: control compressors
Part 1 – System Outline
213
22.9 /
4
SN
A11P
X2A
K7R
101
2
4
6
13
K13F
20.9
K13S
A11P
SL
A11P
22.9 /
1
3
5
14
A2
A1
20.8
20.8
20.8
20.7
X19A:3
X19A:1
111
96
95
110
110
K15F
K8R
24.2
2
4
6
EWYQ 180-210
Only for
EWAQ 180-210
K1*S
/
A11P
EWYQ 180-210
/
Only for
EWAQ 180-210
20.6
K15S
203
102
1 20.6
3 20.6
5 20.6
A2
A1
X19A:7
X19A:5
116
96
95
115
K2*S
/
A11P
K14F
2
4
6
K9R
24.3
20.5
K14S
1 20.5
3 20.5
5 20.5
A2
A1
X20A:1
X20A:2
121
96
95
120
EWAQ 130-150/180-210
EWYQ 130-150/180-210
K3*S
/
A11P
24.4
A13P
A01P
(0V) 2
(AIN+) 3 (AIN-) 4
X72A:4
AO
X72A:3
323
SL
A11P
X2A
324
112
111
220
116
221
121
222
OPSP/OPTP/OPSC/
OPTC/OPHP
K4R
A11P
X27Y
F16B
X27Y
12
1
3
5
13
X27Y
K1P
X27Y
13
Part 1 – System Outline
22.9 /
2
4
6
14
101
1
A2
A1
3
13
15.3
15.3
15.4
40.1
X16A:1
X16A:3
12
4
14
11
2
203
101
203
102
SN
A11P
X2A
SL
/
A11P
/
/
43.3
43.2
ESIE06-05
Wiring Layout
3.5.12 Circuit 1: control fans
1
3
4
5
1–199
4
101
A11P
K7R
2
4
6
13
K13F
21.6
K15S
21.4
K13S
112
111
1
3
5
14
A2
A1
K1*S
/
A11P
21.3
21.4
21.4
21.3
X19A:3
X19A:1
96
111
95
96
95
110
116
K8R
2
4
6
13
K15F
23.1
203
1
3
5
14
A2
A1
2
4
6
K9R
K14F
23.2
21.2
K16S
21.1
K14S
K2*S
/
A11P
21.5
21.5
21.5
21.3
X19A:7
X19A:5
116
115
122
1–200
121
5
220
4
222
3
220
1 21.1
3 21.1
5 21.1
A2
A1
X20A:1
X20A:2
96
121
95
96
95
120
K3*S
/
A11P
EWAQ 240-260
EWYQ 230-250
2
4
6
K16F
23.3
1 21.2
3 21.2
5 21.2
A2
A1
Wiring Layout
ESIE06-05
11
Part 1 – System Outline
222
F21B
Q21C
M21C
K21M
I
U
M
3~
V
4
3
1
2
4
I
3
2
1
I
PE
W
6
5
6
5
14
11
F22B
Q22C
M22C
K22M
I
U
I
4
3
4
3
V
M
3~
2
1
2
1
I
PE
W
6
5
6
5
14
11
R2P
X12A X12A X12A
:1
:3
:5
L1
L2
L3
A21P
I
K24F
M24F
X24Y
K24S
F24B
5
X24Y
3ò
U2
M
V1
W2
I
U1
4
3
4
4
8
I
3
7
2
1
2
2
1
28.3
10
PE
V2
W1
9
6
5
6
6
5
96
95
EWYQ 180-210
Only for
EWAQ 180-210
M25F
X24Y
K25S
K25F
U2
W2
X24Y
3ò
V1
U1
M
14
4
3
4
13
2
1
2
16
PE
V2
W1
15
6
5
6
96
95
X24Y
3
K23F
EWAQ 130-150/180-210
EWYQ 130-150/180-210
28.2
Part 1 – System Outline
14
13
378
I
K23F
8
5
V2F
M23F
K23S
A23P
375
F25B
U2
W2
3ò
V1
U1
M
4
3
4
V
I
2
1
2
U
L2
L2
L1
L1
4
I
3
2
1
PE
V2
W1
6
5
6
W
L3
L3
6
5
28.1
15.2 / L1C2.
15.2 / L2C2.
15.2 / L3C2.
96
95
11
10
ESIE06-05
Wiring Layout
3.5.13 Circuit 2: compressor & fan
1
3
4
5
1–201
31.9
30.8
30.8
M24F
X24Y
K24S
K24F
I
X24Y
3ò
M
U2
V1
U1
W2
8
4
7
2
29.4
10
PE
V2
W1
9
6
5
6
3
4
2
1
6
I
5
4
I
3
2
1
96
95
M26F
X24Y
K26S
K26F
U2
V1
20
4
3
4
X24Y
3ò
M
W2
U1
19
2
1
2
22
PE
V2
W1
21
6
5
6
29.4
1–202
F24B
5
K23F
X24Y
96
95
K25F
3
14
13
14
13
378
I
K23F
8
5
M23F
K23S
A23P
375
F25B
4
376
I
3ò
M
W2
U1
2
1
2
U
L1
2
1
I
U2
V1
4
3
4
V
L2
4
3
PE
V2
W1
6
5
6
W
L3
6
5
96
95
11
10
3
29.1
5
EWAQ 240-260
EWYQ 230-250
M25F
K25S
K25F
3ò
M
W2
U1
2
1
2
U2
V1
4
3
4
29.1
PE
V2
W1
6
5
6
96
95
Wiring Layout
ESIE06-05
11
Part 1 – System Outline
31.9
16.4 /
SN
A21P
X2A
1
3
5
13
21
K21M
K1R
A21P
30.8
K2A
261
SL
A21P
2
4
6
14
22
A2
A1
25.0
25.1
25.1
42.2
.5
X13A:3
X13A:1
14
11
K2R
151
1
3
5
13
21
K22M
254
253
262
16.5 /
2
4
6
14
22
A2
A1
25.2
25.2
25.2
42.3
.6
X14A:1
X14A:2
152
152
K5R
151
X10Y
Only for EWYQ
Y2R
X10Y
155
152
16
15
X17A:1
X17A:2
151
K21M
X10Y
E21HC
X10Y
156
SL
A21P
X2A
19
PE
17
22
21
K22M
PE
18
22
21
X10Y
E22HC
X10Y
157
Part 1 – System Outline
16.4 /
20
2
N
L1
1
X23Y
X23Y
Q22C
Only for
EWAQ 150/180-210/240-260
EWYQ 150/180-210/230-250
X22Y
Q21C
X22Y
2
N
L1
1
151
253
152
SN
A21P
X2A
SL
/
A21P
SL
A21P
X2A
/
/
28.0
28.0
28.0
ESIE06-05
Wiring Layout
3.5.14 Circuit 2: control compressors
1
3
4
5
1–203
27.9 /
SN
A21P
X2A
K7R
151
2
4
6
13
K23F
25.9
K23S
A21P
SL
A21P
27.9 /
6
SL
A21P
X2A
162
161
270
1
3
5
14
A2
A1
25.8
25.8
25.8
25.7
X19A:3
X19A:1
161
96
95
160
K25F
K8R
29.2
2
4
6
EWYQ 180-210
Only for
EWAQ 180-210
K1*S
/
A21P
EWYQ 180-210
Only for
EWAQ 180-210
25.6
K25S
253
253
152
166
271
1 25.6
3 25.6
5 25.6
A2
A1
X19A:7
X19A:5
166
96
95
165
K2*S
/
A21P
K24F
2
4
6
K9R
29.3
25.5
K24S
1 25.4
3 25.5
5 25.5
A2
A1
X20A:1
X20A:2
171
96
95
170
EWAQ 130-150/180-210
EWYQ 130-150/180-210
171
1–204
272
K3*S
/
A21P
29.4
(0V) 2
A23P
A01P
4
(AIN+) 3
(AIN-) 4
X74A:5
AO
X74A:4
373
151
253
152
3
374
/
/
/
11
27.9 /
Wiring Layout
ESIE06-05
3.5.15 Circuit 2: control fans
5
Part 1 – System Outline
6
151
A21P
K7R
2
4
6
13
K23F
26.6
K25S
26.4
K23S
162
161
270
1
3
5
14
A2
A1
26.3
26.4
26.4
26.3
X19A:3
X19A:1
96
161
95
96
95
160
K1*S
/
A21P
253
K8R
2
4
6
13
K25F
28.1
166
270
1
3
5
14
A2
A1
26.5
26.5
26.6
26.3
X19A:7
X19A:5
166
165
K2*S
/
A21P
K9R
2
4
6
K24F
28.2
26.2
K26S
26.1
K24S
172
272
Part 1 – System Outline
171
EWAQ 180-210
EWYQ 180-210
1 26.1
3 26.1
5 26.1
A2
A1
X20A:1
X20A:2
96
171
95
96
95
170
K3*S
/
A21P
2
4
6
K26F
28.3
1 26.2
3 26.2
5 26.2
A2
A1
ESIE06-05
Wiring Layout
1
3
4
5
1–205
272
1–206
16.1 /
SN
A11P
SL
A11P
F1U
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
CIRCUIT 1
X11A:2
X11:1
X10A:1
X10A:3
X9A:3
X9A:1
X8A:3
X8A:1
X7A:2
X7A:1
X6A:1
X6A:3
X5A:1
X5A:2
X4A:3
X4A:1
236
121
116
111
235
234
233
232
231
239
230
X13Y
K3*S
/
A11P
K2*S
/
A11P
11
K1A
4
X13Y
11
3
20.2
F12B
4
X12Y
5
X12Y
Q11C
X12Y
237
11/M1
4
3
14/M2
14 22.1
A2
A1
5'
X13Y
Q12C
X13Y
11/M1
4
3
14/M2
For EWAQ 150/
180-210/240-260
EWYQ 150/
14 For EWAQ 130 180-210/230-250
EWYQ 130
3
11
14
11
10
X12Y
K1*S
/
A11P
5'
5
20.1
F11B
X10Y
S1PH P>
X10Y
16.5 /
16.5 /
A21P
5
16.1 /
SN
A21P
SL
A21P
F1U
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
4
238
CIRCUIT 2
X11A:2
X11:1
X10A:1
X10A:3
X9A:3
X9A:1
X8A:3
X8A:1
X7A:2
X7A:1
X6A:1
X6A:3
X5A:1
X5A:2
X4A:3
X4A:1
286
171
166
161
285
284
283
282
281
289
280
3
X23Y
X23Y
25.2
F22B
4
X22Y
K3*S
/
A21P
K2*S
/
A21P
6
X22Y
X22Y
Q21C
11/M1
4
6
14/M2
11
K2A
6
3
11
X23Y
Q22C
X23Y
14 27.1
A2
A1
6'
11/M1
6
3
14/M2
For EWAQ 150/
180-210/240-260
EWYQ 150/
14 For EWAQ 130
EWYQ 130 180-210/230-250
6
11
14
22
21
X22Y
K1*S
/
A21P
6'
6
25.1
F21B
X10Y
S2PH P>
X10Y
287
288
11
A11P
Wiring Layout
ESIE06-05
3.5.16 Control circuit (DI 230V)
Part 1 – System Outline
X86A:1 2
X88A:1
A71P
X15Y
3
V1C
4
Y11E
M
3
2
36
4
X88A:2
3
5
248
3
X87A:1 2
X89A:1
X18Y
X25Y
3
*
DI
4
Y21E
M
3
36
1
4
5
X89A:2
315
316
20.9
A13P
A13P
X86A:1 2
X88A:1
A72P
ALARM
11
10
X27A:2
DI
X27A:1
X15Y
3
4
only for EWYQ
Y12E
M
7
6
5
8
X88A:2
5
S1L
X87A:1 2
X25Y
3
*
DI
X89A:1
X16Y
5
X30A:1
4
Y22E
M
7
6
5
8
5
X89A:2
6
X30A:2
317
318
X1B:1 X1B:2 X1B:3 X1B:4 X1B:5
X86A:1 2
X88A:1
A73P
X15Y
3
4
M
only for EWYQ 230-250
Y13E
11
10
9
12
X88A:2
5
X1B:1 X1B:2 X1B:3 X1B:4 X1B:5
A01P
WHT
X29A:3
BLU
X29A:4
X2B:1
X87A:1 2
X89A:1
X25Y
3
*
319
X2B:1
4
*=
12
5
shortcut on last
EEV PCB (319)
11
10
M
X2B:3
X89A:2
9
Y23E
X2B:3
BLK
X51A:2
X1M:+
A4P
X19Y
1
X52A:1
X1M:-
2
RS485
X1M:24V
3
X52A:3
RS485
X52A:2
302
302
X51A:1
313
470
RED
471
WHT
472
314
473
BLK
GRN
475
RED
476
WHT
477
249
478
BLK
GRN
246
481
303
303
301
301
247
480
RED
482
WHT
483
BLK
GRN
486
X1M:GND
4
X52A:4
304
304
244
485
RED
BLU
491
245
WHT
487
BLU
490
RED
488
BLK
GRN
BLU
492
GRN
WHT
493
BLK
495
RED
496
25.9
A23P
A23P
ALARM
11
10
X27A:2
X27A:1
DI
RS485
X53A:2
A21P
X53A:1
X53A:2
RS485
X53A:1
311
296
WHT
497
GRN
WHT
498
BLK
312
Part 1 – System Outline
297
A11P
ESIE06-05
Wiring Layout
3.5.17 Control circuit and EEV
1
3
4
5
1–207
B1PH
X15Y
13
X42A:1
-t∞
A11P
R2T
2
14
X42A:3
AI
X42A:2
1
X34A:2
-t∞
8
450
WHT
AI
X34A:1
402
R1T
7
400
X16Y
X33A:3
AI
401
X33A:1
403
451
BLK
15
B1PL
16
17
X43A:3
18
X43A:4
15.1 /
11
OP57
11
T1A
32
12
/
T1A
15.1
T1A
0-5A/0-20mA
31
12
X44A:3
AI
X44A:4
16.3 /
11
X45A:1
-t∞
Only for
EWYQ 230-250
R15T
X15Y
-t∞
28
R26T
27
11
T1V
32
X45A:4
12
/
T1V
16.3
T1V
0-500V/0-20mA
31
12
X45A:3
Only for
EWYQ
-t∞
X15Y
R18T
24
-t∞
23
R25T
22
31
32
Only for
EWYQ 230-250
-t∞
R28T
33
34
X67A:2
AI
X67A:1
X66A:2
AI
X66A:1
X41A:2
AI
X41A:1
X40A:2
A01P
415
AI
AI
X45A:2
21
411
26
X40A:1
X39A:2
X39A:1
412
X38A:2
AI
413
X44A:2
AI
Only for
EWYQ
25
X44A:1
-t∞
X15Y
R16T
30
-t∞
29
X38A:1
X37A:2
AI
X37A:1
R17T
20
X36A:2
AI
AI
X43A:2
19
X15Y
X43A:1
-t∞
X42A:4
R14T
-t∞
X15Y
R3T
4
404
3
X36A:1
X35A:2
X35A:1
AI
405
452
408
455
406
RED
409
RED
453
WHT
504
407
454
BLK
410
501
503
502
416
514
414
60
513
61
417
1–208
418
5
419
4
420
3
421
11
A11P
Wiring Layout
ESIE06-05
3.5.18 Circuit 1: sensors
Part 1 – System Outline
422
13
AI
14
15
X42A:4
Only for
EWYQ 230-250
-t∞
R48T
X25Y
33
X35A:1
X42A:3
AI
X42A:2
32
X34A:2
423
X42A:1
X25Y
31
B2PH
A21P
Only for
EWYQ
-t∞
R38T
X25Y
AI
456
WHT
424
X34A:1
B2PL
34
16
17
18
X43A:4
20
X36A:2
X43A:3
AI
19
AI
X43A:2
X25Y
X43A:1
-t∞
R34T
X25Y
X36A:1
X35A:2
WHT
457
BLK
425
459
BLK
458
RED
426
460
427
461
RED
-t∞
R37T
30
25
Only for
EWYQ
-t∞
R36T
X25Y
428
29
429
X25Y
X38A:1
X37A:2
AI
430
X37A:1
AI
27
AI
only for
EWYQ 230-250
-t∞
R46T
X25Y
431
26
X39A:1
432
X38A:2
-t∞
R35T
21
22
-t∞
R45T
X25Y
23
24
433
X25Y
434
28
X41A:2
X40A:1
AI
X41A:1
X40A:2
435
X39A:2
AI
436
Part 1 – System Outline
437
A21P
ESIE06-05
Wiring Layout
3.5.19 Circuit 2: sensors
1
3
4
5
1–209
7
14
13
X27Y
8
45
X27Y
14
13
7
44
OPSC/OPTC/OPSP/OPTP/OPHP
23.8
K1P
OPSP/OPSC/OPHP
OPTP/OPTC
X27Y
8
43.3
K2P
45
MODELS WITHOUT OPSC/OPTC/OPSP/OPTP/OPHP
OBLIGATORY
23.8
44
13
7
S1S
14
7
Example: remote
start/stop
14
13
S2S
Example: remote
cool/heat
14
13
S3S
14
13
51
S4S
14
13
52
53
44
50
X31A:3
45
49
X32A:4
46
48
X32A:3
47
47
X32A:2
48
46
X65A:4
X65A:3
X65A:2
X65A:1
X32A:1
49
Changeable
DI4
50
Changeable
DI3
51
Changeable
DI2
52
1–210
K1P
X27Y
5
Changeable
DI1
4
X31A:1
DI
A01P
3
53
11
A11P
Wiring Layout
ESIE06-05
3.5.20 Fieldwiring DI, changeable DI
Part 1 – System Outline
8
-t∞
R8T
Ch. AI1
example:
temp. sensor
75
Example
mA measurement
(External power supply)
-
-
Example
mA measurement
(5V power supply by PCB)
0
to
20mA
74
0
to
20mA
8
73
+
75
+
74
70
73
71
72
GND
X69A:3
72
71
5V
X68A:1
73
70
GND
X68A:3
IN
X68A:2
74
IN
X69A:2
+
Ch. AI3
example:
V measurement
-
0
to
10VDC
78
76
77
77
76
GND
X71A:3
IN
X71A:2
S5S
14
13
79
Ch. AI4
example:
Switch
80
IN
X70A:2
Changeable
AI4
5V
X70A:1
79
Changeable
AI3
78
5V
X71A:1
80
Changeable
AI2
75
5V
X69A:1
81
+
91
-
0
to
20mA or 10V
Example
mA output
V output
90
X73A:2
X73A:1
Changeable
AO1
GND
X70A:3
81
Changeable
AI1
90
Part 1 – System Outline
91
A01P
ESIE06-05
Wiring Layout
3.5.21 Fieldwiring changeable AI/AO
1
3
4
5
1–211
6
External
Power
supply
(ex 24VAC
or 230VAC)
5
14
13
External
Power
supply
(ex 24VAC
or 230VAC)
4
K12M
H12P
3
14
4
H11P
3
13
5
K11M
6
K21M
K22M
23
External
Power
supply
(ex 24VAC
or 230VAC)
H21P
22
14
13
Operation
M21C
22
Operation
M12C
23
Operation
M11C
25
External
Power
supply
(ex 24VAC
or 230VAC)
H22P
24
14
13
Operation
M22C
24
7
7
H1P
External
Power
supply
(ex 24VAC
or 230VAC)
8
X22A:1
Safety active = contact closed
No power = contact open
No safety = contact open
9
Alarm NO
Default
X22A:5
X22A:3
K12R
A11P
Changeable DO1
(Default: Alarm,
NO contact 8-9)
9
H1P
External
Power
supply
(ex 24VAC
or 230VAC)
8
Safety active = contact closed
No power = contact closed
No safety = contact open
9
7
Alarm NC
Software selection necessary
9
Changeable DO: Maximum load: 2A-230VAC, Minimum load: 10mA-5VDC
9
1–212
25
5
8
4
K14R
A11P
H2P
11
External
Power
supply
(ex 24VAC
or 230VAC)
10
X24A:1
X24A:2
Changeable DO2
(Default:
Gen. operation)
10
3
11
11
AC15: max.3A-230V
Wiring Layout
ESIE06-05
3.5.22 Fieldwiring DO, changeable DO
Part 1 – System Outline
4
3
K1P
X27Y
External
Power supply
(ex 24VAC
or 230VAC)
12
X16A:3
13
13
NOT FOR MODELS WITH
OPSC/OPTC/OPSP/OPTP/OPHP
K1S
X27Y
K4R
12
2
14
11
6
23.9
SL
A11P
X27Y
F17B
X27Y
14
1
5
15
1
3
5
13
MODELS WITH OPTC/OPTP
23.9
2
4
6
14
SN
A11P
X2A
X27Y
K2P
X27Y
X25A:3
X25A:1
Changeable DO3
(Default: 2nd pump)
10
K15R
A11P
14
X16A:1
15.5
15.5
15.5
40.2
15
X27Y
6
5
H3P
X27Y
External
Power
supply
(ex 24VAC
or 230VAC)
14
MODELS WITHOUT OPTC/OPTP
Changeable DO3
(no predefined function)
10
15
K21R
A01P
16
A11P
Changeable
DO3
H4P
17
External
Power
supply
(ex 24VAC
or 230VAC)
16
X64A:3
X64:1
Changeable
DO4
17
K22R
A01P
18
DO
pump
21
External
Power
supply
(ex 24VAC
or 230VAC)
20
X63A:3
X63A:1
External
Power
supply
(ex 24VAC
or 230VAC)
19
K20R
A01P
Changeable
DO6
H6P
19
H5P
18
X64A:7
X64A:5
Changeable
DO5
20
Part 1 – System Outline
21
Ch. DO: Maximum load: 2A-230VAC, Minimum load: 10mA-5VDC
ESIE06-05
Wiring Layout
1
3
4
5
1–213
Wiring Layout
ESIE06-05
11
3
4
5
1–214
Part 1 – System Outline
ESIE06-05
4
Part 2
Functional Description
Introduction
This part gives more detailed information on the functions and controls of the unit. This information is
used as background information for troubleshooting. An extensive overview of the functioning of the
controller is also given in this part. Knowledge of the controller is essential to gather information prior
to servicing and troubleshooting.
What is in this part?
This part contains the following chapters:
Chapter
See page
1–Operation Range
2–3
2–The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
2–9
3–Functional Control for a Standalone Unit
2–105
Part 2 – Functional Description
2
3
4
5
2–1
ESIE06-05
1
2
3
5
2–2
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
Operation Range
Part 2
1
1
Operation Range
2
1.1
What Is in This Chapter?
Introduction
Overview
This chapter contains the operation range of the different models. Understanding these operation
ranges is vital when selecting a chiller or when diagnosing a malfunction that is related to the chiller
operation range.
3
This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic
See page
1.2–Operational Range: EWAQ080-100-180-210-240-260DAYN(N-P-B)
2–4
1.3–Operational Range: EWAQ130-150DAYN(N-P-B)
2–5
1.4–Operational Range: EWYQ080-100-180-210-230-250DAYN(N-P-B)
2–6
1.5–Operational Range: EWYQ130-150DAYN(N-P-B)
2–7
4
5
Part 2 – Functional Description
2–3
Operation Range
1
1.2
ESIE06-05
Operational Range: EWAQ080-100-180-210-240-260DAYN(N-P-B)
Operational range
The illustration below shows the operational range of the
EWAQ080-100-180-210-240-260DAYN(N-P-B).
2
3
4
5
STD: Standard unit
OPZL: Leaving water evaporator from -10° to 4°C by use of glycol
Protect the water circuit against freezing by:
* OP10: heater tape
or
* Filling up the system with a glycol solution (only for unit without pump or unit
with OPZL)
OPIF Option Inverter Fans EWAQ080-100-180-210-240-260
2–4
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
1.3
Operation Range
Operational Range: EWAQ130-150DAYN(N-P-B)
Operational range
1
The illustration below shows the operational range of the EWAQ130-150DAYN(N-P-B).
.
2
3
4
5
STD: Standard unit
OPZL: Leaving water evaporator from -10° to 4°C by use of glycol
Protect the water circuit against freezing by:
* OP10: heater tape
or
* Filling up the system with a glycol solution (only for unit without pump or unit
with OPZL)
OPIF Option Inverter Fans EWAQ130-150
Part 2 – Functional Description
2–5
Operation Range
1
1.4
ESIE06-05
Operational Range: EWYQ080-100-180-210-230-250DAYN(N-P-B)
Operational range
The illustration below shows the operational range of the
EWYQ080-100-180-210-230-250DAYN(N-P-B).
2
3
4
5
STD: Standard unit
OPZL: Leaving water evaporator from -10° to 5°C by use of glycol
Protect the water circuit against freezing by:
* OP10: heater tape
or
* Filling up the system with a glycol solution (only for unit without pump or unit
with OPZL)
OPIF Option Inverter Fans EWYQ080-100-180-210-230-250
2–6
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
1.5
Operation Range
Operational Range: EWYQ130-150DAYN(N-P-B)
Operational range
1
The illustration below shows the operational range of the EWYQ130-150DAYN(N-P-B).
.
2
3
4
5
STD: Standard unit
OPZL: Leaving water evaporator from -10° to 5°C by use of glycol
Protect the water circuit against freezing by:
* OP10: heater tape
or
* Filling up the system with a glycol solution (only for unit without pump or unit
with OPZL)
OPIF Option Inverter Fans EWYQ130-150
Part 2 – Functional Description
2–7
Operation Range
ESIE06-05
1
2
3
4
5
2–8
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
Part 2
2
1
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
2
2.1
What Is In This Chapter?
Introduction
In this chapter the practical use of the PCASO controller for multiscroll chillers will be explained.
Overview
This chapter contains the following topics:
3
Topic
See page
2.2–The Controller
2–10
2.3–Start/Stop, Cool/Heat and Temperature settings
2–12
2.4–Menu Overview
2–13
2.5–How to Read or Adjust Parameter Settings: the Programming Procedure
2–14
2.6–Read-out Menu
2–15
2.7–Set Points Menu
2–25
2.8–User Settings
2–26
2.9–Timers menu
2–43
2.10–Info menu
2–45
2.11–Input/Output Status Menu
2–48
2.12–User Password Menu
2–56
2.13–Network Menu
2–58
2.14–Cool / Heat Menu
2–60
2.15–Service Menu
2–61
2.16–Menu overview
2–102
2.17–Service menu overview
2–103
Part 2 – Functional Description
4
5
2–9
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
1
2.2
ESIE06-05
The Controller
Digital Controller
The EWAP080-260DAYN and EWYP080-250 DAYN units are equipped with a digital controller,
offering a user-friendly way to configure, use and maintain the unit.
The digital controller consists of:
2
■
Graphic LCD display
■
6 keys
Front Panel
The illustration below shows the front panel of the controller.
Keys
The table below contains an overview of the keys and their functions.
3
4
5
key to start up or to shut down the unit
p
f
g
h
q
2–10
key to enter the safeties menu or to reset an
alarm
key to enter the main menu or to return to the
previous menu
keys to scroll up or down through the screens of
a menu or to raise, or lower a setting
key to confirm a selection or a setting
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
How to switch
between screens
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
h g
Each menu contains a number of screens. You can switch between the screens, using the
or
keys. In the upper-left corner of the screen you will find a screen indicator, indicating whether there is
a previous or next screen.
1
An overview is given in the table below:
The screen indicator
^
v
First screen of the menu, press
h to go to the next screen
Last screen of the menu, press
screen
g to go to the previous
2
either return to the previous or go to the next screen
e
Screen Detail
Indicates that you should do the following
3
Each screen contains 4 lines which give information about a setting (a description and an entry field).
The entry fields can be adjusted using the
h and the g keys.
The cursor is marked by the sign "_". The cursor can be moved between the screen indicator and the
entry fields using the
q key.
The cursor can be moved directly to the screen indicator by pressing the
Cursor
f key.
5
Screen indicator
_ V/
l
i
n
e
1
l
i
n
e
l
i
n
e
l
i
n
e
:
T I
T
L E
2
v
a
l
u
e
1
:
1 0
3
v
a
l
u
e
2
:
2 0
4
v
a
l
u
e
3
:
3 0
Information
Entry field
Remark: Make sure that the cursor is at the screen indicator position when scrolling through the
screens. After changing a entry field push the
Part 2 – Functional Description
4
q key to confirm the setting.
2–11
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
1
2.3
Start/Stop, Cool/Heat and Temperature settings
Power on
2
ESIE06-05
Remote start/stop
■
The initialization takes 20 seconds.
■
The controller automatically goes to the menu overview.
The procedure to start or stop the unit depends on the settings of the remote start/stop.
Remark: The remote start/stop is field supply.
How to start or stop
3
4
How to cool or heat
Local key
Remote Switch
Unit
LED
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
Flashing
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
To change from cooling to heating (or visa versa) you have to enter the Cooling/Heating menu through
the main menu or a remote cool/heat signal can be used.
Remark: The remote cool/heat is field supply.
5
Temperature
Setting
2–12
To adjust the inlet or outlet water temperature, go to the Set Points menu through the main menu.
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
2.4
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
Menu Overview
Introduction
1
This chapter gives an overview of the screens provided by the different menus.
Initial Test
Appears when
connected to
power supply
Main menu
Graphic or Text layout
Readout menu
2
Setpoint menu
User settings menu
3
Service menu
4
Timers menu
History menu
Info menu
5
Input/Output menu
User password menu
Cooling/heating menu
Network menu
Safety menu
Part 2 – Functional Description
2–13
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
1
2.5
ESIE06-05
How to Read or Adjust Parameter Settings: the Programming Procedure
Programming
Procedure
Begin (*)
2
Press the
f key.
Select the desired menu with the
3
h/g keys.
Does the controller prompt you to give the password?
No
Yes
Enter the password using the
Press the
4
h or g key.
q key.
Select the desired screen using the
No
5
h or g key.
Do you want to adjust a parameter setting?
Yes
Select the parameter by using the
Adjust the value using the
q key.
h or g key.
Do you want to save the modifications?
No
Yes
Press the
Yes
q key.
Do you want to adjust another parameter in the same screen?
No
Press the
f key.
Do you want to adjust a parameter in another screen?
Yes
No
(*): The display shows the last screen used.
2–14
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
2.6
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
Read-out Menu
1
Operational
information
Using this menu you can read the operational information, such as the cooling set points, the inlet and
outlet water temperature, the circuit status, etc. This menu allows access to several screens. The
number of screens depends on the unit type and the options.
Screen 1
This screen shows the actual operational information about the status of the pump, the compressor,
the fans and the temperature setpoint. This screen can be enabled or disabled in the service/advanced
menu.
_vc
3
013.6 °C
…
≤0U4
∞11
∞12
H
∞21
∞22
H
2
012.0 °
C
4
Legend:
cooling mode
h
heating mode
5
fan (H high or L low or % of inverter fan output)
s
low noise mode activated (only available when option OPIF is installed)
…
…1/2
∞11/12
∞21/22
≤
13.6 °
C
12.0 °C
pump on
Part 2 – Functional Description
in case of dual pump control: pump 1/2 on
circuit 1 compressor 1/2 on
circuit 2 compressor 1/2 on
alarm and last occurred malfunction code (OU4 in example)
actual temperature (inlet or outlet temperature depending on active mode)
temperature setpoint (inlet or outlet temperature depending on active mode)
2–15
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
1
Screen 2
ESIE06-05
This screen shows the actual operational information about the control mode, the inlet, outlet water
temperature and ambient temperature.
_ COOL. INLSP1:012.0 °
C
INLET WATER:013.6 °
C
2
OUTLET WATER:007.0 °C
AMBIENT:006.5 °
C
3
4
5
Display
Description
COOL
operation in cooling mode
HEAT
operation in heating mode
INLSP(1)(2)
inlet temperature setpoint 1 (or 2 in case of dual setpoint setting)
OUTSP(1)(2)
outlet temperature setpoint 1 (or 2 in case of dual setpoint setting)
INLET WATER
Actual inlet water temperature
OUTLET WATER
Actual outlet water temperature
AMBIENT
Actual ambient temperature
Remark: For a DICN system, the INLET WATER and OUTLET WATER values are the values of the
individual unit, not of the system. Temperatures of the system can be consulted in the first screen of
the network menu.
These screens show the actual operational information about the EEV control. They are only visible
when they are enabled in the Service/EEV menu.
Screen 3
C1 TEMP.READOUT
SUCTION C1:007.4 °
C
SUPERHEAT C1:007.3 °
C
EEV PULS C1:0000PLS
2–16
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
1
Screen 4
C1 TEMP.READOUT
SUCTION H11:007.4 °
C
SUPERHEAT H11:007.3 °
C
2
EEV PULS H11:0000PLS
Screen 5
C1 TEMP.READOUT
3
SUCTION H12:007.4 °
C
SUPERHEAT H12:007.3 °
C
EEV PULS H12:0000PLS
4
Display
Description
C1 TEMP. READOUT
operational information EEV control of circuit 1
SUCTION C1
suction temp. in cooling mode of circuit 1
SUCTION H11
suction temp. in heating mode of compressor 1 of circuit 1
SUCTION H12
suction temp. in heating mode of compressor 2 of circuit 1
SUPERHEAT C1
actual superheat in cooling mode of circuit 1
SUPERHEAT H11
actual superheat in heating mode of coil 1 of circuit 1
SUPERHEAT H12
actual superheat in heating mode of coil 2 of circuit 1
EEV PULS C1
actual electronic expansion valve opening in cooling mode
EEV PULS H11
actual electronic expansion valve opening in heating mode of expansion valve of coil 1
EEV PULS H12
actual electronic expansion valve opening in heating mode of expansion valve of coil 2
Part 2 – Functional Description
5
2–17
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
1
ESIE06-05
These screens show the actual operational information about the EEV control. They are only visible
when they are enabled in the service / EEV menu. The screens are only visible if the unit has 2 circuits.
Screen 6
C2 TEMP.READOUT
2
SUCTION C2:007.4 °
C
SUPERHEAT C2:007.3 °
C
EEV PULS C2:0000PLS
3
Screen 7
C2 TEMP.READOUT
SUCTION H21:007.4 °
C
4
SUPERHEAT H21:007.3 °
C
EEV PULS H21:0000PLS
Screen 8
5
C2 TEMP.READOUT
SUCTION H22:007.4 °
C
SUPERHEAT H22:007.3 °
C
EEV PULS H22:0000PLS
:
2–18
Display
Description
C2 TEMP. READOUT
operational information EEV control of circuit 2
SUCTION C2
suction temp. in cooling mode of circuit 2
SUCTION H21
suction temp. in heating mode of compressor 1 of circuit 2
SUCTION H22
suction temp. in heating mode of compressor 2 of circuit 2
SUPERHEAT C2
actual superheat in cooling mode of circuit 2
SUPERHEAT H21
actual superheat in heating mode of coil 1 of circuit 2
SUPERHEAT H22
actual superheat in heating mode of coil 2 of circuit 2
EEV PULS C2
actual electronic expansion valve opening in cooling
mode
EEV PULS H 21
actual electronic expansion valve opening in heating
mode of expansion valve of coil 1
EEV PULS H22
actual electronic expansion valve opening in heating
mode of expansion valve of coil 2
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
Screen 9
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
These screens show the actual operational information about the discharge temperature of circuits 1
and 2 for compressors 1 and 2.
_
C1 TEMP.READOUT
C11 DISCHARGE:010.1 °
C
2
C12 DISCHARGE:010.5 °
C
Screen 10
3
This screen is only visible if the unit has 2 circuits.
_
C2 TEMP.READOUT
C21 DISCHARGE:010.1 °
C
4
C22 DISCHARGE:010.5 °
C
Display
Description
C1 TEMP. READOUT
discharge temperature readout of circuit 1
C2 TEMP. READOUT
discharge temperature readout of circuit 2
C11 DISCHARGE
discharge temperature compressor 1 of circuit 1
C12 DISCHARGE
discharge temperature compressor 2 of circuit 1
C21 DISCHARGE
discharge temperature compressor 1 of circuit 2
C22 DISCHARGE
discharge temperature compressor 2 of circuit 2
Part 2 – Functional Description
1
5
2–19
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
1
ESIE06-05
These screens show the actual operational information about the refrigerant temperature and the coil
temperature.
Screen 11
_
2
C1 TEMP.READOUT
C1 REFR:000.0 °
C
C11 COIL:000.0 °
C
C12 COIL:000.0 °
C
3
Screen 12
This screen is only visible if the unit has 2 circuits.
_
4
C2 TEMP.READOUT
C2 REFR:000.0 °
C
C21 COIL:000.0 °
C
C22 COIL:000.0 °
C
5
Display
Description
C1 TEMP. READOUT
Temperature readout of circuit 1
C2 TEMP. READOUT
Temperature readout of circuit 2
C1 REFR.
Refrigerant temperature of circuit 1
C2 REFR.
Refrigerant temperature of circuit 2
C11 COIL
Temperature of coil 1 of circuit 1
C12 COIL
Temperature of coil 2 of circuit 1
C21
Temperature of coil 1 of circuit 2
C22
Temperature of coil 2 of circuit 2
Remark: Coil sensors are only present on EWYQ units.
2–20
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
These screens show the actual operational information about the high and low pressure and the fan
output.
1
Screen 13
_
C1 ACT. PRESSURES
2
HP1:019.0b = 050.8 °
C
LP1:004.4b = -05.2 °
C
FAN1:OFF
3
Screen 14
This screen is only visible if the unit has 2 circuits.
.
_
C2 ACT. PRESSURES
4
HP2:019.0b = 050.8 °
C
LP2:004.4b = -05.2 °
C
FAN2:OFF
Display
Description
C1 ACT. PRESSURES
actual pressures of circuit 1
C2 ACT. PRESSURES
actual pressures of circuit 2
HP1:
b=
°C
actual high pressure and corresponding temperature
LP1:
b=
°C
actual low pressure and corresponding temperature
HP2:
b=
°C
actual high pressure and corresponding temperature
LP2:
b=
°C
actual low pressure and corresponding temperature
FAN1/FAN2
actual fan output
OFF :
Part 2 – Functional Description
OFF
L:
low speed
M:
medium speed
H:
high speed
000% :
LOW NOISE : N/Y
5
percentage of inverter fan output (only with OPIF)
Indication if low noise mode is active at the moment (only with
OPIF)
2–21
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
1
ESIE06-05
These screens show the actual status of the circuit 1 or circuit 2 compressors and the capacity of the
unit.
Screen 15
_
2
UNIT STATUS
C11:OFF SAFETY ACT.
C12:OFF SAFETY ACT.
UNIT CAPACITY:000%
3
This screen is only visible if the unit has 2 circuits.
Screen 16
_
4
UNIT STATUS
C21:OFF SAFETY ACT.
C22:OFF SAFETY ACT.
5
.
2–22
Display
Description
C11
status of compressor 1 of circuit 1
C12
status of compressor 2 of circuit 1
C21
status of compressor 1 of circuit 2
C22
status of compressor 2 of circuit 2
UNIT CAPACITY
percentage of the total unit capacity
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
Possible compressor status:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Screen 17
SAFETY ACT: one of the circuit safety devices is activated.
FREEZEUP DIS: the compressor is disabled by the freeze-up disable function.
FREEZEUP PR: the freeze-up prevention is active.
DEFROST BUSY: defrost is active on this circuit.
COMP PR: the compressor protection function is active.
HP SETBACK: the high pressure setback is active.
MIN.RUN.TIM.: the minimum running time of the compressor is active.
LIMIT: the compressor is limited by the limitation function.
STANDBY DICN: when in a DICN configuration, the unit is in standby mode because there is sufficient current capacity to maintain set point.
UNIT OFF: the unit is switched off.
AREC INLET: the compressor will not start up when the inlet water temperature has not risen
enough compared to the previous switch off of the compressor.
FREE COOLING: the free cooling mode is active.
TIMER BUSY: the actual value of one of the compressor timers is not zero.
PUMPLEAD TIM: the compressor will wait to start up for as long as the pump lead timer is counting down.
This screen shows the actual operational information about the current (Ampère) and voltage of the
unit.
1
2
3
4
This screen is only visible when the A-meter, V-meter (option OP57) is installed.
_
EXTRA READOUT
5
CURRENT:055A
VOLTAGE:230V
Part 2 – Functional Description
2–23
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
1
ESIE06-05
These screens show the actual operational information about the total running hours in cooling and
heating mode and the number of compressor stops of each circuit, as well as the total running hours
of the pumps.
Screen 18 & 19
CIRCUIT 1/ COMPRESSOR 1
2
_
CIRCUIT 1/ COMPRESSOR 2
EXTRA READOUT
_
EXTRA READOUT
C11RH:00000hCS:00000
C21RH:00000hCS:00000
C11C:00000h H:00000h
C21C:00000h H:00000h
RHP1:00001hP2:00000h
3
These screens are only visible if the unit has 2 circuits.
4
Screen 20 & 21
CIRCUIT 2/ COMPRESSOR 1
_
EXTRA READOUT
CIRCUIT 2/ COMPRESSOR 2
_
EXTRA READOUT
C12RH:00000hCS:00000
C22RH:00000hCS:00000
C12C:00000h H:00000h
C22C:00000h H:00000h
5
Display
Description
CxxRH: CS
RH: Total running hours of this circuit
CS: Total compressor starts of this circuit
CxxC: H
C: Running hours in cooling mode
H: Running hours in heating mode
RHP1: 2
RHP1: Running hours of pump 1
P2: Running hours of pump 2
2–24
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
2.7
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
Set Points Menu
Screen: password
1
Depending on the settings in the user settings menu explained further on, you may need the user
password to be able to enter the screens in this menu.
This screen will only appear if a password is required.
2
ENTER PASSWORD
PASSWORD: 0000
3
TO LOGIN
Remark: The units leave the factory with the user password set to "1234". This user password can be
modified in the user password menu.
Setpoint Screen
This menu allows you to set the inlet/outlet water temperature of the evaporator/condenser of setpoint
1 and 2. These set points will not be active in the Manual Control Mode.
4
> COOL. INLSP1:012.0 °C
5
COOL. INLSP2:012.0 °
C
COOL. OUTSP1:007.0 °
C
COOL. OUTSP2:007.0 °
C
.
Display
Description
COOL
setpoints in cooling mode
HEAT
setpoints in heating mode
INLSP
inlet water temp. setpoint 1
INLSP
inlet water temp. setpoint 2 (dual setpoint)
OUTSP
outlet water temp. setpoint 1
OUTSP
outlet water temp. setpoint 2 (dual setpoint)
A " >" symbol is displayed in front of the active setpoint in this screen.
Remark: You can select setpoint 1 or 2 with a digital input from a switch. In the service menu you can
select which digital input you want to use for this.
Part 2 – Functional Description
2–25
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
1
2.8
ESIE06-05
User Settings
User Settings Menu
Password
You need the user password to enter this menu.
2
ENTER PASSWORD
PASSWORD: 0000
3
TO LOGIN
Remark: The units leave the factory with the user password set to "1234". This user password can be
modified in the user password menu.
4
User Settings Menu
5
2–26
h
and
Use the
of your choice.
g keys to scroll through the menu and press the q key to enter the submenu
Topic
See page
2.8.1 Thermostat settings
2–27
2.8.2 Compressor settings
2–28
2.8.3 Fan Settings
2–29
2.8.4 Pump settings
2–31
2.8.5 Floating setpoint
2–32
2.8.6 Language
2–34
2.8.7 Time and Date
2–35
2.8.8 Free cooling
2–35
2.8.9 DICN
2–37
2.8.10 Advanced
2–38
2.8.11 Defrost
2–41
2.8.12 Service Menu
2–42
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
2.8.1
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
Thermostat settings
Thermostat
1
This screen allows modification of the control settings.
_v
THERMOSTAT
2
MODE:INL WATER
LOADUP:180s-DWN:030s
3
Possible settings MODE:
■
INL WATER:
inlet water control
LOAD UP: 180s
minimum load up time between 2 compressor starts
DOWN : 30 s
minimum load down time between 2 compressor stops
■
OUTL WATER:
LOAD UP: 30s
minimum load up time between 2 compressor starts
DOWN: 15s
minimum load down time between 2 compressor stops
■
MANUAL CONTROL:
4
outlet water control
manual control (no thermostat control active)
5
Remark: The load up and load down time changes according to the selected operation mode.
Manual Setting
This screen allows modification of the manual control settings.
This screen is only visible when MANUAL is selected as thermostat mode (see THERMOSTAT
screen)
_^
MANUAL SETTINGS
C11:OFF
C12:OFF
C21:OFF
C22:OFF
F1*:OFF
F2*:OFF
Possible settings C11 / C12 / C21 / C22:
ON
:
compressor ON
OFF
:
compressor OFF
Part 2 – Functional Description
2–27
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
ESIE06-05
Possible settings F1*/ F2*:
1
For standard fans:
2
OFF
:
All fans off
L
:
Low speed
M
:
Medium speed
H
:
High speed
Inverter fans (OPIF or OPLN)
000% : percentage of fan output
3
2.8.2
4
Compressor settings
Compr. Lead-Lag
This screen allows modification of the compressor lead-lag settings:
_v
COMPR.LEAD-LAG
MODE:PRIORITY
5
PRIORITY:
C11>C12>C21>C22
Possible settings MODE:
■
PRIORITY:
The user can select the sequence of the compressors to start.
example:
C11 > C12 : compressor 1 will start before compressor 2
■
Compr. Cap. Limit
AUTO :
The compressor lead-lag according to the running hours of
the compressors
This screen allows modification of the compressor capacity limitation settings.
_^
COMPR.CAP.LIMIT
MODE:LIMIT SETTING
SET: C11:OFF C12:OFF
C21:OFF C22:OFF
2–28
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
Possible settings MODE:
■
NOT ACTIVE:
The compressor limitation function is disabled.
■
CHANG. DIG. INP.:
A changeable digital input can be used to enable/disable the
compressor capacity limitation.
1
-When there is no changeable digital input programmed as
“CAP LIMIT SET”, no compressor capacity limits can be
entered (not displayed)
2
-When there is a changeable digital input programmed as
“CAP LIMIT SET”,
■
LIMIT SETTING:
•
the compressors can be disabled by selecting OFF.
•
the compressors can be enabled by selecting ON.
3
The programmed limitation will be used without the need of an
additional programmed DI.
•
the compressors can be disabled by selecting OFF.
•
the compressors can be enabled by selecting ON.
4
Remark: The compressors that are programmed as OFF will always remain off.
■
LIMIT 50%:
The total capacity of the unit will be limited on 50%
Remark: Lines 3 and 4 of the COMPR. CAP. LIMIT screen will not be displayed.
2.8.3
5
Fan Settings
Fan Low Noise
This screen allows modification of the fan low noise mode.
This screen is only visible when the option inverter fans (OPIF) or the option low noise (OPLN) has
been installed.
_v
FAN LOW NOISE
MODE:NOT ACTIVE
Possible settings MODE:
■
NOT ACTIVE
:
fan low noise mode is disabled.
■
ACTIVE
:
fan low noise mode is enabled.
■
CHANG.DIG.INP.
:
fan low noise mode can be enabled/disabled with a changeable digital input, programmed in the service/fan menu.
■
DAILY SCHEDULE
:
fan low noise mode can be enabled/disabled by means of a
specified start and stop time.
Part 2 – Functional Description
2–29
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
ESIE06-05
This screen allows modification of the start and stop time of the fan low noise mode.
1
This screen is only visible when “DAILY SCHEDULE” is selected as fan low noise mode.
_v
FAN LOW NOISE
MODE:DAILY SCHEDULE
2
START:20h00
STOP:06h00
Settings:
3
4
Fan forced ON
START
:
start time of the low noise mode
STOP
:
stop time of the low noise mode
This screen allows modification of the fan forced ON function.
_
FAN FORCED ON
IF UNIT IS OFF THEN
ALL FANS:OFF
5
Possible settings :
2–30
■
OFF
:
If the unit is OFF, then all the fans are OFF.
■
ON
:
If the unit is OFF, then all the fans are ON.
■
CH. DIG. INP.
:
If the unit is OFF, all the fans can be switched on by use of a
changeable digital input, programmed in the service/fan
menu (Fan Forced ON).
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
2.8.4
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
Pump settings
Pump Control
1
This screen allows modification of the pump control.
_v
PUMPCONTROL
PUMPLEADTIME
:020s
PUMPLAGTIME
:060s
DAILY ON:N
2
AT:00h00
3
Settings:
PUMPLEADTIME
:
Time the water pump will operate before starting up the chiller
PUMPLAGTIME
:
Time the water pump will keep running after stopping the
chiller
DAILY ON
:
N: function disabled
:
Y: activation of daily pump start
:
Time of the daily ON function
AT
Dual Pump
4
5
This screen allows modification of the dual pump control.
_^
DUAL PUMP
MODE:AUTO ROTATION
OFFSET ON RH
:048h
Possible settings MODE:
■
AUTO ROTATION
:
the sequence of the pump start is done based on the running hours
■
PUMP1 > PUMP2
:
pump 1 will always start first
■
PUMP2 > PUMP1
:
pump 2 will always start first
■
OFFSET ON RH
:
offset in running hours between pump1 and pump2 (only when autorotation is selected)
Part 2 – Functional Description
2–31
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
1
2.8.5
ESIE06-05
Floating setpoint
Floating Setpoint
This screen allows modification of the floating setpoint function. Different floating setpoint modes will
give different screens.
2
_
FLOATING SETPOINT
MODE:NOT ACTIVE
3
Possible modes :
4
Floating Setpoint
Ambient
■
AMBIENT
■
CH. AI SLOPE NTC
■
CH. AI SLOPE V-A
■
CH. AI MAX VALUE
■
NOT ACTIVE
This screen allows modification of the floating setpoint based on ambient temperature.
5
_
FLOATING SETPOINT
MODE:AMBIENT
MAXPOS:03.0 °
C NEG:00.0 °
C
RF:020.0 °
C SLOPE:006.0 °
C
Settings:
2–32
MODE
:
Ambient, floating setpoint function based on ambient temperature
MAXPOS
:
Maximum value of positive floating setpoint correction
NEG
:
Maximum value of negative floating setpoint correction
RF
:
Reference value. At this ambient temperature there is no correction
of the setpoint.
SLOPE
:
This parameter is necessary to draw the angle of the curve.
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
Floating Setpoint
CH. AI . SLOPE NTC
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
This screen allows modification of the floating setpoint, based on an additional NTC sensor, connected
to an analogue input.
_
1
FLOATING SETPOINT
MODE:CH.AI SLOPE NTC
2
MAXPOS:03.0 °
C NEG:03.0 °
C
RF:020.0 °
C SLOPE:006.0 °
C
Settings:
MODE
:
Changeable analogue input slope NTC, floating setpoint based on
an additional NTC sensor
MAXPOS
:
Maximum value of positive floating setpoint correction
NEG
:
Maximum value of negative floating setpoint correction
RF
:
Reference value. At this ambient temperature there is no correction
of the setpoint.
SLOPE
:
This parameter is necessary to draw the angle of the curve.
Remark: When mode “CH. AI SLOPE NTC” is selected, a changeable analogue input needs to be
programmed in the service/input output menu.
Floating Setpoint
CH. AI. SLOPE V-A
This screen allows modification of the floating setpoint based on an external voltage or current signal.
_
FLOATING SETPOINT
MODE:CH.AI SLOPE V-A
MAXPOS:03.0 °
C NEG:03.0 °
C
RF:020.0 °
C SLOPE:012.0 °
C
Settings:
MODE
:
Changeable analogue input slope V-A, floating setpoint based on
an external voltage or current signal
MAXPOS
:
Maximum value of positive floating setpoint correction
NEG
:
Maximum value of negative floating setpoint correction
RF
:
Reference value. At this percentage of the input signal there is no
correction of the setpoint.
SLOPE
:
This parameter is necessary to draw the angle of the curve.
Remark: When mode “CH. AI SLOPE V-A” is selected, a changeable analogue input needs to be
programmed in the service/input output menu.
Part 2 – Functional Description
2–33
3
4
5
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
1
Floating Setpoint
CH AI MAX VALUE
ESIE06-05
This screen allows modification of the floating setpoint based on an external voltage or current signal.
_
FLOATING SETPOINT
MODE:CH.AI MAX VALUE
2
MAXIMUM VALUE:003.0 °
C
Settings:
3
:
Changeable analogue input maximum value, floating setpoint
based on an external voltage or current signal
MAXIMUM VALUE
:
Maximum value of floating setpoint correction, value can be
positive or negative
Remark: When mode “CH. AI MAX VALUE” is selected, a changeable analogue input needs to be
programmed in the service/input output menu.
4
2.8.6
5
MODE
Language
Language
This screen allows modification of the language.
_
LANGUAGE
PRESS ENTER TO
CHANGE LANGUAGE:
ENGLISH
When entering this menu, just press ENTER to change the language. This is a loop function: when
reaching the last selectable language you are sent back to the first.
2–34
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
2.8.7
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
Time and Date
Time and Date
1
This screen allows modification of the time and date.
_
TIME AND DATE
2
TIME: 22h35
DATE FORMAT:DD/MM/YY
DATE: WED
24/01/07
3
Settings:
TIME
:
To set the actual time
DATE FORMAT
:
To select date format
DATE
2.8.8
:
■
DD/MM/YY
■
YY/MM/DD
4
To set the actual date
5
Free cooling
Free Cooling
This screen allows modification of the free cooling function. The different free cooling modes will give
different screens.
_
FREE COOLING
MODE:NOT ACTIVE
Settings:
■
AMBIENT
■
INLET- AMBIENT
■
CHANG. DIG. INP.
■
NOT ACTIVE
Part 2 – Functional Description
2–35
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
1
Free Cooling
Ambient
ESIE06-05
This screen allows modification of the free cooling based on ambient temperature.
_
FREE COOLING
MODE:AMBIENT
2
SP: 05.0 °
C
PUMP:ON
DIF:01.0 °C
LEAD:000s
Settings:
3
4
Free Cooling InletAmbient
MODE
:
AMBIENT, free cooling based on ambient temperature
SP
:
Define setpoint of free cooling
DIF
:
Setting of the free cooling difference
PUMP
:
Define if pump is ON/ OFF during free cooling operation
LEAD
:
Lead time of the evaporator water pump
This screen allows modification of the free cooling, based on the difference between inlet water
temperature and ambient temperature.
5
_
FREE COOLING
MODE:INLET-AMBIENT
SP:05.0 °
C
DIF:050.0 °
C
Settings:
MODE
:
INLET-AMBIENT, free cooling based on the difference between inlet water
temperature and ambient temperature
SP
:
Define setpoint of the free cooling
DIF
:
Setting of the free cooling difference
Remark: During free cooling, based on inlet-ambient, the pump contact is always closed.
2–36
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
Free Cooling
Chang. Dig. Inp.
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
1
This screen allows modification of the free cooling based on a digital input signal.
_
FREE COOLING
MODE:CHANG.DIG.INP
PUMP:ON
2
LEAD:000s
Settings:
MODE
:
CHANG.DIG.INP., free cooling based on a changeable digital input signal
(example from an external thermostat)
PUMP
:
Define if pump is ON/OFF during free cooling operation
LEAD
:
Lead time of the evaporator water pump
3
4
2.8.9
DICN
DICN
This screen allows modifications of the DICN function.
5
This menu can only be entered when MS is selected in the service/DICN menu.
_
MASTER SETTINGS
_
MODE:NORMAL
OFFSET:0000h
PUMP ON IF:UNIT ON
Part 2 – Functional Description
SLAVE SETTINGS
MODE:NORMAL
OR
OFFSET:0000h
PUMP ON IF:UNIT ON
2–37
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
ESIE06-05
Settings:
1
MODE (Parameter can be set
on each unit)
:
■
NORMAL:
Unit is part of the DICN setup
■
STANDBY:
■
A unit with mode “STANDBY”
will only be able to loadup if:
-a safety is present on a unit in
the DICN setup.
2
OR
-all other units are on 100%
capacity (possible to disable).
3
■
4
Remark: all units can be put on
“STANDBY”, in which case the
DICN will calculate which unit will
be the actual standby.
DISCONN. ON/
OFF
In case more than 1 unit has
“STANDBY” setting, the
actual standby will be
calculated (based on running
hours).
A unit with mode “DISCONNECT
ON/ OFF” can be put on/off
independently from the DICN
on/off status (setpoint & other
network parameters are still
controlled on DICN level) and
unit can be put in manual mode.
:
■
OFFSET
:
The offset time defines the target difference in running
hours between one unit and another unit.
PUMP ON IF
:
UNIT IS ON:
pump of individual unit will run if
unit is on
COMPR ON:
pump of individual unit will only
run if the compressor of that unit
is on
5
2.8.10 Advanced
Advanced
This screen allows modification of the advanced password settings.
_v
ADVANCED
PASSWORD NEEDED FOR:
SETPOINT MENU:Y
UNIT ON/OFF:Y
2–38
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
Settings:
1
PASSWORD NEEDED FOR:
SETPOINT MENU
:
Y: User password is needed to enter the setpoint menu
N: no password is needed to enter the setpoint menu
UNIT ON/ OFF
:
Y: user password is needed to switch the unit ON or OFF
N: no password is needed to switch the unit ON or OFF
2
When a password is needed to switch the unit ON or OFF, the following screen will be displayed while
pushing the ON/OFF button.
3
SWITCH UNIT ON/OFF
ENTER PASSWORD
PASSWORD:0000
TO SWITCH UNIT ON
4
When the password is entered, the unit will switch ON/ OFF.
This screen allows modification of the advanced main menu, logout timer and buzzer settings.
_
5
ADVANCED
MAIN MENU:GRAPHIC
LOGOUT TIMER:05min
BUZZER IF SAFETY:YES
Settings:
MAIN MENU
Part 2 – Functional Description
:
set to GRAPHIC to let the main menu show the graphical
symbols or to TEXT to let the main menu show the names
of the menus.
2–39
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
1
ESIE06-05
Main menu Graphic
a z e r t
y u q b d
2
Main menu Text
> READOUT MENU
SETPOINTS MENU
3
USERSETTINGS MENU
TIMERS MENU
HISTORY MENU
INFO MENU
4
I/O STATUS MENU
LOGIN/LOGOUT MENU
NETWORK MENU
5
COOL/HEAT MENU
■
LOGOUT TIMER
:
Set the time for automatic log out, between 01 and 30
minutes.
■
BUZZER IF SAFETY
:
To activate or deactivate the buzzer sound when an error
occurs.
This screen allows modification of the advanced backlight and graphic readout settings.
_^
ADVANCED
BACKLIGHT TIME:05min
GRAPHIC READOUT:YES
Settings:
2–40
BACKLIGHT TIME
:
to define the time (between 01 and 30 minutes) the light of
the controller display will stay on after the last manipulation
of the controller buttons.
GRAPHIC READOUT
:
to define if the graphical representation of the first screen of
the read out menu is present or not.
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
_vc
1
013.6 °C
…
≤0U4
∞11
∞12
H
∞21
∞22
H
012.0 °
C
2
2.8.11 Defrost
Manual Defrost
3
This screen allows activation of a manual defrost.
_v
MANUAL DEFROST
4
UNIT DEFROST:OFF
CIR1 DEFROST:OFF
CIR2 DEFROST:OFF
5
Settings:
UNIT/CIR1/CIR2
DEFROST
:
OFF: No manual defrost is requested
ON : manual defrost is requested and busy
Unit defrost
:
Both circuits will execute a defrost cycle, due to one circuit
defrost control, the 2nd circuit defrost will only start after the
defrost finish of the 1st circuit.
Circuit defrost
:
Only this circuit will execute a defrost cycle.
Remark: If manual defrost is chosen (for 1 circuit/2 circuits)
■
If condition of
defrost is satisfied
start defrost
AND
indicate ON for manual defrost
■
If condition of
defrost is not
satisfied
Part 2 – Functional Description
return to OFF indication and ignore manual defrost order
2–41
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
1
Defrost Timer
ESIE06-05
This screen allows modification of the minimum time between 2 defrost cycles of the same circuit.
_^
DEFROST
MIN. TIME BETWEEN
2
DEFROST: NORMAL
MIN. TIME BETWEEN
DEFROST
3
:
Minimum time between 2 defrost cycles of the same circuit
in order to keep heating capacity and prevent frequent
defrosting.
Settings:
4
5
NORMAL
:
Normal start value, default 30 min, (range 20~120 min)
SHORT
:
Short start value, default 10min, (range 1~20min)
2.8.12 Service Menu
Operational
information
The service menu is accessible through the last screen of the user settings menu. To enter the service
menu you need the service password. Please contact your distributor for this password. It is only
possible to access the service menu when the unit is “OFF”. Only a qualified engineer is allowed to
access this menu.
You need the password to access this menu.
ENTER SERVICE
PASSWORD:0000
TO LOGIN
2–42
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
2.9
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
Timers menu
1
Software Timers
Using this menu, the actual software timers can be read out. This menu displays three screens.
General Timers
This screen shows the actual value of the general timers:
_v
2
GENERAL TIMERS
LOADUP:000s-DWN:000s
Compressor Timers
PUMPLEAD
:000s
FLOWSTOP
:00s
3
Display
Description
LOADUP
■
LOADUP: starts counting when a thermostat step change has occurred.
During the countdown, the unit is not able to go to a higher thermostat step.
DWN
■
LOADDOWN: starts counting when a thermostat step change has occurred.
During the countdown, the unit is not able to go to a lower thermostat step.
PUMPLEAD
■
FLOWSTART-20sec: counts down when the water flow through the
evaporator is continuous and the unit is in standby. During the countdown,
the unit cannot start up.
PUMPLAG
■
Counts down after the unit is switched off. During the pump lag time (60s)
the pump will keep running after the chiller has stopped. (appears when
PUMPLEAD TIME = 0)
FLOWSTOP
■
FLOWSTOP-5 sec: starts counting when the water flow through the
evaporator stops after the flowstart timer has reached zero. If the water flow
has not restarted during the countdown, the unit will shut down.
These screens show the actual value of the compressor timers.
_
Part 2 – Functional Description
COMPRESSOR TIMERS
_^
COMPRESSOR TIMERS
GRD11:000s
12:000s
GRD21:000s
22:000s
AREC11:000s
12:000s
AREC21:000s
22:000s
M.RT11:000s
12:000s
M.RT21:000s
22:000s
2–43
4
5
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
1
2
ESIE06-05
Display
Description
GRD 11/12/21/22
■
GUARDTIMER (180 sec): starts counting when the compressor (circuit
1/2) has been shut down. During the countdown, the compressor cannot
be restarted.
AREC 11/12/21/22
■
ANTIRECYCLING (300 sec): starts counting when the compressor
(circuit1/2) has started. During the countdown, the compressor cannot be
restarted.
M.RT 11/12/21/22
■
MINIMUM RUNNING TIME (120 sec) : starts counting when the
compressor has started. During the countdown, the compressor will not
be switched off by the thermostat function.
3
4
5
2–44
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
2.10
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
Info menu
1
Introduction
Using this menu, the additional information about the unit can be consulted.
Time info
This screen shows the actual time and date.
_v
2
TIME INFO
TIME: 22h05
DATE: WED
Unit info
Display
Description
TIME
Actual time
DATE
Actual day and date
24/01/07
3
4
This screen shows the unit type.
_
5
UNIT INFO
UNIT:AW-RH-250 C:SCL
CIR:2 EVAP:1 COILC:2
EEV:P REF:R410A
Display
Description
UNITTYPE: XX-XX-XX
The first two letters tell that the unit is air cooled, the following two give
the type of unit and the number indicates the capacity power of the unit.
C:
Indicates the type of the compressor.
SCL : scroll
CIRC: EVAP: COILC:
Indicates the quantity of circuits, the evaporators and whether 1 or 2
coils are present per circuit.
EEV
Indicates the type of electronic expansion valve.
P : PCASO EEV
REFRIGERANT: XXXX
Part 2 – Functional Description
Refrigerant type : R410 a
2–45
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
Remark: unit type explanation:
1
2
ESIE06-05
Unit info
AW
:
Air-water cooled
CO
:
Cooling only
RH
:
Heat pump (refrigerant)
This screen shows the unit type and options.
_
UNIT INFO
2PUMP:Y
FAN: ST VA:Y
3
HEATERTAPE:Y
FAN DO ST:2 DO
4
Display
Description
FAN
Indicates the type of the fans:
INV:2
ST : ON/OFF fans
INV : ON/OFF fans and inverter fans (OPIF or OPLN)
5
Software Info
VA
Indicates if the Volt-Ampere option is present on the unit.
2PUMP
Indicates if the option dual pump is present on the unit
FAN DO ST
Indicates the digital outputs for the ON/OFF (standard) fans.
DO INV
Indicates the digital outputs for the inverter fans.
This screen shows the software version.
_^
SW INFO
MAIN:SP1710C117 V2.3
EXT.:SP1559A019
REM.:SP1734C046
2–46
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
Display
Description
V2.3
Software version 2.3
MAIN
Software file for main PCB
EXT.
Software file for extension PCB
REM.
Software file for remote controller PCB
1
2
3
4
5
Part 2 – Functional Description
2–47
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
1
2.11
ESIE06-05
Input/Output Status Menu
Introduction
Using this menu you can read the status of the digital inputs and the status of the relay outputs.
Digital Inputs
This screen shows the status of the emergency stop and the flow switch.
2
_v
DIGITAL INPUTS
EMERGENCY STOP :OK
FLOWSWITCH:FLOW OK
3
4
Digital Inputs
Display
Description
EMERGENCY STOP
Status of emergency stop
FLOWSWITCH
Status of flow switch
This screen shows the status of the heater tape, pump interlock and pump.
5
_
DIG. INP/OUTPUTS
HEATER TAPE:OFF
PUMPINTERLOCK:CLOSED
PUMP:ON
2–48
Display
Description
HEATER TAPE
Status of the heater tape (if present)
PUMPINTERLOCK
Status of the pumpinterlock
PUMP
Status of the pump
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
Digital Inputs
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
This screen shows the status of the reverse phase protection, high pressure switch and overcurrent
relay of the compressors in circuit 1.
_
DIGITAL INPUTS
C1 REV.PH.PROT. :OK
C1
1
2
HIGH PR.SW. :OK
INT.L C11:OK C12:OK
Digital Inputs
3
Display
Description
C1 REV. PH. PROT.
Status of the reverse phase protection of circuit 1
C1 HIGH PR. SW.
Status of the high pressure switch of circuit 1
INT. L. C11: C12
Status of the compressor interlock of compressors 1 and 2 of circuit 1
4
This screen shows the status of the fan overcurrent of each fanstep of circuit 1.
_
DIGITAL INPUTS
5
C1 FAN OVERC.ST1:OK
C1 FAN OVERC.ST2:OK
C1 FAN OVERC.ST3:NOK
Display
Description
C1 FAN OVERC. ST1
Status of fan overcurrent of fanstep 1 of circuit 1
C1 FAN OVERC. ST2
Status of fan overcurrent of fanstep 2 of circuit 1
C1 FAN OVERC. ST3
Status of fan overcurrent of fanstep 3 of circuit 1
Remark: When the unit has standard ON/OFF fans, 3 fan steps are present. When the unit has
inverter and ON/OFF fans, only fan step 1 or 1 and 3 are present (depending on unit size).
Part 2 – Functional Description
2–49
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
1
Digital Inputs
ESIE06-05
This screen shows the status of the reverse phase protection, high pressure switch and overcurrent
relay of the compressors in circuit 2.
_
DIGITAL INPUTS
C2 REV.PH.PROT. :OK
2
C2
HIGH PR.SW. :OK
INT.L C21:OK C22:OK
3
4
Digital inputs
Display
Description
C2 REV.PH. PROT.
Status of the reverse phase protection of circuit 2
C2 HIGH PR. SW.
Status of the high pressure switch of circuit 2
INT. L C21: C22:
Status of the compressor interlock of compressors 1 and 2 of circuit 2
This screen shows the status of the fan overcurrent of each fanstep of circuit 2.
_
5
DIGITAL INPUTS
C2 FAN OVERC.ST1:OK
C2 FAN OVERC.ST2:OK
C2 FAN OVERC.ST3:NOK
Display
Description
C1 FAN OVERC. ST1
Status of fan overcurrent of fanstep 1 of circuit 2
C1 FAN OVERC. ST2
Status of fan overcurrent of fanstep 2 of circuit 2
C1 FAN OVERC. ST3
Status of fan overcurrent of fanstep 3 of circuit 2
Remark: When the unit has standard ON/OFF fans, 3 fan steps are present. When the unit has
Inverter and ON/OFF fans, only fan steps 1 or 1 and 3 are present (depending on unit size).
2–50
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
Compressor
Outputs
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
1
This screen shows the status of the compressor outputs.
_
COMP. OUTPUTS
C11:ON C12:ON
2
C21:ON C22:ON
Fan Inputs/Outputs
Display
Description
C11
Compressor 1 status of circuit 1
C12
Compressor 2 status of circuit 1
C21
Compressor 1 status of circuit 2
C22
Compressor 2 status of circuit 2
3
4
This screen shows the status of the relay outputs of the fans from circuit 1.
_
5
FAN INP/OUTPUTS
C1 FANSTEP 1:CLOSED
C1 FANSTEP 2:CLOSED
C1 FANSTEP 3:CLOSED
Display
Description
C1 FANSTEP 1
Indicates the status of the fan contactor of circuit 1
C1 FANSTEP 2
Indicates the status of the fan contactor of circuit 1
C1 FANSTEP 3
Indicates the status of the fan contactor of circuit 1
Remark: When the unit has standard ON/OFF fans, 3 fan steps are present. When the unit has
inverter and ON/OFF fans, only fan steps 1 or 1 and 3 are present (depending on unit size).
Part 2 – Functional Description
2–51
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
1
Fan Input/Outputs
ESIE06-05
This screen shows the status of the relay outputs of the fans from circuit 2.
_
FAN INP/OUTPUTS
C2 FANSTEP 1:CLOSED
2
C2 FANSTEP 2:CLOSED
C2 FANSTEP 3:CLOSED
3
4
Display
Description
C2 FANSTEP 1
Indicates the status of the fan contactor of circuit 2
C2 FANSTEP 2
Indicates the status of the fan contactor of circuit 2
C2 FANSTEP 3
Indicates the status of the fan contactor of circuit 2
Remark: When the unit has standard ON/OFF fans, 3 fan steps are present. When the unit has
inverter and ON/OFF fans, only fan steps 1 or 1 and 3 are present (depending on unit size).
Changeable Digital
Inputs
This screen shows the status of the digital inputs.
5
_ CHANG.
DIG. INPUTS
DI1 NONE
DI2 NONE
DI3 NONE
2–52
Display
Description
DI1
Changeable digital input 1 + status of input
DI2
Changeable digital input 2 + status of input
DI3
Changeable digital input 3 + status of input
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
Changeable Digital
Inputs/Outputs
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
1
This screen shows the status of the digital inputs and outputs.
_ CHANG.
DIG. INPUTS
DI4 NONE
Changeable Digital
Outputs
DO1 SAFETY+W.(NO)
:0
DO2 GEN.OPERATION
:0
Display
Description
DI4
Changeable digital input 4 + status of input
DO1
Changeable digital output 1 + status of output
DO2
Changeable digital output 2 + status of output
2
3
4
This screen shows the status of the digital outputs.
_ CHANG. INP/OUTPUTS
5
DO3 NONE (OPEN)
DO4 NONE (OPEN)
DO5 NONE (OPEN)
Display
Description
DO3
Changeable digital output 3 + status of output
DO4
Changeable digital output 4 + status of output
DO5
Changeable digital output 5 + status of output
Part 2 – Functional Description
2–53
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
1
Changeable Digital
Outputs
ESIE06-05
This screen shows the status of the digital output and analogue input.
_ CHANG. INP/OUTPUTS
DO6 NONE (OPEN)
2
AI1 NONE
AI2 NONE
3
4
Changeable
Analogue Inputs
Display
Description
DO6
Changeable digital output 6 + status of output
AI1
Changeable analogue input 1 + value of input
AI2
Changeable analogue input 2 + value of input
This screen shows the status of the analogue inputs and outputs.
_ CHANG.
5
INP/OUTPUTS
AI3 NONE
AI4 NONE
AO1 NONE
2–54
Display
Description
AI3
Changeable analogue input 3 + value of input
AI4
Changeable analogue input 4 + value of input
AO1
Changeable analogue output 1 + value of output
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
Communication
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
1
This screen shows the status of the communication lines.
_^
COMMUNICATION
RS232 ONLINE:N
2
RS485 ONLINE:N
DIII ONLINE:N
Display
Description
RS232 ONLINE
Indicates if the RS232 communication line is active.
RS485 ONLINE
Indicates if the RS485 communication line is active.
DIII ONLINE
Indicates if the DIII communication line is active.
3
4
5
Part 2 – Functional Description
2–55
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
1
2.12
ESIE06-05
User Password Menu
Password
2
The user password is used to protect access to :
■
the user settings menu
■
the set points menu (if selected in the USER/ADVANCED menu)
■
the user password menu
The password is a 4-digit number between “0000” and “9999”.
The units leave the factory with user password “1234”. The service password overrides the user
password (in case you don’t know or have forgotten the user password).
3
Enter Password
In this screen the USER or SERVICE password must be entered to access the user password menu.
Use the
h and g keys to select the password.
ENTER PASSWORD
4
PASSWORD: 0000
TO LOGIN
5
Log in/ Log out
In this screen the user can log out of the controller.
When a password is entered to enter a menu, the user is logged on at this password level for a
specified time (USER/ADVANCED menu). When the controller is not touched for “LOGOUT” time, the
controller will automatically log out. A password is needed again to access the menus.
_v LOGIN/LOGOUT MENU
LOGIN STATUS:USER
LOGOUT? NO
2–56
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
1
Display
Description
LOGINSTATUS :
Indication of password level.
USER: User is logged in with user password
2
SERVICE: User is logged in with service password
LOGOUT
Select to log out of the controller.
NO: Remain logged on with the current password level.
YES: Log out of the controller. The password will be requested again to
enter a menu.
In this screen you can change the password. Use the
3
h and g keys to select the new password.
4
_^ LOGIN/LOGOUT MENU
CHANGE PASSWORD
NEW PASSWORD: 0000
5
CONFIRM: 0000
Display
Description
NEW PASSWORD :
To set a new password
CONFIRM :
To confirm the new password
Part 2 – Functional Description
2–57
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
1
2.13
ESIE06-05
Network Menu
The network menu is only accessible when MS OPTION is set to “YES” in the SERVICE/DICN menu.
Network
This screen shows the temperatures of the network (DICN) system.
2
NETWORK
_v
COOL. INLSP1:012.0 °
C
INLET WATER:013.6 °
C
3
4
Display
Description
COOL
Cooling operation is selected.
HEAT
Heating operation is selected.
INLSP1/ INLSP2
Gives the setpoint you selected to use (dual setpoint if selected)
5
INLSP1 : inlet water setpoint 1
INLSP2 : inlet water setpoint 2 (dual setpoint)
INLET WATER
Network Overview
2–58
Inlet temperature of the inlet water on the master unit
This screen shows the status and capacity of all the units in the DICN network.
_^M:NORMAL
CAP:000%
SL1:NORMAL
CAP:000%
SL2:NORMAL
CAP:000%
SL3:NORMAL
CAP:000%
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
Display
Description
Possible settings
“M:
Displays status of Master (as selected
in USER/DICN settings menu)
NORMAL/STANDBY/DISCONN/
SAFETY
CAP: %
Displays the capacity of the master
SL1:
Displays status of the slave (as
selected in USER/DICN settings
menu)
CAP: %
Displays the capacity of the slave 1
SL2:
Displays status of the slave (as
selected in USER/DICN settings
menu)
CAP: %
Displays the capacity of the slave 2
SL3:
Displays status of the slave (as
selected in USER/DICN settings
menu)
CAP: %
Displays the capacity of the slave 3
1
2
NORMAL/STANDBY/DISCONN/
SAFETY
3
NORMAL/STANDBY/DISCONN/
SAFETY
NORMAL/STANDBY/DISCONN/
SAFETY
4
5
Part 2 – Functional Description
2–59
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
1
2.14
ESIE06-05
Cool / Heat Menu
Password
You need the user password to enter this menu.
ENTER PASSWORD
2
PASSWORD: 0000
TO LOGIN
3
Cooling/ Heating
This screen allows you to choose between cooling and heating.
_^
4
COOLING/HEATING
MODE:COOLING
5
Possible Mode:
Cooling mode: Thermostat function on evaporator
Heating mode: Thermostat function on condenser
2–60
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
2.15
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
Service Menu
1
Operational
Information
The service menu is accessible through the last screen of the user settings menu. To enter the service
menu you need the service password. Please contact your distributor for this password. It is only
possible to access the service menu when the unit is “OFF”.
Password
You need the password to enter this menu.
2
ENTER SERVICE
3
PASSWORD: 0000
TO LOGIN
Remark: When the unit is operating, it is not possible to enter the service menu.
Service Setting
Menu
h
and
Use the
of your choice.
g keys to scroll through the menu and press the q key to enter the submenu
4
5
Topic
See page
2.15.1 Thermostat
2–62
2.15.2 Compressor
2–63
2.15.3 Fan
2–65
2.15.4 Pump
2–68
2.15.5 EEV
2–69
2.15.6 Input Output
2–78
2.15.7 Communication
2–85
2.15.8 DICN
2–88
2.15.9 Safety
2–90
2.15.10 History
2–97
2.15.11 Advanced
2–97
2.15.12 Defrost
2–99
Part 2 – Functional Description
2–61
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
1
ESIE06-05
2.15.1 Thermostat
Thermostat
settings for V2.1
This screen allows modification of the thermostat settings for software version V2.1.
THERMOSTAT
_
2
STEPLENGTH
A:04.0 °
C
C:00.4 °
C
RESTART COND.:Ax2
3
Settings:
4
A
:
Step difference value, used for the thermostat function
C
:
Step length value, used for the thermostat function
RESTART COND
:
Restart condition parameter, used to restart the unit after a
forced thermo off in outlet mode.
Possible settings:
Ax1
Ax2
5
Ax3
Ax4
Remark: The restart condition parameter A in this function
is the same as the programmed step difference value A.
Thermostat
settings for V2.2 or
higher
This screen allows modification of the thermostat settings for software version V2.2.
THERMOSTAT
_
STEPLENGTH
A:04.0 °
C
C:00.4 °
C
RESTART COND.:4.0°
Cx2
Settings:
A
:
Step difference value, used for the thermostat function
C
:
Step length value, used for the thermostat function
RESTART COND
:
Restart condition parameter (default 4°C), used to restart
the unit after a normal thermo off in outlet mode.
Restart condition value x 2: Restart condition parameter
(default 2), used to restart the unit after a forced thermo off
in outlet mode.
2–62
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
Possible settings:
1
Restart condition value x 1
Restart condition value x 2
Restart condition value x 3
2
Restart condition value x 4
2.15.2 Compressor
Compressor Start
3
This screen allows modification of the fan on lag time.
_v
4
COMPR. START
FAN ON LAG TIME:003s
5
Setting:
FAN ON LAG TIME
:
Time delay between switching unit/fans ON and compressor start
These screens allow modification of the total compressor running hours, cool/heat running hours and
compressor starts.
_ RUN.H-COMPR STARTS
_ RUN.H-COMPR STARTS
C11RH:00000hCS:00000
C21RH:00000hCS:00000
RUN.H COOL-HEAT
RUN.H COOL-HEAT
C11C: 00000hH:00000h
C21C: 00000hH:00000h
These screens are only visible if the unit has 2 circuits.
Part 2 – Functional Description
_ RUN.H-COMPR STARTS
_^RUN.H-COMPR STARTS
C12RH:00000hCS:00000
C22RH:00000hCS:00000
RUN.H COOL-HEAT
RUN.H COOL-HEAT
C12C: 00000hH:00000h
C22C: 00000hH:00000h
2–63
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
ESIE06-05
Settings:
1
2
3
RUN. H-COMPR. STARTS
: Title, running hours and compressor starts
CxxRH
: Define or change total running hours of this compressor
CS
: Define or change total compressor starts of this compressor
RUN. H COOL-HEAT
: Title, running hours in cooling and heating mode
CxxC
: Define or change running hours in cooling mode of this
compressor
H
: Define or change running hours in heating mode of this
compressor
Remark:
■
These parameters need to be entered (changed) when
replacing a PCB or compressor.
■
Running hours COOL/HEAT are only visible with EWYQ units.
4
5
2–64
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
2.15.3 Fan
Fan Control
Ambient
1
This screen allows modification of the ambient fan control used during the startup of the chiller.
_v
FAN CONTROL
2
AMBIENT TIMER:070s
AMBIENT SETP A:15.0 °
C
AMBIENT SETP B:05.0 °
C
3
Settings:
Fan Control
AMBIENT TIMER
:
Time when the fan control based on ambient temperature is used at
the startup of a circuit
AMBIENT SETP A
:
Setpoint for high fan speed used in ambient fan control
AMBIENT SETP B
:
Setpoint for medium fan speed used in ambient fan control
4
This screen allows modification of the fan high pressure setpoints.
_v
FANST.
5
FAN CONTROL
A:18.9b/28.0b
FANST.
B1:32.4b
FANST.
B2:27.5b/35.0b
Settings:
FANST. A
:
High pressure setpoint for fan control
-First value: setpoint used for standard ON/OFF fans and units with inverter
fans
-Second value: setpoint used for inverter fans working in LOW NOISE mode
FANST. B1
:
High pressure setpoint for fan control with standard ON/OFF fans
FANST B2
:
High pressure setpoint for fan control
-First value: setpoint used for standard ON/OFF fans and units with inverter
fans
-Second value: setpoint used for inverter fans working in LOW NOISE mode
Part 2 – Functional Description
2–65
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
1
Fan Control
ESIE06-05
This screen allows modification of the fan high pressure setpoints.
_^
FAN CONTROL
FANST. B3:35.0b/37.0b
2
UNLOAD CONST:02.6b
COMPAR. PRESSURE:01.9b
Settings:
3
FANST. B3
:
High pressure setpoint for fan control
-First value: setpoint used for standard ON/OFF fans and units
with inverter fans
-Second value: setpoint used for inverter fans working in LOW
NOISE mode
4
5
Fan Control Antihunting
UNLOAD CONST
:
Parameter used to calculate the high pressure fan switching point
if 1 compressor of this circuit is in operation.
COMPAR. PRESSURE
:
Parameter to specify extra condition for fan up/down.
This screen allows modification of the anti-hunting timer and reset conditions.
_
FAN CONTROL
HUNTING PR TIM:0720s
RESET CONDTEMP:02.0 °
C
RESET CONDAMB.:03.0 °
C
Settings:
HUNTING PR TIME
:
When a fanstep changes with ± 1 fanstep and it becomes the
same fanstep within HUNTING PR TIME, then the anti-hunting
function will be enabled.
- ON/OFF fans: 720s
- Inv. fans: 240s
2–66
RESET CONDITION
TEMP
:
When outlet water temp. rises with 2°C, the anti-hunting function
will be reset.
RESET CONDITION
AMBIENT
:
When the ambient temp. rises with 3°C, the anti-hunting function
will be reset.
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
Fan Control Timers
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
1
This screen allows modification of the fan timers.
_^
FAN CONTROL
COMPRESSION RATIO:1.6
2
LOADUP TIM:0015s
LOADDOWN TIM:0090s
Settings:
COMPRESSION
RATIO
:
Used for pressure difference surveillance control
LOADUP TIM
:
Load up time, minimum time between 2 fan up steps
LOADDOWN TIM
:
Load down time, minimum between 2 fan down steps
3
4
Remark: Different default timers are used for ON/OFF and inverter fans
LOADUP TIME
:
ON/OFF fans: 90s
Inv. fans: 15s
LOADDOWN TIME
:
ON/OFF fans: 180s
5
Inv. fans: 90s
Fan inverter
Frequency
This screen allows modification of the fan inverter frequency for each fan step.
FAN INV FREQ
ST4:50HZ
ST3:45HZ
ST2:30HZ
ST1:20HZ
Settings:
ST1
:
Frequency used for inverter fan step 1
ST2
:
Frequency used for inverter fan step 2
ST3
:
Frequency used for inverter fan step 3
ST4
:
Frequency used for inverter fan step 4
Part 2 – Functional Description
2–67
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
1
ESIE06-05
2.15.4 Pump
Pump Control
This screen allows modification of the manual pump control and the pump running hours.
_
2
PUMPCONTROL
MAN.PUMP:OFF 2ND:OFF
RUNN. HOURS
RHP1:00000hP2:00000h
3
Settings:
4
5
MAN. PUMP
:
Manual switching on pump 1 or 2
RUNN. HOURS RHP1/
P2
:
Running hours of pump 1 and pump 2. When the software is
updated or the PCB is replaced, these running hours have to be
entered in the new configuration.
Remark: When the manual pump control is activated, the pump will switch OFF (disable manual
control) when you leave the Service menu.
Pump Control with
low water
temperature
This screen allows modification of the pump control with low water temperatures when unit is switched
off.
_
PUMPCONTROL
IF UNIT OFF AND LOW
WATER TEMP THEN PUMP
:OFF
Settings:
OFF
:
Pump function is disabled (default setting)
ON
:
Pump function is enabled.
Remark: This screen is only visible when no heater tape is installed.
2–68
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
2.15.5 EEV
This menu allows modification of the EEV settings. The EEV parameter values used in the following
screens are not the same for all units. Each unit has his own parameters and should not been
changed.
EEV Control
This screen allows modification of the EEV additional screen setting.
_v
1
2
EEV CONTROL
SCREENS: N
3
Setting:
SCREENS
EEV Control Steps
:
Used to select whether the additional EEV screens in the Readout
menu have to be displayed or not. (C1/C2 Temp readout screen)
4
This screen allows modification of the EEV step pulses.
5
_
EEV CONTROL
STEP RANGE:2625pls
INITIAL STEP:0132pls
ALL CLOSE ADD:160pls
Settings:
■
STEP RANGE
:
Upper limit of max. opening pulses of EV ( o~2625 pls)
■
INITIAL STEP
:
Open- closing steps during initialisation process at power-on
■
ALL CLOSED ADD
:
Additional pulses added to the close pulses.
Close pulses at power on: 2625 + 160 = 2785
Close pulses at compressor stop: current output pulses + 160
Part 2 – Functional Description
2–69
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
1
EEV Control Adjust
Cool / Heat
ESIE06-05
This screen allows modification of the adjust cool/heat pulses.
_
EEV CONTROL
ADJUST COOL:0800pls
2
ADJUST HEAT:0300pls
SAMPLING TIME:003s
Settings:
3
ADJUST COOL
:
After the initializing process, if the compressor starts up in cooling mode,
it goes to the specified output for the electronic expansion valve. After
reaching above ADJUST COOL EV opening, it will go to normal
superheat control.
ADJUST HEAT
:
After the initializing process, if the compressor starts up in heating mode,
it goes to the specified output for the electronic expansion valve. After
reaching above ADJUST HEAT EV opening, it will go to normal
superheat control.
SAMPLING TIME
:
Sampling time for the expansion valve control.
4
5
Low Ambient EEV
Control
This screen allows modification of the Low Ambient function.
_
EEV CONTROL
LOW AMB.CONDITION
ADJUST HEAT:150pls
HEAT AMB.CONST:005.0 °
C
Settings:
2–70
ADJUST HEAT
:
After initializing process, if the compressor starts up in heating
mode and the ambient temperature is below the HEAT AMB.
CONST setpoint, it goes to the specified output for the electronic
expansion value. After reaching above ADJUST HEAT EV
opening, it will go to normal superheat control.
HEAT AMB. CONST
:
Ambient setpoint for the low ambient condition function.
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
Superheat Control
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
1
These screens allow modification of the superheat control.
_
EEV CONTROL
_
EEV CONTROL
TRANSIENT TIME:300s
TIP COOL DRY:002s
KP COOL DRY:01.6
TIP HEAT DRY:003s
2
KP HEAT DRY:02.2
_
EEV CONTROL
_
EEV CONTROL
KP COOL WET:01.8
KP COOL WET:002s
KP HEAT WET:02.6
KP HEAT WET:003s
_
EEV CONTROL
_
3
EEV CONTROL
KP COOL NORMAL:03.0
KP COOL NORMAL:020s
KP HEAT NORMAL:03.0
KP HEAT NORMAL:015s
4
Remark: Do not change these parameters because they have a direct influence on the superheat
control.
EEV Feed Forward
Control Ambient
Setpoints
_
EEV CONTROL
FF CONTROL TIME:03s
COOL AMB.CONST:005.0 °
C
HEAT AMB.CONST:005.0 °
C
Settings:
FF CONTROL TIME
:
If the compressor load changes during thermostat control, the
controller will change the EV opening after the “FF CONTROL
TIME”.
COOL AMB. CONST
:
Ambient setpoint in cooling mode for the feed forward control when
the compressor load goes up or down.
HEAT AMB. CONST
:
Ambient setpoint in heating mode for the feed forward control
when the compressor load goes up or down.
Part 2 – Functional Description
2–71
5
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
1
EEV Normal Feed
Forward Control
ESIE06-05
This screen allows modification of the EEV FF control in cooling mode.
_
2
COOL EEV CONTROL
FF NORMAL UP:1.3
FF NORMAL DOWN:1.5
Settings:
3
FF CONTROL UP
:
If the compressor load goes up, the controller will change the EEV
opening.
Output pulses= Current pulses x “FF CONTROL UP”
FF CONTROL DOWN
:
4
5
If the compressor load goes down, the controller will change the
EEV opening.
Output pulses= Current pulses / “FF CONTROL DOWN”
EEV Low Ambient
Feed Forward
Control
This screen allows modification of the EEV FF control in cooling mode with low ambient temperatures.
_
COOL EEV CONTROL
FF LOW AMB.UP
:1.1
FF LOW AMB.DOWN:1.2
Settings:
FF LOW AMB. UP
:
If the compressor load goes up AND the ambient temperature is
below the COOL AMB. CONST setpoint, the controller will change
the EEV opening.
Output pulses= Current pulses x “FF LOW AMB. UP”
FF LOW AMB. DOWN
:
If the compressor load goes down AND the ambient temperature
is below the COOL AMB. CONST setpoint, the controller will
change the EEV opening.
Output pulses= Current pulses / “FF LOW AMB. DOWN”
2–72
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
EEV Feed Forward
Control
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
1
This screen allows modification of the EEV FF control in Heating mode.
_
HEAT EEV CONTROL
FF NORMAL UP
2
:1.5
FF NORMAL DOWN:1.7
Settings:
FF CONTROL UP
:
If the compressor load goes up, the controller will change the EEV
opening.
3
Output pulses= Current pulses x “FF CONTROL UP”
FF CONTROL DOWN
:
If the compressor load goes down, the controller will change the
EEV opening.
Output pulses= Current pulses / “FF CONTROL DOWN”
EEV Feed Forward
Low Ambient
Control
4
This screen allows modification of the EEV FF control in cooling heating with low ambient
temperatures.
_
5
HEAT EEV CONTROL
FF LOW AMB.UP
:2.2
FF LOW AMB.DOWN:2.2
Settings:
FF LOW AMB. UP
:
If the compressor load goes up AND the ambient temperature is
below the HEAT AMB. CONST setpoint, the controller will change
the EEV opening.
Output pulses= Current pulses x “FF LOW AMB. UP”
FF LOW AMB. DOWN
:
If the compressor load goes down AND the ambient temperature
is below the HEAT AMB. CONST setpoint, the controller will
change the EEV opening.
Output pulses= Current pulses / “FF LOW AMB. DOWN”
Part 2 – Functional Description
2–73
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
1
Superheat Limits or
C1 in Cooling
ESIE06-05
This screen allows modification of the upper and lower limit of the suction superheat of circuit 1 in
cooling mode.
_
EEV CONTROL
C1SH L LIM COOL:04.0 °
C
2
C1SH U LIM COOL:08.5 °
C
Settings:
3
C1 SH L LIM COOL
:
Superheat lower limit in cooling mode for circuit 1
C1 SH U LIM COOL
:
Superheat upper limit in cooling mode for circuit 1
Remark: The suction super heat target changes according to the discharge super heat. However, this
between an upper and lower superheat limit.
4
Superheat Limits of
C1 in Heating
This screen allows modification of the upper and lower limit of the suction superheat of circuit 1 in
heating mode.
_
5
EEV CONTROL
C1SH L LIM HEAT:03.0 °
C
C1SH U LIM HEAT:08.0 °
C
Settings:
C1 SH L LIM HEAT
:
Superheat lower limit in heating mode for circuit 1
C1 SH U LIM HEAT
:
Superheat upper limit in heating mode for circuit 1
Remark: The suction super heat target changes according to the discharge super heat. However, this
between an upper and lower superheat limit.
2–74
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
Superheat Limits of
C2 in Cooling
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
This screen allows modification of the upper and lower limit of the suction superheat of circuit 2 in
cooling mode.
_
EEV CONTROL
C2SH L LIM COOL:04.0 °
C
2
C2SH U LIM COOL:08.5 °
C
Settings:
C2 SH L LIM COOL
:
Superheat lower limit in cooling mode for circuit 2
C2 SH U LIM COOL
:
Superheat upper limit in cooling mode for circuit 2
3
Remark: The suction super heat target changes according to the discharge super heat. However, this
between an upper and lower superheat limit.
Superheat Limits of
C2 in Heating
1
4
This screen allows modification of the upper and lower limit of the suction superheat of circuit 2 in
heating mode.
_
EEV CONTROL
5
C2SH L LIM HEAT:03.0 °
C
C2SH U LIM HEAT:08.0 °
C
Settings:
C2 SH L LIM HEAT
:
Superheat lower limit in heating mode for circuit 2
C2 SH U LIM HEAT
:
Superheat upper limit in heating mode for circuit 2
Remark: The suction super heat target changes according to the discharge super heat. However, this
between an upper and lower superheat limit.
Part 2 – Functional Description
2–75
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
1
EEV Fan Up/Down
Control
ESIE06-05
This screen allows modification of the EEV fan up/down control.
_
EEV CONTROL
FAN DOWN PLS:050pls
2
FAN UP PLS:200pls
Settings:
3
FAN DOWN PLS
FAN UP PLS
4
EEV Low Pressure
Control
:
When the Fan step goes DOWN, immediately close EV with 20
pulses.
:
When the Fan step goes UP, immediately open EV with 20 pulses.
This screen allows modification of the EEV Low Pressure Control in cooling mode.
_
5
EEV CONTROL
LP PR.SETP COOL:2.3b
LP PR.RESET COOL:3.0b
LP ADD COOL:0200pls
Settings:
LP PR. SETP COOL
:
When the LP drops below LP PR. SETP COOL (2.3 bar)
add 200 pulses to the actual electronic expansion valve position.
LP PR. RESET COOL
:
When the LP rises back above LP PR. RESET COOL (3.0 bar)
reset the function and stop adding additional pulses.
LP ADD COOL
2–76
:
Additional pulses that will be added when the low pressure is
below the low pressure prevention setpoint in Cooling mode.
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
EEV Low Pressure
Control
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
1
This screen allows modification of the EEV Low Pressure Control in heating mode.
_^
EEV CONTROL
LP PR.SETP HEAT:2.3b
2
LP PR.RESET HEAT:3.0b
LP ADD HEAT:0200pls
Settings:
LP PR. SETP HEAT
:
3
When the LP drops below LP PR. SETP HEAT (2.3 bar)
add 200 pulses to the actual electronic expansion valve position.
LP PR. RESET HEAT
:
When the LP rises back above LP PR. RESET HEAT (3.0 bar)
reset the function and stop adding additional pulses.
LP ADD HEAT
:
4
Additional pulses that will be added when the low pressure is
below the low pressure prevention setpoint in Heating mode.
5
Part 2 – Functional Description
2–77
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
1
ESIE06-05
2.15.6 Input Output
Unit Options
This screen allows modification of the options installed on the unit.
2
_v
UNIT OPTIONS
FAN:ST
VA:N 2PUMP:N
HEATERTAPE:N
CONFIRM? N
3
Settings:
FAN
VA:N/Y
4
:
ST: Fantype is ON/OFF fans
:
INV: Fantype is a combination of ON/OFF fans and Inverter fans
:
Select if Volt-Ampere meters (option) is installed.
When Y is selected, an additional screen will appear in the readout
menu.
5
2PUMP:Y/N
:
Select if 2nd pump is installed
HEATERTAPE:Y/N
:
Select if heatertape is installed
CONFIRM?
:
•
•
Changeable Digital
Inputs
Confirm settings, when an option setting has been changed.
When a setting has been changed without confirmation
the
0UA: OP. NOT CONFIRMED alarm will be displayed and can
only be reset after confirmation.
When a main PCB has been changed or reprogrammed with
new software, the OU4: OP. NOT CONFIRMED will be displayed and can only be reset after confirmation.
This screen allows modification of the changeable digital inputs.
_
CHANG. INP/OUTPUTS
DI1:NONE
DI2:NONE
DI3:NONE
2–78
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
Settings:
DI1
:
To set the digital input 1
DI2
:
To set the digital input 2
DI3
:
To set the digital input 3
1
2
When programming this input, check the field wiring to see if it has been installed correctly.
Possible settings for Chang. Dig. Inputs
■
None
■
Status
■
Dual setpoint
■
Remote ON/OFF
■
Remote Cool/Heat
■
Cap. Limit 25% (only double circuit)
■
Cap. Limit 50%
■
Cap. Limit 75% (only double circuit)
■
Cap. Limit Set
■
Free cooling request
■
Low noise (only with inverter fans)
■
Fan forced on
Part 2 – Functional Description
3
4
5
2–79
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
1
Changeable Digital
Input and Outputs
ESIE06-05
This screen allows modification of the changeable digital input and outputs.
_
CHANG. INP/OUTPUTS
DI4:NONE
2
DO1:SAFETY+W.(NO)
DO2:GEN.OPERATION
Settings:
3
DI4
:
To set the digital input 4
DO1
:
To set the digital output 1
DO2
:
To set the digital output 2
When programming this input or one of these outputs, check the field wiring to see if the
input/output has been installed correctly.
4
Possible settings for Chang. Dig. Outputs
5
2–80
■
None (open)
■
Closed
■
2nd pump
■
100% capacity
■
Full capacity
■
Free cooling
■
Gen. Operation
■
Safety+W (NO) / Safety + W (NC)
■
Safety (NO) / Safety (NC)
■
C1/C2 safety
■
Warning
■
C1/C2 operation
■
0% capacity
■
Cooling
■
Heating
■
Defrost
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
Changeable Digital
Outputs
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
1
This screen allows modification of the changeable digital outputs.
_
CHANG. INP/OUTPUTS
DO3:NONE (OPEN)
2
DO4:NONE (OPEN)
DO5:NONE (OPEN)
Settings:
DO3
:
To set the digital output 3
DO4
:
To set the digital output 4
DO5
:
To set the digital output 5
3
4
When programming this output, check the field wiring to see if the output has been installed
correctly.
5
Part 2 – Functional Description
2–81
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
1
Changeable Digital
Output and
Analogue Input
ESIE06-05
This screen allows modification of the changeable digital output and analogue inputs.
_
CHANG. INP/OUTPUTS
DO6:NONE (OPEN)
2
AI1:NONE
AI1 TYPE:0-20mA
Settings:
3
4
DO6
:
To set the digital output 6
AI1
:
To set the analogue input 1
AI1 TYPE
:
To set the type of the analogue input 1
When programming this digital output or analogue input, check the field wiring to see if the output
or analogue input has been installed correctly.
The changeable analogue inputs can be programmed as analogue inputs OR as digital inputs.
1. Select the analogue input status
5
2. Specify the type of the used signal
Possible settings analogue inputs
■
None
■
Status
■
Floating setpoints
■
Temperature
Possible settings analogue input as digital input
■
DI STATUS
■
DI REM. COOL / HEAT
■
DI CAP LIM 25% / 50% / 75%
■
DI CAP LIM SET
■
DI FREE COOLING
Remark: The digital input will close when a 5 V DC signal is given to the controller.
2–82
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
Changeable
Analogue Inputs
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
1
These screens allow modification of the analogue inputs.
_
CHANG. INP/OUTPUTS
_
CHANG. INP/OUTPUTS
AI2:NONE
AI3 TYPE:0-20mA
AI2 TYPE:0-20mA
AI4:NONE
AI3:NONE
AI4 TYPE:0-20mA
2
Settings:
AI2
:
To set the analogue input 2
AI2 TYPE
:
To set the type of the analogue input 2
AI3
:
To set the analogue input 3
AI3 TYPE
:
To set the type of the analogue input 3
AI4
:
To set the analogue input 4
AI4 TYPE
:
To set the type of the analogue input 4
3
4
When programming this analogue input, check the field wiring to see if the input has been installed
correctly.
Changeable
Analogue Output
5
This screen allows modification of the analogue output.
_
CHANG. INP/OUTPUTS
AO1:NONE
AO1 TYPE:0-20mA
Settings:
AO1
:
To set the analogue output 1
AO1 TYPE
:
To set the type of the analogue output 1
Possible settings for the analogue output.
■
None
■
Unit capacity
Part 2 – Functional Description
2–83
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
1
Sensor Offset For
Software V2.1
ESIE06-05
This screen allows modification of the sensor offset for software version V2.1.
_
NTC/PR. SENSORS
SELECT:PCB1 AI1
2
NTC:TYPE1
OFFSET:0.0 °
C
Settings:
3
4
Sensor Offset For
Software V2.2 or
higher
SELECT: PCB1 AI1
:
All the sensors (temp. and press.) connected to the PCB1, PCB2
or expansion boards can be selected.
NTC
:
This will display the type of sensor.
OFFSET
:
An offset can be done for this sensor.
This screen allows modification of the sensor offset for software version V2.2.
_
NTC/PR. SENSORS
SEL:MAINPCB1 AI X33A
5
NTC:TYPE1
OFFSET:0.0 °
C
Settings:
2–84
SEL: MAINPCB AI
X33A
:
All the sensors (temp. and press.) connected to the PCB1, PCB2
or expansion boards can be selected.
NTC
:
This will display the type of sensor.
OFFSET
:
An offset can be done for this sensor.
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
1
2.15.7 Communication
Communication
PCB Information
This screen shows additional information about the extension PCB, communication PCB and
communication P1 P2 PCB.
_v
2
COMMUNICATION
EXT. PCB:4SSR+HIC
3
COMM. PCB:DIII+SER
COMM.P1P2 PCB:NONE
EEV PCB
Information
Display
Description
EXT. PCB
Extension PCB with 4 solid state relays and hybrid type (PCB with Analogue outputs)
COMM. PCB
Communication PCB with DIII and serial communication
COMM. P1 P2 PCB
None (not used)
5
This screen shows additional information about the EEV PCB.
_
COMMUNICATION PCB
EEV. PCB:UNI POLAR
Display
Description
EEV. PCB
UNI POLAR, PCB type used for EEV control.
Part 2 – Functional Description
4
2–85
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
1
Serial
Communication
Parameters
ESIE06-05
This screen allows modification of the serial communication parameters.
_
COMMUNICATION PCB
RS232:NONE
2
BR:19200bps
Parameters for the RS232 communication:
3
■
BNS
Communication
Parameters
Not used in multiple scroll units.
This screen allows modification of the communication PCB parameters (BMS settings)
_
4
COMMUNICATION PCB
RS485:NONE
ADDR:01
BR:19200bps
PARITY:EVEN (1STOPb)
5
Settings:
RS485
2–86
:
■
NONE: communication disabled
■
MODBUS : MODBUS communication enabled
ADDR
:
Address of the unit in the BMS system
BR
:
Indicates the speed of communication
(19200/9600/4800/2400/1200)
PARITY
:
■
NONE (2 stop bit)
■
EVEN (1stop bit)
■
ODD (1 stop bit)
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
D III
Communication
Parameters
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
1
This screen allows modification of the communication PCB parameters (DICN settings, ...).
_
COMMUNICATION PCB
DIII:YES
ADDR:---
2
POWER:Y
AIRNET:01
AUTO:Y
Settings:
D III:
:
ADDR
:
POWER
:
3
■
YES: D III communication enabled
■
No : D III communication disabled
■
---: No address selected
■
“1-00” to “8-15”: address selected
■
If a D-BACS device is present (iManager, ...) DIII power
parameter: “N” on all units
■
If no D-BACS device is present
only for DICN DIII power
parameter: “Y” on only 1 unit (Master unit)
AIRNET
:
Airnet address (1-64)
AUTO
:
■
YES: Chiller send information automatic to Airnet
■
NO: Airnet must request chiller data each time
4
5
Remark: The DICN functionality can be used in combination with the D-BACS functionality.
This screen allows modification of the BMS control setting.
_^
COMMUNICATION
BMSCONTROL ALLOWED:N
Settings:
BMS CONTROL ALLOWED
Part 2 – Functional Description
:
■
If set to Y (yes), the unit can be commanded and
configured from a supervisory system.
■
If set to N (no), the supervisory system can only read out
values but cannot modify them.
2–87
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
ESIE06-05
1
2.15.8 DICN
DICN settings
This screen allows modification of the DICN settings.
2
_v
DICN SETTING
MS OPTION:N
UNIT:MASTER
3
NR OF SLAVES:1
Settings:
MS OPTION
:
4
N: DICN is disabled
Y: DICN is enabled
UNIT
:
MASTER: unit is selected as master unit
SLAVE: unit is selected as slave unit
NR OF SLAVES
5
:
The number of slaves in the system has to be defined. (only
on the master unit)
Remark: NR OF SLAVES will only be visible when the unit is programmed as MASTER unit.
Slave addresses
This screen allows modification of the slave addresses.
_
DICN SETTING
ADD SL1:---
Settings:
Only on MASTER unit
■
ADD SL1
:
Specify the D III address programmed in slave 1
■
ADD SL2
:
Specify the D III address programmed in slave 2 (if present)
■
ADD SL3
:
Specify the D III address programmed in slave 3 (if present)
Example: ADD SL1:1-01
2–88
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
Master Settings
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
1
This screen allows modification of the master unit settings.
_
MASTER SETTING
PRIORITY:0-2
2
STEPLENGTH:1.5 °
C
STANDBY IF MAX CAP:Y
Settings:
PRIORITY: 0-2
:
Select Unit priority - stepL Priority
STEPLENGHTTH: 1,5°
:
parameter used in the formula to calculate the loading priority
STANDBY IF MAX CAP
:
N: When all “normal” units are at maximum capacity
3
standby unit will start up to reach the setpoint.
Y: When all “normal” units are at maximum capacity
standby unit will not start up (only on error on other units)
DICN Thermostat
5
This screen allows modification of the DICN thermostat settings.
_^
DICN THERMOSTAT
STEPLENGTH
A:04.0 °
C B:03.6 °
C B:00.4 °
C
Step length settings:
A
:
Step difference value A, used for the DICN thermostat function
B
:
Step difference value B, used for the DICN thermostat function
C
:
Step difference value C, used for the DICN thermostat function
Remark: DICN thermostat control is only possible on Inlet control.
Part 2 – Functional Description
4
2–89
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
ESIE06-05
1
2.15.9 Safety
2
MOW and no flow
settings
This screen allows modification of the minimum outlet water setpoint and the flow alarm.
_v
SAFETY
MIN.OUTL.WATER:005.0 °
C
IF NO FLOW AFTER
PUMPLEADTIME:ALARM
3
Settings:
MIN. OUTL. WATER
:
The minimum outlet water can be selected in this menu. When
using glycol, this setting has to be changed. Units with OPZL
(glycol operation) have special software with a lower MOW
setpoint range.
IF NO FLOW AFTER
PUMPLEADTIME
:
ALARM: The unit will go into alarm and manual reset is
needed.
4
STANDBY: The unit will wait to start until the flow is resorted.
5
HP Setback and
Inverter Fan Mask
Settings
This screen allows modification of the high pressure setback and the inverter fan mask time.
_
SAFETY
HPSETB:37.4b DIFF:0.4b
MASK INVFAN SAF:120s
Settings:
HPSETB
:
High pressure set back safety. When the HP rises above the
setpoint, the unit will switch OFF 1 compressor of this circuit.
DIFF
:
When the high pressure setback is active and the pressure
drops below HPSETB-DIFF, normal operation and
compressor can be added.
MASK INVFAN SAF
:
Mask time of the inverter fan safety. The inverter safety will be
displayed after 120sec.
Remark: MASK INVFAN SAF will only be visible when the unit has OPIF or OPLN.
2–90
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
Reset Safety
Setting
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
1
This screen allows modification of the reset safety setting.
_
SAFETY
PASSWORD NEEDED TO
2
RESET SAFETIES:
NONE
Settings:
3
Select if a password is needed to reset a safety
Fan Overcurrent
Setting For V2.1
NONE
:
No password is needed to reset a safety.
USER PASSWORD
:
User password is needed to reset a safety
SERVICE PASSWORD
:
Service password is needed to reset a safety.
4
This screen allows modification of the fan overcurrent safety for software version V2.1.
_
SAFETY
5
FAN OVERC.:WARNING
Settings:
FAN OVERC.:
WARNING
:
When a fan overcurrent occurs, a warning will be displayed,
but the unit will continue operation.
SAFETY
:
When a fan overcurrent occurs, a safety will be displayed and
the circuit will be switched off.
Part 2 – Functional Description
2–91
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
1
Fan Overcurrent
Setting For V2.2
ESIE06-05
This screen allows modification of the fan overcurrent safety for software version V2.2.
_
SAFETY
FAN OVERC.:WARNING
FREEZE UP OW:DIS&SAF
2
Settings:
3
FAN OVERC.:
4
WARNING:
When a fan overcurrent occurs, a warning will be displayed,
but the unit will continue operation.
SAFETY:
When a fan overcurrent occurs, a safety will be displayed and
the circuit will be switched off.
FREEZE UP OW:
Freeze up safety on outlet water temperature
DIS&SAF
Use the same logic as the freeze up safety on refrigerant gas
alarm).
temperature (second time in 30 min
DISABLE
Same function as software version V2.1. Unit will shut down
on freeze up but will restart automatic and no alarm is
displayed.
5
Unit Status during
Safety
This screen allows modification of the unit status when a safety is active.
_
SAFETY
IF UNITSAFETY THEN
PUT UNIT OFF:NO
Settings:
IF UNIT SAFETY THEN PUT UNIT OFF:
2–92
YES:
Normal function. The after safety unit has to be restarted.
NO:
Used with D-bacs control. When the unit switches off the after
safety, there is a possibility that the safety can not be seen by
the D-bacs control.
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
Warning Settings
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
This screen allows modification of the setting if during the high pressure set back function or the
compressor protection function, a warning has to be displayed.
_
1
WARNING
IF HP SETBACK:N
2
IF COMPR PR:N
Settings:
3
IF HP SETBACK:
N: If the unit is in the HP setback function, no warning will be displayed
Y: If the unit is in the HP setback function, a warning will be displayed
IF COMPR PR:
4
N: If the unit is in the compressor protection function, no warning will be displayed.
Y: If the unit is in the compressor protection function, a warning will be displayed.
High Discharge
Safety Settings
This screen allows modification of the high discharge temperature setpoint.
5
_
SAFETY
HIGH DIS.SAFETY:135 °
C
Settings:
HIGH DIS. SAFETY
Part 2 – Functional Description
:
When the discharge temperature of a compressor rises above
the setpoint, the circuit will shut down and a HIGH
DISCHARGE TEMP. ERROR will be displayed.
2–93
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
1
LP Setpoint and
Mask Timers
ESIE06-05
This screen allows modification of the low pressure alarm setpoint and the low pressure mask timers.
_
SAFETY
LP SETP. C:1.2b H:0.5b
2
FAN LP MASK:030s
COMPR LP MASK:030s
Settings:
3
LP SETPOINT:
If the low pressure drops below the LP setpoint
4
5
stop the unit immediately on LP Error.
■
Cooling mode: 1,2 bar
■
Heating mode: 0,5 bar
FAN LP MASK: Mask time of 30sec from fan switching (only fan Load up)
COMPR LP MASK: Mask time of 30sec from 1st compressor start-up (no masking at 2nd
compressor start)
Freeze-up Settings
This screen allows modification of the freeze-up safety settings.
_
FREEZE UP SAFETY
FREEZE UP DIS:004.0 °
C
RESET:005.0 °
C
Settings:
FREEZE UP DIS:
Freeze-up disabling setpoint, used for:
■
Freeze-up protection
=
FREEZE UP DIS setpoint
■
Freeze-up Prevention
=
FREEZE UP DIS setpoint +0,5°C
RESET:
Reset value of freeze-up prevention / protection
2–94
■
Freeze-up protection
:
Above RESET value, possible to reset freeze-up safety
■
Freeze-up prevention
:
Above RESET value, back to normal thermostat control
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
Anti-freeze
Function
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
1
This screen allows modification of the anti-freeze function by pump operation and refrigerant
temperature.
_
FREEZE UP SAFETY
PUMP ON SETP.:001.5 °
C
2
REFR TEMP SET:-03.5 °
C
Settings:
Discharge Gas
Safety
PUMP ON SETP
:
Setpoint of the anti-freeze function by pump operation
REFR TEMP SET
:
Setpoint of the anti-freeze function by refrigerant gas
temperature
3
4
These screens allow modification of the discharge gas safety.
_
DISCH GAS SAFETY
START CONTROL:110 °C
_
DISCH GAS SAFETY
CONTROL EEV:001pls
STOP CONTROL:109 °C
5
RESET TO NORMAL:100 °C
Settings:
START CONTROL
:
Setpoint of the discharge gas safety, start of adding extra EXV
opening
STOP CONTROL
:
Setpoint of the discharge gas stop condition, stop of adding
extra EXV opening
RESET TO NORMAL
:
Reset setpoint of the discharge gas safety, stop of the function
and switching back to normal EEV control.
CONTROL EEV
:
Setting of the additional pulses that will be added to the EXV
opening during the discharge gas safety function
Part 2 – Functional Description
2–95
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
1
Compressor and
Unit Restart Timers
ESIE06-05
This screen allows modification of the compressor timers and unit restart timer.
_^
RESTART SAFETY
GRD:03m
2
AREC:005m
RESTART POWERON:030s
REF GRD EXTEND:12m
Settings:
3
GRD
:
Guard timer setting
AREC
:
Anti recycling timer setting
RESTART POWER ON
:
When the unit is powered up after a power failure / main
switch, the unit can restart (automatic restart) after 30 sec.
REF GRD EXTEND
4
Refrigerant guard extendtimer, when unit is switched off on
refrigerant gas temperature safety. The compressor can only
restart after 12 min (default).
5
2–96
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
2.15.10 History
Extra screen
1
This screen allows modification of the extra screen parameter that enables or disables the history
logging function.
_
2
HISTORY
EXTRA SCREENS:N
3
Settings:
EXTRA SCREENS
:
Enable or disable the history logging function
4
N: Log data will not be displayed in the history menu.
Y: Log data will be displayed in the history menu.
5
2.15.11 Advanced
Auto Restart
This screen allows modification of the auto restart function.
_v
ADVANCED
AUTORESTART:YES
Settings:
Auto re-start:
YES: The unit will re-start after a power failure.
NO: The unit will not re-start after a power failure. Manual re-start is needed on the controller.
Part 2 – Functional Description
2–97
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
1
Simulation
Parameters
ESIE06-05
This screen allows modification of the simulation function, used on simulation boards.
_^
ADVANCED
SIMULATION:NO
2
AI:0
EEV:0
Settings:
3
■
SIMULATION:
NO: Use of software on real unit
YES: Use of software on simulation board
■
4
AI:
0: Use on real unit
1: Use on simulation board
■
EEV:
0: Use on real unit
1: Use on simulation board
5
2–98
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
1
2.15.12 Defrost
This screen allows modification of the defrost start condition and defrost timers.
2
_v
DEFROST
START CONST TEMP:10 °
C
NORMAL TIMER:030m
3
SHORT TIMER: 10m
Settings:
START CONST TEMP
:
Setting used in the formula to calculate if defrost cycle is
requested.
NORMAL TIMER
:
Minimum normal time between 2 defrost cycles of the same
circuit.
SHORT TIMER
:
Minimum short time between 2 defrost cycles of the same
circuit.
5
Remark: The selection of NORMAL or SHORT timer can be done in the USER/defrost screens.
This screen allows modification of the defrost lead time.
_
DEFROST
LEAD TIME:030s
Settings:
LEAD TIME
Part 2 – Functional Description
:
4
Time between the actual defrost start and the moment the
defrost start conditions were met.
2–99
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
1
ESIE06-05
This screen allows modification of the defrost parameters.
_
DEFROST
START EEV:0200pls
2
START KEEP TIME:005s
RESET COIL TEMP:20°
C
Settings:
3
START EEV
:
Start opening of the EEV by switching from heating to cooling
mode during the defrost cycle.
START KEEP TME
:
Time when the START EEV pulses are used before normal
cooling EEV control is active.
RESET COIL TEMP
:
Stop condition of the defrost cycle based on the coil
temperature.
4
This screen allows modification of the defrost stop conditions.
_
5
DEFROST
START EEV:0200pls
START KEEP TIME:005s
RESET COIL TEMP:20°
C
Settings:
2–100
RESET SET PR
:
Stop condition of the defrost cycle based on the high pressure.
RESET OUTL TEMP
:
Stop condition of the defrost cycle based on the outlet water
temperature.
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
Defrost settings
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
1
This screen allows modification of the defrost settings.
_^
DEFROST
INITIAL EEV:0200pls
2
INITIAL TIME:030s
EEV KEEPTIME:030s
Settings:
INITIAL EEV
:
Initial EEV pulses used in the defrost function
INITIAL TIME
:
Initial time used in the defrost function
EEV KEEP TIME
:
Time when the EEV already completely opens before
switching 4-way valve
3
4
5
Part 2 – Functional Description
2–101
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
1
2.16
ESIE06-05
Menu overview
2
3
4
5
2–102
Part 2 – Functional Description
Å
Part 2 – Functional Description
‡
> THERMOSTAT
COMPRESSOR
FAN
PUMP
EEV
INPUT OUTPUT
COMMUNICATION
DICN
SAFETY
HISTORY
ADVANCED
DEFROST
USERSETTINGS MENU
INPUT OUTPUT
EEV
PUMP
FAN
COMPRESSOR
THERMOSTAT
THERMOSTAT
PUMPCONTROL
FAN CONTROL
FAN CONTROL
_÷
EEV CONTROL
UNIT OPERATIONS
AI2:NONE
AI2 TYPE:0-20mA
AI3:NONE
_÷ CHANG.INP/OUTPUTS
FAN:ST VA:N 2PUMP:N
HEATERTAPE:N
CONFIRM? N
_v
C2SH L LIM COOL:04.0¢
C2SH U LIM COOL:08.5¢
_÷
AI3 TYPE:0-20mA
AI4:NONE
AI4 TYPE:0-20mA
_÷ CHANG.INP/OUTPUTS
DI1:NONE
DI2:NONE
DI3:NONE
AO1:NONE
AO1 TYPE:0-20mA
_÷ CHANG.INP/OUTPUTS
DI4:NONE
DO1:SAFETY+W.(NO)
DO2:GEN.OPERATION
_÷ CHANG.INP/OUTPUTS
EEV CONTROL
_÷ CHANG.INP/OUTPUTS
_÷
FAN DOWN PLS:0100pls
FAN UP PLS:0050pls
EEV CONTROL
C2SH L LIM HEAT:03.0¢
C2SH U LIM HEAT:05.0¢
_÷
FF NORMAL UP :1.5
FF NORMAL DOWN:1.7
EEV CONTROL
_÷ HEAT EEV CONTROL
FF LOW AMB.UP :2.2
FF LOW AMB.DOWN:2.2
_÷ HEAT EEV CONTROL
_÷
COOL EEV CONTROL
EEV CONTROL
FF LOW AMB.UP :1.1
FF LOW AMB.DOWN:1.2
_÷
ADJUST COOL:0500pls
ADJUST HEAT:0500pls
SAMPLING TIME:003s
KP COOL NORMAL:03.0
KP HEAT NORMAL:03.0
EEV CONTROL
_^
FANST. CONST B3:35.0b/37.0b
UNLOAD CONST:02.6b
COMPAR.PRESSURE:01.9b
TIP COOL WET:002s
TIP HEAT WET/003s
KP COOL WET:01.9
KP HEAT WET:02.0
EEV CONTROL
_÷
EEV CONTROL
_÷
_÷
STEP RANGE:2625pls
INITIAL STEP:0132pls
ALL CLOSE ADD:160pls
EEV CONTROL
_v
FANST. A:18.9b/28.0b
FANST.B1:32.4b/
FANST.B2:27.5b/35.0b
SCREENS: N
_v
MAN.PUMP:OFF 2ND:OFF
RUNN: HOURS
RHP1:00000hP2:00000h
_
AMBIENT TIMER:070S
AMBIENT SETP H:15.0¢
AMBIENT SETP M:05.0¢
FAN CONTROL
C12RH:00000hCS:00000
RUN:H COOL-HEAT
C12C: 00000hH:00000h
C11RH:00000hCS:00000
RUN:H COOL-HEAT
C11C: 00000hH:00000h
_v
_÷RUN.H-COMPR.STARTS
_÷RUN.H-COMPR.STARTS
COMPR. START
FAN ON LAG TIME:003e
_v
STEPLENGTH
STEPLENGTH
A:04.0¢
C:04.0¢
A:04.0¢
C:04.0¢
RESTART COND
COND :Ax2
:Ax2
RESTART
_
EEV CONTROL
EEV CONTROL
EEV CONTROL
_÷
EEV CONTROL
EEV CONTROL
EEV CONTROL
SELECT:PCB1 AI1
NTC:TYPE1
OFFSET: 0.0¢
_÷ NTC/PR. SENSORS
DI4:NONE
DO1:SAFETY+W.(NO)
DO2:GEN.OPERATION
DO3:NONE (OPEN)
DO4:NONE (OPEN)
DO5:NONE (OPEN)
_÷ CHANG.INP/OUTPUTS
EEV CONTROL
_÷ CHANG.INP/OUTPUTS
_^
C1SH L LIM HEAT:03.0¢
C1SH U LIM HEAT:05.0¢
_÷
FF CONTROL TIME:03.S
COOL AMB.CONST:005.0¢
HEAT AMB.CONST:005.0¢
_÷
TRANSIENT TIME:300s
KP COOL DRY:01.5
KP HEAT DRY/01.9
LP PR.SETP HEAT:2.3b
LP PR.RESET HEAT:3.0b
LP ADD HEAT:0200pls
EEV CONTROL
FAN CONTROL
COMPRESSION RATION:1.6
LOADUP TIM: 0015s
LOADDOWN TIM: 0090s
_÷
LP PR.SETP COOL:2.3b
LP PR.RESET COOL:3.0b
LP ADD COOL:0200pls
_÷
C1SH L LIM COOL:04.0¢
C1SH U LIM COOL:08.5¢
_÷
TIP COOL NORMAL:015s
TIP HEAT NORMAL:015s
_÷
LOW AMB. CONDITION
ADJUST HEAT:0151pls
HEAT AMB.CONST:005.0¢
_÷
HUNTING PR TIM:0720s
REST CONDTEMP:02.0¢
REST CONDAMB.:03.0¢
FAN CONTROL
C22RH:00000hCS:00000
RUN:H COOL-HEAT
C22C: 00000hH:00000h
C21RH:00000hCS:00000
RUN:H COOL-HEAT
C21C: 00000hH:00000h
_÷
_^RUN.H-COMPR.STARTS
_÷RUN.H-COMPR.STARTS
EEV CONTROL
EEV CONTROL
DO6:NONE (OPEN)
AI1:NONE
AI1 TYPE:0-20mA
_÷ CHANG.INP/OUTPUTS
FF CONTROL UP :1.3
FF CONTROL DOWN:1.5
_÷
TIP COOL DRY:002s
TIP HEAT DRY:003s
_÷
ST3:45HZ
ST1:20HZ
FAN INV FREQ
ST4: 50HZ
ST2: 30HZ
_^
2.17
PASSWORD: 0000
TO LOGIN
ENTER SERVICE
‡
THERMOSTAT
ESIE06-05
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
Service menu overview
1
2
3
4
5
2–103
2–104
DEFROST
ADVANCED
HISTORY
SAFETY
DICN SETTING
SAFETY
SAFETY
HISTORY
DEFROST
START CONST TEMP:10¢
NORMAL TIMER:030m
SHORT TIMER: 10m
_v
:YES
ADVANCED
EXTRA SCREENS:N
AUTORESTART
_v
_
LP SETP. C:1.2b H:0.5b
FAN LP MASK:030s
COMPR LP MASK:030s
_÷
MIN.OUTL.WATER:004.0¢
IF NO FLOW AFTER
PUMPLEADTIME:ALARM
_v
MS OPTION:N
UNIT:MASTER
NR OF SLAVES:1
_v
DICN SETTING
ADVANCED
_÷
LEAD TIME:030s
DEFROST
SIMULATION:NO
AI:0
EEV:0
_^
FREEZE UP DIS:003.0¢
RESET:004.0¢
DEFROST
START EEV:0200pls
START KEEP TIME:005s
RESET COIL TEMP:120¢
_÷
PUMP ON SETP.:001.5¢
REFR TEMP SET:-03.5¢
_÷ FREEZE UP SAFETY
SAFETY
_÷ FREEZE UP SAFETY
_÷
PASSWORD NEEDED TO
RESET SAFETIES:
NONE
SAFETY
MASTER SETTING
PRIORITY:0-2
STEPLENGTH:1.5¢
STANDBY IF MAX CAP:Y
_÷
RS232:NONE
BR:19200bps
HPSETB:37.4b DIFF:0.4b
MASK INVFAN SAF:120s
_÷
ADD SL1:---
_÷
4
_÷ COMMUNICATION PCB
SAFETY
DEFROST
RESET SET PR.:25.0b
RESET OUTL TEMP:04¢
_÷
START CONTROL:110¢
STOP CONTROL:109¢
RESET TO NORMAL:090¢
_÷ DISCH GAS SAFETY
FAN OVERC.:WARNING
_÷
STEPLENGTH
A:04.0¢ B:03.2¢ C:00.4¢
_^ DICN THERMOSTAT
RS485:NONE ADDR:01
BR: 19200bps
PARITY:NONE (2STOPb)
_÷ COMMUNICATION PCB
3
EEV. PCB:UNI POLAR
_÷ COMMUNICATION PCB
5
COMMUNICATION
SAFETY
POWER:Y
AUTO:Y
DEFROST
INITIAL EEV:0200pls
INITIAL TIME:030s
EEV KEEP TIME:030s
_^
CONTROL EEV:001pls
_÷ DISCH GAS SAFETY
IF UNITSAFETY THEN
PUT UNIT OFF: NO
_÷
DIII:YES
ADDR:--AIRNET:01
_÷ COMMUNICATION PCB
2
EXT. PCB:4SSR+HIC
COMM. PCB:DIII+SER
COMM.P1P2 PCB:NONE
_v
COMMUNICATION
SAFETY
RESTART SAFETY
GRD:03m
AREC:005m
RESTART POWERON:030s
REF GRD EXTEND:12m
_^
HIGH DIS SAFETY:135¢
_÷
BMSCONTROL ALLOWED:N
_^
1
DICN
COMMUNICATION
The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers
ESIE06-05
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
Functional Control for a Standalone Unit
Part 2
3
1
Functional Control for a Standalone Unit
2
3.1
What Is in This Chapter?
Introduction
Overview
This chapter will give more detailed information about the functions used to control the system.
Understanding these functions is vital when diagnosing a malfunction, which is related to functional
control.
3
This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic
See page
3.2–Operation Flowchart
2–106
3.3–On/Off Management
2–107
3.4–Thermostat Control
2–108
3.5–Manual Control
2–114
3.6–Compressor Control
2–115
3.7–Fan Control
2–119
3.8–Pump Control
2–128
3.9–Floating Setpoint
2–129
3.10–Free Cooling
2–133
3.11–Superheat control
2–137
3.12–Changeable digital inputs
2–140
3.13–Changeable digital outputs
2–141
3.14–Changeable analogue inputs
2–142
3.15–Changeable analogue outputs
2–143
3.16–DICN Basic Setup (=master/slave system)
2–144
3.17–BMS Function
2–153
3.18–Freeze-up Control
2–157
3.19–Discharge gas safety
2–163
3.20–Password Function
2–164
3.21–History logging
2–165
3.22–Defrost management
2–166
3.23–Reversing valve
2–171
3.24–Low pressure bypass
2–172
3.25–Simulation
2–173
Part 2 – Functional Description
4
5
2–105
Functional Control for a Standalone Unit
1
3.2
ESIE06-05
Operation Flowchart
Cooling only
Power on
2
Start in cooling
Thermostat control
Inlet or outlet control
3
Stop
Heat pump
4
Power on
5
Start in cooling
Start in heating
Thermostat control
Inlet or outlet control
evaporator
Thermostat control
Inlet or outlet
control condenser
Stop
2–106
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
3.3
Functional Control for a Standalone Unit
On/Off Management
Introduction
1
There are three ways of switching the unit on and off:
■
Through the local key of the controller.
■
Through the BMS.
2
The last command, of these two, determines the status of the local key.
■
Through a remote switch. The remote switch gives an on/off signal to one of the changeable digital
inputs of the controller.
If the remote switch function is used, then an AND function with the first two commands determines
the on/off status of the unit.
Power on
■
The initialization takes 20 seconds.
■
The controller automatically goes to the menu overview or operation informative screen.
Remark:
An auto restart function is integrated. This means that the on/off status is remembered after a power
failure of the unit. This function can be disabled in the service/advanced menu.
Remote on/off
4
The procedure to switch the unit on/off depends on the settings of the changeable inputs/outputs.
These settings can be made in the service input output menu.
Remark:
On/off status
3
5
■
The remote on/off switch is field supply.
■
When the remote switch is "OFF" it is not possible to switch the unit on with the controller.
This table gives an overview of the status of the unit and LEDs in applications with a remote switch. In
case there's no remote switch the status of the unit only depends on the status of the local key.
Part 2 – Functional Description
Local key
Remote Switch
Unit
LED
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
Flashing
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
2–107
Functional Control for a Standalone Unit
1
3.4
ESIE06-05
Thermostat Control
Introduction
The thermostat control is used to generate a load -up or load-down according to the active thermostat,
if the load-up respectively load-down timer is finished (this means gone to "0").
The thermostat can be set to regulate on different signals:
2
■
Signal from the water sensor at the inlet of the evaporator.
■
Signal from the water sensor at the outlet of the evaporator.
■
Signal from the water sensor at the inlet of the condenser (only for EWYQ).
■
Signal from the water sensor at the outlet of the condenser (only for EWYQ).
There are several possible functions for the thermostat control:
3
4
Mode change over
5
■
Cooling: inlet evaporator control.
■
Cooling: outlet evaporator control.
■
Heating: inlet condenser control (only for EWYQ).
■
Heating: outlet condenser control (only for EWYQ).
■
External analog signal. ( 0 - 1V, 0 - 10V, 4 -20 mA, 0 - 20 mA).
■
Floating setpoint.
Modechange inlet/outlet:
■
From Manual to inlet/outlet (or reverse): switch off all compressors.
■
From inlet to outlet (or reverse): switch off all compressors.
Modechange cooling/heating:
Thermostat timers
and actions
■
From cooling to heating (or reverse): switch off all compressors.
■
If the temperature is below the setpoint, the thermostat control will check every LOADDOWN
TIMER (example for cooling mode).
According to the deviation to the setpoint, no action, load up, load down is required.
■
If the temperature is above the setpoint, the thermostat control will check every LOADUP TIMER
(example for cooling mode).
According to the deviation to the setpoint, no action, load up, load down is required.
Default and limit
values
Default value
INLET CONTROL
Units 2 circuit
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
4.0 (*)
2.0 (*)
______
______
_______
______
Step difference - a
(K)
Steplength - c
(K)
Loadup timer
(sec)
180
15
300
Loaddown timer
(sec)
30
15
300
Setpoint cooling
(°C)
12.0
7.0
23.0
Setpoint heating
(°C)
40
20.0
45.0
(*)
2–108
Units 1
circuit
0.2 (*)
can only be modified in the service menu.
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
Functional Control for a Standalone Unit
1
Default value
OUTLET CONTROL
Inlet control for
cooling mode
Units 1
circuit
Units 2
circuit
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
4.0 (*)
2.0 (*)
______
______
_______
______
Step difference - a
(K)
Steplength - c
(K)
Loadup timer
(sec)
30
15
300
Loaddown timer
(sec)
15
15
300
Setpoint cooling
(°C)
7.0
5.0
20.0
Setpoint heating
(°C)
45.0
25.0
50.0
0.2 (*)
2
3
The illustration below shows the thermostat inlet control in cooling mode.
4
Compressor Request
>Load up request of 1 compressor
>No action
5
>Load down request of 1 compressor
Inlet water temerature evaporator (°C)
Setpoint (°C)
Inlet Control for the
Heating Mode
The illustration below shows the thermostat inlet control in heating mode.
Compressor Request
>Load up request of 1 compressor
>No action
>Load down request of 1 compressor
Inlet water temerature condenser (°C)
Setpoint (°C)
Part 2 – Functional Description
2–109
Functional Control for a Standalone Unit
Remark:
1
The EWYQ080DAYN* has a modified control in heating mode when ambient temperature is less than
or equal to 5 °C.
■
2
ESIE06-05
Restart conditions
for inlet control
If ambient temperature is lesser than or equal to 5 °C, then two compressors always run together
(30 seconds between the startup of the first compressor and the second compressor).
Restart conditions from normal thermo OFF or forced thermo OFF.
When after thermo OFF, all below conditions are met, the compressor can be restarted.
The start conditions are:
3
■
Restart prevention timer has counted down.
■
Load up signal is given by controller (thermostat).
■
Inlet water temperature is > inlet water setpoint + A (cooling).
■
Inlet water temperature is > to inlet water setpoint - A (heating).
Remark:
Parameter A= Restart condition value programmed in the service/thermostat menu.
4
Outlet control for
cooling mode
The illustration below shows the thermostat outlet control in cooling mode.
Compressor Request
5
>Load up request of 1 compressor
>No action
>Load down request of 1 compressor
Outlet water temerature evaporator (°C)
Setpoint (°C)
Outlet control for
heating mode
The illustration below shows the thermostat outlet control in heating mode.
Compressor Request
>Load up request of 1 compressor
>No action
>Load down request of 1 compressor
Outlet water temerature condenser (°C)
Setpoint (°C)
2–110
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
Restart conditions
for outlet control
version 2.1
Functional Control for a Standalone Unit
1
Restart conditions after normal thermo off for software version 2.1.
After NORMAL thermo off, AND below conditions are met, the compressor can be restarted.
Start conditions:
■
Restart Prevention timer has counted down.
■
Load up signal is given by controller (thermostat).
■
Inlet water temp.during previous thermo-off + Stl A °C is < current inlet water temp. (Cooling)
■
Inlet water temp.during previous thermo-off - Stl A °C > current inlet water temperature (Heating).
Stl A : Thermostat differential value.
However, for below conditions, the start condition of inlet water temperature + Stl A °C is invalid and
the unit will start immediately if:
■
Water temperature setpoint has changed + 1 °C or more.
■
Forcing “thermo ON” order has been input from user interface.
■
Inlet thermistor has abnormality and other circuit is in alarm.
Remark:
Parameter A= Step difference value programmed in the service/thermostat menu.
Restart conditions
after forced
thermo-OFF
FORCED thermo off
conditions:
2
3
4
After FORCING Thermo-off, AND below conditions are met, the compressor can be restarted.
■
Re-start prevention timer has been counted down.
■
Outlet setpoint + (Stl A °C x B) < current outlet water temperature. (Cooling)
■
Outlet setpoint _ (Stl A °C X B) > current outlet water temperature. (Heating)
Stl A : Step difference value.
B= 2 : Differential expansion constant Changeable : 1~ 4.
■
Outlet water temperature below FREEZE up DIS setpoint forcing thermo-off.
■
Refrigerant temperature below REFR TEMP setpoint forcing thermo-off.
Part 2 – Functional Description
5
2–111
Functional Control for a Standalone Unit
1
Restart conditions
for outlet control
version 2.2
ESIE06-05
Restart conditions after normal thermo-OFF for software version 2.2.
After NORMAL thermo-off, AND below conditions are met, the compressor can be restarted.
Start conditions :
2
■
Timer has counted down
■
Load up signal is given by controller (thermostat)
■
Inlet water temperature during previous thermo-off + restart condition °C is < current inlet water
temp (cooling).
■
Inlet water temperature during previous thermo-off minus restart conditions °C is > current inlet
water temperature (heating).
Restart conditions: restart condition differential value programmed in the service/thermostat menu.
3
However, for below conditions, condition of inlet water temperature + restart condition °C is invalid and
the unit will start immediately if:
4
Restart conditions
after forced thermo
off
5
■
Water temperature setpoint has changed + 1 °C or more.
■
Forcing “thermo ON” order has been input from user interface.
■
Inlet thermistor has abnormality and other circuit is in alarm.
After FORCING thermo off, AND below conditions are met, the compressor can be restarted.
Start conditions:
■
Re-start prevention timer has been counted down.
■
Outlet setpoint + restart conditions x 2 is < current outlet water temperature (cooling).
■
Outlet setpoint - restart conditions x 2 is > current outlet water temperature (heating).
Restart condition: restart condition in differential value programmed in the service/thermostat menu.
2 : differential expansion constant changeable 1 ~ 4 programmed in the service/thermostat menu.
Forced thermo-off
conditions
2–112
■
Outlet water temperature below FREEZE UP DIS setpoint forcing thermo-off.
■
Refrigerant temperature below REFR TEMP setpoint forcing thermo off.
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
Startup sequence
Functional Control for a Standalone Unit
1
The unit startup sequence is described in the following schematic overview.
(3 seconds)
Start condition met
Thermostat control
ON
OFF
2
ON
OFF
Fan
ON
OFF
Compressor
(compreesor with
highest priority)
2nd start-up compressor :ON
3
3rd start-up compressor :ON
4th start-up compressor :ON
Pump lead time
Remote cooling or
heating
While giving a Download signal
■
If there is a Download signal, turn off the designated compressor after duration of “Compressor
minimum running time”.
■
If only the first compressor is running, after duration of the “Compressor minimum running time”
Thermo-OFF.
5
Only applicable on heat pump units.
This function allows switching from cooling to heating mode trough a remote switch connected to one
of the digital inputs.
For details about the possible settings of the digital inputs refer to the chapters about the changeable
digital inputs and the service menu.
Dual setpoint
This function allows switching between two set-points, with a switch.
The actual setpoint can also be influenced by the floating setpoint function.
The set-points can be set in the according menu, refer to the chapter about the set-points menu.
For details about the possible settings of the digital inputs refer to the chapters about the changeable
digital inputs and the service menu.
Part 2 – Functional Description
4
2–113
Functional Control for a Standalone Unit
1
2
3
3.5
ESIE06-05
Manual Control
Introduction
Only available on standalone unit or in disconnected mode. This function must only be used for testing
of the unit, e.g. during commissioning or trouble shooting.
Description
This function allows setting the compressors & fans to fixed capacity steps, without thermostat control.
In manual mode freeze-up prevention, defrost, high pressure setback and low noise operation are not
active.
In manual mode the load-up and load-down timers are not active.
Manual mode
versus thermostat
mode
The following table shows the difference between manual and automatic mode:
If…
Then there is…
Manual capacity control
(=fixed capacity step control)
■
No thermostat control, the unit is set to
fixed steps manually.
■
No defrost control.
■
No low noise operation.
■
No freeze up prevention.
■
No HP setback.
4
Thermostat control
An inlet/outlet thermostat control.
When changing from manual to thermostat control all compressors will shut down before operating in
thermostat mode.
5
Manual pump
control
2–114
In the service menu it is possible to switch on the pump manually, when the unit is off. This makes it
possible to check the operation of the pump.
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
3.6
Functional Control for a Standalone Unit
Compressor Control
Lead Lag control
1
Introduction
The lead lag control mode determines which circuit/compressor starts up first in case of a capacity
demand. It prevents the unit from always starting up the same circuit or compressor.
2
Possible modes:
■
Auto : the controller decides which compressor starts first.
■
Priority : the user can select the sequence of the compressor starts (fixed)
Remark : the different modes can be selected in the user/compressor menu.
Lead Lag in Auto
Mode
When the lead lag control is done automatically, the software calculates the differences in operation
time between the compressors.
Start up priority in
Auto Mode
At first, power on:
4
Start up priority compressor : cir 1-1 -> cir 2-1* -> cir 1-2 -> cir 2-2 *
Sequence
Status
Start-up priority
0 compressors running
Compressor with least running hours
1 compressor running
Compressor wit least running hours of
the other circuit
2 compressors running*
Compressor with least running hours
3 compressors running*
Start compressor 4.
Remark : (*) is not applicable for 30hp and 40hp unit.
Reason : There are only 2 compressors (1 circuit) for 30hp and 40hp unit.
Stop priority in Auto
Mode
Sequence
Status
Start-up priority
4 compressors running*
Compressor with most running hours
3 compressor running*
Compressor with the most running
hours of the circuit with two compressors running
2 compressors running
Compressor with the most running
hours
1 compressors running
Stop compressor.
Remark : (*) is not applicable for 30hp and 40hp unit.
Reason : There are only 2 compressors (1 circuit) for 30hp and 40hp unit.
In case running hours has the same value for several compressors in start/stop priority. Start up priority
compressor : cir1-1 -> cir 2-1* -> cir1-2 -> cir2-2* (stop priority is opposite).
Part 2 – Functional Description
3
2–115
5
Functional Control for a Standalone Unit
1
Capacity Limitation
ESIE06-05
This function allows you to limit the capacity of the chiller. Depending on the adjusted mode, it is
possible to control the capacity limitation via remote digital input or software.
The limitation setting can be set in the user/compressor menu. In manual mode this function is not
active.
■
2
Changeable digital input
To activate the remote digital input mode, program one of the changeable digital inputs to “CAP. LIMIT
SET” in the service.Input output menu and connect the limitation switch to the right remote digital input
terminal.
When a changeable digital input is programmed, the compressor capacity limit mode can be
programmed as CHANG. DIG. INP and the limitation can be entered.
3
Remark : when no changeable digital input is programmed as CAP. LIMIT SET, no limitation can be
set (not displayed on the screen).
■
Limit Setting
To activate the limit setting function, the compressor capacity limit mode can be programmed as LIMIT
SETTING and the limitations can be entered.
4
5
■
Limit 50%
To activate the Limit 50% function, the compressor capacity limit mode can be programmed as LIMIT
50% and the unit will be limit to 50% capacity.
Re start prevention
timers
Introduction
Delay timers are implemented to prevent the compressor from restarting after a shutdown. Three
different timers are present.
■
Guard timer:
Delay timer to prevent compressor from restarting after a shutdown (default 3 minutes). Only if
AREC timer is already on 0s.
■
Anti recycling timer:
AREC timer is used to limit the starts per hour, means counting after starting the compressor. For
scroll compressor the default value is 5 min.
■
Minimum running time:
Delay timer to prevent switching off compressor after start-up. During the countdown the
compressor will not be switched off by the thermostat function.
Functional description
Minimum running time
(2min or more)
TimGrd
(3min or more)
Compressor
ON
OFF
TimArec (5min or more)
Compressor’s minimum running time has to be larger than or equal to 2 min. However, stop
immediately at unit stop (On/off button pushed when unit is on)
OR
Forced thermo OFF (Freeze-up prevention, low pressure protection etc.)
2–116
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
Functional Control for a Standalone Unit
Time > 5 min.
1
TimGrd
(3min or more)
Compressor
ON
OFF
2
Extension of restart prevention timer
During restart after FORCED Thermo OFF due to anti-freeze by refrigerant gas temperature or leaving
water, the restart compressor timer value (REF GRD EXTEND) is 12 minutes (default).
This “REF GRD EXTEND” value can be changed in the service/safety menu.
Protection control
of compressor
running area during
heating
3
Introduction
When the compressor is operating in heating mode, a compressor protection function will avoid that
the compressor works out of operation area.
4
Function
When two compressors are in operation of this circuit:
■
If activation condition 1 or 2 is satisfied for 120 seconds:
Reduce 1 compressor immediately.
5
When 1 compressor is in operation of this circuit
■
If activation condition 1 or 2 is satisfied for 300 seconds:
Switch off this circuit immediately (thermo off).
Activation
conditions
Activation conditions
1
Te < Tc + c (c= -67°C)
OR
2
Te < d (d= -20°C)
Te: Evaporating temperature.
Tc: Condensation temperature.
Recovery
conditions
In case compressors went from 2 to 1 running compressor: next compressor start-up will be when
condition 3 and 4 are satisfied.
3
Te > Tc + c + a (a=4°C).
AND
4
Te > d + b (b=4°C).
Part 2 – Functional Description
2–117
Functional Control for a Standalone Unit
ESIE06-05
1
2
3
Remark:
4
Warning indication
5
2–118
5
This control is bypassed for 30 seconds at 1st compressor start-up after thermo-OFF.
6
During the defrost control, this function is disabled.
7
This control is bypassed for 120 seconds after defrost recovery.
8
After the recovery condition, compressor guard timer is valid.
9
When 1 compressor is running and condition 1 or 2 is met, no load up is allowed during the 300
sec timer (timer busy).
In the Service/Safety menu, the compressor protection warning (COMPR PR Setting) can be enabled
or disabled.
■
When the warning is enabled.
- Compressor status will indicate : COMP PR.
- Warning indication is displayed on the controller.
■
When the warning is disabled.
- Compressor status will indicate: COMP PR.
- No warning on the controller.
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
3.7
Functional Control for a Standalone Unit
Fan Control
Purpose
1
To regulate the high pressure.
There are two different methods used to control the HP.
■
Fan control based on ambient control: only at start-up, of each circuit, for the first 70 seconds
(default).
■
Fan control based on high pressure value, when fan ambient control is finished.
2
Schematic
overview
Start up unit
No
3
Yes
70 sec
Amb.
Temp
4
HP
Fan step in function
of HP value
< 7 °C
Fan control based
on Ambient
Temperature with
Standard Fans
7-17 °C
Ambient based control for standard fans
During the first 70 seconds (default), after startup of a circuit, the fan control is based on the ambient
temperature. After this timer the fan control changes to high pressure control, based on high pressure
value.
Ambient temp.
Low
1 15°C
3 5°C
High
H
M
17°C
2
L
7°C
Parameter
Fan control based
on high pressure
with standard fans
5
> 17 °C
1 and
4
1 : Ambient setp A
3 : Ambient setp B
2 = 1 + 2°C
1 = 3 + 2°C
3 can be changed in the Service/Fan menu.
High pressure based control for standard fans.
After the first 70 seconds (default) fan control is based on high pressure value.
Part 2 – Functional Description
2–119
Functional Control for a Standalone Unit
1
Min. time between
DWN& DWN:
180sec
ESIE06-05
Min. time between
UP& UP: 90sec
Min. time
between UP&
UP: 20sec
Fanstep
H
M
2
Step
Down
Step UP
L
A:18,9 bar
2,6 bar
2,6 bar
B2:27,5 bar
3
B2 (50%):
24,9 bar
B3: 35 bar
B1:32,4 bar
High pressure
In case 1 comp or
no compr running
B1 (50%):
29,8 bar
Remark:
There are different switching points for fan up depending if 1 or 2 compressors are running in that
circuit.
4
5
The parameters for the fan regulation can be changed in the Service/Fan menu.
High pressure
control: Fanstep
up/down by
pressure A/B1/B2
■
HP < A : if below setpoint for 10 sec then 1 fanstep DOWN
■
HP > B1 or B2: 1 fanstep UP.
- Min time for next fan step up 90sec.
- Min time for next fan down 180 sec
During these timer no fanstep up or down is allowed.
-If 1 compressor is running or no compressor running, then:
B1(50%)=B1-2,6b & B2(50%)=B2 - 2, 6b.
-Extra condition For Fanstep up, Compare present High pressure and High pressure from 30 sec
before (memorize and compare with sampling time of 5 sec.), Fanstep up is only allowed if there
is a rise of 1,9 bar or more.
-Extra condition For Fanstep down, Compare present High pressure and High pressure from 30
sec before, Fanstep down is only allowed if there is a drop of 1,9 bar or more.
High pressure
control: Fanstep
up/down be
pressure B3
(Avoid problem of Fan up decline because of minimum time up condition.)
Fan control based
on Ambient
Temperature with
inverter fans
Ambient based control for inverter fans.
2–120
■
HP > B3. 1 fanstep up.
- Minimum time between fanstep up (by B1/B2 or B3) and next fan step up (by B3) is 20 sec.
During the first 70 seconds (default value), after startup of a circuit, the fan control is based on the
ambient temperature. After this timer the fan control changes to high pressure control based on high
pressure control.
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
Functional Control for a Standalone Unit
Ambient temperature
Low
1
High
15°C
5°C
100%/100%
50/53%
17°C
-5°C
30/33%
2
7°C
-10°C
30/30%
-3°C
-15°C
20/20%
Unit with 8 fanstep
Unit with 12 fanstep
-8°C
20/13%
3
-13°C
1 : Ambient setpoint A
2:
1 + 2°C
4
3: Ambient Setpoint B
4:
3 + 2 °C
Parameter
Fan control based
on high pressure
with inverter fans
1 and
3 can be changed in the service/fan menu.
5
High pressure based control for inverter fans.
After the first 70 seconds (default) fan control is based on high pressure value.
Min. time
between
DWN& DWN:
90sec
Min. time
between
UP& UP:
15sec
Min. time
between
UP& UP:
10sec
Fanstep
100%
95%
…
Step
Down
Step
Up
…
30%
20%
A: 18,9 bar
2,6bar
B2:27,5bar
B2 (50%):
24,9 bar
High pressure
B3: 35 bar
In case 1 comp or
no compr running
Remark:
There are different switching points for fan up depending if 1 or 2 compressors are running in that
circuit.
Part 2 – Functional Description
2–121
Functional Control for a Standalone Unit
1
The parameters for the fan regulation can be changed in the Service/Fan menu.
High pressure
control: Fanstep
up/down by
pressureA/B1/B2
■
HP < A : if below setpoint for 10 sec then 1 fanstep DOWN
■
HP > B1 or B2: 1 fanstep UP.
- Min time for next fan step up 15sec.
- Min time for next fan down 90sec.
During these timer no fanstep up or down is allowed.
-If 1 compressor is running or no compressor running, then:
B1(50%)=B1-2,6b & B2(50%)=B2 - 2, 6b.
-Extra condition For Fanstep up, Compare present High pressure and High pressure from 30 sec
before (memorize and compare with sampling time of 5 sec.), Fanstep up is only allowed if there
is a rise of 1,9 bar or more.
-Extra condition For Fanstep down, Compare present High pressure and High pressure from 30
sec before, Fanstep down is only allowed if there is a drop of 1,9 bar or more.
High pressure
control: Fanstep
up/down be
pressure B3
(Avoid problem of Fan up decline because of minimum time up condition.)
Low noise mode
with inverter fans
Low noise is only possible when inverter fans are installed.
2
3
4
ESIE06-05
■
HP > B3. 1 fanstep up.
- Minimum time between fanstep up (by B1/B2 or B3) and next fan step up (by B3) is 10 sec.
Min. time
between
DWN& DWN:
90sec
5
Min. time
between
UP& UP:
15sec
Min. time
between
UP& UP:
10sec
Fanstep
100%
95%
…
Step
Down
Step
Up
…
30%
20%
A: 28 bar
2,6bar
B2:35bar
High pressure
B3: 37 bar
In case 1 comp or
no compr running
B2 (50%):
32,4 bar
The fan control in low noise mode is the same as standard inverter control. Only the setpoints A/B2/B3
are different (higher value). These parameters can be changed in the service/fan menu.
This function can be activated by a changeable input or a daily schedule.
Example of low noise operation with daily schedule.
2–122
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
Functional Control for a Standalone Unit
Low noise
1 : START
2 : STOP
:22h00
:26h00
1
Time
06h00
00h00
2
22h00
Fans running in low noise mode (higher pressure)
Anti hunting control
When the fanstep modifies with + one fanstep and it becomes again the same fanstep within 720
seconds, then :
■
Reset anti-hunting
control.
the B3 = 35 bar condition is required for the next fanstep up (Reason: Pressure differential bigger
than estimated).
Anti-hunting will prevent frequently switching between two fan steps.
Anti-hunting control will be reset (normal fan control) if one of the following conditions is fulfilled:
■
unit stop/ Thermo OFF
■
1,5 hour after start of anti-hunting control.
■
outlet water temperature rise: +2°C or more (HP rise due to LP rise).
■
Ambient temperature rise : 1 comp step up (HP rise due to load rise).
■
Comp step drop : 1 compr step down (Deferential drop due to load drop).
■
Example :
Fanstep
H
M
...
At this point B3
condition becomes
valid for fan step up
B2 Condition for
Fanstep up
B3 Condition for
Fanstep up
At this point B2
condition becomes
valid for fan step up
B2 Condition for
Fanstep up
30%
20%
Maximum + or ñ 1
fanstep
Pressure difference
surveillance control
Reset condition:
Unit stop or thermostat off
Or 1.5 hour past
or outlet water temp rise
or ambient temp rise
or compr step rise
or compr step drop
Time
The fan control will make a fan step down if the compression ratio of a circuit is too low, this to create
a bigger compression ratio.
Make a fanstep down in case of below condition.
1.6 > (Compression ratio (HP+1.92)/ (LP+1.92)) : For 30 sec or more.
Also in this case the minimum time between fanstep down and next fanstep down of 180sec is valid.
This would mean that after the 180sec the ratio is compared with the ratio with 30 sec before.
Part 2 – Functional Description
4
5
...
720 sec
3
2–123
Functional Control for a Standalone Unit
When a fanstep down is executed by the pressure diff surveillance control, then fanstep up is not
allowed unless one of following conditions is met:
1
2
3
ESIE06-05
Fan control in
heating mode
Fan output for
inverter fans
■
Unit stop/Thermo off
■
1.5 hr after start of this forbidden area.
■
Water temp. drop : -2°C (bigger pressure difference due to LP drop).
■
Rise of outdoor temp.: +3 °C or more (bigger pressure difference due to HP rise).
Fan management : heating mode
■
Fanstep = 100 % (step)
■
Fanstep = 100 % (inverter fans)
Fanstep output for 50-60Hp units
Fanstep
%
4
5
K13F
K23F
K14F
K24F
8
100
50Hz
ON
7
95
45Hz
ON
6
80
30Hz
ON
5
70
20Hz
ON
4
50
50Hz
OFF
3
45
45Hz
OFF
2
30
30Hz
OFF
1
20
20Hz
OFF
Changeover
on/off fan &
Fan inv
Fanstep output for 70-80Hp units
2–124
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
Functional Control for a Standalone Unit
Fanstep
%
K14F
K24F
K13F
K23F
K15F
K25F
12
100
ON
50 Hz
ON
11
96
ON
45 Hz
ON
10
86
ON
30 Hz
ON
9
79
ON
20 Hz
ON
8
66
ON
50 Hz
OFF
7
63
ON
45 Hz
OFF
6
53
ON
30 Hz
OFF
5
46
ON
20 Hz
OFF
4
33
OFF
50 Hz
OFF
3
30
OFF
45 Hz
OFF
2
20
OFF
30 Hz
OFF
1
13
OFF
20 Hz
OFF
1
2
Changeover
on/off fan &
Fan inv
Changeover
on/off fan &
Fan inv
3
4
5
Part 2 – Functional Description
2–125
Functional Control for a Standalone Unit
ESIE06-05
Fanstep output for 30-40 Hp and 90-100 Hp units. Circuit 2 is not present with 30-40Hp units.
1
Fanstep
%
2
3
K13F
K23F
K14F
K24F
K15F
K25F
K16F
K26F
8
100
50 Hz
ON
50 Hz
ON
7
95
45 Hz
ON
45 Hz
ON
6
80
30 Hz
ON
30 Hz
ON
5
70
20 Hz
ON
20 Hz
ON
4
50
50 Hz
OFF
50 Hz
OFF
3
45
45 Hz
OFF
45 Hz
OFF
2
30
30 Hz
OFF
30 Hz
OFF
1
20
20 Hz
OFF
20 Hz
OFF
Changeover
on/off fan &
Fan inv
4
5
2–126
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
3.7.1
Functional Control for a Standalone Unit
High pressure setback
Description
1
This is a safety prevention function, when high pressure is near to the high pressure switch setpoint.
The unit will load-down one compressor to prevent that the unit trips on high pressure switch.
Fanstep
100%
95%
…
Step
Down
2
Step
Up
…
HP Switch
Level 40,5 Bar
30%
20%
A: 18,9 bar
2,6bar
B2:27,7bar
3
High pressure
B3: 35 bar
B2 (50%):
24,9 bar
4
HP Setback reset 37b
(possible to add compr.)
HP Setback 37,4b
(1 compr. Switched off)
5
Part 2 – Functional Description
2–127
Functional Control for a Standalone Unit
1
3.8
ESIE06-05
Pump Control
Introduction
To prevent the chiller to start up without flow, safety checks are performed.
First there is a check to make sure that water flows through the system.
If a second evaporator pump is installed a second safety check is performed: the double evaporator
pump control, in case of failure of one pump the other one takes over.
2
Another advantage of this control is the fact that the system switches from one pump to the other in
case failure during operation.
3
Pump lead/lag time
The PUMPCONTROL of the user settings menu allows the user to define the pump-lead time and
pump-lag time.
Daily pump startup
The user will get the choice to perform a pump start every day to prevent obstruction of the pump and
to increase its lifetime. Everyday at pump start time, which can be set in the user/pump menu, the
pump will be started automatically for a short period (5s) if the unit is off.
If dual pump control is selected by changeable digital output, then it is also possible to start up this
pump in the service/pump menu.
Dual evaporator
pump control
When dual pump control is allowed an extra digital output is needed (see Service Menu). In total four
choices will be possible: one pump (default), two pumps with automatic rotation (by running hours and
with a certain offset), priority pump 1 and priority pump 2.
4
5
When the dual evaporator pump control is set in automatic rotation, the software calculates the
differences in operation time between the two pumps. When this time exceeds the chosen offset time,
the pump will shut down and the other pump will start up, during this the unit keeps running. The
switchover will happen immediately, there is no transition time.
Remark: In case two pumps are present and the running pump fails then the unit is stopped and
started up again with the other pump. When the first pump fails a visible warning will be given. The
failed pump can not start up before this warning is reset. If the running pump fails while the other pump
is already in warning a unit alarm will be given.
2–128
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
Functional Control for a Standalone Unit
3.9
Floating Setpoint
3.9.1
Floating Setpoint - Ambient Mode
Introduction
1
The ambient mode can be used to modify the setpoint in function of the ambient temperature.
The user is able to choose to use the floating setpoint or not. The result of using the ambient mode is
that the unit will be used more efficiently and that the modified setpoint will be displayed under the
normal setpoint.
The floating setpoint parameters and function can be set in the user floating setpoint settings menu.
2
Function
description
Setpoint
3
SLOPE:
The rise in floating setpoint
value for a 10°C ambient drop.
A: Active setpoint
B: Setpoint
4
5
Explanation
When in cooling mode the load of the unit drops (by drop in outdoor temperature), then the setpoint
will be changed upwards by the floating setpoint value. Because of this the unit will evaporate at a
higher temperature and thus the performance of the unit will be better.
Remark: When you use the floating setpoint, the value of the setpoint on the readout and set point
menu can be different. The readout screen will show the calculated value and the setpoint screen the
set value.
Part 2 – Functional Description
2–129
Functional Control for a Standalone Unit
1
3.9.2
ESIE06-05
Floating Setpoint - changeable analogue input slope NTC
Introduction
2
The CH. AI SLOPE NTC mode can be used to modify the setpoint in function of the NTC sensor which
is connected to a changeable analogue input (and programmed) the user is able to choose to use the
floating setpoint or not. The result of using the CH. AI. SLOPE NTC mode is that the unit will change
setpoint according to the measured temperature. The floating setpoint parameters and functions can
be set in the user/floating setpoint menu.
Functional
description
3
A: Active setpoint
B: Setpoint
4
5
Explanation
When the temperature measured with the NTC sensor is 20 °C (reference), then the original setpoint
will be used. When the measured temperature rises, the active setpoint will change downwards. When
the measured temperature drops, the active setpoint will change upwards.
Remark: when you use the floating setpoint, the value of the setpoint on the readout and setpoint menu
can be different. The readout screen will show the calculated value and the setpoint screen the set
table.
2–130
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
3.9.3
Functional Control for a Standalone Unit
Floating Setpoint - AI SLOPE V-A
Introduction
1
The AI SLOPE V-A mode can be used to modify the setpoint in function of an external voltage or
current (mA) signal connected to a changeable analogue input (and programmed). The user is able to
choose to use the floating setpoint or not. The result of using the CH.AI. SLOPE V-A mode is that the
unit will change setpoint according to the external signal. The floating setpoint parameters and
functions can be set in the user/floating setpoint menu.
2
Functional
Description
A: Active setpoint
3
B: Setpoint
4
5
V-A
50
Explanation
012,0°C
When the external signal is 50% of the maximum signal value (reference), then the original setpoint
will be used. When the external signal value rises, the active setpoint will change downwards. When
the external signal value drops, the active setpoint will change upwards.
With the MAXPOS and NEG values the maximum and minimum limit of the active setpoint is specified.
Remark : When you use the floating setpoint, the value of the setpoint on the readout and setpoint
menu can be different. The readout screen will show the calculated value and the setpoint screen set
value.
Part 2 – Functional Description
2–131
Functional Control for a Standalone Unit
1
3.9.4
Floating setpoint - CH AI MAX VALUE
Introduction
2
ESIE06-05
The CH AI MAX VALUE mode can be used to modify the setpoint in function of an external signal. The
user is able to choose to use the floating setpoint or not. The result of using the CH AI MAX VALUE
mode is that the unit will change setpoint according to the external signal. The floating setpoint
parameter and functions can be set in the user/floating setpoint menu.
Functional
description
3
4
A: Active setpoint
B: Setpoint
5
Explanation
When the external signal is at maximum value, the actual setpoint will be the setpoint plus the
maximum value. When the external signal is at minimum value, the actual setpoint will be equal to the
setpoint. Between the minimum and maximum external signal, the actual setpoint will change
according to the signal.
Remark : when you use the floating setpoint, the value of the setpoint on the readout and setpoint
menu can be different. The readout screen will show the calculated value and the setpoint screen the
set value.
2–132
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
3.10
Functional Control for a Standalone Unit
Free Cooling
Introduction
1
When ambient temperature is low, cool water can be made easily by direct heat exchange with
ambient air. Free cooling can work on ambient or difference between inlet water temperature and
ambient temperature.
When free cooling is activated a 3 way valve will be closed.
Free cooling can only be used if the changeable digital output "free cooling" is selected in the service
Input/Output menu.
Free cooling function is only active if unit is on.
It is possible to work with indirect or direct free cooling on ambient temperature.
With indirect free cooling the water of the load circulates through a separate heat exchanger instead
of through the chiller. A second water circuit circulates through the other side of that heat exchanger.
In direct free cooling it is the water from the load that is directly cooled by the ambient air.
2
3
4
5
Part 2 – Functional Description
2–133
Functional Control for a Standalone Unit
1
3.10.1
ESIE06-05
Free cooling on Ambient Temperature
Indirect and direct
free cooling
CASE 1
CASE 2
2
Chiller
Dry Cooler
Chiller
Dry Cooler
3
Free cooling on ambient :
4
5
Functional
description
■
When free cooling becomes active, turn off compressors and close DI to e.g. energize 3 way valve
(case 1) or pump (case 2) to dry cooler.
■
When deactivation of free cooling, there is a lead timer to startup the compressors (as to give 3
way valve time to de-energize and go to chiller).
■
When Free cooling is active, it is possible to select if the pump contact must be closed or open
(case 1 : closed / case 2 : open).
Depending on the settings and according to the function below free cooling is requested or not.
Free cooling on ambient:
2–134
■
When free cooling is active, turn off compressors.
■
When deactivation of free cooling, there is a lead timer to startup the compressors.
■
When free cooling is active, it is possible to select if the pump contact must be closed or open.
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
3.10.2
Functional Control for a Standalone Unit
Free cooling on inlet evaporator - ambient
1
Functional
description
2
inlet water evaporator temperature ambient temperature
3
4
Free cooling on difference between inlet and ambient temperature
■
Compressors are not turned off (also no lead timer).
■
Pump contact always on.
5
Part 2 – Functional Description
2–135
Functional Control for a Standalone Unit
1
3.10.3
ESIE06-05
Free cooling on changeable digital input
Free cooling on
CHANG. DIG.INP
■
When free cooling is active, turn off compressors
■
When deactivation of free cooling, there is a lead timer to startup the compressors.
■
When free cooling is active, it is possible to select if the pump contact must be closed or open.
2
3
4
5
2–136
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
3.11
Functional Control for a Standalone Unit
Superheat control
Introduction
1
Electronic expansion values are used to control the superheat. Depending from the unit and model 1
or 3 expansion values are used per circuit.
■
EWAQ BO-150 DAYN(N-P-B): one condenser coil per circuit and one electronic expansion value
per circuit
EWYQ 130-150 DAYN(N-P-B): one condenser coil per circuit and two electronic expansion valve
per circuit.
One for cooling and one for heating mode.
■
EWAQ080-100-180-210-240-260 DAYN(N-P-B):
two condenser coils per circuit and one electronic expansion valve per circuit.
■
EWYQ080-100-180-210-240-250DAYN(N-P-B):
two condenser coils per circuit and three electronic expansion valves per circuit. One in cooling
mode and two in heating mode.
2
3
Example: piping principal for EWY080-100-180-210-240-250 DAYN(N-P-B) in cooling mode.
Suction temperature sensor
for Super heat Control is R14T
Suction temperature sensor
for Super heat Control is R34T
4
condenser
1-1
condenser
condenser
2-1
1-2
condenser
2-2
Evaporator side
Y11E
EWYQ 080-100-180-210-240-250DAYN(N-P-B)
Part 2 – Functional Description
Y12E
5
Only EWYQ 180-210-240-250DAYN(N-P-B)
2–137
Functional Control for a Standalone Unit
ESIE06-05
Example : piping principle for EWYQ080-100-180-210-240-250 DAYN(N-P-B) in heating mode.
1
(WYQ080-100-180-210-240-250 DAYN(N-P-B); only EWYQ180-210-240-250 DAYN(N-P-B).
EWYQ 080-100-180-210-240-250 DAYN(N-P-B)
Evaporator
1-1
Only EWYQ 180-210-240-250 DAYN(N-P-B)
Evaporator
Evaporator
1-2
Evaporator
2-1
2
2-2
condenser side
3
Y13E
Y22E
Y12E
Y23E
Suction temperature
Suction temperature
sensor for Super heat
sensor for Super heat
Control is R38T
Control is R18T
Suction temperature
Suction temperature
sensor for Super heat
sensor for Super heat
Control is R48T
Control is R28T
4
Remark: only during heating mode, two expansive valves are used per circuit. For the prevention of
air heat exchanger drift during heating mode, each air heat exchanger does individual suction SH
control.
5
Variable control
condition
2–138
The electronic expansion valve control is done by a variable control. The suction superheat value will
be changed according to the discharge superheat. This between the upper and lower limit specified in
the controller. Same superheat control in cooling and heating mode, however other limit values are
used.
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
Functional Control for a Standalone Unit
1
Variable control condition
a
If Discharge SH < 20°C, continuous for
3 minutes. Raise the target suction SH
with 0.5°
Judge when 1 compressor is satisfied
(Reset the timer then).
b
If discharge SH > C, continuous for 3
minutes. Drop the target suction SH
with 0.5°
Judge when 1 compressor is satisfied
(Reset the timer then).
2
If a and b conditions are both satisfied at the same time give priority to control a
(Discharge SH = Discharge thermistor
temperature - Saturated gas
temperature for high pressure)
Additional EVV
Functions
■
3
Adjust cool/heat function
After initializing process, if compressor starts up in cooling or heating mode, it goes to the specified
output (service/EEV menu) for electronic expansion value. After reaching the ADJUST
COOL/ADJUST HEAT EV Opening, it will go to normal superheat control.
Low ambient
condition function
■
Low ambient condition.
After initializing process, if the compressor starts up in heating mode and the ambient temperature is
below the COOL or HEAT AMB. CONST setpoint, it goes to the specified output for the electronic
expansion valve. After reaching above ADJUST COOL/HEAT EV opening, it will go to normal
superheat control.
FF control on comp.
capacity
Feed forward control for compressor loading/unloading. If the compressor load goes up or down, the
controller will change (open/close) the electronic expansion valve opening. Different values are used
in cooling or heating mode.
FF control or
ambient
Feed forward control on low ambient.
If the compressor load goes up or down AND the ambient temperature is below the COOL/HEAT AMB.
CONST setpoint, the controller will change the EEV opening.
Fan down/up
control
When the fan stage changes:
■
drastic change of high pressure will happen
■
drastic shortage/Excess of capacity for expansion valve occurs.
Therefore, an adjustment of the electric expansion valve opening will be done.
Low pressure
control
4
EVV low pressure control: when the LP drops below the setpoint, additional pulses will be given to the
electronic expansion valve to prevent that the circuit trips on LP safety.
Part 2 – Functional Description
2–139
5
Functional Control for a Standalone Unit
1
2
3.12
ESIE06-05
Changeable digital inputs
Introduction
4 changeable digital inputs are available and can be assigned to 12 different functions in the service
menu.
Functions overview
Possible settings for changeable digital inputs.
3
4
■
When NONE is selected
-No function is allocated to this changeable input.
■
When STATUS is selected:
- In the I/O menu the status of Changeable input (connected switch) can be displayed
(open/closed).
■
When DUAL SETPOINT is selected:
- A digital input (voltage free contact) can be used to switch between 2 specified setpoints.
- Open contact --> Setpoint 1.
■
When REMOTE ON/OFF is selected:
- A digital input (voltage free contact) can be used to switch the unit ON and OFF.
- Closed contact --> chiller ON.
- Remote ON/OFF has priority on “unit ON/OFF password” (no password needed when Remote
on/off is selected)
■
When FAN FORCED ON is selected :
- A digital input (voltage free contact) van be used to switch on the fans of the unit (by use of
changeable input).
■
When CAP. LIMIT 25% / 50% / 75 % / SET is selected :
- A digital input (voltage free contact) can be used to limit the maximum capacity of the unit.
5
2–140
30-40 HP
50-100 HP
Remarks
Lim 25
-
25%
1 comp is running
Lim 50
50%
50%
2 comps running
Lim 75
-
75%
3 comps running
Lim SET
User can select number of compressors running
■
In case Limit Set mode is selected, each compressor must be defined (C11/C12/C21/C22).
- OFF: These compressors will always be switched off
- ON : These compressors will still be used by the thermostat according to the required load.
■
When LOW NOISE is selected : (only if OPIF is installed)
- A digital input (voltage free contact) can be used to switch on the Low noise mode.
■
When FREE COOLING REQ is selected:
- A digital input (voltage free contact) can be used to switch on the Free cooling mode.
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
3.13
Functional Control for a Standalone Unit
Changeable digital outputs
1
Introduction
6 changeable digital outputs are available and can be assigned to 20 different functions in the service
menu.
Function overview
Possible settings for changeable digital outputs
2
■
When NONE (OPEN) is selected.
-The digital output will open.
■
When Close is selected:
- The digital output will close.
■
When 2ND PUMP is selected:
- The digital output will indicate (close) the status of the second pump.
■
When 100% capacity is selected:
- The digital output will indicate (close) when the unit is working at 100 percent capacity.
■
When FULL CAPACITY is selected:
- The digital output will indicate (close) when the unit is working at maximum capacity, example
reached 100% capacity or reached maximum capacity because of safety limitation.
■
When FREE COOLING is selected:
- The digital output will close when the free cooling mode is active.
■
When GENERAL OPERATION is selected:
-The digital output will indicate (close) when the unit is active.
■
When SAFETY+W(NO) is selected
-The digital output will indicate (close) when a safety or warning is active. (Normal open contact)
■
When SAFETY+W(NC) is selected:
-The digital output will indicate (close) when a safety or warning is active. (normal closed contact)
■
When SAFETY (NO) is selected:
- The digital output will indicate (close) when a safety is active (normal open contact).
■
When SAFETY (NC) is selected:
-The digital output will indicate (close) when a safety is active (normal closed contact).
■
When C1 or C2 SAFETY is selected:
-The digital output will indicate (close) when a safety is active for the specified circuit.
■
When WARNING is selected:
-The digital output will indicate (close) when a warning is active.
■
When C1 or C2 OPERATION is selected:
- The digital output will indicate (close) when the specified circuit is active.
■
When COOLING or HEATING or DEFROST is selected:
- The digital output will indicate (close) when the unit is in Cooling/Heating or Defrost.
■
When 0% CAPACITY is selected:
-The digital output will indicate (close) when the unit capacity is 0%
Part 2 – Functional Description
3
4
2–141
5
Functional Control for a Standalone Unit
1
2
3.14
ESIE06-05
Changeable analogue inputs
Introduction
Four changeable analogue inputs are available and can be assigned to four different functions in the
service menu.
Function overview
Possible settings for changeable analogue inputs.
3
■
None
-No status function is allocated to this analogue input.
■
Status
-Displays the analogue input value in the I/O menu.
■
Floating Setpoints
-Select the signal type used for the floating setpoint function.
■
Temperature
- An additional temperature sensor can be connected to the controller and will be displayed in the
I/O menu (only NTC type can be selected).
Possible analogue input types:
4
5
■
0-20 mA
■
4-20 mA
■
0-1V
■
0-5V
■
0-10V
■
NTC Type1
■
NTC Type2
■
NTC Type3
■
NTC Type4
The analogue input can also be programmed as a digital input.
Possible settings analogue inputs:
2–142
■
Digital inputs
- DI STATUS
- DI REM COOL/HEAT
- DI CAP.LIM 25%/50%/75%
- DI CAP LIM SET
- DI FREE COOLING
When a DI signal is selected the AI type will automatically go to DIGITAL INP. Type.
■
Remark : The digital input will close when an 5Vdc signal is given to the controller.
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
3.15
Functional Control for a Standalone Unit
Changeable analogue outputs
Introduction
One analogue output is available and can be assigned to the unit capacity output function.
Function overview
Possible settings analogue outputs:
1
2
■
None
- No function is allocated to this analogue input
■
Unit capacity
- Displays the analogue output value in the I/O menu, and give the selected signal on the AO.
Possible analogue output types.
■
0-20mA
■
4-20mA
■
0-1V
■
0-5V
■
0-10V
3
4
5
Part 2 – Functional Description
2–143
Functional Control for a Standalone Unit
1
3.16
ESIE06-05
DICN Basic Setup (=master/slave system)
A site with units installed in a DICN configuration will operate as one big chiller with different water
circuits installed in parallel. We can virtually speak about a DICN unit instead of a site with different
chillers.
The DICN-unit can only be controlled via inlet water. DICN can only be used if option kit EKACPG
(addresscord) is installed.
2
Up wiring
Connection and setup of a DICN system (option kit EKACPG)
For a system with chillers in a DICN configuration, the chillers have to be connected as shown in the
figure below.
3
4
Make the F1/F2 connection for DIII communication using a
0.75~1.25 mm2 2-wire cable (maximum of 1000 m from start to end).
5
For units in a DICN configuration, be sure to provide every chiller with its own flow switch, and be sure
to interlock with the pump that is serving the chiller.
Addresses in DICN
Setup
2–144
The addresses of the unit (pcb, EEV driver, controller) don’t change when the units are used as
standalone or in a DICN system.
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
Functional Control for a Standalone Unit
DICN (network): Overview
Introduction
1
DICN = Daikin Integrated Chiller Network
Also referred to as master-slave system.
Remark: In a DICN system (Master-Slave), all the PCASO-controllers must have the same software,
bios, and boot version!
Function
description
To activate the DICN function MS Option must be set to "Yes" in the Service/DICN menu. In the user
settings menu of the master it must also be specified how many slave units are connected.
When activated, this function will transfer all parameters to the different units through F1/F2
communication line.
In DICN setup (when MS option is yes): the different units can be put in "normal" or "standby" mode
or in disconnected ON / OFF mode. When the mode is disconnected the unit selected will operates
as standalone units.
2
3
Remark: If the master is down (= no power) then a network safety is activated and all units will work
as standalone (no parameters are transferred), and they will work with their own setting in
the controller.
Overview of
possibilities
4
Basic principles:
■
Maximum four units can be combined in on DICN system.
■
Possible to combine all EWAQ-DAYN in one DICN.
■
Possible to combine all EWYQ-DAYN in one DICN.
5
Important:
DICN thermostat
function in cooling
■
It is not possible to combine Pco or Pco² and PCASO controllers in one DICN system.
■
When the user enters the service menu, the DIII communication stops.
■
When the user leaves the service menu, the DIII communication restarts.
■
It takes 10 minutes before DIII communication is fully re-established.
If communication fails after 10 minutes, the network safety error message “OU4:PCB COMM.
PROBLEM” appears.
The illustration below shows the thermostat inlet control in cooling mode for a DICN network.
Part 2 – Functional Description
2–145
Functional Control for a Standalone Unit
1
ESIE06-05
Each 180sec (loaduptimer) 4 comp.
(15sec between
compressor request
Each 180sec (loaduptimer) 3 comp.
(15sec between
2
Each 180sec (loaduptimer) 2 comp.
(15sec between
Each 180sec (loaduptimer) 1 comp.
inlet water temperature evaporator (°C)
= Setpoint
3
DICN: ONLY INLET CONTROL !!!!!!!!!!!
4
5
Default and limit
values
2–146
■
Loadup request of 1 compressor: request to add one additional compressor.
■
Loadup request of 2 compressors: request to add 2 additional compressors (with interval of 15
seconds in between).
■
The maximum number of compressors that can possibly be added in 1 request is limited to the total
number of units that are present in the DICN setup.
■
Example: A DICN Setup with two units meats load up requests of maximum two compressors at a
time.
Inlet control
Default value
Lower limit
Upper limit
Step difference -a
(K)
4.0(*)
----
----
Step difference -b
(K)
3.6(*)
----
----
Step difference -c
(K)
0.4(*)
----
----
Loadup timer
(sec)
180
15
300
Loaddown timer
(sec)
180
15
300
Setpoint cooling
(°C)
12.0
7.0
23.0
Setpoint heating
(°C)
40.0
20.0
45.0
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
Functional Control for a Standalone Unit
Practical example:
1
2
3
= Setpoint
Condition
Result
If evaporator inlet temperature (Master)
--> active inlet setpoint +A
Loadup request A1
Loadup is executed and loadup timer is
put on maximum.
If evaporator inlet temperature (Master)
--> active inlet setpoint + A +B +C
Loadup request A2
Loadup nr1 is executed and loadup
timer is put on maximum.
Loadup nr2 is executed and loadup
timer - 15 sec.
If evaporator inlet temperature (Master)
--> active inlet setpoint + A + 2x(B+C)
Loadup request A3
Loadup nr1 is executed and
loadup&loaddown timer is put on maximum.
Loadup nr2 is executed at loadup timer
- 15 sec
Loadup nr3 is executed at loadup timer
- 30 sec
DICN Thermostat
function in heating
The illustration below shows the thermostat inlet control in heating mode for a DICN network.
Part 2 – Functional Description
2–147
4
5
Functional Control for a Standalone Unit
ESIE06-05
1
2
3
Inlet water temperature
condenser (°C)
= Setpoint
A1 ~A4 Load up request of 1~ 4 compressors
4
B no action
C1~C4 load down request of 1~ 4 compressors.
D Inlet setpoint.
5
Remark: The EWYQ080DAYN* has a modified control in heating mode when the ambient temperature
is < 5 °C.
■
Settings on the
controller
If the ambient temperature < 5 °C and the master makes a request to load up a EWYQ080 or
EWYQ100 unit, then the 2 compressors of this unit will start up (30 sec between the startup of the
first compressor and the second compressor).
DICN settings for the PCASO controller
Remark: The remote start/stop, is the same as with individual units. In case of DICN, the remote
start/stop to be used, is the one from then master unit. In case of a disconnect unit, you must use the
remote start-stop of this unit.
STEP 1 : Go to the Service menu, submenu communication.
2–148
Unit 1
Master
Unit 2
Slave 1
Unit 3
Slave 2
Unit 4
Slave 3
DIII:
YES
YES
YES
YES
ADDR:
1-00
1-01
1-02
1-03
POWER:
Y
N
N
N
1
Enable the DIII communication on each chiller
2
Specify a different address for each chiller
3
Enable the power parameter on one chiller in the DICN network (Master).
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
Functional Control for a Standalone Unit
STEP 2 : Go to the service menu, submenu DICN.
Unit 1
Master
(*)
Unit 2
Slave 1
Unit 3
Slave 2
1
Unit 4
Slave 3
MS OPTION:
Y
Y
Y
Y
UNIT:
MASTER
SLAVE
SLAVE
SLAVE
NR OF SLAVES:
3
-
-
-
2
(*) The master unit must be set as last in row, otherwise set to N and back to Y.
1
Enable Master-Slave option on each chiller.
2
Specify the unit as master or slave.
3
Specify the number of slaves (only on master unit).
3
STEP 3: Go to the Service menu, submenu DICN
Specify address of slave 1/2/3, same address as programmed in step 1.
Unit 1
Master
Unit 2
Slave 1
Unit 3
Slave 2
Unit 4
Slave 3
ADD SL1:
1-01
-
-
-
ADD SL2:
1-02
-
-
-
ADD SL3:
1-03
-
-
-
4
5
STEP 4: Go to the service menu, submenu DICN
Unit 1
Master
Unit 2
Slave 1
Unit 3
Slave 2
Unit 4
Slave 3
0-2
0-2
0-2
0-2
1.5˚C
1.5˚C
1.5˚C
1.5˚C
N
N
N
N
PRIORITY
STEPLENGTH
STANDBYIF MAX CAP
STEP 5: Go to the user menu, submenu DICN
1
Specify the unit priority - stepL priority.
2
Specify the steplength parameter used in the steplength priority function.
3
Specify if unit has to start or stay in standby when normal units in DICN system run at 100% and
the setpoint is not reached yet.
Remark: Unity priority - stepL Priority
■
The first digit of the Master Slave Priority refers to the Unit priority. With this digit you can give each
unit a certain start up priority.
■
The second digit refers to the Step Length priority. This setting reacts only on load up steps and
avoids that one of the DICN units goes into freeze-up alarm because the common leaving water is
still to high.
Part 2 – Functional Description
2–149
Functional Control for a Standalone Unit
ESIE06-05
Explanation of Unit priority - stepL Priority Settings
1
There is a possibility to put a priority parameter in the service menu. This parameter is standard set
on 2 and can be changed from 0 till 4. The setting reacts only on load up steps and avoid that one of
the DICN unit goes into freeze-up alarm.
Load up priority result:
2
If an unit has an LWE < MOW + Stepl priority*steplength,
than it has a lower priority than the rest.
EXAMPLE: LWE setpoint = 6°C
C11:ON C12:ON C11:ON C12:OFF C11:OFF C12:OFF
C21:ON C22:ON C21:ON C22:OFF C21:OFF C22:OFF
3
Unit 1
LWT 1:
Unit 2
10°C
Common Leaving Water CLWT 9°C
4
Unit 3
C11:OFF C12:OFF
C21:OFF C22:OFF
Unit 4
15°C
15°C
EWT 15°C (Entering Water temp)
Without Priority Parameter
compressor
capacity (%)
T°
15°C
0%°
5
25%°
EWT
CLWT
50%°
LWT2
75%°
4°C
LWT1
100%°
LWT1 = leaving water temperature unit 1.
LWT2 = leaving water temperature unit 2.
CLWT = common leaving water temperature DICN system.
EWT = Entering water temperature.
2–150
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
Functional Control for a Standalone Unit
With priority parameter
T°
Step
15°C
0%°
EWT
1
2
25%°
CLWT
LWT2
50%°
LWT1
3
75%°
4°C
100%°
4
If unit 1 gets priority 3 then we get : If LWE < 4+(3*1.5)
If LWE < 8.5 then this unit gets a lower priority than the other units.
For units with more than 2 circuits, the individual lead/lag setting of a unit to determine the priority of
the circuits - remain valid. Every unit should be configured as either a “NORMAL”, “STANDBY” or
“DISCONNECT” unit. This setting will be mentioned on the display of each chiller.
Description of the different operation modes and settings.
MODE: NORMAL
The network controls the unit. Loading and unloading is decided by the central control of the network.
Putting this unit ON or OFF will also put all other units ON or OFF, unless their status is
"DISCONNECT ON/OFF".
Changing CONTROL SETTINGS or THERMOSTAT SETTINGS on this unit, will apply to all other
units. MANUAL CONTROL on such a unit is not possible.
MODE: STANDBY
The unit is considered as a "NORMAL" unit and its function is then also similar to a unit defined as
"NORMAL", but this unit however, will only come into operation if:
■
another unit is in alarm (unit safety or circuit safety)
■
another unit is in "DISCONNECT ON/OFF" mode
■
the setpoint is not reached when all other units have been running on 100% capacity. This
condition can be disabled in the service/DICN menu, standby if MAXCAP.
If more than one unit is defined as STANDBY, only 1 of the units will be really standby. The number of
running hours will decide the unit that is really standby.
Also, more than 1 unit (up to 4) can be defined as a ''STANDBY'' unit. In that case, only the unit which
is most near to its target running hours will be considered as a ''STANDBY'' unit. This means, if a
customer wants to have 1 particular unit always to be in ''off'' mode (except for alarm or capacity
shortage of the other chillers), then he only has to define this 1 unit as ''STANDBY''.
But if a customer wants to have more than 1, or even all chillers to be a standby unit alternately (each
on its turn), then more than 1 or all chillers should be defined as ''STANDBY''.
Part 2 – Functional Description
2–151
5
Functional Control for a Standalone Unit
ESIE06-05
MODE: DISCONNECT
1
DISCONNECT: Units which are defined as ''DISCONNECTED'', can be put ''ON/OFF'' or set to
MANUAL MODE independent from the other units. This can be very useful e.g. in case of servicing.
When changing to ''NORMAL'' or ''STANDBY'', the unit becomes part of the system again.
OFFSET
2
The OFFSET time defines the target difference in running hours between one unit and another unit
with OFFSET:0000 h. This value is important for maintenance purposes. The difference in setting
among different units should be high enough as to avoid servicing of the units all at the same time. The
lower and upper limits are 0 and 9000 hours respectively. The default value is 0 hours.
For units with 2 circuits, the individual lead/lag setting is valid as to determine the priority of the circuits.
3
E.g. if following setting is made:
4
Then unit 3 and 4 will be operated most. They will get priority in operation as to reach 2000 running
hours more than unit 1. Unit 1 will be the unit with the lowest running hours.
Unit 1 = 0 h
Unit 2 = 1000 h
Unit 3 = 2000 h
Unit 4 = 2000 h
PUMP ON IF
Set if the pump must operate as long as the chiller is ON (UNIT ON), or during compressor on condition
only (COMPR ON).
5
■
When UNIT ON is selected, the voltage free contact S9L will remain closed as long as the chiller
is ON.
The pump of individual unit will run if unit is on.
■
When COMPR ON is selected, the voltage free contact S9L will remain closed as long as the
compressor is ON.
Remark: If no pumpcontact is closed (ex all pump on if “COMPR ON” & no request to loadup) then turn
on the pumpcontact of the unit with highest priority. (This is needed because the temperature sensor
must be able to measure the correct water temperature).
2–152
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
3.17
Functional Control for a Standalone Unit
BMS Function
Introduction
1
BMS stands for Building Management Systems. These systems were developed for centralized
overview and control of technical installation for complete sites.
The Daikin BMS option makes it possible to connect the Daikin chillers to a larger control system. The
necessary tools for this communication are the Gateway and the address card.
In this chapter we will give a short overview of the possibilities and settings for the BMS function. For
more detailed information we refer to the service manual “BMS option for Daikin” air cooled chillers
with scroll compressor.
BMS integration
with MODBUS
protocol (kit
EKACPG per
chiller)
Modbus protocol.
2
3
Functions:
Monitor and Control:
Setup:
On-Off
Thermostat (setpoints, mode)
4
Capacity limit
Low noise
…
Monitor:
RS485
Error (active/not active, code, type)
Unitcapacity
5
Compressor, fan status
RS485
All inputs/outputs (incl all sensors)
…
RS485
Full list of variables that can be read and/or
written: see operation manual of adress
card or BMS Service Manual ESIE 07-09.
Maximum 32 chillers
DIP-switch S3A on adress card
on OFF except for last unit in line
Part 2 – Functional Description
mainPCB
circuit 1
mainPCB
circuit 2
2–153
Functional Control for a Standalone Unit
1
BMS integration
with BACnet/IP
protocol
ESIE06-05
BACnet/IP Protocol
Option 1: via RS485-port on address cards EKACPG
and kit EKBNPG.
Chiller 1
2
A11P
A21P
Chiller 2
A11P
RS485
A21P
A11P
A21P
RS485
Address card EKACPG
3
Chiller 3
RS485
Chiller 4
A11P
A21P
RS485
Kit EKBNPG
Modbus <-> BACnet
gateway
Like in previous example, we connect address-cards of different
chillers via RS485.
Monitor and control : On-Off, Thermostat (setpoints, mode)
Monitor: Error (active, code, type), inlet/outlet temp,
unitcapacity, compressor status, fan status
BACnet BMS
Full list of variables that can be read and/or written : see operation
manual of address card or BMS Service Manual ESIE 07-09
4
Maximum 8 chillers
BMS integration
with LON protocol
LON protocol
5
Option 1: via RS485-port on address cards EKACPG
and kit EKLONPG.
Chiller 1
A11P
A21P
RS485
Chiller 2
A11P
A21P
Chiller 3
A11P
RS485
A21P
RS485
A11P
RS485
Kit EKLONPG
We connect address-cards of different chillers via RS485.
Modbus <-> LON
gateway
Monitor and control : On-Off, Thermostat (setpoints, mode)
Monitor: Error (active, code, type), inlet/outlet temp,
unitcapacity
LON BMS
Full list of variables that can be read and/or written : see operation
manual of address card or BMS Service Manual ESIE 07-09
Maximum 16 chillers
2–154
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
Functional Control for a Standalone Unit
Example of BMS Modbus Setup
1
STEP 1 : Up-Wiring
2
3
STEP 2 : DIP switch settings (S3A)
4
The cable terminal (resistor) is integrated
on the address card and is
enabled by means of a DIP switch (S3A).
5
In this example, the last in line DIP switch
on the address cards of chiller units 1 and 2
has to be set to OFF.
Because chiller unit 3 is the last unit in line,
the last in line DIP switch on the address
card must be set to ON.
Part 2 – Functional Description
2–155
Functional Control for a Standalone Unit
ESIE06-05
STEP 3: Go to the Service menu, Submenu comminication (Communication fourth screen).
1
2
3
1
Specify the address of the chiller in the BMS system.
2
Specify the communication speed, baudrate.
3
Specify the parity and stop bit for the communication.
Go to the Service menu, submenu.
4
STEP 4: Communication (sixth screen)
5
1
2–156
Enable or disable if BMS control is allowed or not (possible to read or to read and write).
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
3.18
Functional Control for a Standalone Unit
Freeze-up Control
Introduction
1
Freeze-up control is used to protect the evaporator against accidentally freezing.
Three protections are present :
1
Anti-freeze function on water temperature (thermistor).
- Anti-freeze prevention.
- Anti-freeze protection.
2
Anti-freeze function by pump control OR heater tape.
3
Anti-freeze function by refrigerant gas temp (function only in cooling mode).
2
3
4
5
Part 2 – Functional Description
2–157
Functional Control for a Standalone Unit
1
3.18.1
Anti-Freeze function or inlet/outlet water temperature
Freeze-up
prevention
2
3
4
5
ESIE06-05
Freeze-up
protection for
software version
2.1
Freeze-up prevention will request a load-down when the temperature of the evaporator outlet water
gets below the freeze-up disable setpoint +0.5 °C. If 1 compressor is reduced immediately, reset the
load up/down timers (and start recounting). After reducing 1 compressor in operation, when the
temperature is still in this area, reduce 1 more compressor after 15 seconds. Repeat this until only 1
compressor remains in operation. If only 1 compressor remains on, do not execute this procedure.
Characteristics
Freeze-up prevention
Control device
Sensor
Diagram name
R3T, R4T
Activation
When 2 or more compressors are in operation
AND
If leaving water temperature < FREEZE UP DIS +
0.5 °C.
Result
Load down compressor every 15 seconds until 1
compressor is in operation.
Reset
Result
If leaving water temperature > RESET value
Normal mode.
When the evaporator outlet water temperature sinks below Freeze-up disable setpoint freeze-up
protection is activated and the unit is shut down. When the temperature rises above the reset setpoint,
protection is reset and the unit will work in its initial mode after compressor timers. The compressor
will go back to the necessary capacity step, depending on the load-up possible status.
Characteristics
Freeze-up prevention
Control device
Sensor
Diagram name
R3T, R4T
Activation
Result
Leaving water temperature < FREEZE UP DIS
Reset
Reset when leaving water temperature rises
above MOW setpoint.
Unit disabled
Important : No alarm is displayed after freeze-up protection. Unit will restart after the REF GRD
EXTEND timer (12 min).
2–158
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
Functional Control for a Standalone Unit
Functional
description
1
Outlet temp
RESET
setpoint
2
FREEZE UP
DIS setpoint
+0.5°C
Freeze-up prevention
area (loaddown)
FREEZE UP
DIS setpoint
3
Freeze-up
safety-disabling
(shutdown)
Time
Freeze-up
protection for
software version
2.2 or higher
■
Loadup not possible area : if outlet water is lower then MOW then loadup is not possible.
■
Freeze-up prevention area : if outlet water temperature is lower then freeze up DIS + 0.5°C then
unload 1 compressor, as long as the outlet water temp is too low and until 1 compressor is in
operation.
■
Freeze-u safety disabling area: unit will shutdown.
When the evaporator outlet water temperature sinks below freeze-up disable setpoint, protection is
activated and the unit is shut down. When the temperature rises above the reset setpoint the freeze-up
protection is reset and the unit will work in its initial mode after compressor timers. The compressor
will go back to the necessary capacity step, depending on the load-up possible status. A maximum
number of freeze-up protections per 30 min can be set in the service/safety menu. When the unit
exceeds this number in less than 30 minutes, an alarm will be activated.
Characteristics
Freeze-up prevention
Control device
Sensor
Diagram name
R3T, R4T
Activation
Leaving water temperature < FREEZE UP DIS
Result
Unit disabled, after
Reset
Reset when leaving water temperature rises
above MOW setpoint.
Remark:
■
A selection of the freeze-up safety can be made in the :
- FREEZE UP OW: DISABLE, freeze-up function as described in software version 2.1.
- FREEZE UP OW: DIS & SAF, freeze up function as described above.
■
When Freeze-up safety is active, the controller will display “O4A: Freeze UP” alarm.
Part 2 – Functional Description
2–159
4
5
Functional Control for a Standalone Unit
1
Functional
description
ESIE06-05
Outlet temp
RESET
setpoint
2
FREEZE UP
DIS setpoint
+0.5°C
3
FREEZE UP
DIS setpoint
Freeze-up prevention
area (loaddown)
Freeze-up
safety-disabling
(shutdown)
Time
4
■
Loadup not possible area : if outlet water is lower then MOW then loadup is not possible.
■
Freeze-up prevention area : if outlet water temperature is lower then FREEZE UP
■
DIS + 0.5°C then unload 1 compressor, as long as the outlet water temp is too low and until 1
compressor is in operation.
■
Freeze-u safety disabling area: unit will shutdown.
5
2–160
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
3.18.2
Functional Control for a Standalone Unit
Anti-freeze function by pump control OR heater tape
Anti-freeze by
pump operation
1
Only when no heater tape is present (OP10 not installed).
Activation :
- If water temperature of inlet/outlet is < PUMP ON SETP. °C
AND
-pump is off
2
Action:
Turn on pump.
3
Reset :
Reset function if water temperature gets > reset setpoint.
Anti-freeze by
heater tape
Only when heater tape is present (OP10 installed).
Ambient <
< MOW
MOW -1.5°C
-1.5 °C
Ambient
And
EvapPump=Off
And EvapPump=Off
And 22nd
EvapPump=Off
nd EvapPump=Off
And
4
Ambient
Ambient=>
=>MOW
MOW
Or
EvapPump=On
Or EvapPump=On
Or
Or2nd
2nd EvapPump=On
EvapPump=On
Heatertape
ON
5
OFF
Activation:
- If ambient temperature is < MOW -1.5 °C.
- AND evaporator pump is OFF
- AND 2nd evaporator pump is OFF
Action:
Turn on evaporator heater tape
Reset:
-If ambient temperature is > MOW.
-OR evaporator pump is ON.
-OR 2nd evaporator pump is ON.
Part 2 – Functional Description
2–161
Functional Control for a Standalone Unit
1
3.18.3
ESIE06-05
Anti-freeze function by refrigerant gas temperature
Function only in
cooling
Activation :
If refrigerant gas temperature is < REFR TEMP SET continuously for 10 seconds.
Action:
2
■
Switch off/on the unit (first time in 30 min --> no alarm).
■
If above condition is satisfied twice in 30 minutes --> switch off unit on alarm.
Reset:
Reset possible if refrigerant temperature rises above -2.5 °C.
3
This control will be masked during below operation status.
60 sec from first compressor start-up of each circuit.
4
5
2–162
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
3.19
Functional Control for a Standalone Unit
Discharge gas safety
Introduction
1
The discharge gas safety is used to protect the compressor.
Activation
When the discharge gas temperature gets above the “START CONTROL (°C)” till the discharge
temperature drops below STOP CONTROL (°C).
2
Action
Open EV (Electric expansion valve) with CONTROL EEV(PLS) every sampling time 10 sec.
Reset
Reset if discharge gas temperature becomes less than “RESET TO NORMAL” value or discharge gas
super heat becomes 25°C or less, return to the normal EV control.
Remarks : If 2 compressors are operated per circuit, Judge the one with the highest discharge gas
temperature for EV opening, and to return to normal EV control, judge on the one with the lowest gas
temperature.
3
4
5
Part 2 – Functional Description
2–163
Functional Control for a Standalone Unit
1
3.20
ESIE06-05
Password Function
Introduction
A user password can be chosen, in the user password menu, to protect the user settings.
In the user advanced menu it can be chosen whether a password is needed to change the setpoint.
In the service/safety menu you can choose if a password is needed to reset safeties. This password
can be either the user password either the service password.
2
When the user is logged in with a password, this password will be remembered. When the controller
is not touched for a specified time “LOGOUT TIMER” (user advanced menu), the controller will
automatically logout and password is needed again to enter the menu.
The user can find back in the password menu with which password he is logged on and he can also
manually log off.
3
Overview of
possibilities
A user password is used to protect the user parameters. This password can be set in the user
password menu.
A service password is used to protect the service parameters; this password is factory set and cannot
be changed.
4
User password
Service password
1234 (default)
Contact your distributor for this
password (fixed)
Possible to enter with
5
Menu
1.
Setpoint menu (only if Setpoint password is
enabled in the user advanced menu)
Yes
Yes
2.
User settings menu
Yes
Yes
3.
Service menu
No
Yes
4.
User password menu
Yes
Yes
Additionally: depending on the status of the "password needed to reset safety" parameter in the
service menu.
2–164
5.
Possible to reset a safety in safety menu if
user password is required
Yes
Yes
6.
Possible to reset a safety in safety menu if
service password is required
No
Yes
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
3.21
Functional Control for a Standalone Unit
History logging
Introduction
1
Before a safety happened a number of data (Logs default 5) has been recorded (LogTime: default with
10 sec between), this logging data is only available of the last safety that happened and the data will
only be displayed in the history menu, if the History Extra screens =”Y” in the service menu.
This logging data will be continuously stored in the RAM memory, when the safety happens the data
will be copied into the flash memory (Flash memory: This type of memory will keep all data, even when
power is put off).
Functional
description
LogNr
5
4
3
2
Moment when
safety happens
1 0
3
Moment when
safety is detected
by controller
HP
Safety Yes
No
HisDelay
(def 2.0 sec)
LogTime
(def 10 sec)
Logging data indication:
00: History at moment of last error
01 ~05: Logging data from the
moment before error
4
Time
Time between moment
when safety happens and
first log data is not fixed.
This time will be between
LogTime (def 10s) and 0s
5
History number
 00
To consult the log data:
1
Enable history extra screens : Y
2
Enter History menu
3
Go to last error
4
Press Down to consult logging data 1 2 3 4 and 5.
Part 2 – Functional Description
2
2–165
Functional Control for a Standalone Unit
1
3.22
Defrost management
3.22.1
Introduction
ESIE06-05
For dual circuit units, each refrigerant circuit will enter defrost function separately. The defrost cycle
will only occur on the circuit that needs it. The other circuit will continue its normal operation when
required.
2
In heating mode, the defrost will be executed when the following conditions are met:
■
Manual defrost is requested.
■
The temperature sensors reach a certain value.
3
3.22.2
Manual defrost
If below conditions are met during compressor operation in heating mode, a manual defrost can be
selected from the user menu.
4
Only possible if:
1
The user requests a manual defrost via the controller.
2
Tr < 10° C (or when thermistor abnormality : Ta < 7°C)
Remark : in case of coil thermistor error, condition is based on ambient temperature.
5
No defrost forbid timer active when manual defrost is selected.
Unit defrost setting: If manual defrost starting conditions are satisfied for both circuits, 2nd circuit
defrost will only start after defrost finish of 1st circuit. During 1st circuit defrost, defrost finish conditions
for 2nd circuit are not evaluated, so 2nd circuit defrost is guaranteed.
Remark : manual defrost can be requested in the user/defrost menu.
Tr: coil temperature.
Ta: ambient temperature.
2–166
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
3.22.3
Functional Control for a Standalone Unit
Automatic defrost
Defrost forbidden
timer
1
Defrost forbidden timer.
This is the minimum time between 2 defrost cycles in order to keep the heating capacity and to prevent
frequent defrosting.
■
The timer can be
- Normal startvalue (def 30 min, range 20 - 120 min).
- Short start value (default 10 min, range 1 - 20 min).
■
If timer is not on 0, the defrost cycle cannot be started.
■
The timer starts counting from previous defrost finished.
■
In case of a safety stop, the timer starts counting.
■
In case of thermostat-OFF, counter does not reset and keeps on counting.
■
If during countdown of the timer, timer selection is modified from normal to short, and the already
time past is larger than the short timer value ==> timer is put on 0.
Defrost start
conditions
2
4
Defrost forbidden timer T(min) must be zero
AND
OR
Conditions were met at time
of coil sensor failure
1) Ta-Tr> 0.4 x Ta+A
2) Tr < 0°C
3) Ta < 10 °C
5
A = “start const temp”, default 12 °C (can be changed between 5 - 25°C).
Ta = ambient temperature sensor
Tr = coil sensor
(in case of EWYQ230/250 : lowest temperature of 2 coil temperature sensors = Tr)
During compressor operation, above conditions should be met for 5 min before defrost will start. If less
than 5 minutes, re-detect again.
Part 2 – Functional Description
3
2–167
Functional Control for a Standalone Unit
1
2
Defrost start
condition at sensor
failure
When an abnormality occurs concerning the coil sensor, this is defined as Alarm Level. Defrost
conditions will be as stated below.
For 50 ~80 HP
For 30-40-90-100 HP
3
4
Defrost STOP
conditions
5
Defrost stop
condition at sensor
abnormality
For 40 - 80 HP
For 30-90-100 HP
2–168
ESIE06-05
TR1
TR 2
Defrost start conditions
(Coil sensor)
(coil sensor)
Normal operation
Not present
Standard defrost cycle
Abnormality
Not present
Ta < 7°C
Normal operation
Normal operation
Standard defrost cycle
Normal operation
Abnormality
Ta-Tr1 >= 0.4xTa+A and Tr1<0°C
Abnormality
Normal operation
Ta-Tr2 >= 0.4xTa+A and Tr2<0°C
Abnormality
Abnormality
Ta < 7°C
When one of the below conditions is met, recovery of the defrost cycle will occur:
1
Tr > RESET COIL TEMP (default 20° C, range 3 - 20°C)
2
HP < RESET SET PR (default 25 bar, range 21 - 30 bar)
3
Tleavingwater < RESET OUTL TEMP (default 4°C, range 3 - 20 °C)
4
In case the defrosting time exceeds 10 min.
When an abnormality occurs concerning the coil sensor, this is defined as Alarm Level. Defrost
conditions will be as stated below.
TR1
TR 2
Defrost start conditions
(Coil sensor)
(coil sensor)
Normal operation
Not present
Tr >= 20°C
Abnormality
Not present
Timer recovery 10 min.
Normal operation
Abnormality
Tr1>=20°C
Abnormality
Normal operation
Tr2>=20°C
Abnormality
Abnormality
Time recovery 10 min.
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
Actions during
defrost start
Functional Control for a Standalone Unit
1
Actions during start and execution of the defrost cycle.
Defrost starting conditions satisfied
Defrost start
Comp
load 50%
EV
heatingEV
Normal SH
CoolingEV
2
control
Totally open
Completely
Open
B(PLS)
3
Normal SH control
ON
OFF
4way valve
4
ON
OFF
Fan
Asec
5
Bsec
Low pressure mask
Superheat error mask
1
DEFROST CONDITIONS SATISFIED.
2
Only 1 compressor in operation of this circuit during defrost.
3
Open Cooling EV completely.
4
30 seconds (A) normal SH control (heating) before defrost start.
5
DEFROST START.
6
Switch 4way valve and close heating EV totally.
7
Turn OFF fans.
8
Open Cooling EV with “initial pulses” 200pls (B pls) for 5 sec (B sec)
9
Continue normal SH control (cooling)
10 Mask low pressure protection control and superheat error during defrost.
Remark : the EWYQ080DAYN* has a modified control during defrost.
■
If the unit is starting a defrost cycle, then keep the number of running compressors.
- If 1 compressor is running then 1 compressor defrost.
- If 2 compressors are running then 2 compressor defrost.
Part 2 – Functional Description
2–169
Functional Control for a Standalone Unit
1
ESIE06-05
Startup control
after defrost
recovery
Defrost recovery
E
A sec
2
C sec
Compressor
3
30hp
load
40-100hp
load
Stable
Normal thermo control
50%
Normal thermo control
Normal SH control
4
EV
30,40hp heatingEV
90,100hp
B pls fixed
Initial opening angle B pls, normal SH control
50-80hp heatingEV
CoolingEV
5
Completely closed
ON
4 way valve
Fan
ON
C
1
Defrost recovery conditions satisfied.
2
For 40 - 100 Hp units: only 1 compressor in operation of this circuit during defrost recovery.
For 30 Hp units: keep the same number of compressors as used in the defrost function.
3
Energize 4-way valve.
4
Close cooling EV completely.
5
Turn fans ON.
6
For 30, 40, 90, 100 Hp units: EV opening for heating is defined as B(pls) for “C” sec (EEV KEEP
TIME), after this timer change to normal SH control.
For 50, 80 Hp units: EV opening for heating is defined as B(pls) and direct start with normal SH
control (EEV KEEP TIME is defined as 0 sec).
7
For 40 - 100 Hp units: after switching 4-way valve, keep 1 compressor running for “A” sec, after
this timer, change to normal heating mode.
For 30 Hp units: keep the same number of compressors for “A” sec, after this timer, change to
normal heating mode.
Remark :
2–170
■
In case of “A” sec timer < “C” sec timer then FF CONTROL function is invalid and not used when
a compressor is added.
■
In case of “A” sec timer > “C” sec timer then FF CONTROL function is valid and used when a
compressor is added.
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
3.23
Functional Control for a Standalone Unit
Reversing valve
1
This digital output function allows switching a reversing valve.
REMOTE COOL/HEAT:
■
Digital input open = Heating
■
Digital input closed = Cooling
Remark : if remote cooling/heating is chosen by digital input then it is not possible any more to change
by controller or via Supervisor system.
■
Four way valve relay is:
-energized during heating mode
-not energized during cooling mode.
■
When switching cooling <--> heating during operation :
1
Thermostat OFF
2
Restart unit + change status of 4 way valve (by (de) energizing the relay).
2
3
The four way valve status is changed at the same time of compressor start-up.
4
5
Part 2 – Functional Description
2–171
Functional Control for a Standalone Unit
1
3.24
ESIE06-05
Low pressure bypass
To avoid low pressure during startup of the unit or fan shifting (Fan up) the low pressure error is
disabled for a certain time.
The low pressure bypass can be set in the service safety menu.
FAN LP MASK : 30s (default)
Low pressure mask after switching to a higher fanstep.
2
COMPR LP MASK : 30 s (default)
Low pressure mask from first compressor start of a circuit (no masking at second compressor start).
3
4
5
2–172
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
3.25
Functional Control for a Standalone Unit
Simulation
This is an operation mode for the controller in a simulation board because then the actual unit and
components are replaced by electrical and electronic components. These components would not allow
correct operation of the controller if it was in normal mode.
1
This mode can only be used on simulation boards.
2
Possible settings (Service/Advanced menu):
■
■
■
Simulation setting:
Simulation parameter
Application
Simulation = NO
actual unit
Simulation = YES
simulation board is selected
3
AI Setting:
Simulation parameter
Application
AI = 0
actual unit = actual sensors are used on
the analog inputs
AI = 1
simulation board (all analog inputs use
potentiometers = NTC)
4
DIS. EEV Setting:
Simulation parameter
Application
DIS. EEV = 0
actual unit with EEV driver
DIS. EEV = 1
If no EEV driver is connected to the
simulation board this parameter should
be put on 1. This will disable the EEV
control on the controller.
Part 2 – Functional Description
5
2–173
Functional Control for a Standalone Unit
ESIE06-05
1
2
3
4
5
2–174
Part 2 – Functional Description
ESIE06-05
4
Part 3
Troubleshooting
Introduction
When a problem occurs, all possible faults have to be checked. This chapter gives a general idea of
where to look for faults. Furthermore the general procedures for refrigeration circuit repair and for
electrical circuit repair are explained.
Remark
Not all repair procedures are described. Some procedures are considered common practice.
What is in this part?
This part contains the following chapters:
Part 3 – Troubleshooting
33
4
Chapter
See page
1–Overview of Fault Indications and Safeties
3–3
2–Checking the Temperature Sensors
3–25
3–Reset procedure
3–31
4–Procedure for Software Upload
3–33
5–Procedure for main PCB changing
3–43
6–Procedure for extension PCB changing
3–47
7–Procedure for controller changing
3–49
8–Procedure for EEV PCB changing
3–51
9–Procedure for compressor replacement : Suction washer
3–53
10–Procedure for Compressor Oil Fill or Oil Drain
3–55
11–Compressor electrical connections and wiring
3–57
12–Procedure to Clear the Refrigerant Circuit in Case of Frozen Evaporators
3–59
5
3–1
ESIE06-05
1
33
5
3–2
Part 3 – Troubleshooting
ESIE06-05
Overview of Fault Indications and Safeties
Part 3
1
Overview of Fault Indications and Safeties
1.1
What Is in This Chapter?
Introduction
Overview
Part 3 – Troubleshooting
In the first stage of trouble shooting sequence it is important to interpret the fault indication on the
controller display. This will help you to find the cause of the problem.
1
33
This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic
See page
1.2–What happens in the Event of an Alarm?
3–4
1.3–What to do in the Event of an Alarm?
3–5
1.4–Overview of Unit Safeties
3–6
1.5–Overview of Circuit Safeties
3–11
1.6–Overview of Network Safeties
3–19
1.7–Overview of Warnings
3–21
1.8–Overview of Start Problems
3–23
4
5
3–3
Overview of Fault Indications and Safeties
1
1.2
ESIE06-05
What happens in the Event of an Alarm?
The units are equipped with three kinds of safety devices.
Unit alarm
Function
33
Description
■
All compressors
are shut down.
■
The red LED above
the p key lights up
Protects the individual
circuit
■
■
Action to take
4
Protects the unit in
general
Circuit alarm
Display example
The compressors
of the
corresponding
circuit are shut
down.
The red LED above
the p key lights up
Network alarm
Is activated when a
communication problem occurs
■
The units of the
network will
operate as
standalone.
■
The red LED above
the p key lights up
Warnings
Dual pump safety
■
No action is taken,
the units keep
operating.
■
The red LED above
the p key lights up
Press p to acknowledge the alarm
Press p to acknowledge the alarm
Press p to acknowledge the alarm
Press p to acknowledge the warning
OAE:FLOW HAS
STOPPED
OU1:REVERESE
PHASE PR
1CA:OUT E SENSOR
ERR
1EO:GENERAL
SAFETY
1A4:FREEZE -UP
PROT.
0U4:PCB
COMM.PROBLEM
0AE:FLOW HAS
STOPPED
5
3–4
Part 3 – Troubleshooting
ESIE06-05
1.3
Overview of Fault Indications and Safeties
What to do in the Event of an Alarm?
1
In event of an alarm or a warning, the following must be done:
Step
1
Action
Result
Press p to acknowledge the alarm.
■
The p LED lights up
■
A unit, circuit or network, safety is displayed.
2
Find the cause of the alarm and correct it.
The system is repaired.
3
The cause of the alarm was found and corrected.
The p LED starts blinking. Now it is possible to reset.
Press p to reset the alarm.
■
The p LED goes out and the alarm screen is
deactivated.
■
The main menu screen is displayed automatically.
4
Remark: if in the service menu the option "password
needed to reset safeties" is activated, you will be asked
to enter the correct password to reset the safety.
Remark: After resetting the alarm it is possible to consult the safety information by using the history menu.
5
If all circuits were shutdown, switch the unit on by
pressing o.
33
4
The unit starts again.
5
Part 3 – Troubleshooting
3–5
Overview of Fault Indications and Safeties
1
1.4
ESIE06-05
Overview of Unit Safeties
Introduction
This section provides useful information for diagnosing and correcting certain troubles which may
occur in the unit.
Before starting the troubleshooting procedure, carry out a thorough visual inspection of the unit and
look for obvious defects such as loose connections or defective wiring.
When carrying out an inspection on the supply panel or on the switch box of the unit, always
make sure that the circuit breaker of the unit is switched off.
33
Unit safety
overview
MESSAGE SAFETY MENU
UNIT SAFETY
0AE:FLOW HAS STOPPED
0AE:PUMPINTERLOCK
0A4:FREEZE UP
0A9:EEV PCB COMM ERR
4
0A9:EEV PCB ERR
0C9:INL SENSOR ERR
0CA:OUT SENSOR ERR
0H9:AMB T SENSOR ERR
5
0U4:EXTPCB COMM.ERR
0U4:MAINPCB COMM.ERR
0U5:PCB COMM.PROBLEM
Unit Safety
description
OAE : FLOW HAS STOPPED
Purpose:
■
To prevent that chiller start up without flow.
■
To stop chiller when there is no flow.
Symptom: Flowswitch is activated
POSSIBLE CAUSES
CORRECTIVE ACTION
CONSEQUENCE
No water flow for 5 seconds
continuously or too low water
flow.
Check the water pump filler
and the water circuit for
obstructions.
Unit switched off.
RESET : After finding the cause, the flowswitch is reset automatically, but the controller still needs
to be reset.
3–6
Part 3 – Troubleshooting
ESIE06-05
Overview of Fault Indications and Safeties
OAE : PUMPINTERLOCK
1
Purpose:
■
Detect if pump works or not.
Symptom: Pump interlock contact is open
POSSIBLE CAUSES
CORRECTIVE ACTION
CONSEQUENCE
The pump interlock contact is
not closed.
Make sure a pump interlock
contract is wired correctly and
closed when the pump starts
operating.
Unit switched off
RESET : Only if a pump contractor is present: Switch the black handle on the pump fuse inside the
switchbox and reset the controller.
33
OA4: FREEZE UP
Purpose:
■
4
To prevent freezing of the evaporator.
Symptom: Freeze-up protection is activated
POSSIBLE CAUSES
CORRECTIVE ACTION
CONSEQUENCE
Water flow too low.
Increase the water flow.
Inlet temperature to the evaporator is too low.
Increase the inlet water temperature.
Flow switch is not working or
no water flow.
Check the flow switch and the
water pump.
In case outlet water temperature becomes too low. Software version 2.2 or higher.
Freeze-up disable, unit will
switch off, no safety, unit will
restart if water temperature is
above reset setpoint and compressor timers are on 0.
After second (default) freeze
up disable within 30 min alarm
is displayed and manual reset
of the controller is needed.
RESET : After water temperature rises, above the RESET value, this safety resets automatically,
but the controller still needs to be reset.
Refrigerant temperature
becomes too low (=def -3.5
°C)
Check the water flow and filter.... (No good heat exchange
in the evaporator).
Unit switched off.
RESET: After refrigerant temperature rise, above -3.5 °C, this safety resets automatically, but the
controller still needs to be reset.
OA9: EEV PCB COMM ERR
OA9: EEV PCB ERR
Purpose:
■
Part 3 – Troubleshooting
Indicate if there is no communication with the EEV-PCB.
3–7
5
Overview of Fault Indications and Safeties
1
ESIE06-05
Symptom: EEV driver is not operating
POSSIBLE CAUSES
CORRECTIVE ACTION
CONSEQUENCE
The EEV driver is not operating, no communication with
the EEV PCB.
Check the power supply to the
EEV driver.
Check if the address setting
by DIP-switch is according to
the wiring diagram.
Unit switched off.
RESET : After finding the cause and communication is restored, error can be reset on the controller.
33
OC9: INL SENSOR ERR
OCA: OUT SENSOR ERR
OH9 : AMB T SENSOR ERR
Purpose:
4
■
Detect if sensor is broken or not good connected (open OR short circuit).
Symptom: Sensor error
5
POSSIBLE CAUSES
CORRECTIVE ACTION
CONSEQUENCE
The sensor is broken or not
correctly wired (open or short
circuit).
Check if the wiring is according to the wiring diagram.
■
If value is too high (above
range) ==> display “+ER”.
■
If value is too low (below
range) ==> display “-ER”.
RESET : Possible to reset (manual) if the value is within range.
OU3 : REMOCON SW ERR
Purpose:
■
Indicate if there is no communication with the remote controller.
Symptom: The alarm message shows REMOCON SW ERR
POSSIBLE CAUSES
CORRECTIVE ACTION
CONSEQUENCE
The software for the wired
remote controller (A4P or
A5P) is corrupt or absent.
Check if the wiring to the main
PCB (A11P) is according to
the wiring diagram.
Check if the “address setting”
and the “terminator resistor
setting” by DIP-switch is
according to the setting mentioned in the wiring diagram.
Unit switched off and no controller readout.
RESET : After finding the cause and communication is restored, error can be reset on the controller.
3–8
Part 3 – Troubleshooting
ESIE06-05
Overview of Fault Indications and Safeties
OU4:EXTPCB COMM.ERR
1
Purpose:
■
Indicate if there is no communication with the Extension PCB (the extension PCB A01P cannot be
found).
Symptom: The alarm message shows EXT PCB COMM. ERR
POSSIBLE CAUSES
CORRECTIVE ACTION
CONSEQUENCE
The extension PCB (A01P)
cannot be found.
Check if the wiring to the
extension PCB (A01P) is
according to the wiring diagram
Unit switched off.
RESET : After finding the cause and communication is restored, error can be reset on the controller.
33
OU4:MAINPCB COMM. ERR
4
Purpose:
■
Indicate if there is no communication with the main PCB 2 (double circuit).
Symptom: The alarm message shows MAINPCB COMM. ERR
POSSIBLE CAUSES
CORRECTIVE ACTION
CONSEQUENCE
The main PCB of circuit 2
(A21P) cannot be found
Check if the wiring to the main
PCB of circuit 2 (A21P) is
according to the wiring diagram.
Unit switched off.
5
Check if the “address setting”
and the “terminator resistor
setting” by DIP-swtich is
according to the setting mentioned in the wiring diagram.
RESET : After finding the cause and communication is restored, error can be reset on the controller.
Part 3 – Troubleshooting
3–9
Overview of Fault Indications and Safeties
ESIE06-05
OU5: PCB COMM PROBLEM
1
Purpose:
■
Indicate if there is no communication with the wired remote controller A4P (or A5P, EKRUPG) and
the main PCB.
Symptom: The alarm message shows PCB COMM. PROBLEM
33
POSSIBLE CAUSES
CORRECTIVE ACTION
CONSEQUENCE
The wired remote controller
(A4P of A5P (EKRUPG)) has
no correct communication with
the main PCB (A11P)
Check if the wiring to the main
PCB (A11P) is according to
the wiring diagram.
Check if the “address setting”
and the “terminator resistor
setting” by DIP-switch is
according to the setting mentioned in the wiring diagram.
Unit switched off.
RESET : After finding the cause and communication is restored, error can be reset on the controller.
4
5
3–10
Part 3 – Troubleshooting
ESIE06-05
1.5
Overview of Fault Indications and Safeties
Overview of Circuit Safeties
1
Circuit safeties
overview
CIRCUIT SAFETY 1/2
1/2 53:FAN OVERC. ST1
1/2 53:FAN OVERC. ST2
1/2 53:FAN OVERC. ST3
1/2 A9:EEV ERR
1/2 A9:SUPERHEAT ERR
1/2 E3:HIGH PRESSURE SW
33
1/2 E4:LOW PRESSURE
1/2 E6:COMPR 1 SAFETY
1/2 E6:COMPR 2 SAFETY
1/2 F3:HIGH DISCH TEMP1
4
1/2 F3:HIGH DISCH TEMP2
1/2 J3:DISCHSENSOR ERR1
1/2 J3:DISCHSENSOR ERR2
1/2 J5:REFR SENSOR ERR
1/2 J5:SUCTSENSOR ERR
5
1/2 J5:SUCTSENSOR ERRH1
1/2 J5:SUCTSENSOR ERRH2
1/2 JA:HP SENSOR ERR
1/2 JC:LP SENSOR ERR
1/2 U1:REV PHASE PROT
Remark:
Part 3 – Troubleshooting
■
For circuit 1 error code starts with 1.
■
For circuit 2 error code starts with 2.
3–11
Overview of Fault Indications and Safeties
1
Circuit Safeties
ESIE06-05
153/253 : FAN OVERC. 1/2/3
Purpose
■
To avoid overheating of the fan motor
Symptom: Fan overcurrent is activated
33
POSSIBLE CAUSES
CORRECTIVE ACTION
CONSEQUENCE
Mechanical failure (fan is
blocked)
Check that the fan rotates
freely.
Air flow in the unit too low or
outdoor temperature too high.
Clean the air heat exchanger
properly.
Warning or safety displayed
on the controller. When warning is selected unit will continue operation.
RESET : Push the blue button on the fan fuse inside the switchbox and reset the controller.
1A9/2A9 EEV ERR
4
Purpose
■
Detect when standalone EEV driver gives error
Symptom: EEV driver is not operating
5
POSSIBLE CAUSES
CORRECTIVE ACTION
CONSEQUENCE
The EEV driver is not operating. No communication with
the EEV PCB.
Check the power supply to the
EEV driver.
Check if the address setting
by DIP-switch is according to
the wiring diagram.
Circuit switched off.
RESET : After finding the cause and communication is restored, error can be reset on the controller.
3–12
Part 3 – Troubleshooting
ESIE06-05
Overview of Fault Indications and Safeties
1A9/2A9 SUPERHEAT ERR
1
Purpose
■
Protection compressor against liquid pumping or overheating of compressor.
Symptom: Superheat temperature is not correct.
POSSIBLE CAUSES
CORRECTIVE ACTION
CONSEQUENCE
Superheat temperature is too
high.
Check if the unit has enough
refrigerant (no foaming visible
in sight glass).
Check if the suction temperature sensor of the EEV driver
is in the holder in the suction
tube and not hanging loose.
Circuit switched off.
SH C1/C2 larger than or equal
to 15 °C for 300 sec.
Superheat temperature is too
low.
SH C1/C2 smaller than or
equal to 0°C for 300 sec.
Check if the EEV driver or the
control motor of the EEV is
wired correctly and operating.
Check if the suction temperature sensor of the EEV driver
is reading the night temperature.
The sensed suction temperature is more than 2°C higher
than the entering water temperature of the evaporator
(+2°C) for 300 sec.
Check if the suction temperature sensor of the controller is
in its holder and not hanging
loose.
33
4
5
RESET : After finding the cause, error can be reset on the controller.
1E3/2E3 HIGH PRESSURE SW
Purpose
■
Detect high pressure switch activation on a refrigerant circuit (HP higher as 40.5 bar).
Symptom: High-pressure switch and high pressure setback.
POSSIBLE CAUSES
CORRECTIVE ACTION
CONSEQUENCE
Condenser fan does not operate properly
Check that the fans turn freely.
Clean if necessary.
Circuit switched off.
Dirty or partially blocked condenser
Remove any obstacle and
clean condenser coil using
brush and blower.
Inlet air temperature of the
condenser is too high.
The air temperature measured
at the inlet of the condenser
may not exceed 43°C.
Fan turning in the wrong direction.
Two phases of the power supply to the fan motor must be
inverted (by a licensed electrician).
RESET : After pressure rise, this safety resets automatically (if HP is below 30,2 b), but the controller still needs to be reset.
Part 3 – Troubleshooting
3–13
Overview of Fault Indications and Safeties
1
ESIE06-05
1E4/2E4 LOW PRESSURE
Purpose
■
A low pressure measurement is used to control the low pressure. The setting is depending if the
unit is a glycol application or not.
Symptom: Low pressure.
33
4
5
POSSIBLE CAUSES
CORRECTIVE ACTION
CONSEQUENCE
Water flow to water heat
exchanger too low.
Increase the water flow.
Circuit switched off.
Shortage of refrigerant
Check for leaks and refill
refrigerant if necessary.
Unit is working out if its operation range.
Check the operation conditions of the unit.
Inlet temperature to the water
heat exchanger is too low.
Increase the inlet water temperature.
Dirty evaporator.
Clean the evaporator, or call
your local dealer.
Low pressure safety setting
too high.
Refer to the installation manual “Customization in the service menu”, paragraph “Setting
of the minimum outlet water
temperature” for correct values.
Flowswitch is not working or
no water flow.
Check the flowswitch and the
water pump.
RESET : After pressure rise, this safety resets automatically, but the controller still needs to be
reset. Reset is possible when LP > LP setpoint + 0.2 bar.
1E6/2E6 COMPR 1/2 SAFETY
Purpose
■
3–14
Protection of the compressor if the compressor motor coil temperature is too high because the
compressor motor takes (demands/needs) too much current and is not sufficiently cooled by
refrigerant.
Part 3 – Troubleshooting
ESIE06-05
Overview of Fault Indications and Safeties
1
Symptom: Compressor safety (only for SJ161-4)
POSSIBLE CAUSES
CORRECTIVE ACTION
CONSEQUENCE
Failure of one of the phases.
Check fuses on the supply
panel or measure the supply
voltage.
Circuit switched off.
Voltage too low.
Measure the supply voltage.
The unit is working out of its
range.
Make sure the unit operates
within its operating range.
Overload of motor.
Reset. If the failure persists,
call your local dealer.
There is a short circuit.
Check the wiring.
33
RESET : Pull the black handle on the compressor fuse inside the switch box and reset the controller.
4
5
Part 3 – Troubleshooting
3–15
Overview of Fault Indications and Safeties
1
ESIE06-05
Symptom: Compressor safety (only for SJ180-4-SJ240-4 and SJ300-4)
POSSIBLE CAUSES
CORRECTIVE ACTION
CONSEQUENCE
The compressor motor coil
temperature is too high
because the compressor
motor takes (demands/needs)
too much current and is not
sufficiently cooled by refrigerant.
Make sure there are no refrigerant leaks.
After repairing leaks, charge
the unit with additional refrigerant until the sight glass in
the liquid line shows no foaming.
Circuit switched off.
Make sure the unit operates
within its operating range (too
high ambient or too high water
temperature).
33
Make sure the compressor
motor is not locked.
RESET : After temperature decrease, a 5 minute delay is activated. After this delay the relay in the
electronic protection module (EPM) is pulled in. The controller needs to be reset manually.
4
5
Failure of one of the phases.
Check fuses on the supply
panel or measure the supply
voltage.
Voltage too low.
Measure the supply voltage.
The unit is working out of its
range.
Make sure the unit operates
within its operating range.
Overload of motor.
Reset. If the failure persists,
call your local dealer.
The compressor is running in
reverse phase (only for
SJ240-SJ300)
Check the wiring.
There is a short circuit
Check the wiring
Circuit switched off.
RESET : Pull the black handle on the compressor fuse inside the switch box and reset the controller.
3–16
Part 3 – Troubleshooting
ESIE06-05
Overview of Fault Indications and Safeties
1F3/2F3 HIGH DISCH TEMP 1/2
1
Purpose
■
Detect when discharge temperature becomes too high.
Discharge temperature < High discharge safety setpoint.
Symptom: Low pressure.
POSSIBLE CAUSES
CORRECTIVE ACTION
CONSEQUENCE
Unit is working outside the
operation range.
Check the operation condition
of the unit.
Circuit switched off.
The unit is undercharged.
Check if there are no refrigerant leaks.
After repairing leaks, charge
the unit with additional refrigerant until the sight glass in
the liquid line shows no foaming.
33
RESET : After temperature decrease, the safety resets automatically but the controller still needs
to be reset.
4
1J3/2J3 DISCH SENSOR ERR 1/2
1J5/2J5 REFR SENSOR ERR 1/2
5
1J5/2J5 SUCT SENSOR ERR 1/2
1J5/2J5 SUCT SENSOR ERRH 1/2
Purpose:
■
Detect if sensor is broken or not good connected (open OR short circuit).
Symptom: Sensor error
POSSIBLE CAUSES
CORRECTIVE ACTION
CONSEQUENCE
The sensor is broken or not
correctly wired (open or short
circuit).
Check if the wiring is according to the wiring diagram.
■
If value is too high (above
range) ==> display “+ER”.
■
If value is too low (below
range) ==> display “-ER”.
RESET : Possible to reset (manual) if the value is within range.
Part 3 – Troubleshooting
3–17
Overview of Fault Indications and Safeties
ESIE06-05
1JA/2JA HP SENSOR ERR
1
1JC/2JC LP SENSOR ERR
Purpose
Detect if sensor is broken or not good connected (sensor out of range).
■
Symptom: Sensor error
33
POSSIBLE CAUSES
CORRECTIVE ACTION
CONSEQUENCE
The sensor is broken or not
correctly wired.
Check if the wiring is according to the wiring diagram
■
If value is too high (above
range) ==> display “+ER”.
■
If value is too low (below
range) ==> display “-ER”.
If value is out of voltage range:
■
If value < min value (0.08V)
■
If value > max value (4.92
V).
Circuit switched off.
RESET : Possible to reset (manual) if the value is within range.
4
1U1/2U1 REV PHASE PROT
Symptom: Reverse phase protector is activated.
5
POSSIBLE CAUSES
CORRECTIVE ACTION
CONSEQUENCE
Two phases of the power supply are connected in the wrong
phase position.
Invert two phases of the power
supply (by licensed electrician).
Unit switched off.
One phase is not connected
properly.
Check the connection of all
phases.
Voltage too low.
Measure the supply voltage.
RESET : After inverting two phases or fixing the power supply cables properly, the protector is
reset automatically, but the controller still needs to be reset.
3–18
Part 3 – Troubleshooting
ESIE06-05
1.6
Overview of Fault Indications and Safeties
Overview of Network Safeties
Network Safety
Overview
1
NETWORK SAFETY
0C9:INL SENSOR ERR
0U4:PCB COMM.PROBLEM
0U4:SW VERSION ERR
Network Safety
OC9 INL SENSOR ERR
Purpose
■
33
Detect if sensor is broken or not good connected (open OR short circuit).
Symptom: Sensor error
POSSIBLE CAUSES
CORRECTIVE ACTION
CONSEQUENCE
The sensor is broken or not
correctly wired (open or short
circuit).
Check if the wiring is according to the wiring diagram.
■
If value is too high (above
range) ==> display “+ER”.
■
If value is too low (below
range) ==> display “-ER”.
RESET : Possible to reset (manual) if the value is within range.
5
OU4: PCB COMM. PROBLEM
Purpose
■
Indicate if there is no communication with the communication PCB
Symptom: The NETWORK SAFETY alarm message shows PCB COMM. PROBLEM
POSSIBLE CAUSES
CORRECTIVE ACTION
CONSEQUENCE
The unit cannot be found by
the DICN system (EKACPG)
Check if the wiring is according to the wiring diagram.
■
■
Make sure all the units in
the DICN system are
powered up.
■
Make sure that the correct
number of slave units is
defined in the master unit.
■
Make sure that the correct
unit address setting is
defined in each unit (refer
to the installation manual).
RESET: After finding the cause and communication is restored, error can be reset on the controller.
Part 3 – Troubleshooting
4
3–19
Overview of Fault Indications and Safeties
ESIE06-05
OU4 : SW VERSION ERR
1
Purpose
■
Indicate if there is a conflict in software versions in the DICN system.
Symptom: The NETWORK SAFETY alarm message shows SW VERSION ERR
33
POSSIBLE CAUSES
CORRECTIVE ACTION
All units in the DICN system
(EKACPG) do not have the
same software version.
Check the software version of
each unit.
Call your local dealer in case a
software upgrade is
necessary.
CONSEQUENCE
RESET: After finding the cause and software is upgraded, error can be reset on the controller.
4
5
3–20
Part 3 – Troubleshooting
ESIE06-05
1.7
Overview of Fault Indications and Safeties
Overview of Warnings
1
Unit warnings
overview
UNIT WARNING
5.2
0AE:FLOW HAS STOPPED
7
0C9:INL SENSOR ERR
5.7
1/2 E3:HP SETBACK
5.13
1/2 E6:COMPR PR
Unit warning
description
1/2 53:FAN OVERC. ST1
5.4
1/2 53:FAN OVERC. ST2
5.4
1/2 53:FAN OVERC. ST3
5.4
33
OAE : FLOW HAS STOPPED
Purpose
■
4
Detect if one motor of the twin pump is broken
Symptom: Flowswitch is activated
POSSIBLE CAUSES
CORRECTIVE ACTION
CONSEQUENCE
No water flow for 5 seconds
continuously.
Check the water pump filter
and the water circuit for
obstructions.
Unit switched off and restart
after pump lead of other pump.
RESET: After finding the cause, the flowswitch is reset automatically, but the controller still needs
to be reset.
Remark : only when twin pump is installed.
OC9 : INL SENSOR ERR
Purpose
■
Detect if sensor is broken or not good connected (open OR Short circuit)
Symptom: Sensor error
POSSIBLE CAUSES
CORRECTIVE ACTION
CONSEQUENCE
The sensor is broken or not
correctly wired (open or short
circuit).
Check if the wiring is according to the wiring diagram.
■
If value is too high (above
range) ==> display “+ER”.
■
If value is too low (below
range) ==> display “-ER”.
RESET : Possible to reset (manual) if the value is within range.
1E3/2E3 : HP SETBACK
Purpose
■
Part 3 – Troubleshooting
Detect high pressure setback on a refrigerant circuit.
3–21
5
Overview of Fault Indications and Safeties
1
ESIE06-05
Symptom: High pressure switch and high pressure setback
33
POSSIBLE CAUSES
CORRECTIVE ACTION
CONSEQUENCE
Condenser fan does not operate properly
Check that the fans turn freely.
Clean if necessary.
Unload compressor till only 1
compressor is in operation.
Dirty or partially blocked condenser.
Remove any obstacle and
clean condenser coil using
brush and blower.
Inlet air temperature of the
condenser is too high.
The air temperature measured
at the inlet of the condenser
may not exceed 43°C.
Fan turning in the wrong direction.
Two phases of the power
supply to the fan motor must
be inverted (by a licensed
electrician).
RESET: After pressure decrease this warning automatically resets.
4
1E6/2E6 COMPR PR
Purpose
■
5
Protection of the compressor if the compressor is working outside the operation range.
Symptom: Compressor protection (function of controller) is activated
POSSIBLE CAUSES
CORRECTIVE ACTION
CONSEQUENCE
Compressor is working outside the operation range
Check the operation condition
of the compressor. "Protection
control of compressor running
area during heating" on
page 2–117.
Circuit is switched off.
RESET: When the temperature has returned to normal, the controller resets automatically.
153/253 : FAN OVERC. 1/2/3
Purpose
■
To avoid overheating of the fan motor.
Symptom: Fan overcurrent is activated
POSSIBLE CAUSES
CORRECTIVE ACTION
CONSEQUENCE
Mechanical failure (fan is
blocked)
Check that the fan rotates
freely.
Air flow in the unit too low or
outdoor temperature too high.
Clean the air heat exchanger
properly.
Warning or safety displayed on
the controller, when warning is
selected unit will continue
operation.
RESET: Push the blue button on the fan fuse inside the switchbox and reset the controller.
3–22
Part 3 – Troubleshooting
ESIE06-05
1.8
Overview of Fault Indications and Safeties
Overview of Start Problems
Introduction
1
When a safety device was activated, stop the unit and find out why the safety device was activated
before resetting it. Under no circumstances safety devices may be bridged or changed to a value other
than the factory setting.
Symptom 1: The unit does not start, but the ON LED lights up.
Possible causes
Corrective action
The temperature setting is not correct.
Check the controller setpoint.
The flowchart timer is still running
The unit will start after approximately 15 seconds. Make sure that water is flowing through
the evaporator.
The circuit cannot start up
Refer to Symptom 5: The circuit does not start
up.
Unit is in manual mode (all compressors at 0%)
Check on the controller
Power supply failure
Check the voltage on supply panel.
Blown fuse or interrupted protection device.
Inspect fuses and protection devices. Replace
by fuses of the same size and type.
Loose connections.
Inspect connections of the field wiring and the
internal wiring of the unit. Tighten all loose connections.
Shorted or broken wires.
Test circuits using a tester and repair if necessary.
4
Symptom 2: The unit does not start, but the ON LED is flashing.
Possible causes
Corrective action
The remote ON/OFF input is enabled and the
remote switch is off.
Put the remote switch on or disable the remote
ON/OFF input.
Symptom 3: The unit does not start and the ON LED does not light up.
Part 3 – Troubleshooting
Possible causes
Corrective action
The unit is in failure mode.
Check safety devices.
One of the following safety devices is activated:
Check safety devices.
■
Flowswitch (S8L, S9L).
■
Emergency Stop.
33
3–23
5
Overview of Fault Indications and Safeties
ESIE06-05
Symptom 4 : Unit stops soon after operation.
1
Possible Causes
Corrective Action
One of the safety devices is activated.
Check safety devices.
Voltage is too low.
Test the voltage in the supply panel and, if necessary, in the electrical compartment of the unit
(voltage drop due to supply cables is too high).
Symptom 5: The circuit does not start up.
33
4
5
3–24
Possible causes
Corrective action
One of the following safety devices is activated:
Check on the controller if the safety device is
active.
■
Compressor thermal protector (Q*M)
■
Overcurrent relay (K*S)
■
Discharge thermal protector
■
Low pressure
■
High pressure switch (S*PH)
■
Reverse phase protector
■
Freeze-up
The anti-recycling timer is still active
The circuit can only start up after approximately
5 minutes.
The Guard timer is still active.
The circuit can only start up after approximately
3 minutes.
The circuit is limited to 0%
Check the enable/disable capacity limitation
remote contact.
Part 3 – Troubleshooting
ESIE06-05
Checking the Temperature Sensors
Part 3
2
1
Checking the Temperature Sensors
Introduction
If the cause of the problem is related to the temperature sensors, the sensors should be checked prior
to changing the PCB or an output device.
Temperature
Sensors
In multiple scroll software, four different types of NTP temp sensors are programmed. On the unit, only
NTC type 1 and 2 are actually used. In this chapter, the resistance/temp table is described.
How to check
To check the temperature sensors, proceed as follows:
Temperature
Sensor Types
Temperature
Sensor List
Part 3 – Troubleshooting
33
4
Step
Action
1
Disconnect the sensor from the PCB.
2
Measure the temperature and the resistance value.
3
Check whether the measured values correspond with the values in the appropriate table.
The table below contains the four different sensor types programmed in the controller.
Type
Also used in the following units
Type 1: PF-46 F (ST8602/8603/8604 use
PB-46F
Temp Sensor Sky Air/VRV/ DENV scroll chillers
Type 2: ST 8606
Discharge sensor Sky Air / VRV
Type 3: PB-43
Water temp DIL screw chillers
Type 4: Carel Sensor
Water temp DENV scroll and screw chillers
The table below contains the list with the sensor name and the sensor type used in the unit.
Part number
Description
R1T
ambient temperature sensor
Type 1
R2T
inlet water temperature sensor
Type 1
R3T
outlet water temperature sensor
Type 1
3–25
5
Checking the Temperature Sensors
1
ESIE06-05
Part number
R8T
33
4
5
Description
*
temperature sensor for changeable analog input
Type 1 or 2 or
3 or 4 (Configurable in the
service
input/output
menu)
R14T
suction temperature sensor circuit 1
Type 1
R15T, R25T
discharge temperature sensor circuit 1
Type 2
R16T
coil temperature sensor circuit 1 (Only for EWYQ)
Type 1
R17T
refrigerant piping temperature sensor circuit 1
Type 1
R18T, R38T
heating suction temperature sensor circuit 1, circuit
2 (only EWYQ)
Type 1
R28T, R48T
heating suction temperature sensor circuit 1, circuit
2 (only EWYQ 80-100/230-250)
Type 1
R26T
coil temperature sensor circuit 1 (only for EWYQ
80-100/230-250).
Type 1
R34T
suction temperature sensor circuit 2
Type 1
R35T, R45T
discharge temperature sensor circuit 2
Type 2
R36T
coil temperature sensor circuit 2 (only for EWYQ)
Type 1
R37T
refrigerant piping temperature sensor circuit 2
Type 1
R46T
coil temperature sensor circuit 2 (only for
EWYQ230-250)
Type 1
* Not included with standard unit (not possible as option + not obligatory).
3–26
Part 3 – Troubleshooting
ESIE06-05
2.1
Checking the Temperature Sensors
Temperature and resistance characteristics of thermistor type 1
Temp.-resistance
1
The table below contains the temperature resistance values of sensor type 1.
.
Temp. (°C)
-20
-19
-18
-17
-16
-15
-14
-13
-12
-11
-10
-9
-8
-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Resistance (kΩ)
At x.0°C
At x.5°C
197.81
186.53
175.97
166.07
156.80
148.10
139.94
132.28
125.09
118.34
111.99
106.03
100.41
95.14
90.17
85.49
81.08
76.93
73.01
69.32
65.84
62.54
59.43
56.49
53.71
51.09
48.61
46.26
44.05
41.95
39.96
38.08
36.30
34.62
192.08
181.16
170.94
161.36
152.38
143.96
136.05
128.63
121.66
115.12
108.96
103.18
97.73
92.61
87.79
83.25
78.97
74.94
71.14
67.56
64.17
60.96
57.94
55.08
52.38
49.83
47.42
45.14
42.98
40.94
39.01
37.18
35.45
33.81
Part 3 – Troubleshooting
Temp. (°C)
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
Resistance (kΩ)
At x.0°C
At x.5°C
33.02
31.50
30.06
28.70
27.41
26.18
25.01
23.91
22.85
21.85
20.90
20.00
19.14
18.32
17.54
16.80
16.10
15.43
14.79
14.18
13.59
13.04
12.51
12.01
11.52
11.06
10.63
10.21
9.81
9.42
9.06
8.71
8.37
8.05
32.25
30.77
29.37
28.05
26.78
25.59
24.45
23.37
22.35
21.37
20.45
19.56
18.73
17.93
17.17
16.45
15.76
15.10
14.48
13.88
13.31
12.77
12.25
11.76
11.29
10.84
10.41
10.00
9.61
9.24
8.88
8.54
8.21
7.90
Temp. (°C)
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
—
Resistance (kΩ)
At x.0°C
At x.5°C
7.75
7.46
7.18
6.91
6.65
6.41
6.65
6.41
6.18
5.95
5.74
5.14
4.96
4.97
4.62
4.46
4.30
4.16
4.01
3.88
3.75
3.62
3.50
3.38
3.27
3.16
3.06
2.96
2.86
2.77
2.68
2.60
2.51
7.60
7.31
7.04
6.78
6.53
6.53
6.53
6.29
6.06
5.84
5.43
5.05
4.87
4.70
4.54
4.38
4.23
4.08
3.94
3.81
3.68
3.56
3.44
3.32
3.21
3.11
3.01
2.91
2.82
2.72
2.64
2.55
2.47
33
4
5
3–27
Checking the Temperature Sensors
1
2.2
Temperature and resistance characteristics of thermistor type 2
Temp-resistance
The table below contains the temperature resistance values of the sensor type 2.
T°C
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
33
4
5
3–28
ESIE06-05
0.0
640.44
609.31
579.96
552.00
525.63
500.66
477.01
454.60
433.37
413.24
394.16
376.05
358.88
342.58
327.10
312.41
298.45
285.18
272.58
260.60
249.00
238.36
228.05
218.24
208.90
200.00
191.53
183.46
175.77
168.44
161.45
154.79
148.43
142.37
136.59
131.06
125.79
120.76
115.95
111.35
106.96
102.76
98.75
94.92
91.25
87.74
84.38
81.16
78.09
75.14
72.32
(kΩ)
0.5
624.65
594.43
565.78
538.63
512.97
488.67
465.65
443.84
423.17
403.57
384.98
367.35
350.62
334.74
319.66
305.33
291.73
278.80
266.51
254.72
243.61
233.14
223.08
213.51
204.39
195.71
187.44
179.57
172.06
164.90
158.08
151.57
145.37
139.44
133.79
128.39
123.24
118.32
113.62
109.13
104.84
100.73
96.81
93.06
89.47
86.04
82.75
79.61
76.60
73.71
70.96
T°C
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
0.0
72.32
69.64
67.06
64.60
62.24
59.97
57.80
55.72
53.72
51.98
49.96
48.19
46.49
44.86
43.30
41.79
40.35
38.96
37.63
36.34
35.11
33.92
32.78
31.69
30.63
29.61
28.64
27.69
26.79
25.91
25.07
24.26
23.48
22.73
22.01
21.31
20.63
19.98
19.36
18.75
18.17
17.61
17.07
16.54
16.04
15.55
15.08
14.62
14.18
13.76
13.35
(kΩ)
0.5
70.96
68.34
65.82
63.41
61.09
58.87
56.75
54.70
52.84
50.96
49.06
47.33
45.67
44.07
42.54
41.06
39.65
38.29
36.98
35.72
34.51
33.35
32.23
31.15
30.12
29.12
28.16
27.24
26.35
25.49
24.66
23.87
23.10
22.36
21.65
20.97
20.31
19.67
19.05
18.46
17.89
17.34
16.80
16.29
15.79
15.31
14.85
14.40
13.97
13.55
13.15
T°C
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
0.0
13.35
12.95
12.57
12.20
11.84
11.49
11.15
10.83
10.52
10.21
9.92
9.64
9.36
9.10
8.84
8.59
8.35
8.12
7.89
7.68
7.47
7.26
7.06
6.87
6.69
6.51
6.33
6.16
6.00
5.84
5.69
5.54
5.39
5.25
5.12
4.98
4.86
4.73
4.61
4.49
4.38
4.27
4.16
4.06
3.96
3.86
3.76
3.67
3.58
3.49
3.41
(kΩ)
0.5
13.15
12.76
12.38
12.01
11.66
11.32
10.99
10.67
10.36
10.06
9.78
9.50
9.23
8.97
8.71
8.47
8.23
8.01
7.78
7.57
7.36
7.16
6.97
6.78
6.59
6.42
6.25
6.08
5.92
5.76
5.61
5.46
5.32
5.18
5.05
4.92
4.79
4.67
4.55
4.44
4.32
4.22
4.11
4.01
3.91
3.81
3.72
3.62
3.54
3.45
3.37
Part 3 – Troubleshooting
ESIE06-05
2.3
Checking the Temperature Sensors
Temperature and Resistance characteristics of Thermistor Type 3
1
Introduction
The thermistors in use have the following temperature (°C) to resistance (K Ω) characteristics.
Explanation
X-Axis: indicates tens digit (°C).
Y-Axis : Indicates ones digit (°C).
In the case of -9°C characteristics : -10 + 1 = -9.
Therefore, see the characteristics (K Ω) at the intersection of -10 (tens digit) and 1 (ones digit).
Similarly, in the case of 12°C characteristics : 10 + 2= 12.
33
Therefore, see the characteristics (K Ω) at the intersection of 10 (tens digit) and 2 (ones digit).
The table below contains the temperature resistance values of sensor type 3.
Temp.-resistance
-10
0
10
20
30
40
50
0
48.5
30.0
19.2
12.7
8.6
6.0
4.3
1
46.1
28.6
18.4
12.2
8.3
5.8
4.1
2
43.9
27.4
17.6
11.7
8.0
5.6
4.0
3
41.8
26.2
16.9
11.2
7.7
5.4
3.9
4
39.8
25.0
16.2
10.8
7.4
5.2
3.7
5
38.0
23.9
15.5
10.4
7.1
5.0
3.6
6
36.2
22.9
14.9
10.0
6.9
4.9
3.5
7
34.5
21.9
14.3
9.6
6.6
4.7
3.4
8
32.9
20.9
13.7
9.3
6.4
4.5
3.3
9
31.4
20.1
13.2
8.9
6.2
4.4
3.2
4
5
Example: characteristics at -9°C
-10
0
10
0
1
46.1
2
Example: characteristics at 12°C
-10
0
10
0
1
2
Part 3 – Troubleshooting
17.6
3–29
Checking the Temperature Sensors
1
2.4
Temperature and resistance characteristics of thermistor type 4.
Temp.-resistance
33
4
5
ESIE06-05
The table below contains the temperature resistance values of sensor type 4.
Resistance (kΩ)
Temp.
(°C)
Maximum
Standard
-50
344.40
329.20
Resistance (kΩ)
Temp.
(°C)
Resistance (kΩ)
Minimum
Temp.
(°C)
Maximum
Standard
Minimum
Maximum
Standard
Minimum
314.70
4
23.42
22.99
22.57
58
3.28
3.21
3.14
3.04
-49
324.70
310.70
297.20
5
22.45
22.05
21.66
59
3.18
3.11
-48
306.40
293.30
280.70
6
21.52
21.15
20.78
60
3.09
3.02
2.95
-47
289.20
277.00
265.30
7
20.64
20.29
19.95
61
2.99
2.92
2.86
-46
273.20
261.80
250.60
8
19.80
19.40
19.15
62
2.90
2.83
2.77
-45
258.10
247.50
237.20
9
19.00
18.70
18.40
63
2.81
2.75
2.69
-44
244.00
234.10
224.60
10
18.24
17.96
17.67
64
2.73
2.66
2.60
-43
230.80
221.60
212.70
11
17.51
17.24
16.97
65
2.65
2.58
2.52
-42
218.50
209.80
201.50
12
16.80
16.55
16.31
66
2.57
2.51
2.45
-41
206.80
198.70
191.00
13
16.13
15.90
15.87
67
2.49
2.43
2.37
-40
195.90
188.40
181.10
14
15.50
15.28
15.06
68
2.42
2.36
2.30
-39
185.40
178.30
171.59
15
14.89
14.68
14.48
69
2.35
2.29
2.24
-38
175.5.
168.90
162.00
16
14.31
14.12
13.93
70
2.28
2.22
2.17
-37
166.20
160.10
154.10
17
13.75
13.57
13.40
71
2.21
2.16
2.10
-36
157.50
151.80
140.20
18
13.22
13.06
12.89
72
2.15
2.10
2.04
-35
149.30
144.00
138.80
19
12.72
12.56
12.41
73
2.09
2.04
1.98
-34
141.60
136.60
131.80
20
12.23
12.09
11.95
74
2.03
1.98
1.93
-33
134.40
129.70
125.20
21
11.77
11.63
11.07
75
1.97
1.92
1.87
-32
127.60
123.20
118.90
22
11.32
11.20
11.07
76
1.92
1.87
1.82
-31
121.20
117.10
113.10
23
10.90
10.78
10.60
77
1.86
1.81
1.78
-30
115.10
111.30
107.50
24
10.49
10.38
10.27
78
1.81
1.76
1.71
-29
109.30
105.70
102.20
25
10.10
10.00
9.90
79
1.76
1.71
1.68
-28
103.80
100.40
97.16
26
9.73
9.63
9.52
80
1.71
1.66
1.62
-27
98.63
95.47
92.41
27
9.38
9.28
9.18
81
1.66
1.62
1.57
-26
93.75
90.80
87.93
28
9.04
8.94
8.84
82
1.62
1.57
1.53
-25
89.15
86.39
83.70
29
8.72
8.62
8.52
83
1.57
1.53
1.49
-24
84.82
82.22
79.71
30
8.41
8.31
8.21
84
1.53
1.49
1.44
-23
80.72
78.29
75.93
31
8.11
8.01
7.91
85
1.49
1.45
1.40
-22
76.85
74.58
72.36
32
7.82
7.72
7.62
86
1.45
1.41
1.37
-21
73.20
71.07
68.99
33
7.55
7.45
7.35
87
1.41
1.37
1.33
-20
69.74
67.74
65.80
34
7.28
7.19
7.09
88
1.37
1.33
1.29
-19
66.42
64.54
62.72
35
7.03
6.94
6.84
89
1.34
1.30
1.26
-18
63.27
61.52
59.81
36
6.79
6.69
6.60
90
1.30
1.26
1.22
-17
60.30
58.66
57.05
37
6.56
6.46
6.37
91
1.27
1.23
1.19
-16
57.49
55.95
54.44
38
6.33
6.24
6.15
92
1.23
1.20
1.16
-15
54.83
53.39
51.97
39
6.12
6.03
5.94
93
1.20
1.16
1.13
-14
52.31
50.96
49.83
40
5.92
5.82
5.73
94
1.17
1.13
1.10
-13
49.93
48.66
47.12
41
5.72
5.63
5.54
95
1.14
1.10
1.07
-12
47.67
46.48
45.31
42
5.53
5.43
5.35
96
1.11
1.08
1.04
-11
45.53
44.41
43.32
43
5.34
5.25
5.17
97
1.08
1.05
1.01
-10
43.50
42.25
41.43
44
5.16
5.08
4.99
98
1.05
1.02
0.99
-9
41.54
40.56
39.59
45
4.99
4.91
4.82
99
1.03
0.99
0.96
-8
39.68
38.76
37.85
46
4.83
4.74
4.66
100
1.00
0.97
0.94
-7
37.91
37.05
36.20
47
4.67
4.59
4.51
101
0.98
0.94
0.91
-6
36.24
35.43
34.03
48
4.52
4.44
4.36
102
0.95
0.92
0.89
-5
34.65
33.89
33.14
49
4.38
4.30
4.22
103
0.93
0.90
0.87
-4
33.14
32.43
31.73
50
4.24
4.16
4.08
104
0.91
0.87
0.84
-3
31.71
31.04
30.39
51
4.10
4.02
3.95
105
0.88
0.85
0.82
-2
30.35
29.72
29.11
52
3.97
3.90
3.82
106
0.86
0.83
0.80
-1
20.00
28.47
27.89
53
3.84
3.77
3.69
107
0.84
0.81
0.78
0
27.83
27.28
26.74
54
3.72
3.65
3.57
108
0.82
0.79
0.76
1
26.64
26.13
25.62
55
3.61
3.53
3.46
109
0.80
0.77
0.74
2
25.51
25.03
24.55
56
3.49
3.42
3.35
110
0.78
0.75
0.73
3
24.24
23.99
23.54
57
3.39
3.31
3.24
—
3–30
Part 3 – Troubleshooting
ESIE06-05
Reset procedure
Part 3
3
Reset procedure
3.1
Introduction
1
For all safeties, a login with the user password (default) is required to reset a safety.
33
User password is mentioned in the operation manual.
Service password is known by the service technician.
4
5
Part 3 – Troubleshooting
3–31
Reset procedure
1
3.2
ESIE06-05
Login/Logout
When a user is logged in with the password equal to the password needed to reset safeties, no
password will be asked to reset a safety.
Login function:
33
4
5
3–32
■
Without a login (ex. At startup= no password in login menu), then a limited menus are available.
■
A user can login with the user password, then all menus with user parameters are available.
■
A service man can login with the service password, then all menus with user/service parameters
are available.
■
A login can be done in login/logout menu OR if password is requested at first screen of protected
menu.
■
A logout is possible in the login/logout menu.
■
An automatically logout (jump to the first screen in readout menu) is done if no buttons are pushed
for 5 minutes (default)
1
Warnings ==> no password is required to reset a warning (remark: warning is always logged in
history menu).
2
Switch main power off will remember active safeties.
3
Number of reset: if the same error happens 3 times in 1 hour then the level to reset is put 1 level
higher.
Default case: in case reset safety is protected by user password ==> 1 level higher means service
password. In case reset safety is protected by no password ==> 1 level higher means user
password.
Remark : not in case reset safety is already protected by service password.
4
A backup reset password is present ==> Only possible to reset safeties (meaning no actual login
value).
This backup reset password is based on a calculation result on the number of safeties that are
present in the history.
(Example: number of safeties in history. 50 ==> result calculation : 3398)
This means it can only be used 1 time, because next time the number of history will be different.
Part 3 – Troubleshooting
ESIE06-05
Procedure for Software Upload
Part 3
4
Procedure for Software Upload
4.1
What is in this chapter
Overview
1
This chapter contains the following topics:
33
Topic
See page
4.2–Overview hardware software/Source files
3–34
4.3–Software upload procedure: PCASOflash
3–35
4.4–Installation of PCASOflash Software
3–40
4.5–Overview of most common problems
3–41
4
5
Part 3 – Troubleshooting
3–33
Procedure for Software Upload
1
4.2
ESIE06-05
Overview hardware software/Source files
1. Hardware
Laptop PC (windows 2000 or windows xp)
Serial cable:
DENV part number: 999480P
Description: “RS-232C Cable included driver assy”
33
4
This cable exists out of 2 pieces:
RS-232C Cable incl drive assy
Adapter cable with label “R”
(Remark: Similar cables of VRV have
labels “A”, instead of “R”)
5
Use in combination with PCASOflash software
Remark: A USB / RS232 can be used to connect the serial cable to a USB port.
Power supply (230VAC)
2. Software
SW program
Source files
Source files example
PCASOflash
Main PCB Logic file (*.lgc)
Multiple scroll chillers:
Remocon PCB Logic file (*.lgc)
sp1710_XXX.lgc
SP1734_XXX.lgc
Language file (*.lng)
SP1734_XXX.lng
Parameter file (*.par)
4PW30697-X-XX.par
3–34
Part 3 – Troubleshooting
ESIE06-05
4.3
Procedure for Software Upload
Software upload procedure: PCASOflash
Introduction
1
The upload of the parameters can be executed on Main PCB nr 1 only.
The upload of the Software and parameters can be executed on Main PCB nr 1 only. After this the
software is distributed by the Main PCB nr 1 towards the Main PCB nr 2, the extension PCB and
towards the Main and sub remocon.
(If PCASOflash is not installed yet: refer to chapter “install software PCASOflash”)
PCASOflash:
manual upload
Remark: all lgc and lng and par files should be put in 1 directory!
Action
Result
Connect wires:
Result:
Communication: X49A ÙRS-232C
Cable incl drive assy+ adapter cable with
label “R”
HAP is blinking
33
Remark: In case HAP is continuously On, then the
wrong adapter cable is used.
4
Power: X1A Ù 230V
Remark: PCB should be continuously
powered.
HAP
X49A Serial communication
5
X1A power (230V)
2. Start PCASOflash.exe
Result: PCASO flash main window
By default: “Upload software sheet” is selected
Part 3 – Troubleshooting
3–35
Procedure for Software Upload
1
ESIE06-05
Action
Result
3. Select directory by pushing “…”
Result:
33
(Remark: all the files present in a directory are
continuously shown)
4. select correct directory and push OK
4
Result: All lgc and lng files in the selected directory are
shown.
(Remark: all the files present in a
directory are continuously shown)
5
3–36
Part 3 – Troubleshooting
ESIE06-05
Procedure for Software Upload
Action
Result
4. Select files to be uploaded and push
“Add=>”
Result: A selection of files to be uploaded is made.
1
33
(Or in case all files can be uploaded push
“Add all =>”)
(Remark: if correct software is already
present, then it is possible only to select
a parameter file)
4
5
Part 3 – Troubleshooting
3–37
Procedure for Software Upload
ESIE06-05
1
Action
Result
6. Push Start
Result:
33
(Remark: default password is 0000 and
must not be modified)
A pop-up window will show progress and progress is
recorded in logging-area. During upload:
■
4
MainRemocon display: “-PCB SW UPLOAD
BUSY-”
■
SubRemocon display: “-PCB SW UPLOAD
BUSY-” (if present)
5
Result should be OK at the end. (Remark: Upload by
PCASOflash can take up to +- 4 min.) (Remark: if
result is OK, then communication cable can be
removed)
If uploading ended correctly
then Main PCB nr 1 will automatically distribute
software towards Main PCB nr 2 (if present)
■
MainRemocon display “----STARTUP BUSY----“
■
SubRemocon display “----STARTUP BUSY----“ (if
present)
After this Main PCB nr 1 will automatically distribute
software towards Remocon PCB Main (if present):
3–38
■
MainRemocon display “-REM.SW UPLOAD
BUSY-“
■
SubRemocon display “----STARTUP BUSY----“ (if
present)
Part 3 – Troubleshooting
ESIE06-05
Procedure for Software Upload
Action
Result
1
After this then Main PCB nr 1 will automatically
distribute software towards Remocon PCB Sub (if
present)
■
MainRemocon display “----STARTUP BUSY----“
■
SubRemocon display “-REM.SW UPLOAD
BUSY-“
After this the normal initialization procedure will start
MainRemocon display “----STARTUP BUSY----“
■
SubRemocon display “----STARTUP BUSY----“
When distribution and initialization procedure ended
normally then readout screen is shown on display of
remocon
■
MainRemocon display: Readout screen
■
SubRemocon display: Readout screen
Remark: The distribution and initialization can take up
to +-16 min.
33
4
5
Part 3 – Troubleshooting
3–39
Procedure for Software Upload
1
4.4
ESIE06-05
Installation of PCASOflash Software
Only needed if software is not yet present on PC.
Remark: Only possible to install if user has administrator rights.
Necessary files: PCAS0flash0xx.msi. (xx depending on version)
■
To install PCASOflash software: execute PCAS0flash0xx.msi.
Select Each time Next when required.
Remark: When “Error 1913” message is shown, select OK (this has no influence on the good
functioning of the software)
■
To install a newer PCASOflash software, it is required to first remove the existing PCASOflash
software as follows: execute PCAS0flash0xx.msi.
Select “Remove PCASO flash” and push next.
33
4
5
3–40
Part 3 – Troubleshooting
ESIE06-05
4.5
Procedure for Software Upload
Overview of most common problems
1
PCASO flash
Symptom
Possible cause
1. Not possible to start upload
■
No connection to Main PCB nr 1
■
Main PCB nr 1 has no power
■
Wrong adapter cable is used. (“R” label)
■
Serial connection has been cut
■
ex. Debugmonitor is also running => close program
■
Visa software is running (can be checked status bar next to time )=>
close program
4. After upload never display on remocon or
continuously “STARTUP BUSY”
■
Remocon has been uploaded with wrong mot file.
■
Remocon Main and Sub have same address (ex. Main & Main or Sub &
Sub)
5. Not possible to select the different software
files from different directories
■
The different software files should be put in one directory.
2. Upload stops after certain %
3.
33
4
5
Part 3 – Troubleshooting
3–41
Procedure for Software Upload
ESIE06-05
1
33
4
5
3–42
Part 3 – Troubleshooting
ESIE06-05
Procedure for main PCB changing
Part 3
5
Procedure for main PCB changing
5.1
Changing the main PCB
1
To change the Main PCB nr1 (circuit 1) or Main PCB nr 2 (circuit 2), proceed as follows:
33
Step
Action
1
Turn off the power supply.
2
Remove the connections of the old PCB.
3
Remove the old PCB, also remove the extension PCB if present (only on Main PCB
of circuit 1) and communication PCB if present.
4
Place the new PCB in the same way as the old PCB, also place back the extension
PCB and communication PCB, if present in the same way.
5
Reconnect the PCB.
4
5
Part 3 – Troubleshooting
3–43
Procedure for main PCB changing
1
5.2
ESIE06-05
Configuration of Main PCB nr 1
To start the configuration of Main PCB nr 1, proceed as follows:
33
4
Step
Action
1
Set the address dipswitch S1A to the right address, Main PCB nr. & (circuit 1) :
address 1.
2
Upload the software to Main PCB nr 1, see "Installation of PCASOflash Software" on
page 3–40.
3
After programming switch on/off power supply.
4
Wait until the Main PCB nr 1 has finished the automatic distribution of software
towards Main PCB nr 2 (if present) and Main.Sub Remocon display.
5
After this the normal initialization procedure will start. Main Remocon displays :
“------ STARTUP BUSY --------”
6
If Inverterfans/VA meter/2 pump or heatertape is present on the unit, enter the service/input output menu and enable the unit options. Confirm after changing unit
options.
5
3–44
Part 3 – Troubleshooting
ESIE06-05
5.3
Procedure for main PCB changing
Configuration of Main PCB nr 2
1
To start the configuration of Main PCB nr 2, proceed as follows :
Step
Action
1
Set the address dipswitch SIA to the right address.
Main PCB nr 2 (circuit 2) : address 2.
2
Switch on the power supply.
3
The Main PCB nr 1 will automatically distribute the software towards Main PCB nr 2.
4
After this the normal initialization procedure will start. Main Remocon displays:
“--------- STARTUP BUSY --------------”.
33
4
5
Part 3 – Troubleshooting
3–45
Procedure for main PCB changing
ESIE06-05
1
33
4
5
3–46
Part 3 – Troubleshooting
ESIE06-05
Procedure for extension PCB changing
Part 3
6
Procedure for extension PCB changing
6.1
Changing the extension PCB
1
To change the extension PCB, proceed as follows:
6.2
Step
Action
1
Turn off the power supply.
2
Remove the connections of the old PCB.
3
Remove the old PCB.
4
Place the new PCB in the same way as the old PCB.
5
Reconnect the PCB.
33
4
Configuration of the extension PCB
When the extension PCB is replaced, no software has to be uploaded and no parameters have to be
set. The main PCB will upload the software to the extension PCB.
Part 3 – Troubleshooting
3–47
5
Procedure for extension PCB changing
ESIE06-05
1
33
4
5
3–48
Part 3 – Troubleshooting
ESIE06-05
Procedure for controller changing
Part 3
7
Procedure for controller changing
7.1
Changing the Main Controller
1
To change the Main Controller or Subcontroller display, proceed as follows:
7.2
Step
Action
1
Turn off the power supply.
2
Remove the 4 wires on the back of the controller.
3
Place the new controller in the same way as the old controller.
4
Reconnect the 4 wires on the back of the controller.
33
4
Configuration of the Main Controller
To start the configuration of the Main Controller, proceed as follows:
Step
Action
1
Set the address dipswitch S1A to “MAIN”.
2
If no sub controller is connected :
■
5
Set the Term dipswitch S2A to “ON”.
If a sub controller is connected :
■
7.3
Set the Term dipswitch S2A to “OFF”.
3
Switch on the power supply.
4
The Main PCB nr 1 will automatically distribute the software towards the controller.
Main controller will display “------- STARTUP BUSY ----------” during distribution.
5
After this, the normal initialization procedure will start. Main Remocon displays:
“-------- STARTUP BUSY ----------”.
Configuration of the Sub Controller
To start the configuration of the subcontroller, proceed as follows:
Part 3 – Troubleshooting
Step
Action
1
Set the address dipswitch S1A to “SUB”.
2
Set the Term dipswitch S2A to “ON”.
3–49
Procedure for controller changing
1
ESIE06-05
Step
Action
3
Switch on the “power supply”.
4
The main PCB nr 1 will automatically distribute the software towards the controller.
Subcontroller will display “ ------- REM. SW UPLOAD BUSY -------” during distribution.
5
After this, the normal initialization procedure will start. Sub Remocon displays :
“------- STARTUP BUSY ---------”.
33
4
5
3–50
Part 3 – Troubleshooting
ESIE06-05
Procedure for EEV PCB changing
Part 3
8
Procedure for EEV PCB changing
8.1
Changing the EEV PCB
1
To change the EEVPCB, proceed as follows:
8.2
Step
Action
1
Turn off the power supply.
2
Remove the connections of the old PCB.
3
Remove the old PCB.
4
Place the new PCB in the same way as the old PCB.
5
Reconnect the PCB.
33
4
Configuration of EEV PVB
5
To start the configuration of the EEV PCB, proceed as follows:
Part 3 – Troubleshooting
Step
Action
1
Set the address dipswitch DS1 to the right address :
■
A7IP : address 1.
■
A72P : address 2 (only for EWYQ).
■
A73P : address 3 (only for EWYQ 230-250).
3–51
Procedure for EEV PCB changing
ESIE06-05
1
33
4
5
3–52
Part 3 – Troubleshooting
ESIE06-05
Procedure for compressor replacement : Suction washer
Part 3
9
Procedure for compressor replacement : Suction
washer
9.1
Introduction
To maintain an equal oil level in 2 compressors, a suction washer is used (in some compressor setup).
Therefore it is very important that the right suction washer is used during a compressor replacement.
9.2
1
33
Use of Suction Washer
1) C/O unit
When the two tandem compressors are unequal, a restrictor is mounted in the suction of the smallest
compressor in order to create a pressure drop in the suction and in such way, when the compressors
are in operation, maintain an equal oil level in the 2 compressors. Without this ring, the oil level would
be higher in the biggest compressor and in some conditions cause too low oil level in the smallest
compressor (especially applications with low LWE and high ambient).
Overview
2) H/P unit
Cooling only unit
Smallest compressor
Equal compressors
No suction washer needed.
Unequal compressors
Suction washer installed.
5
Biggest compressor
No suction washer installed.
When the two tandem compressors are unequal, a restrictor is mounted in the suction of the smallest
compressor, also when the two tandem compressors are equal a restrictor is mounted in the
compressor that is closed to the 4-way valve (special piping is causing small pressure drop) in such
way, when the compressors are in operation, maintain an equal oil level in the 2 compressors. Without
the ring, the oil level would be higher in one of the compressors and in some conditions cause to low
oil level in the compressor that is close to the 4-way valve (especially applications with low LWE and
high ambient).
Overview
Part 3 – Troubleshooting
Heatpump only unit
Smallest compressor
Equal compressors
Suction washer needed in compressor that is closed to the
4-way valve
Unequal compressors
Suction washer installed.
4
Biggest compressor
No suction washer installed.
3–53
Procedure for compressor replacement : Suction washer
ESIE06-05
1
Suction Washer
The table below contains an overview of the compressor configuration and the used suction washer
(if needed) for the cooling only units.
33
Cooling only unit
4
5
Compressor Configuration
Conclusion
SJ161-SJ161
No restriction
SJ180-SJ180
No restriction
SJ180-SJ240
Use a 31 mm restrictor on SJ 180
SJ240-SJ240
No restriction
SJ240-SJ300
Use a 31 mm restrictor on SJ 240
SJ300-SJ300
No restriction
The table below contains an overview of the compressor configuration and the used suction washer
for the heat pump unit.
Heat pump unit
3–54
Compressor Configuration
Conclusion
SJ161-SJ161
Use a 27 mm restrictor on compressor positioned on the 4
way valve side.
SJ180-SJ180
Use a 31 mm restrictor on compressor positioned on the 4
way valve side.
SJ180-SJ240
Use a 31 mm restrictor on SJ180 compressor.
SJ240-SJ240
Use a 31 mm restrictor on compressor positioned on the 4
way valve side.
SJ240-SJ300
Use a 31 mm restrictor on SJ240 compressor.
SJ300-SJ300
Use a 31 mm restrictor on compressor positioned on the 4
way valve side.
Part 3 – Troubleshooting
ESIE06-05
Procedure for Compressor Oil Fill or Oil Drain
Part 3
10
Procedure for Compressor Oil Fill or Oil Drain
10.1
Introduction
1
An oil fill connection and oil drain connection are present on the compressor to fill or drain the
compressor oil in an easy way.
10.2
33
Compressor connections
Sight glass
All Performer® SJ scroll compressors come equipped with a sight glass which may be used to
determine the amount and condition of the oil contained within the sump.
4
Schrader
The oil fill connection and gauge port is 1/4” male flare connector incorporating a schrader valve.
Oil drain
The oil drain connection allows oil to be removed from the sump for changing, testing, etc. The fitting
contains an extension tube into the oil sump to more effectively remove the oil. The connection is a
female 1/4” NPT fitting and is mounted on SJ180-240-300 models only.
Oil fill connection
and gauge port
Oil drain
connection
Procedure
To drain the oil :
1
Remove the refrigerant from the system (or separate the compressor from the system by use of
the suction and discharge valve if present).
2
Open the oil drain connection.
3
Use the oil fill connection to pressurize the compressor.
To fill the oil :
Part 3 – Troubleshooting
1
Use the oil fill connection to vacuum the compressor.
2
Use the oil fill connection to suck the oil in the compressor.
3–55
5
Procedure for Compressor Oil Fill or Oil Drain
ESIE06-05
1
33
4
5
3–56
Part 3 – Troubleshooting
ESIE06-05
Compressor electrical connections and wiring
Part 3
11
Compressor electrical connections and wiring
11.1
Electrical connections for SJ161
1
Electrical power is connected to the compressor terminals by diameter 4,8 mm (3/16”) screws. The
maximum tightening torque is 3 Nm. Use a 1/4” ring terminal on the power leads.
33
Terminal box
4
Power supply
ø 29 mm knockout
11.2
5
Electrical connections SJ180
Electrical power is connected to the compressor terminals by diameter 4,8 mm (3/16”) screws. The
maximum tightening torque is 3Nm. Use a 1/4” ring terminal on the power leads.
The protection rating of the terminal box is IP54.
Discharge gas pipe
Discharge gas thermostat
Protection module
power supply
L1
N
1
2
12
14
11
M otorProtection
M odule
Cover holding
screw (x2)
Torque:
2.2 Nm.
Belt type
heater
Terminal box
Faston 1/4" tabs
Power supply
11.3
Electronic protection module wiring
The motor protection module comes preinstalled within the terminal box and has pre-wired thermistor
connections. The module must be connected to a power supply of the appropriate voltage.
Part 3 – Troubleshooting
3–57
Compressor electrical connections and wiring
ESIE06-05
Internal control contact
1
L
N
1
2 12 14 11
Safety
circuit
Module power
24 or 230 vac
11.4
Thermistor
connection
Electrical connections for SJ240-300
Electrical power is connected to the compressor terminals by the diameter 4.8 mm (3/16”) screws. The
maximum tightening torque is 3 Nm. Use a 1/4” ring terminal on the power leads.
The protection rating of the terminal box is IP54.
33
Discharge gas thermostat
Cover holding screws (x4)
Torque: 2.2 N.m.
Black Blue
Discharge gas
pipe
Brown
4
M1, M2
Control circuit
Terminal
box
Belt type
crankcase
heater
Power supply
5
Power supply
11.5
Electronic protection module wiring
The motor protection module comes preinstalled within the terminal box. Phase sequence protection
connections and thermistor connections are pre-wired. The module must be connected to a power
supply of the appropriate voltage.
Phase sequence input
L1 L2 L3
Black Blue
L
N S1 S2 M1 M2
Module power
24 or 115/230 vac
3–58
Internal control contact
Brown
Thermistor
connection
Safety
circuit
Part 3 – Troubleshooting
ESIE06-05
Procedure to Clear the Refrigerant Circuit in Case of Frozen Evaporators
Part 3
12
1
Procedure to Clear the Refrigerant Circuit in Case of
Frozen Evaporators
If water is detected in the refrigerant circuit after a evaporator damage, the following procedure should
be executed to clear the system.
Step
1
33
Action
Cleaning & drying refrigerant circuit.
Cleaning components:
■
Suction and liquid line.
4
Replace components:
■
Sight glass
■
Drier filter element by high density filter
■
Compressor oil
5
Actions:
■
Drill a hole in the bottom of the condenser headers to remove
water.
■
Braze the drilled holes.
■
Blow dry N2 trough all the pipes.
■
Drain compressor oil
■
Vacuum the whole installation:
Check on a regular base the condition of the oil of the vacuum
pump. If the vacuum oil becomes milky, it should be replaced by
new vacuum oil. The crankcase heater must be activated. It is
advisable to connect a second heater tape at the suction of the
compressor.
2
Part 3 – Troubleshooting
■
Stop the vacuum and purge with dry nitrogen.
■
Restart the vacuum of the installation; check after a couple of
hours the condition of the vacuum oil. If OK the unit can be
recharged.
■
Charge the unit with R410A.
■
Start the unit & re-commissioning.
■
After 24 hours replace HD filter by new HD filter & replace
compressor oil.
■
Check oil contamination with measuring kit.
■
After 48 hours replace HD filter by normal filter drier + check sight
glass and pressures.
Find the cause of this evaporator breakdown and take the necessary
actions to prevent recurrence in the future.
3–59
Procedure to Clear the Refrigerant Circuit in Case of Frozen Evaporators
ESIE06-05
1
33
4
5
3–60
Part 3 – Troubleshooting
ESIE06-05
4
Part 4
Commissioning and Test Run
Introduction
Commissioning and test run are well known practices in service engineering. This part contains a
systematic approach on test run checks and test values, which guarantees a high quality installation
and operation of the units.
What is in this part?
This part contains the following chapters:
Chapter
See page
1–Pre-Test Run Checks
4–3
3
44
5
Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run
4–1
ESIE06-05
1
3
4
5
4–2
Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run
ESIE06-05
Pre-Test Run Checks
Part 4
1
Pre-Test Run Checks
1.1
What Is in This Chapter?
Introduction
This chapter contains checks you have to carry out before every test run.
Overview
This chapter contains the following topics:
3
Topic
See page
1.2–General Checks
4–5
1.3–Water Piping Checks
4–6
1.4–Water Pressure Drop through Evaporator: EWAQ080-100DAYN (N-P-B)
4–11
1.5–Water Pressure Drop through Evaporator: EWAQ130-210DAYN(N-P-B)
4–12
1.6–Water Pressure Drop through Evaporator: EWAQ240-260DAYN (N-P-B)
4–13
1.7–Water Pressure Drop through Evaporator: EWYQ080-100DAYN (N-P-B)
4–14
1.8–Water Pressure Drop through Evaporator: EWYQ130-210DAYN(N-P-B)
4–15
1.9–Water Pressure Drop through Evaporator: EWYQ230-250DAYN(N-P-B)
4–16
1.10–Unit pressure drop : EWAQ080-100DAYNN Standard Model
4–17
1.11–Unit pressure drop : EWAQ130-210DAYNN Standard Model
4–19
1.12–Unit pressure drop : EWAQ240-260DAYNN Standard Model
4–21
1.13–Unit pressure drop : EWYQ080-100DAYNN Standard Unit
4–23
1.14–Unit pressure drop : EWYQ130-210DAYNN Standard Unit
4–25
1.15–Unit pressure drop : EWYQ230-250DAYNN Standard Unit
4–27
1.16–External Static Unit Pressure: EWAQ080-100 DAYN (P-B)
4–29
1.17–External Static Unit Pressure: EWAQ130-210 DAYN (P-B)
4–31
1.18–External Static Unit Pressure: EWAQ240-260DAYN (P-B)
4–32
1.19–External Static Unit Pressure: EWYQ080-100DAYN (P-B)
4–34
1.20–External Static Unit Pressure: EWYQ130-210DAYN (P-B)
4–35
1.21–External Static Unit Pressure: EWYQ230-250DAYN (P-B)
4–36
1.22–External Static Unit Pressure: EWAQ080-100DAYN (OPHP)
4–37
1.23–External Static Unit Pressure: EWAQ130-210DAYN (OPHP)
4–39
1.24–External Static Unit Pressure: EWAQ240-260DAYN (OPHP)
4–40
1.25–External Static Unit Pressure: EWYQ080-100DAYN (OPHP)
4–41
1.26–External Static Unit Pressure: EWYQ130-210DAYN (OPHP)
4–43
Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run
1
4
5
4–3
Pre-Test Run Checks
1
ESIE06-05
Topic
See page
1.27–External Static Unit Pressure: EWYQ230-250DAYN (OPHP)
4–45
1.28–Electrical Checks
4–46
1.29–Field wiring connection diagram : EWAQ/EWYQ 080-260 DAYN*
4–47
3
4
5
4–4
Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run
ESIE06-05
1.2
Checklist
Pre-Test Run Checks
General Checks
1
The table below contains the general checklist.
Step
Check whether...
1
There is external damage.
2
The unit is properly supported and/or has a proper foundation.
3
The unit is installed horizontally with a deviation of maximum 1°.
4
Anti-vibration pads are required.
5
Check for remaining metal dust of burrs. Metal dust or burrs from grinding or drilling in the
metal parts during construction facilitates the rust process and shortens the lifetime of the
unit.
6
The operator has received the operation manual.
7
The installer has received the installation manual.
8
The air volume over the coil is adequate; there is no blockage (from paper, plastic...) or air
short circuit due to wrong positioning.
3
4
5
Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run
4–5
Pre-Test Run Checks
1
1.3
Water Piping Checks
Checklist
3
4
5
ESIE06-05
Water volume, flow
and pressure
The table below contains the water piping checklist.
Step
Check whether...
1
The factory mounted water filter is clean.
2
The water volume is within the limits.
3
There is adequate water flow.
4
The water quality meets the standards.
5
The water piping is properly insulated.
6
Measurement points for temperature and pressure are available on the water circuit.
7
The flow switch, pump interlock and pump are properly working.
8
Air purge points are installed on the high parts of the water piping.
9
Drain taps are installed at the low points of the water piping.
10
Other parts of the water circuit are properly mounted and installed (e.g. buffer tank, expansion tank...).
11
Vibration compensators are mounted at the water connections if the unit is positioned on
anti-vibration pads.
The table below shows the operation range of water volume and water flow for proper operation of the
unit.
Evaporator
Minimum water
volume
Minimum water
flow
Maximum water
flow
EWAQ080DAYN*
358 l
115 l/min
459 l/min
EWAQ100DAYN*
470 l
151 l/min
602 l/min
EWAQ130DAYN*
295 l
188 l/min
756 l/min
EWAQ150DAYN*
341 l
218 l/min
871 l/min
EWAQ180DAYN*
522 l
261 l/min
1043 l/min
EWAQ210DAYN*
599 l
300 l/min
1198 l/min
EWAQ240DAYN*
529 l
339 l/min
1355 l/min
EWAQ260DAYN*
569 l
364 l/min
1456 l/min
EWYQ080DAYN*
393 l
110 l/min
503 l/min
EWYQ100DAYN*
511 l
143 l/min
654 l/min
EWYQ130DAYN*
334 l
195 l/min
854 l/min
EWYQ150DAYN*
370 l
208 l/min
946 l/min
EWYQ180DAYN*
446 l
262 l/min
1141 l/min
EWYQ210DAYN*
504 l
302 l/min
1290 l/min
EWYQ240DAYN*
578 l
331 l/min
1479 l/min
Chiller type
4–6
Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run
ESIE06-05
Pre-Test Run Checks
1
Evaporator
EWYQ250DAYN*
629 l
361 l/min
1611 l/min
The water pressure should not exceed the maximum working pressure of 10bar.
Calculation of the
minimum water
volume
The calculation method below is based on the fact that the water volume in a chiller should be large
enough to prevent the compressor from excessive cycling. Sufficient water volume gives a certain
inertia to the system, so that:
■
Water (or glycol) temperature does not drop too fast when the unit turns ON.
■
Water (or glycol) temperature does not rise too fast when the unit turns OFF.
3
0,5 x Q x t
V=
2 x ρ x d x Cw
[m³]
4
5
Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run
4–7
Pre-Test Run Checks
ESIE06-05
with:
1
3
Notation
Dimension
Description
Default
V
[m³]
Required system volume
—
Q
[W]
Cooling capacity at the lowest capacity
step of each chiller in the system
—
t
[s]
Minimum cycling time allowed by the compressor
300 s
ρ
[kg/m³]
Specific mass of the fluid
ρ water = 1000 kg/m³
d
[K]
Thermostat step difference
dinlet water control = 4 K
Cw
[J/kgK]
Specific heat capacity of the fluid
Cw, water = 4186 J/kgK
4
5
4–8
Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run
ESIE06-05
Pre-Test Run Checks
Water quality
The table below contains the required water quality specifications. It is a table from the JRA (Japanese
Refrigerant Assdated GL-02-1994.
Cooling water (3)
Circulating system
Heated water (2)
Once
flow
Cooled water
Low temperature
High temperature
Items to be referred to
Items to be controlled
Items (1) (5)
Tendency if
out of criteria
Circulating
water
Supply
water
(4)
Flowing
water
Circulating
water
(below
20°C)
Supply
water
(4)
Circulating
water
(20°C ~
60°C)
Supply
water
(4)
Circulating
water
(60°C ~
80°C)
Supply
water
(4)
6.5~8.2
6.0~8.0
6.8~8.0
6.8~8.0
6.8~8.0
7.0~8.0
7.0~8.0
7.0~8.0
7.0~8.0
corrosion +
scale
below
80
below
30
below
40
below
40
below
30
below
30
below
30
below
30
below
30
corrosion +
scale
below
200
below
50
below
50
below
50
below
50
below
50
below
50
below
30
below
30
corrosion
2 /l)
4
below
200
below
50
below
50
below
50
below
50
below
50
below
50
below
30
below
30
corrosion
M-alkalinity (ph
4.8)
(mgCaCO3/l)
below
100
below
50
below
50
below
50
below
50
below
50
below
50
below
50
below
50
scale
Total
hardness
(mgCaCO3/l)
below
200
below
70
below
70
below
70
below
70
below
70
below
70
below
70
below
70
scale
Calcium
hardness
(mgCaCO3/l)
below
150
below
50
below
50
below
50
below
50
below
50
below
50
below
50
below
50
scale
Silica
ion
(mgSiO2/l)
Below
50
Below
30
Below
30
Below
30
Below
30
Below
30
Below
30
Below
30
Below
30
scale
Iron
(mgFe/l)
Below
1.0
Below
0.3
Below
1.0
Below
1.0
Below
0.3
Below
1.0
Below
0.3
Below
1.0
Below
0.3
Corrosion +
scale
Copper
(mgCu/l)
below
0.3
below
0.1
velow
1.0
below
1.0
below
0.1
below
1.0
below
0.1
below
1.0
below
0.1
corrosion
Sulfide
ion
(mgS 2-/l)
not
detectable
not
detectable
not
detectable
not
detectable
not
detectable
not
detectable
not
detectable
not
detectable
not
detectable
corrosion
below
1.0
below
0.1
below
1.0
below
1.0
below
0.1
below
0.3
below
0.1
below
0.1
below
0.1
corrosion
pH
at 25°C
Electrical conductivity
(mS/m) at
25°C
Chloride ion
mgCl -/l
Sulfate
ion
Ammonium ion
(mgSO
(mgNH
+
4 /l)
(mgCl/l)
below
0.3
below
0.3
below
0.3
below
0.3
below
0.3
below
0.25
below
0.3
below
0.1
below
0.3
corrosion
Free
carbide
(mgCO2/l)
below
4.0
below
4.0
below
4.0
below
4.0
below
4.0
below
0.4
below
4.0
below
0.4
below
4.0
corrosion
6.0 ~
7.0
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
corrosion
and scale
Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run
3
4
5
Remaining
chloride
Stability
index
1
4–9
Pre-Test Run Checks
ESIE06-05
(2) In case of using heated water (more than 40°C), corrosion is generally noticeable. Especially when
the iron material is in direct contact with water without any protection shields. It is desireable to give
the valid measures for corrosion e.g. chemical measure.
1
(3) In the cooling water using hermetic cooling tower, closed circuit water is according to heated water
standard and scattered water is according for cooling water standard.
(4) Supply water is considered drink water, industrial water and ground water except for genuine water,
neutral water and soft water.
(5) The above mentioned items are representable items in corrosion and scale cases.
3
4
5
4–10
Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run
ESIE06-05
1.4
Pre-Test Run Checks
Water Pressure Drop through Evaporator: EWAQ080-100DAYN (N-P-B)
Water pressure
drop
1
The illustration below shows the water pressure drop through evaporator for
EWAQ080-100DAYN (N-P-B).
Pressure drop evaporator [kPa]
1000
3
1
100
4
2
10
5
1
100
1000
10000
Water Flow through Evaporator [l/min]
Symbols
The table below describes the symbols.
Symbol
Description
(1)
For EWAQ080DAYN*
(2)
For EWAQ100DAYN*
Selecting a flow outside the curves can cause damage to or malfunction of the unit. See also
minimum and maximum allowed water flowrange. See "Technical Specifications:
EWAQ080-260DAYN" on page 1–5.
Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run
4–11
Pre-Test Run Checks
1
1.5
ESIE06-05
Water Pressure Drop through Evaporator: EWAQ130-210DAYN(N-P-B)
Water pressure
drop
The illustration below shows the water pressure drop through evaporator for
EWAQ130-210DAYN(N-P-B).
1000
Pressure drop evaporator [kPa]
3
4
5
1
2
100
4
3
10
1
100
1000
10000
Water Flow through Evaporator [l/min]
Symbols
The table below describes the symbols.
Symbol
Description
(1)
For EWAQ130DAYN*
(2)
For EWAQ150DAYN*
(3)
For EWAQ180DAYN*
(4)
For EWAQ210DAYN*
Selecting a flow outside the curves can cause damage to or malfunction of the unit. See also
minimum and maximum allowed water flowrange. See "Technical Specifications:
EWAQ080-260DAYN" on page 1–5.
4–12
Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run
ESIE06-05
1.6
Pre-Test Run Checks
Water Pressure Drop through Evaporator: EWAQ240-260DAYN (N-P-B)
Water pressure
drop
1
The illustration below shows the water pressure drop through evaporator for EWAQ240-260DAYN
(N-P-B).
Pressure drop evaporator [kPa]
1000
3
100
1
4
2
10
5
1
100
1000
10000
Water Flow through Evaporator [l/min]
Symbols
The table below describes the symbols.
Symbol
Description
(1)
For EWAQ240DAYN*
(2)
For EWAQ260DAYN*
(3)
Selecting a flow outside the curves can cause damage to or malfunction of the unit. See also
minimum and maximum allowed water flowrange. See "Technical Specifications:
EWAQ080-260DAYN" on page 1–5.
Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run
4–13
Pre-Test Run Checks
1
1.7
ESIE06-05
Water Pressure Drop through Evaporator: EWYQ080-100DAYN (N-P-B)
Water pressure
drop
The illustration below shows the water pressure drop through evaporator for EWYQ080-100DAYN
(N-P-B)
Pressure Drop Evaporator [kPa]
1000
3
4
1
100
2
10
5
1
100
10000
1000
Water Flow Evaporator [l/min]
Symbols
The table below describes the symbols.
Symbol
Description
(1)
For EWYQ080DAYN*
(2)
For EWYQ100DAYN*
Selecting a flow outside the curves can cause damage to or malfunction of the unit. See also
minimum and maximum allowed water flowrange. See "Technical Specifications for options:
EWAQ080-100DAYN" on page 1–8.
4–14
Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run
ESIE06-05
1.8
Pre-Test Run Checks
Water Pressure Drop through Evaporator: EWYQ130-210DAYN(N-P-B)
Water pressure
drop
1
The illustration below shows the water pressure drop through evaporator for
EWYQ130-210DAYN(N-P-B).
Pressure Drop Evaporator [kPa]
1000
1
100
3
2
4
4
3
10
5
1
100
1000
10000
Water Flow Evaporator [l/min]
Symbols
The table below describes the symbols.
Symbol
Description
(1)
For EWYQ130DAYN*
(2)
For EWYQ150DAYN*
(3)
For EWYQ180DAYN*
(4)
For EWYQ210DAYN*
Selecting a flow outside the curves can cause damage to or malfunction of the unit. See also
minimum and maximum allowed water flowrange. See "Technical Specifications for options:
EWAQ180-210DAYN" on page 1–10.
Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run
4–15
Pre-Test Run Checks
1
1.9
ESIE06-05
Water Pressure Drop through Evaporator: EWYQ230-250DAYN(N-P-B)
Water pressure
drop
The illustration below shows the water pressure drop through condenser for
EWYQ230-250DAYN(N-P-B).
Pressure Drop Evaporator [kPa]
1000
3
4
100
1
2
10
5
1
100
1000
10000
Water Flow Evaporator [l/min]
Symbols
The table below describes the symbols.
Symbol
Description
(1)
For EWYQ230DAYN*
(2)
For EWYQ250DAYN*
Selecting a flow outside the curves can cause damage to or malfunction of the unit. See also
minimum and maximum allowed water flowrange. See "Technical Specifications for options:
EWAQ130-150DAYN" on page 1–9.
4–16
Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run
ESIE06-05
1.10
Pre-Test Run Checks
Unit pressure drop : EWAQ080-100DAYNN Standard Model
Unit pressure drop
1
The illustration below shows the water pressure drop through evaporator for EWAQ080-100DAYNN
Standard Model.
1000
3
100
4
Pressure drop unit [kPa]
1
2
5
10
1
100
1000
Water Flow Unit [l/min]
Symbols
The table below describes the symbols.
Symbol
Description
(1)
For EWAQ080DAYNN Standard Model
(2)
For EWAQ100DAYNN Standard Model
Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run
4–17
Pre-Test Run Checks
ESIE06-05
Selecting a flow outside the curves can cause damage to or malfunction of the unit. See also
minimum and maximum allowed water flowrange. See "Technical Specifications:
EWAQ080-260DAYN" on page 1–5.
1
3
4
5
4–18
Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run
ESIE06-05
1.11
Pre-Test Run Checks
Unit pressure drop : EWAQ130-210DAYNN Standard Model
Unit pressure drop
1
The illustration below shows the water pressure drop through evaporator for EWAQ130-210DAYNN
Standard Model.
1000
3
1
Pressure drop unit [kPa]
100
4
4
2
3
5
10
1
100
1000
10000
Water Flow Unit [l/min]
Symbols
The table below describes the symbols.
Symbol
Description
(1)
For EWAQ130DAYNN Standard Model
(2)
For EWAQ150DAYNN Standard Model
(3)
For EWAQ180DAYNN Standard Model
Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run
4–19
Pre-Test Run Checks
1
ESIE06-05
Symbol
Description
(4)
For EWAQ210DAYNN Standard Model
Selecting a flow outside the curves can cause damage to or malfunction of the unit. See also
minimum and maximum allowed water flowrange. See "Technical Specifications:
EWAQ080-260DAYN" on page 1–5.
3
4
5
4–20
Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run
ESIE06-05
1.12
Pre-Test Run Checks
Unit pressure drop : EWAQ240-260DAYNN Standard Model
Unit pressure drop
1
The illustration below shows the water pressure drop through evaporator for EWAQ240-260DAYNN
Standard Model.
1000
3
Pressure drop unit [kPa]
100
1
4
2
5
10
1
100
1000
10000
Water Flow Unit [l/min]
Symbols
The table below describes the symbols.
Symbol
Description
(1)
For EWAQ240DAYNN Standard Model
(2)
For EWAQ260DAYNN Standard Model
Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run
4–21
Pre-Test Run Checks
ESIE06-05
Selecting a flow outside the curves can cause damage to or malfunction of the unit. See also
minimum and maximum allowed water flowrange. See "Technical Specifications:
EWAQ080-260DAYN" on page 1–5.
1
3
4
5
4–22
Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run
ESIE06-05
1.13
Pre-Test Run Checks
Unit pressure drop : EWYQ080-100DAYNN Standard Unit
Unit pressure drop
1
The illustration below shows the water pressure drop through evaporator for EWAQ240-260DAYNN
Standard Model.
1000
3
Pressure Drop Unit [kPa]
100
4
1
5
2
10
1
100
1000
Water Flow Unit [l/min]
Symbols
The table below describes the symbols.
Symbol
Description
(1)
For EWYQ080DAYNN Standard Unit
(2)
For EWYQ100DAYNN Standard Unit
Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run
4–23
Pre-Test Run Checks
ESIE06-05
Selecting a flow outside the curves can cause damage to or malfunction of the unit. See also
minimum and maximum allowed water flowrange. See "Technical Specifications:
EWYQ080-250DAYN" on page 1–12.
1
3
4
5
4–24
Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run
ESIE06-05
1.14
Pre-Test Run Checks
Unit pressure drop : EWYQ130-210DAYNN Standard Unit
Unit pressure drop
1
The illustration below shows the water pressure drop through evaporator for EWYQ130-210DAYNN
Standard Unit.
1000
3
1
Pressure Drop Unit [kPa]
100
4
4
2
5
3
10
1
100
1000
10000
Water Flow Unit [l/min]
Symbols
The table below describes the symbols.
Symbol
Description
(1)
For EWYQ130DAYNN Standard Unit
(2)
For EWYQ150DAYNN Standard Unit
(3)
For EWYQ180DAYNN Standard Unit
Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run
4–25
Pre-Test Run Checks
1
ESIE06-05
Symbol
Description
(4)
For EWYQ210DAYNN Standard Unit
Selecting a flow outside the curves can cause damage to or malfunction of the unit. See also
minimum and maximum allowed water flowrange. See "Technical Specifications:
EWYQ080-250DAYN" on page 1–12.
3
4
5
4–26
Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run
ESIE06-05
1.15
Pre-Test Run Checks
Unit pressure drop : EWYQ230-250DAYNN Standard Unit
Unit pressure drop
1
The illustration below shows the water pressure drop through evaporator for EWYQ230-250DAYNN
Standard Unit.
1000
3
100
4
Pressure Drop Unit [kPa]
1
2
5
10
1
100
1000
10000
Water Flow Unit [l/min]
Symbols
The table below describes the symbols.
Symbol
Description
(1)
For EWYQ230DAYNN Standard Unit
(2)
For EWYQ250DAYNN Standard Unit
Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run
4–27
Pre-Test Run Checks
ESIE06-05
Selecting a flow outside the curves can cause damage to or malfunction of the unit. See also
minimum and maximum allowed water flowrange. See "Technical Specifications:
EWYQ080-250DAYN" on page 1–12.
1
3
4
5
4–28
Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run
ESIE06-05
1.16
Pre-Test Run Checks
External Static Unit Pressure: EWAQ080-100 DAYN (P-B)
External Static
Pressure
1
The illustration below shows the water pressure drop through evaporator for EWAQ080-100 DAYN
(P-B).
300
3
External Static Pressure Unit [kPa]
250
200
4
2
150
1
5
100
50
0
100
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
Water Flow [l/min]
Symbols
The table below describes the symbols.
Symbol
Description
(1)
For EWAQ080DAYN* + 0PSP
(2)
For EWAQ100DAYN* + 0PSP
Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run
4–29
Pre-Test Run Checks
ESIE06-05
Selecting a flow outside the curves can cause damage to or malfunction of the unit. See also
minimum and maximum allowed water flowrange. See "Technical Specifications:
EWAQ080-260DAYN" on page 1–5.
1
3
4
5
4–30
Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run
ESIE06-05
1.17
Pre-Test Run Checks
External Static Unit Pressure: EWAQ130-210 DAYN (P-B)
External Static
Pressure
1
The illustration below shows the water pressure drop through evaporator for EWAQ130-210 DAYN
(P-B).
300
250
External Static Pressure Unit [kPa]
3
3
200
4
150
4
1
2
5
100
50
0
150
250
350
450
550
650
750
850
Water Flow [l/min]
Symbols
The table below describes the symbols.
Symbol
Description
(1)
EWAQ130 DAYN*+0PSP
(2)
EWAQ150 DAYN*+0PSP
(3)
EWAQ180 DAYN*+0PSP
(4)
EWAQ210 DAYN*+0PSP
Selecting a flow outside the curves can cause damage to or malfunction of the unit. See also
minimum and maximum allowed water flowrange. See "Technical Specifications:
EWAQ080-260DAYN" on page 1–5.
Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run
4–31
Pre-Test Run Checks
1
1.18
ESIE06-05
External Static Unit Pressure: EWAQ240-260DAYN (P-B)
External Static
Pressure
The illustration below shows the water pressure drop through evaporator for EWAQ240-260DAYN
(P-B).
300
3
External Static Pressure Unit [kPa]
250
4
5
200
2
1
150
100
50
0
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1000
Water Flow [l/min]
Symbols
4–32
The table below describes the symbols.
Symbol
Description
(1)
EWAQ240 DAYN*+0PSP
(2)
EWAQ260 DAYN*+0PSP
Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run
ESIE06-05
Pre-Test Run Checks
Selecting a flow outside the curves can cause damage to or malfunction of the unit. See also
minimum and maximum allowed water flowrange. See "Technical Specifications:
EWAQ080-260DAYN" on page 1–5.
1
3
4
5
Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run
4–33
Pre-Test Run Checks
1
1.19
ESIE06-05
External Static Unit Pressure: EWYQ080-100DAYN (P-B)
External Static
Pressure
The illustration below shows the water pressure drop through evaporator for EWYQ080-100DAYN
(P-B).
300
250
External Static Pressure [kPa]
3
4
5
200
2
150
1
100
50
0
0
100
200
300
400
500
600
Water Flow Unit [l/min]
Symbols
The table below describes the symbols.
Symbol
Description
(1)
EWYQ080 DAYN*+0PSP
(2)
EWYQ100 DAYN*+0PSP
Selecting a flow outside the curves can cause damage to or malfunction of the unit. See also
minimum and maximum allowed water flowrange. See "Technical Specifications:
EWYQ080-250DAYN" on page 1–12.
4–34
Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run
ESIE06-05
1.20
Pre-Test Run Checks
External Static Unit Pressure: EWYQ130-210DAYN (P-B)
External Static
Pressure
1
The illustration below shows the water pressure drop through evaporator for EWYQ130-210DAYN
(P-B).
300
250
3
External Static Pressure [kPa]
3
200
4
4
150
1
2
5
100
50
0
150
250
350
450
550
650
750
850
Water Flow Unit [l/min]
Symbols
The table below describes the symbols.
Symbol
Description
(1)
EWYQ130 DAYN*+0PSP
(2)
EWYQ150 DAYN*+0PSP
(3)
EWYQ180 DAYN*+0PSP
(4)
EWYQ210 DAYN*+0PSP
Selecting a flow outside the curves can cause damage to or malfunction of the unit. See also
minimum and maximum allowed water flowrange. See "Technical Specifications:
EWYQ080-250DAYN" on page 1–12.
Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run
4–35
Pre-Test Run Checks
1
1.21
ESIE06-05
External Static Unit Pressure: EWYQ230-250DAYN (P-B)
External Static
Pressure
The illustration below shows the water pressure drop through evaporator for EWYQ230-250DAYN
(P-B).
300
250
External Static Pressure [kPa]
3
4
5
200
2
150
1
100
50
0
0
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1000
Water Flow Unit [l/min]
Symbols
The table below describes the symbols.
Symbol
Description
(1)
EWYQ230 DAYN*+0PSP
(2)
EWYQ250 DAYN*+0PSP
Selecting a flow outside the curves can cause damage to or malfunction of the unit. See also
minimum and maximum allowed water flowrange. See "Technical Specifications:
EWYQ080-250DAYN" on page 1–12.
4–36
Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run
ESIE06-05
1.22
Pre-Test Run Checks
External Static Unit Pressure: EWAQ080-100DAYN (OPHP)
External Static
Pressure
1
The illustration below shows the water pressure drop through evaporator for EWAQ080-100DAYN
(OPHP).
400
350
External Static Pressure Unit [kPa]
300
3
2
250
1
4
200
150
5
100
50
0
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
Water Flow [l/min]
Symbols
The table below describes the symbols.
Symbol
Description
(1)
EWAQ080 DAYN*+0PSP
Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run
4–37
Pre-Test Run Checks
1
ESIE06-05
Symbol
Description
(2)
EWAQ100 DAYN*+0PSP
Selecting a flow outside the curves can cause damage to or malfunction of the unit. See also
minimum and maximum allowed water flowrange. See "Technical Specifications:
EWAQ080-260DAYN" on page 1–5.
3
4
5
4–38
Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run
ESIE06-05
1.23
Pre-Test Run Checks
External Static Unit Pressure: EWAQ130-210DAYN (OPHP)
External Static
Pressure
1
The illustration below shows the water pressure drop through evaporator for EWAQ130-210DAYN
(OPHP).
400
350
External Static Pressure Unit [kPa]
300
3
3
250
4
200
4
1
2
150
5
100
50
0
150
350
550
750
950
1150
Water Flow [l/min]
Symbols
The table below describes the symbols.
Symbol
Description
(1)
EWAQ130 DAYN*+0PSP
(2)
EWAQ150 DAYN*+0PSP
(3)
EWAQ180 DAYN*+0PSP
(4)
EWAQ210 DAYN*+0PSP
Selecting a flow outside the curves can cause damage to or malfunction of the unit. See also
minimum and maximum allowed water flowrange. See "Technical Specifications:
EWAQ080-260DAYN" on page 1–5.
Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run
4–39
Pre-Test Run Checks
1
1.24
ESIE06-05
External Static Unit Pressure: EWAQ240-260DAYN (OPHP)
External Static
Pressure
The illustration below shows the water pressure drop through evaporator for EWAQ240-260DAYN
(OPHP).
400
350
300
External Static Pressure Unit [kPa]
3
4
5
2
250
1
200
150
100
50
0
150
350
550
750
950
1150
1350
Water Flow [l/min]
Symbols
The table below describes the symbols.
Symbol
Description
(1)
EWAQ240 DAYN*+0PSP
(2)
EWAQ260 DAYN*+0PSP
Selecting a flow outside the curves can cause damage to or malfunction of the unit. See also
minimum and maximum allowed water flowrange. See "Technical Specifications:
EWAQ080-260DAYN" on page 1–5.
4–40
Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run
ESIE06-05
1.25
Pre-Test Run Checks
External Static Unit Pressure: EWYQ080-100DAYN (OPHP)
External Static
Pressure
1
The illustration below shows the water pressure drop through evaporator for EWYQ080-100DAYN
(OPHP).
450
400
3
External Static Pressure [kPa]
350
2
300
4
250
1
5
200
150
100
50
0
0
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
Water Flow Unit [l/min]
Symbols
The table below describes the symbols.
Symbol
Description
(1)
EWYQ080 DAYN*+0PSP
(2)
EWYQ100 DAYN*+0PSP
Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run
4–41
Pre-Test Run Checks
ESIE06-05
Selecting a flow outside the curves can cause damage to or malfunction of the unit. See also
minimum and maximum allowed water flowrange. See "Technical Specifications:
EWYQ080-250DAYN" on page 1–12.
1
3
4
5
4–42
Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run
ESIE06-05
1.26
Pre-Test Run Checks
External Static Unit Pressure: EWYQ130-210DAYN (OPHP)
External Static
Pressure
1
The illustration below shows the water pressure drop through evaporator for EWYQ130-210DAYN
(OPHP).
400
350
External Static Pressure [kPa]
300
3
3
250
4
4
1
200
2
5
150
100
50
0
150
250
350
450
550
650
750
850
950
1050
1150
Water Flow Unit [l/min]
Symbols
The table below describes the symbols.
Symbol
Description
(1)
EWYQ130 DAYN*+0PSP
(2)
EWYQ150 DAYN*+0PSP
(3)
EWYQ180 DAYN*+0PSP
(4)
EWYQ210 DAYN*+0PSP
Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run
4–43
Pre-Test Run Checks
ESIE06-05
Selecting a flow outside the curves can cause damage to or malfunction of the unit. See also
minimum and maximum allowed water flowrange. See "Technical Specifications:
EWYQ080-250DAYN" on page 1–12.
1
3
4
5
4–44
Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run
ESIE06-05
1.27
Pre-Test Run Checks
External Static Unit Pressure: EWYQ230-250DAYN (OPHP)
External Static
Pressure
1
The illustration below shows the water pressure drop through evaporator for EWYQ230-250DAYN
(OPHP).
400
350
3
External Static Pressure [kPa]
300
2
250
4
200
1
5
150
100
50
0
0
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
1400
Water Flow Unit [l/min]
Symbols
The table below describes the symbols.
Symbol
Description
(1)
EWYQ230 DAYN*+0PSP
(2)
EWYQ250 DAYN*+0PSP
Selecting a flow outside the curves can cause damage to or malfunction of the unit. See also
minimum and maximum allowed water flowrange. See "Technical Specifications:
EWYQ080-250DAYN" on page 1–12.
Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run
4–45
Pre-Test Run Checks
1
1.28
Checklist
3
ESIE06-05
Electrical Checks
The table below contains the electrical checklist.
Step
Check whether...
1
The main fuses, earth leak detector and main isolator are installed.
2
The main power supply voltage deviates less than 10% from the nominal value.
3
The flow switch and pump contact are properly wired.
4
The optional wiring for pump control is installed.
5
The optional wiring for remote start/stop is installed.
Make sure that the controller is correctly programmed.
6
The optional wiring for remote cool/heat is installed.
Make sure that the controller is correctly programmed.
4
5
4–46
Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
L2
F2
4
3
L3
F3
5
6
PE
F4
3
1
F5
4
OFF
X1M
A4P
MODBUS
DICN
2
V2C
X1M
ON
TERM
S3A
A02P
OFF
For S3A setting
see installation manual
F1
F2
+
RS485
-
EKACPG (refer to EKACPG installation manual for more details)
ADDRESS=MAIN
TERM=OFF
TERM
S2A
S1A
ON
MAIN
PE
ADDRESS=SUB
TERM=ON
TERM
S2A
S1A
ON
MAIN
SUB
F4,F5 : fuse 10A gL/gG
EKRUPG (refer to EKRUPG installation manual for more details)
SUB
2
2
1
7
OP10 and fieldheater E5H
Power supply
1ò50Hz 230V
S2M
(2) Fieldwiring: communication wiring
Power supply
3ò50Hz 400V
L1
F1
Switchbox
S1M
+
RS485
DC 24V
GND
Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run
8
OFF
X1M
M2P
Switchbox
K2P
for OPTC
M1P
Switchbox
K1P
U
2
1
U
2
1
3ò
M
3ò
M
for OPSC and OPTC
PE
W
6
5
PE
W
6
5
A5P
V
4
3
V
4
3
+
RS485
DC 24V
GND
9
1.29
(1) Fieldwiring: Main power connection
ESIE06-05
Pre-Test Run Checks
Field wiring connection diagram : EWAQ/EWYQ 080-260 DAYN*
1
3
4
5
4–47
1
4–48
14
13
S1S
E5H
0
Switchbox
2
Fieldheater
contact
(max 1 kW
resistive,
230 VAC)
S2S
47
K1P
13
External power supply (ex 24VAC or 230VAC)
K1S
p
12
S3S
49
51
Ch.DI3
50
S4S
53
Ch.DI4
52
Switchbox
3
Operation
M11C
H11P
4
H12P
6
22
Operation
M21C
H21P
23
External power supply (ex 24VAC or 230VAC)
5
Operation
M12C
70
71
72
24
Operation
M22C
H22P
25
Ch.AI1
Example type: NTC
-t∞
R8T
not for EWAQ/EWYQ 80-100
Operation compressor contact
AC15 (max 3A, 230VAC)
Ch.DI2
48
Pump contact for models
without OPSC/OPTC/OPSP
/OPTP/OPHP
(Maximum load:
2A-230VAC,
Minimum load:
10mA-5VDC)
(6) Fieldwiring: output terminals
OBLIGATORY
Ch.DI1
FOR MODELS
WITHOUT
OPSC/OPTC/OPSP/
OPTP/OPHP
K1P
46
5
5
6
2
7
8
Safety active = contact closed
No power = contact open
No safety
= contact open
Alarm NO
(default)
2
H1P
7
External power supply (ex 24VAC or 230VAC)
H1P
9
Safety active = contact closed
No power = contact closed
No safety
= contact open
8
9
Alarm NC
(software setting necessary)
Ch.DO1: Alarm
S5S
78
7
Ch.AI3
Example type:Vmeasurement
10
H2P
11
Ch.DO2
General operation
(default)
Changeable digital output terminals (Maximum load: 2A-230VAC, Minimum load: 10mA-5VDC)
Ch.AI2 Example type: mA measurement
mA measurement
(External power supply)
+
0
to
10VDC
-
77
+
76
0
to
20mA
-
5V Signal GND
73 74 75
+
1
0
to
20mA
-
5V Signal GND
73 74 75
mA measurement
(5V power supply by PCB)
1
(4) Fieldwiring: Analog input terminals
(connection is depending on type setting: NTC or mA or V or DI)
4
4
45
3
3
44
2
14
16
H4P
17
+
91
0
to 20mA
or 10V
-
90
Switchbox
18
H5P
19
Ch.DO5
20
H6P
21
Switchbox
Ch.DO6
Ch.AO1
Example type:
mA or V output
External power supply (ex 24VAC or 230VAC)
H3P
15
9
(5) Fieldwiring: Analog output terminals
(types: mA or V)
Ch.DO4
81
MODELS WITHOUT
OPTC OR OPTP
Ch.DO3
Ch.AI4
Example type:
DI switch
80
Switchbox
79
8
1
(3) Fieldwiring: Digital input terminals
0
Pre-Test Run Checks
ESIE06-05
Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run
ESIE06-05
4
Part 5
Maintenance
Introduction
Preventive maintenance should be set up for operation at maximum capacity or to avoid damage. The
following chapters explain how to or when to maintain the units.
3
It is also applicable on other types of Daikin chillers.
What is in this part?
This part contains the following chapters:
Chapter
See page
1–Maintenance
5–3
4
55
Part 5 – Maintenance
5–1
ESIE06-05
1
3
5
5–2
Part 5 – Maintenance
ESIE06-05
Maintenance
Part 5
1
Maintenance
1.1
What Is in This Chapter
Introduction
Precautions
Overview
Part 5 – Maintenance
As shown in the table below, we have grouped the maintenance in maintenance of the main parts
(condenser, compressor and evaporator) and periodical checks.
1
3
Correct choices and decisions have to be made before any maintenance is done. Opening the
refrigerant circuit may cause a loss of refrigerant or lead to system contamination.
■
Avoid high gas concentrations.
While the heavy concentration of the refrigerant gas will remain on the floor level, good ventilation
is a must.
■
Avoid all contact with open fires or hot surfaces.
By high temperatures, the refrigerant gas R410A may decompose into irritating and poisonous gas.
Avoid skin and hand contact with the liquid refrigerant and protect your eyes against liquid
splashes.
55
This chapter covers the following topics:
Topic
See page
1.2–Maintenance of the Main Parts
5–4
1.3–Maintenance of the Control Devices
5–6
1.4–Periodical Checks
5–7
5–3
Maintenance
1
1.2
ESIE06-05
Maintenance of the Main Parts
Preventive
maintenance
A program of scheduled maintenance should be set up and followed. The items mentioned are to be
used as a guide and must be used in combination with sound electrical and refrigeration workmanship
to ensure trouble free operation and performance.
Unit Casing
Follow the below instructions to check the unit casing.
3
Compressor
Check if...
If not, then...
The paint of the unit casing is
intact.
Touch-up with paint.
All plate work is screwed down in
position.
Screw the plate work down in position.
Follow the instructions below to check the compressor:
■
Check crankcase heater operation. Switch of the compressor and carefully touch the crankcase
heater area by hand.
No operation can cause compressor damage when the ambient temperature reaches a low
temperature.
55
Evaporator and
condenser
Unit switchbox
5–4
Follow the instructions below to check the evaporator and condenser:
■
Inspect the water and condenser after the first operating season. This condition indicates the
required frequency of cleaning and also whether water treatment is needed in the chilled water
circuit.
■
Check the air plugs and drain plugs to prevent or detect water leakage.
■
Check pressure-drop and water flow.
■
Record temperature difference between water in/out temperature.
■
Inspect evaporator insulation. If damaged, repair.
■
Inspect water and refrigerant connections.
■
If the evaporator heater-tape is installed, check operation by direct power connection and
hand-touch.
■
Brush cleaning. Abnormal high condensing-pressures are an indication for periodic cleaning.
Follow the instructions below to check the unit switchbox:
■
Check all power connections for tightness.
■
Check compressor motor terminals.
■
Inspect wiring for any signs of overheating (discolouring).
■
Remove all dust and debris from the switchbox. Replaced coils and components should not be left
in the unit control panel.
■
Check all field-wired terminals.
Part 5 – Maintenance
ESIE06-05
Expansion valve
Flow switch and
pump interlock
Maintenance
The expansion valve will allow the correct amount of refrigerant to enter the evaporator to match the
cooling load (by keeping a constant superheat). Follow the instructions below to check the expansion
valve.
■
Check the superheat setting.
■
Inspect the LP sensor operation (offset). Compare the controller valve with a pressure gauge.
■
Inspect the suction temperature sensor (offset). Compare the controller valve with a temperature
probe.
1
Follow the instructions below to check the flow switch and the pump interlock.
■
Check operation by ohmmeter after disconnecting the wires to the field terminals and simulating
flow and no-flow conditions.
■
Inspect the flow-switch for possible corrosion (glycol applications). Check electrical connections for
shunts or bridges.
3
55
Part 5 – Maintenance
5–5
Maintenance
1
1.3
ESIE06-05
Maintenance of the Control Devices
Preventive
maintenance
A program of scheduled maintenance should be set up and followed. The items mentioned are to be
used as a guide and must be used in combination with sound electrical and refrigeration workmanship
to ensure trouble free operation and performance.
3
55
5–6
Part 5 – Maintenance
ESIE06-05
1.4
Maintenance
Periodical Checks
Electrical checks
Refrigerant checks
The table below contains the electrical checks.
Inspection checks and actions
Remarks
Check that all electrical wiring is properly
connected and securely tightened.
—
Check the electrical components for damage or loss.
—
Check if the power supply corresponds with the
identification label of the unit.
—
Check the operation of the circuit breaker and the
earth leak detector of the local supply panel.
—
Check the operation of the safety devices.
No operation can cause damage of the
unit.
Part 5 – Maintenance
3
The table below contains the refrigerant checks.
Inspection checks and actions
Remarks
Check the refrigerant circuit.
—
■
Water checks
1
If the unit leaks, contact your dealer.
55
The table below contains the water checks.
Inspection checks and actions
Remarks
Check the water condition.
Dirty water causes a cooling capacity drop
as well as corrosion of the water heat
exchanger and pipe.
■
Drain the water from the air release plug.
■
If the water is dirty, replace all the water in the
system.
Check the water connection.
—
Check the water velocity.
—
Check the function of the flow switch.
The evaporator can freeze up if the flow
switch is not able to operate.
Make sure that there is no air mixed in the water
pipes.
Even if air is removed at the beginning, air
can sometimes enter later. Bleed therefore the system regularly.
Check the water filter.
—
5–7
Maintenance
1
Noise checks
ESIE06-05
The table below contains the noise checks.
Inspection checks and actions
Remarks
Check for any abnormal noise.
—
■
Locate the noise producing section and search
the cause.
■
If the cause of the noise cannot be located,
contact your dealer.
3
55
5–8
Part 5 – Maintenance
ESIE06-05
4
Part 6
Appendix
Introduction
History of the software
What is in this part?
This part contains the following chapters:
3
Chapter
See page
1–Appendix
6–3
4
65
Part 6 – Appendix
6–1
ESIE06-05
1
3
6
6–2
Part 6 – Appendix
ESIE06-05
Appendix
Part 6
1
Appendix
1.1
What Is in This Chapter
Introduction
History of the software
Overview
This chapter covers the following topics:
1
3
Topic
See page
1.2–History of the Software
6–4
65
Part 6 – Appendix
6–3
Appendix
1
1.2
ESIE06-05
History of the Software
3
56
6–4
Part 6 – Appendix
ESIE06-05
Index
1
C
Components Water side
EWAQ-EWYQ-DAYN(N-P-B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 1–85
3
D
DICN (network) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 2–145
E
4
Electrical Checks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 4–46
Electrical Specifications
EWAQ080~260DAYN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 1–19
EWAQ130~150DAYN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 1–21
EWAQ180~210DAYN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 1–22
Electrical Specifications for options
EWAQ080~100DAYN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 1–20
EWAQ080-100DAYN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 1–20
EWAQ180~210DAYN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 1–22
EWAQ 080~ 260 DAYN
description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k i–i
EWYQ 080~250 DAYN
description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k i–i
External Static Unit Pressure
EWAQ080-100DAYN (OPHP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 4–37
EWAQ080-100DAYN (P-B). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 4–29
EWAQ130-210DAYN (OPHP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 4–39
EWAQ130-210DAYN (P-B). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 4–31
EWAQ240-260DAYN (OPHP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 4–40
EWAQ240-260DAYN (P-B). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 4–32
EWYQ080-100DAYN (OPHP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 4–41
EWYQ080-100DAYN (P-B). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 4–34
EWYQ130-210DAYN (OPHP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 4–43
EWYQ130-210DAYNN (P-B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 4–35
EWYQ230-250DAYN (OPHP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 4–45
EWYQ230-250DAYN (P-B). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 4–36
5
F
Floating setpoint - Ambient mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 2–129
Free cooling on ambient temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 2–133
Functional Diagram Refrigeration Circuit
EWAP400~540MBYNN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 1–80
EWAQ130~150DAYN(N-P-B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 1–70
EWAQ240=260DAYN(N-P-B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 1–72
EWYQ080~100DAYN(N-P-B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 1–76
EWYQ130~210DAYN(N-P-B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 1–78
EWYQ230~250DAYN(N-P-B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 1–80
EWYQ230-250DAYN(N-P-B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 1–80
Functional Diagram Water Piping
EWAQ-EWYQ-DAYN(N-P-B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 1–84
Index
1
ESIE06-05
1
G
General Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 4–5
H
High pressure setback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 2–127
History of the software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 6–4
How to read or adjust parameter settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 2–14
M
3
Maintenance of the Control Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 5–6
Maintenance of the Main Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 5–4, 6–4
Manual control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 2–114
Menu overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 2–13
O
4
On/Off management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 2–107
Operation flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 2–106
Operational Range
EWAQ080-100-180-210-240-260DAYN(N-P-B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 2–4
EWAQ130~150DAYN(N-P-B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 2–5
EWYQ080-100-180-210-230-250DAYN(N-P-B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 2–6
EWYQ130~150DAYN(N-P-B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 2–7
Optional equipment for EWYQ~DAYN(N-P-B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 1–33
Outlook Drawing
EWAQ080~100DAYN(N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 1–34
EWYQ180~210DAYN(N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 1–58
Overview of network safeties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 3–19
Overview of the circuit safeties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 3–11
Overview of the unit safeties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 3–6
Overview of warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 3–21
5
P
Password function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 2–164
Periodical Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 5–7
Pump control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 2–128
R
Read-out menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 2–15
S
Set Points Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 2–25
Start/Stop, Cool/Heat and Temperature settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 2–12
T
Technical Specifications
EWAQ080~100DAYN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 1–8
EWAQ080~260DAYN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 1–5
EWAQ130~150DAYN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 1–9
EWAQ180~210DAYN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 1–10
EWAQ240~260DAYN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 1–11
EWTP110~540MBYNN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 1–12
EWYQ230~250DAYN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 1–18
2
Index
ESIE06-05
1
Technical specifications for options
EWYQ180~210DAYN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 1–17
The Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 2–10
Thermostat control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 2–108
Thermostat settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 2–27
U
Unit Pressure Drop
EWAQ080-100DAYNN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EWAQ130-210DAYNN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EWAQ240-260DAYNN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EWYQ080-100DAYNN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EWYQ130-210DAYNN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EWYQ230-250DAYNN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
4–17
4–19
4–21
4–23
4–25
4–27
2–26
3
W
4
Water Piping Checks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 4–6
Water Pressure Drop through Evaporator
EWAQ080-100DAYN (N-P-B). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 4–11
EWAQ130-210DAYN (N-P-B). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 4–12
EWAQ240-260DAYN (N-P-B). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 4–13
EWYQ080-100DAYN (N-P-B). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 4–14
EWYQ130-210DAYN (N-P-B). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 4–15
Water Pressure Drop through evaporator
EWYQ230-250DAYN (N-P-B). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 4–16
What happens in the event of an alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 3–4
What to do in the event of an alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 3–5
Wiring Layout
EWAQ080=100DAYN(N-P-B) and EWYQ080=100DAYN(N-P-B) with OPIF. . . . . . . . . . . . . k 1–149
EWAQ080~100DAYN(N-P-B) and EWYQ080~100DAYN(N-P-B) standard unit . . . . . . . . . . . k 1–88
EWAQ130=260DAYN(N-P-B) and EWYQ130=250DAYN(N-P-B) standard unit . . . . . . . . . . k 1–116
Index
5
3
ESIE06-05
1
3
4
5
4
Index